


:.^?^ 



oo^ 



oo' 




f/ 







^.S^ 









■^^ = ^^ ^z;. 



.^^ "^^ 



A^-»/V'-- 



1 T> 



K^^ 



-f .*^^%\ % 



•*.^- . ^-gs^t -^^' 









L^ <> 



'^ .\0' 






^.%: 









o 



V' 












oo^ 



V^^ "^c^^ 



-" V^ 



"• \'^ ^ -^ O « I "^ (V 















.^0^ 






z' a5>»' 



■"b 0^" 



.^ -f^ 



c^'-^^S .^ -^j:^vjf; ,, 



.. ^ ,0- 






'/ c- 



^*' »\,*-£!^'' '^, 



>-^ '''*. 



v.^ 















A>-^ 'ct- 






^ 



v^. (BiB>£!^mm^m^^'m^,^^ 



eB THE 



FRENCH LANGUAGE 



WITH 



T^ACTlCAli T&XTilLCl^^S, 



BY N WANOSTROCHT, LL. D. 

ri¥TH AMERICAN PROM THE FOFRtEENTH LONDON fiDlTrON, 
TO IfBUfCH 18 NOW FIEST ADDSD, 

A VERY COMPREHENSIVE TABLE OF CONTENtS, 

\yith considerable Additions and Inaprovement*. 



BOSTOJ^T: 

PRINTED BY J. H. A. FROSf, 

FOR WEST, RICHARDSON AND L0Rl5t, 

No. 75, Comhill. 
1819. 



N 



Vis 



i 

A-.P '^ 



B 



DISTT-^CT OF MASSACHUSETTS, to wit: 

District Clerk's Office, 

E IT REMEMBERED, that on the t?:^ft»«th day of May, A. P. 1817, and in 

the /orty-first year of the Independence of the* Wmted States of America, «^e»i 
ir Richardson, of the said District, have deposited in this 9»ce the Title ©f a Book, 
ihe right whereof they claim as Proprietors, in the words fbllowiu*; tV wit : 

A Grammar of the French Language, with Practical Exercises. By IV. Wgaos- 
♦rocht, LL. D. Fourth American from the thirteenth London edition, with consider- 
able Additions and Improvements. 

In conformity to the Act of the Congress of the United States, entitled, " An Act for 
the Encouragement of Learning, by securing the Copies of Maps, Charts and Books; 
to the Authors and Proprietors of such copies, during the times therein mentioned :" 
and also to an Act entitled, " An Act supplementary to an Act, entitled, 'An Act for 
the Encouragement of Learning, by securing the copies of Maps, Charts and Books, 
to the Authors and Proprietors of such copies during the times therein mentioned ; 
and extending the benefits thereof to the Arts of Designing, Engraving and Etching 
JSistoric^, and other Priflts.' " 

JOHN W. DAVIS, 
C)lirk Af the Pistiict «f Mas*a«husem. 



hvchange 
9 1 



ADVERTISEMENT. 

The publishers of the previous Boston editions of this 
Grammar now offer a new and improved edition of a 
work which has become generally known and esteemed. 

When it was first determined to reprint this judicious 
system of theoretically and practically teaching the 
French language, a perfect conviction was felt that it 
would meet the approbation of the wise and learned as 
soon as it was known ; and the rapid sale of four edi- 
tions in the United States wit^^in a few years has fully- 
realized that expectation and given indubitable evidence 
of the intrinsic merit of this mode of instruction. 

In London this Grammar has passed through four- 
teen editions, and it has likewise been printed several 
times at Paris. 

Previous to the printing of every new edition the 
American publishers have always been careful to pro- 
cure the latest English copy, in order to profit by any 
improvement which may have been made in succeeding 
editions, and this attention has always proved advanta- 
geous. Besides this, they have been so fortunate as to 
have the same editor for all their editions, who, being 
an experienced instructer of languages, has given this 
grammar a decided preference ever since its first ap- 
pearance, and contributed, by his own observations in 
the course of tuition, to remove every obscurity, supply 
all defects, and render it as easy and perfect as possible. 

This work is now introduced into some of the first 
literary institutions in the country, and particularly into 
the University at Cambridge, and St. Mary's College ia 
Baltimore. 

Bosxojf, May, 1819. 



PREFACE. 



THAT '' a great book is a great evil" is generally a great teuth, 
for the discovery of Avhich we moderns must hold ourselves indebted 
to the sages of antiquity. In the follov^ing sheets, I. have endeavour- 
ed to improve upon the ancient maxim, and bring the two ends of the 
book as near together as I possibly could. On this frugal plan, the 
preface might have been spared, but custom must be complied with : 
some part of our time must be spent on superfluities ; and what 'le 
rendered venerable by age mCst not too hastily be rejected. To en- 
ter abruptly upon the main subject is generally considered as a breach 
of politeness. What is useful must sometimes give place to what is 
convenient, and what rigorous justice cannot defend, may yet enjoy 
the security of prescription. In compliance, therefore, with universal 
custom, with the general practice of the ancients, and, w^hat is still 
more forcible, the urgent solicitation of the booksellers, I proceed to 
lay before the Reader the general Plan of the Work. 

The idea of the Practical Grammar was first suggested to the 
Author in the course of his private teaching. He found daily the in- 
convenience of refeiTiiig from book to book, and determined to sup^ 
ply the defect in the best manner he could. Whatever was neceKary 
to furnish a tolerable acquaintance with the elements of the language, 
and point out the nature of its construction, he proposed to admit ; 
and reject every thing that was not essentially connected with his 
principal design. His first object was to comprise, in as little room 
t\,s possible, every thing that was really useful in the grammar, the 
exercise-book, and the book of dialogues. To this plan he has strictly 
adhered in the composition, and has brought the whole together in a 
much smaller compass than, at first, could reasonably have been ex- 
pected. 

The several parts of speech are arranged in the usual order, and 
each part is discussed under a separate section. 

Each rule is followed by a familiar exercise, which the master maj 
use in the place of a dialogue. 

The advantages resulting from the scholars learning and then re- 
peating their own translations by heart must, in the opinion of impar- 
tial and disinterested minds, materially tend to tteir improvement ; 



PREFACE. V 

by these means, the pupils, uniting practice to theory, not only be- 
<jome imperceptibly acquainted with the French phraseology, which 
in many instances differs so much from the English construction, but 
immediately know what is the English word that corresponds wiih 
the French, and vice versa^ which cannot absolutely be done, in a 
dialogue where the French is ready made for them. Therefore, in 
order the more fully to answer the Author's intention, he has, instead 
of fine sentences, extracted from the most elegant writers, and often 
above the comprehension of young people, preferred, and made use, 
throughout all tbe exercises, of plain and easy sentences, which, at 
the same time they are within the reach of the young learners' facul- 
ties, will soon enable them to speak the French language with pro- 
priety and elegance. What more can be expected from an elemen- 
tary book ? 

At the close of every section, a recapitulatory exercise is given 
upon all the preceding rules. 

When there is any difference in the order of arrangement, the 
French construction is pointed out by the small figures placed against 
the top of the words in the English sentence. 

Some of the most remarkable French idioms are noticed, and ex- 
emplified by various instances. Many others might have been ad- 
duced, perhaps, to very little profit. The idiomatical expressions 
are daily giving way to a regular syntactical form, and growing into 
disuse with the best masters. 

A few general rules for pronunciation only have been given. From 
all the attempts that have hitherto been made, it does not appear 
that any adequate idea of it can be conveyed in writing. The eai* 
cannot be properly formed without the assistance of a good speaker. 

Throughout the whole composition, the Author's chief aim has been 
to unite ease and simplicity with accuracy and precision. That he 
has not sometimes said too little where more was required, and some- 
times too much where less would have been sufficient, he does not 
take upon himself to assert. That he has sometimes failed through 
negligence, and many times through ignorance, he has also great rea- 
son to fear. His daily avocations left him but little time for study, 
and his want of a better acquaintance with the English language, 
may have subjected him to many inaccuracies in his style, and some-? 
times, perhaps, to palpable improprieties. 

The author cheerfully embraces this opportunity of making his 
most grateful acknowledgements to the Public, for the favourable re- 
ception given to the former e^tions of tiiis Grsonjoaar, and, in gen^r*!, 
1* 



VI PREfACfii 

to all his other works : while he is perfectly sensible of the otjligaCidSi, 
he is also sensible that much indulgen-ce was required to justify the 
favours he has already deceived, either as a teacher or as an Atr- 
THOK.. That generous indulgence he again solicits for their accep* 
tance in this new edition, and begs to assure them, that, in every 
situation of life, it will be his constant care, as well as his highest am* 
bition, to deserve the flattering encouragement he has met with in 
this country, and never forget the obligations already conferred. 

In this edition, the errors in the former publications are carefully 
corrected, the several expressions which did not so well please in the 
course of practice, have been altered, and every improvement added, 
that could tend to facilitate the attainment of the French language. 
It having been suggested, by some gentlemen, to whose judgment the 
Author pays the greatest deference, that the irregular verbs, being ar- 
ranged in alphabetical order, in the body of the book, would be a 
considerable improvement to the work, and facilitate the progress of 
-the scholar, this is done in the present edition. The primitives of the 
jrregular verbs are conjugated at length, and at the end of each are 
given their several compounds, with large exereis©s, both npon tije 
primitives and compounds. 



CONTENTS. 



^ SECT. I. 

OF GRAMMAR, 13 

Of the French Alphabet , . ib. 

Of Vo'vels — Dipthongs — Accents — Kinds of E . . . 14 

Of Diosresis— Cedilla — Apostrophe 15 

Alphabetical list of French words having their initial h mute . ib» 
Variations in the pronunciation of Consonants . . .17 

Kinds of words ......... 18 

General ExplEination of their use . . . . ; 19 



SECT. II. 

Of Nouns . ^ 20 

Of Articles 21 

Declension of the Article Definite 22 

Of Genders and Numbers . . . . . .' 23 

General Rules for the formation of the Plural Number . « 24 

Of Exceptions ......... id. 

Of the Declension of Nouns ...... 27 

Declension of the Article Definite Z<e, (the) before Nouns mas- 
culine beginning with a consonant or h aspirated . . 28 
Declension of the Article Definite Z.a, (the) before nouns fem- 
inine beginning with a consonant or k aspirated . . ib. 
Declension of the Article Definite L' (the) for both Genders, 

before nouns beginning with a Vowel, or an ^ not aspirated 29 

Recapitulation of the Article Definite . . . . » ib. 

Rules for the proper use of the Definite Article with Exercises 30 

Declension of the Article Partitive ..... 38 

Rules and Exercises upon this Partitive . . , . 39 

Declension of the Article Indefinite . • . . . 41 

Rules and Exercises on this Indefinite . . . . . ib. 

Declension of Un^ m. Une^ f. a or an 43 

Rules and Exercises on this Article . . . . . ib. 

Of Noun? Adjective ........ 50 

Of the Gender and Number of Adjectives .... ib. 

Declension of Nouns Adjective ...... 53 

Rules and Exercises upon Adjectives , . . , . ib. 

The Place of an Adjective in a Sentence .... 56 

Of Adjectives which precede their Substantives . . . ib. 

Of Adjectives which come after their Substantives . . 57 

'Allies and Exercises upon these Adjectives . . , . S8 



Vlll 



CONTENTS. 



Of the Degrees of Comparison 6Q 

Rules with Exercises upon the Degrees of Comparison . . 61 

Of Numbers 67 

Rules and Exercises upon these Cardinal Numbers . . 68 

Of the Ordinal lumbers 71 

Rules and Exercises upon the Ordinal Numbers ... 72 
Recapitulatory or Promiscuous Exercises upon all the Preced- 
ing Rules ,4 74 



SECT. TIL 

OfPrononns .81 

Of Pronouns Personal ........ 82 

Rules and Exercises upon these Pronouns . » . . 83 
Observations on the Pronouns Je and JVJTor, Tu and Toi^ II and 

Lui^ lis and Eux 85 

Exercises upon the Preceding Observations ... 86 
Of Conjunctive Pronouns and their Declensions . . .87 

Rules and Exercises upon these Pronouns .... 89 

Of Particles Relative or Supplying Pronouns en, 3/, and le . 92 

Rules and Exercises upon these Supplying Pronouns . . ib. 

Of Pronouns Possessive, and their Declensions ... 99 

Rules and Exercises upon these Pronouns .... 100 

Of Pronouns Demonstrative ...... 104 

Rules and Exercises upon these Pronouns .... 103 

Of Pronouns Relative 110 

Rules and Exercises upon these Pronouns . . . .111 

Of Pronouns Interrogative. . . . . . . 116 

Rules and Exercises upon these Pronouns .... ib. 

Of Pronouns Indefinite ....... 118 

Rules and Exercises upon these Pronouns .... 120 

Recapitulatory or Promiscuous Exercises upoM all the Pronouns ISS 



SECT. IV. 

Of Verbs and- their different Sorts 142 

Conjugation of Verbs and Moods I44 

Tenses . . 147 

Tenses of the Indicative Mood ...... 148 

Simple tenses of the Indicative Mood .... -ib. 

Compound Tenses of the Indicative Mood .... 153 

Tenses of the Subjunctive or Conjunctive Mood, and their 

Compounds * . . 157 

Numbers and Persons I59 

Conjugation of the Auxiliary Verb Avoir., to have . . 161 

Conjugation of the Auxiliary Verb jE/re, to be . . , 163 

Rules and Exercises on the two preceding Auxiliary Verbs . 166 
Promiscuous Exercises upon the Compound Tenses of these 

Auxiliary Verbs ^ . » 169 



CONTENTS. IX 

Rules and Examples for using these Verbs Interrogatively, &c. 170 

Promiscuous Exercises on Rules of Interrogation, (fcc. . . 172 

Remark on the Verb Etre, to be . . . . . 174 

First Conjugation in er, as in Parl-er . . . . . 175 
Important Observation upon the repetition of Verbs, &c. 

see N. B. . 179 

Exercises on this Conjugation . . . , , .181 

Exercises on the Compound Tenses . . x * .183 

Second Conjugation, in tr, as in Pun-zV . . . . 184 

Exercises on this Conjugation . .- . . . .187 

Third Conjugation, in eroir^ as in rec-eroiV, . . . 190 

Exercises on this Conjugation . . . . . . 193 

Fourth Conju«:ation, in re, as in Vend-re . . . . 197 

Exercises on this Conjugation ' 200 

Recapitulatory Exercises on the regular Verbs of the four Con- 
jugations ......... 203 

Promiscuous Exercises on the Compound Tenses, of the pre- 
ceding conjugations . . . . . . • . . 206 

Conjugations of the Passive Verbs ..... 208 

Of Neuter Verbs generally ib. 

Of Reflective Verbs 214 

Model of Conjugations for the Reflected verbs of the four Con- 
jugations 219 

Exercises on the Reflective Verbs ..... 222 
Conjugation of the Irregular Verbs of the first Conjugation . 227 
Irregular Verbs of the Second Conjugation . . . 230 
Exercises on the Irregular Verbs of the first and second Conju- 
gations . . . " 235 

Continuation of the Irregular Verbs of the second Conjugation 238 

Exercises on the preceding Irregular Verbs . . . 243 

Continuation of the Irregu-ar Verl?* of the second Conjucatioii 245 

Exercises on the preceding Irregnlar Verbs and their Compounds 251 

Irreg-ular Verbs of the third Conjugation .... 254 
Observation upon May^ and Might, when used as a Verb or 

Auxiliary 259 

Observation upon the -words Will^ and Would when used as a 

Verb or an Auxiliary ....... 265 

Exercises upon Irregular Verbs of the third Conjugation . 266 

Irregular Verbs of the fourth Conjugation .... 2.71 

Exercises upon the preceding IiTegular Verbs, and their Cora- 
pounds . . . . . . . '. , . 281 

Continuation of the Irregular Verbs of the fourth Conjugation 284 

Exercises on the preceding Irregular Verbs and their Compounds 296 

Continuation of the Irregular Verbs of the fourth Conjugation 302 

Exercises on the preceding Verbs, and their Compounds . 313 

Of the ImpersoncJ Verbs 319 

Conjugation of the Impersonal Verbs . . . . . ib. 

Exercises on the Impersonal Verbs ..... 321 

Upon the Impersonal Verb y avcir^ there to be . , . 322 

Exercises on the preceding Verb . . . , . 323 

Remarks on the Pronoun General On ..... 324 

Exercises on the preceding Pronoun, &©. . . . . ib, 



IS. CONTESTS. 

Remarks ©n the luapersonal Verb Falloir^ to be needful, requi- 
site, necessary 3^2 

Exercises on the preceding Impersonal Verb . . , 334 

Additional Remarks on the general Pronoun 0« . ^ . 337 

Exercises on the preceding Pronoun ..... 338 

.Recapitulatory Exercisee ob the Impersonal Verbs . . 339 



SECT. V. 

Of Participles .....-..,. 342 
Rules and Exercises on the Participles . . . 342, 343 



SECT. VI. 

Of Indeclinable Parts of Speech 353 

Of Adverbs .......... i&. 

Table of Adverbs . . 354, 357, 359, 361, 363, 365, 368, 369* 

Observation on the Adverb Ou 370 

Table of Adverbs continued . . 373, 376, 378, 379, 382 



SECT. VII. 

Of Prepositions . ggg 

Prepositions gnvernins: the Genitive or Ablative Cases .* -38*3 384 
Exercises on these Prepositions . , . , , . ' 335 
* rcpo?itions gorsmrng'the Dative Case .... 387 

Exercises on these Prepositions ......«'&. 

Prepositions requiring the Acctisative Case .... 388 

Exercises upon these Prepositions ...... 389 

Observations on some Prepo? itions, and Exercises upon them, 

Jlhove, 392 ; At, 393, 394 ; By, 395, ?.^Q, 397 ; For, 398 ; 

From, 399 ; In, 400, 401 -, On or Upon, 402 ; Ovtr, 403 ; 

Wilh, 404, 405, 407, 408 ; Without, 409 . . . . 409 



SECT. VIII. 

Of Conjunctions . . 411 

Conjunctions requiring the Infinitive Mood, and Exercises upon 
them .......... r&. 

Conjunctions requiring the Verb in the Indicative Mood, and 

Exercises upon them in continuation, . . . .412 

Conjunctions requiring the Future Tense . . . ,417 

Remark on the Conjunction Qwe, preceding an Infinitive or 
Subjunctive Moed , . 4l8 



eOBTTENTS* 



XI 



Conjunctions requiring the Verb in the Subjunctitre Mood, and 

Exercises upon them ..*... 420, 421 

Remarks on the Conjunctions Si and Qwe, .... 424 

Exercises on the preceding Conjunctions .... 425 
Verbs requiring the Conjunction Que, with the following Verb 

in the Subjunctive Mood 427 

Exercises on this and the preceding Rules ...» 428 

Observation on the Verb V'ouloir, to will, to wish, . . 431 
Conjunctions Qui, Que or Dont, requiring the following Verb 

in the Subjunctive Mood, and Exercises upon them . . 433 



SECT. IX. 

Of Intcijectionis 43S 

Table of Interjections , , . z6. 

Exercises on the preceding Interjections «... 436 
Remarks on the Particles -De, a, Pour, when not expressed, 

and Exercises upon them 437 

Remarks on the Particle De^ when it is to be expressed, and 

Exercises upon it 439 

Remarks on the Particle «, when it is to be expressed, and 

Exercises upon it 441, 442 

Important remarks on the Particles i>e, a, and Pour, with 

Exercises 444 



SECT. X. 

Idiomatical Expressions .... ... 445 

Of the Verb Avoir, to have, and Exercises upon it . 445, 446 
Of Eire, to be, and Exercises upon it . . . , . 448 
Oi Faire, to make, or to do, and Exercises upon it . 449, 450 
Of different Verbs, and Exercises upon them 451, 452, 453, 454 



SECT. XI. 



€^eneral and Promiscuous Exercises 

Of the Understanding of Languages 

Of Study . . . 

Indolence Characterised 

Anecdote of the Cardinal Viviera . 

Fraternal Affection 

Study of Nature . . . « 

History ..... 

The City of Babylon . 

M«tit c . . . « 



455 
ib, 
456 
458 
459 
460 
461 
471 
477 
479 



AN EXPLANATION OF THE ABBREVIATIONS MADfc USE OP IN. 
THE FOLLOWING WORK. 

m. Noun masculine. 

f. Noun feminine. 

pi. Plural. 

adj. Noun adjective. 

pro. Pronoun. 

V. Verb. 

p. act. Participle active. 

p. p. Participle passive. 

p. Preposition. 

adv. Adverb. 

G. Conjunction. 

int. Interjection. 

too The English word that has this mark 

underneath, is not to be expressed in 
French. 
The figures, *, ^ ^, &c. direct to the arrangement of the 

words in the French sentence. 
Two words having the same figure are expressed by the 

French word placed under one of them. 
Two or three words between parentheses ( ), are ex- 
pressed by the Frenck under them. 



A PRACTICAL 

FRENCH GRAMMAR 



SECT. I. 

GRAMMAR is the art of speaking and writing in any 
language with propriety ; or, it is the art of rightly ex- 
pressing our thoughts by words. 

Grammar is of two kinds, general and particular. 
Universal grammar considers language in itself, explains 
ihe principles which are alike common to every tongue, 
and distinguishes, with precision, between those partic- 
ulars which are essential and those which are only acci- 
dental. Particular grammar applies these common prin- 
ciples to a particular language, and furnishes certain 
rules and observations w^hich are, either mediately or 
immediately, deducible from its common principles. 

A grammar of the French tongue must be formed 
agreeably to the established usage, and those particular 
modes of expression, to which custom has given its 
sanction. It has therefore for its object, in common 
with all other grammars, the consideration of letters, 
syllables, words, sentences, &;c. 

ALPHABET ;— is composed of twenty-five letters, 
©f which words are formed ; five of them, a, e, ?, o, w, 
are distinguished by the name of vowels, which form a 
perfect sound of themselves. The twenty other letters 
h, r, (I /, g. h, j, A-, /, m, 72, p, q, r, s, t, r, x, y, r, are 
called consonants, and cannot be pronounced but when 
Joined with vowels, except y, which has often the sound 
of double ?, and of which some make a sixth vowel. 



14 

VOWELS, three sorts ; — Simple, cf, «, i, o, «, whicli 
are subdivided into short and long, whose sound is more 
prolonged and deeper. 

Compound, of two or three simple vowels, as ai, ej, 
ei, ui, au^ eu, ow, cb, cew : ai has the sound of e mute in 
faisant, and the sound of e close in je lira% as well as in 
all the verbs in the first person singular of the future. 

Nasal, when they are joined to m or n, and when 
they form only one goimd, as an, am, en, ew, in, im, ain, 
ein, 

DIPTHONG ; — Is the union of several vowels, the 
pronunciation of which causes two sounds to be heard 
by a single impulse of the voice. Dieu, yeux, niais, 
jpion, ouie, mien, are dipthongs ; yet Caen, eau, paon, 
eraie are not so, because they are pronounced Can, o, 
pan, ere. 

ACCENTS, three sorts ;— The acute ', the grave \ 
and the circumflex '^ serve to modify the sound of the 
vowels; the office of the latter is to render long the 
vowels which are affected by it ; thus pronounce a, e, i, 
6, u, by a greater opening of the mouth, almost as if 
it were na, ee, ii, oo, uu. It is thus we write age, in- 
stead oiaage ; this is also the reason why it is placed over 
the vowels that were formerly followed by an s, which 
has been dropped^ since it is no longer pronounced ; as 
in asne, beste, in which the suppression of the s, requires 
that we should write dne, bete, in order to shew that a 
and e are long. 

KINDS of E, Jive ; — two kinds. Mute : Isi, — One 
whose dull sound is almost null in brave, encore, which 
are pronounced no otherwise than b)'av, encor. 

2c?.— The other, whose sound, although obscure, can 
be prolonged, nearly as the sound of eu, in je, me, te, 
revenir, redemander, 

Sd, — Close, by the accent Acute, in bonte | yet ez is 
equivalent to e, as in voyez^ liseZy fouchez. 



15 



4th, — Open, by the accent Gravt^ in acces^ succes, ne/?e, 
which is suppressed in greffe, sans cesse^ abbesse. 

5 th — Yery open, by the accent Circumflex, in etre, tite^ 
iempite, which were formerly pronounced and writteii 
estre^ teste, &c. 

Middling, followed by a double consonant, and whose 
sound is between that of e close and e open, in maison- 
nette, musette, poulette. 

The DliERESIS, (••)— Which is placed over the vow- 
els e, I, w, and causes them to be pronounced separately 
from the preceding vowel as in poete, aieul, Saiil, and 
may be ranked among the accents. 

The CEDILLA, (,) — A little dash, which is put un- 
der the c, is also a sort of accent, since it serves to mod- 
ify the hard pronunciation which it would otherwise 
have before the vowels a, o, u, and to change it into that 
of 5 ; it is thus we pronounce it in frangois, fagon, regu. 

The APOSTROPHE, C) ;— Is only a comma put over 
the place which the vowel e or a ought to occup}^, which 
is suppressed when the word following begins with a 
vowel or an h not aspirate ;* thus, instead of le esprit^ 





* AN ALPHAB 


of such 


Freueh Words as 


HABILE, 


CLEVER 


liabilenient, 


cltvtrly 


habilete, 


cleverness 


hahiDer, 


to clothe 


h'dbiilement, 


dress 


habit, 


a coat 


habiter, 


to mhabit 


habitable, 


inhabitable 


liabitant, 


inhabitant 


habitude. 


custom 


habituel, 


habitual 


habituery 


to use 


haleine, 


breath 


hiuttc^on. 


a Jishing hook 



harmonie, 

hebdomadaire, 

H^braique, 

Hebreu, 

hecatombe, 

h^gire, 

helas ! 

Helicon, 

heliotrope, 

hemisphere, 

h^mistiche, 

hemorrhagic, 

h^niorrhoides, 

h^patique. 



harmony 

weekly 

Hebraick 

Hebrew 

an hecatomb 

hegira 

alas ! 

Helicon 

turn-sol 

hemisphere 

hemistich 

bloody-Jlux 

pil^s 

hepatical 



u 



la ^rnnhiUon^ and h hamme^ we must pronounce and 
write Vesprity Vambition, Vhomme, But when the h is 



herbage, 

Ilerbe, 

herboriste, 

heriditaire, 

h^r^sie, 

h^r^tique, 

heritage, 

h^riter, 

h^ritier, 

heriti^re, 

hermine, 

hermite, 

fcermitage, 

heroine,* 

h^rcique, 

h^roisme, 

hesiter, 

hesitation, 

heur, 

heure, 

heureux, 

heure use ment, 

h^xagone, 

hfexani^tre, 

hiatus, 

hier, 

hi^roglyphe, 

hirondelle, 

histoire, 

hifrtoricn, 

historique, 

histrion, 

hiver, 

hiverner, 

holocauste, 

hombre, (jeu) 

bomelie, 

homicide, 

hommage, 

homme, 

honnete, 

honnetement, 

honnetete 

honneur, 

honorable, 

ho nor aire, 

bonorer, 



herbage^ pasture 
herb or grass 
herbalist 
hereditary 
heresy 
heretic 
inheritance 
to inherit 
an heir 
(tn heiress 
ermine 
an hermit 
hermitage 
mi heroine 
heroical 
heroism 
to hesitate 
hesitation 
luck 
hour 
happy 
happily 
sji hexagon 
hexameter 
hiatus^ a gap 
yesterday 
hieroglyphic 
a swallow 
history 
historian 
historical 
a buffoon 
winter 
to winter 
burnt sacrifice 
ombre 
an homily ' 
an homicide j 
homage \ 
m,an ; 
honest 
honestly 
honesty 
honour 
honorable 
honorary 
to honour 



hdpital, 

horizon, 

horloge, 

horloger, 

horrnip, 

horoscope, 

horreur, 

horrible, 

horriblement, 

hospitalier, 

hospitalile, 

hostie, 

hostilite, 

bote, 

botesse, 

hotel, 

hotelier, 

hotellerie, 

huile, 

huilier, 

huissier, 

huitre, 

humain, 

humhinement, 

humanifer, 

humaiiite, 

humble, 

humblement, 

humectation, 

humecter, 

humeur, 

humide, 

humidite, 

humiliant, 

humiliation, 

humiJier, 

hnmilite, 

hyacinthe, 

hydre, 

hydromel, 

hydropique, 

hydropisie, 

hymen, 

hymne, 

hyperbole, 

hypocondre, 

hypocrisie, 

* But the h is aspirated in he'ro^ 



hospital 

horizon, 

a clock 

watch-maker 

except 

horoscope 

horror 

horrid 

horribly 

hospitable 

hospitality 

host or victim 

hostility 

landlord 

landlady 

a great house 

inn-keeper 

an inn 

oil 

eil-cruet 

v^her or tip staff 

oyster 

humane 

humanehj 

to civilize 

humanity 

humble 

humbly 

moistening 

io moisten 

humour 

damp^ moi«t 

humidity 

mortifying 

humiliation 

to hxtmhh 

humility 

hyacinth 

hydra 

mead 

hydropic 

dropsy 

hymen 

hymn 

hyperbole 

hypocondriac 

hypocrisy. 



17 

aspirate, the article remains entire ; we must not say 
Pheros^ but pronounce le heros, du heros, au heros. 

VARIATION IN THE PRONUNCIATION OF 
CONSONANTS ;— C is pronounced hard like k before 
the vowels, a, o, w, in cocarde^ cube ; like s before e, ?, in 
cecite. There are even some words in which it is pro- 
nounced like g, as in second, &oc, G is pronounced hard 
before a, o, u ; like j, before e, i ; when we wish to 
modify its pronunciation before a, o, u, an e is placed 
after it, as in, il gagea^ nagcoire ; when on the contrary 
we wish to have it pronounced hard before e, r, an 
u is placed after it, as in guerir, guide, H is of two sorts, 
aspirate as in hair, envahir ; then the consonants by 
which it is preceded are not sounded ; it is called mute, 
when it is not pronounced at all, as in homme, heroine. 
The h of heros is aspirate, that of its derivatives is 
not so. Q when not the last letter of a word, as in 
cinq, is never used without being followed by «, which 
gives it the pronunciation of A;, as in qui, quclconqve ; y^i 
in several words u has retained its ancient sound of cnx, 
and then qu is pronounced like kou, as in aquatiquc, equa- 
tion, S is pronounced hard in salut, senat ; but between 
two vowels, it takes the pronunciation of z, as in viserj 
raison, &c. T followed by i and another vowel, is pro- 
nounced like c, as in partial, partiel, portion ; but if ti is 
preceded by s or x, or if it is at the beginning of a word, 
it is pronounced as in tircr, question, mixtion, X is pro- 
nounced like cs in fixer, taxer ; like gz in examen, ex- 



hypocrite, hypocrite 

hypotheque, morigage 

hypoth^quer, to mortgage 



hypothese, hypothesis 

hysope, kysoji 

hysteriquc, hysterrc 



In a familiar discourse, the letter h is not aspirated in the follow- 
ing words, viz. Ilmiovre, Hollandt^ and Hongrie^ when either of them 
t3 preceded by the particle dt ; for though we ahvays say le Hanovre^ 
la Hollande and la Hongrie^ yet it is usual to fay and write VEItctorat 
d^Hanorre^ La Heine d'^Hongrir, la toile d'Hollande, and the like. As 
to other national and proper names, the initial h is aspirated in most 
of them ; as in Ilainaut, Hamboicrgh, Haranne, Henri ^ k.c. but in 
Hamilton, Harcoxni^ Hector^ Helent, Her cult. Her ode, JJomere, 
Horace, and Hyppoliie, it h luute. 

2* 



18 

^mpte ; and like s in six^ dix^ soixantc. Ch is generally 
pronounced like 5/1, as in chat ; yet it is pronounced often 
like k : Christy orchestre^ bacchante^ are examples. Rh, 
ih^ ph, are pronounced like ?*, /,/, in rhume^ theme, philo- 
sophe, which are pronounced rume, time, Jilosofe. 

A SYLLABLE, whether composed of one or more let- 
ters, requires, in the pronunciation, no more than a 
single impulse of the voice : ex. ba, we, moi, &lc. 

A WORD may consist of one syllable, or of many 
compacted into one meaning ; for, a word is the smallest 
part of speech which is in itself significant : ex. mon^ 
my ; livre, book, &c. 

A SENTENCE, or PHRASE, is an assemblage of w^ords 
arranged in their proper order, forming a sense either 
more or less complete ; ex. 
Je siiis voire ami, I am your friend- 

JHcrivis hier a voire tante, I yesterday wrote to your 

aunt. 

A PERIOD may consist of two or three sentences 
joined together, so that they depend on one another to 
form a contplete sense. Each of the sentences forming 
part of a period is called a member of the period ; ex. 
Les grands hommes sont rares ; Great men are scarce ; we 

on doit les respecter, ei Von ought to respect them, 

devroit toujours iravailler a and constantly endeaT- 

se rendre semblahle a eux. our to resemble them. 

A DISCOURSE, or SPEECH, is an assemblage of sentences 
(or phrases) and periods, joined together, and arranged 
according to the rules of the language. 

KINDS OF WORDS. 

There arc, in the French tongue, nine different sorts 
of words, which are generally called the nine parts of 
speech, viz. 

1. L'Article, Article. 

2. Le Nom^ Noun. 

3* Le Pronom, Pronoun^ 

4. Le Verb% VERBe 



5. Le Participe, Participle. 

6. L'Adverbe, Adverb, 

7. La Preposition, Preposition. 

8. La Conjonction, Conjunction. 
9^. L'Interjection, Interjection. 

Five of them are declinable ; that is to say, the radical 
part of the word remainiDg the same, the other parts, 
but especially the termination, will admit of several vari- 
ations. These declinable words are, the article, noun, 
pronoun, verb, and participle. 

The four last, as they never vary their tersainationsf, 
are therefore called indeclinable. 

GENERAL EXPLANATION. 

Tlie ARTICLES are certain minute words, which, joined 
to nouns, determine the extent of their signification^ 
rind which, in French, denote their gender, numl)er, 
and case, corresponding to the English words, the, of thc^ 
from the, and to the* These in French, are 

Le, la, les, The. 

De, du, de la, dts, Of or from the« 

A, au, a la, aux. To the. 

The noun, in general, is a word which is used t© 
name or qualify every thing which is the object of dis- 
course : ex. 



Papier, 


Paper. 


Bon, 


Good. 


Plume, 


Pen. 


Petit, 


Little. 


Pain, 


Bread. 


Mauvais, 


Bad, &c 



The PRONOUN is a word commonly substituted in the 
place of the noun, to avoid its too frequent repetition : 
ex. 

J'fli vu M. voire pere, et I saw your father, and 
lui ai parU, spoke to him. 

In this instance the word lui, to hirri, is put to avoid 

the repetition of the word pere, father. 

The VERB is a word which either expresses the state 

of the subject, or an action done by the subject, or the 

action received or suffered by the subject : ex. 



20 

Mon frlre, est maladt^ My brother is ill. 

Ma scdur ecrit une lettre, My sister writes a letter. 

Fo/re cousine est punie, Your cousin w punished. 

The verb is varied by moods, tenses, persons, and 
numbers. 

The PARTICIPLE partakes both of the nature of the 
verb and the adjective noun : ex. 

Ayanty Having. 1 Aime, Loved. 

Donnant, Giving. | Puni, Punished, &c. 

The ADVERB is sometimes joined to the noun, but 
more frequently to the verb, whence it derives its name. 
The use of the adverb is, to determine the signification 
of the noun or verb, or express some particular modifi- 
cation or circumstance of the action or quality : ex. 
Je vous atme sincerement, I love you sincerely, 
Venez demain. Come to-morrow^ 

In these instances the words sincerely and to-morrow 
are adverbs. 

The PREPOSITION is a word which is put before the 
noun or pronoun, and it always governs the word before 
which it is placed : ex. 

Chez mon ami^ At my friend's house. 

Devant moi, Before me, &:c. 

The CONJUNCTION serves to connect the several parts 
of a discourse : ex. e/, and ; car^ for ; maw, but, &c. 

The INTERJECTION is a word which expresses the dif- 
ferent affections or passions of the soul : ex. 

Helas ! mon Dieu ! Oh ! my God ! <£:g. 

A more particular delineation of these nine parts of 
speech, and their use in the composition of a sentence^ 
or period, will be the subject of the following sections. 



SECT. II. 

OF XOUMS. 
NOUNS are divided into substantives and adjectives. 
A NOUN SUBSTANTIVE cxpresses a thing subsisting by itself, 



21 

and can make a complete sense independent of anj 
other word : ex. Diew, God ; roij king ; maison^ house, &c. 

A NOUN SUBSTANTIVE is cithcT common, collective, or 
proper. 

A COMMON NOUN is applicable to all beings or things of 
the same kind : ex. horame^ man ; rw, king ; ri7/e, town ; 
table^ table, -Slc. 

A COLLECTIVE NOUN is cxprcssive of many particulars ; 
jei^ as these particulars are all united in the mind, and 
comprehended under one general idea, they may there- 
fore be conceived as one individual, and, without any 
impropriety, expressed in the singular number : ex,|>eit- 
/>/e, people ;foret, forest; armee, army, &c. 

A PROPER NOUN is applicable to one person or thing 
only : ex. Pierre^ Peter ; Londres, London, &c. 

.AT, B* A noun is always a substantive when we can- 
not, with propriety, add to it the word personnel person^ 
or the word chose, thing. 

A NOUN ADJECTIVE is uscd to cxprcss the quality, colour, 
form or quantity, of the substance to which it belongs; 
and is so called because its meaning cannot be ascer- 
tained without being joined to its proper substantive-, 
with which it must also agree in gender, number, and 
case: ex. hon^ good ; aimahh, lovely; rcnige, red; jaunty 
yellow ; rond, round ; qiiarrt, square ; wn, one ; deux, two ; 
trois^ three, &:c. 

N, B* The noun is always adjective when we can add 
to it the word personne or chose, person or things 
In NOUNS, four things must be considered, viz. 

Lcs Articles, The Articles. 

Les Genres, The Genders. 

Les Nvmhresy The Numbers. 

Les Casy The Cases. 

ARTICLES. 
There are three sorts of Articles, viz. 

UArticle difini, The Article definite. 

D Article par titif, The Article partitive. 

D Article indefiiii^ The Article indefinite- 



The Article mtist always agree with the noun in gea- 
^er and number. 

The DEFINITE ARTICLE is SO Called, because it means 
the whole of the object to which it is applied. 

Singular. 
Le^ for the masculine, before nouns beginning with a 

consonant or h aspirated : jex, h roi, the king ; h heros, 

the hero, &c. 
Xa, for the feminine : ex. la reine^ the queen, &c. 
L\ with an elision, for both genders, before nouns sin- 
gular beginning with a vowel or h not aspirated : ex. 

^enfant, the child ; riiomme^ the man, &e. 
Plural. 
Le5, for both genders, whether the noun begin with a 

consonant or a vowel : ex. hs rois^ the kings ; Us reines^ 
the queens ; les enfans, the children, &c. 

The partitive article means only a part of the ob- 
ject, the English word some being always expressed or 
implied. 

Singular. 
r These two articles are used 

I»«,forthemasc.J''*=*"°'^'= T"' ^<^gl"°|°f ^"V 

DeL,forthefem.V°"'''»^n* or h aspirated : ex. du 
' I pain^ some bread ; de la viande, 

l^some meat. 
De r, for both genders, beginning with a Vowel or an B 
not aspirated : ex, de Vencre^ some ink. 

Plural. 
De5, for both gender^ : ex. des amis, some friends. 

The indefinite article is de or d\ of, from, and 
fl, to. 

This article is used, without distinction, before nouns 
masculine and feminine in both numbers. Proper 
names, and the greater part of the pronouns, are de- 
clined with it. 

Some grammarians admit of a fourth article, viz; ^m 
for the masculine, and une for the feminine, in English 
M or an j but it aaay be observed, that it is alwaj^s declined 



23 



with the indefinite article, and therefore takes the na- 
ture of a noun adjective. 

GENDERS AND NUMBERS. 

There t^re two genders, viz. the masculine and femi- 
nine, A noun is masculine when there is before it k 
or un, as h or un livre^ the or a book. A noun is femi- 
nine wtien it is preceded*bj la or ime, as la or uneplume^ 
the or a pen. 

There are two numbers, the singular and plural. 
The singular number speaks of one tiling only, as icnc 
table, a table : the plural speaks of more than one, as, 
des tables, tables. There are some nouns that are never 
used but in the singular number : as, 

1 . The names of metals : ex. or, gold ; argent, silver : 
cuivre, brass ; plomb, lead, &c. 

2. The names of virtues and vices : ex. avaric», avarice ; 
chariti, charity ; foi, faith ; hainc, hatred ; orgutil^ 
pride ; prodigalite, prodigality, &c. 

3. The names by which the five senses are denoted : ex. 
la vue, the sight ; le gout, the taste ; Vodorat, the 
smell ; Ic toucher, feeling ; Pouie, hearing. 

4. Proper names, except when they are used meta- 
phorically. -^ 

5. To the foregoing may be added the following, which 
are not reducible to any general rules : 



Artilhrieff 
Attirail, 
Bonheur, 
Cclere, 


artillery, 
implements, 
happiness, 
anger. 


Faim, 

Fiimee, 

Fuite, 

Gloire, 


hunger, 
smoke, 
flight, 
glory. 


Courronx, 


wrath. 


Honte, 


shame. 


Enfance, 
Lait, 


infancy, 
milk. 


Jeunesse, 
Salut, 


youth, 
safety. 


Miel, 

Nohlesae, 

Panvrete, 


honey, 
nobility. 
30verty. 


Soif, 

Sonimeil, 

Vieillesse, 


thirst, 
sleep, 
old age 


Sang, 


)lood. 






There ar< 


; others which 


are never. 


used but 


plural number only ; such a 


s» 





in the 



24 



Atmirs^ 


apparel. 


Ciseaux, 


scissars. 


Hardes, 


clothes. 


Limites^ 


limits. 


Maurs^ 


mannerg. 


Mmtchettes, 


snuffers. 


Teiiebresj 


darkness. 


yivrcs. 


victuals. 



Ancitres, ancestors. 
Aytux^ forefathers. 

Funiraillts^ a funeral. 
Frais^ expense. 

D6lices, delight. 
Diptns^ cost. 
Entrailtes^ entrails. 
Epousailhsj espousals. 
Fonts ^ font. 

And, in general, those which, in English, admit of no 
singular. 

In. general the plural numher is formed hy adding aft 
s to the singular : ex. 

Le pere, the father ; hs peres^ the fathers. 

La mere^ the mother ; ies mercs^ the mothers, &:c. 

All nouns, having their singular ending in s^ x, or z^ 
admit of no variation in the plural : ex. 

Le fds^ the son ; Ub Jils^ the son^. 

TJne noix^ a walnut ; dts noix^ walnuts. 

Le nez, the nose -, ks nez^ the noses. 



EXCEPTIONS. 

Nouns ending in au^ eau, ew, ceif, ieu, or om, form their 
plural hy ar, instead of s : ex. 

Un chapeau^ a hat ; des chapeaux^ hats. " 

Un manteau^ a cloak ; des manteaux^ cloaks. 

Un lieu^ a place ; des lieux, places. 

Un chou^ a cabbage ; des choux, cabbages. 

The following differ from this rule, and their plural 
terminates in * : 

Matoii, a great cat ; matous, great cats. 

Ti'ou, a hole ; troiis^ holes. 

Nouns ending in al and ail have their plural in aux : 
ex. 

Animal, a living creature : animaux, living crea1?ares. 
Cheval^ a horse ; chevavx, horses. 

Travail, work ; fravav.x, works. 



25 

These onlj are excepted : 
Bal, a ball, 

Detail, account, retail, 
Eventail, a fan, 



Gouvernail^ the helm, 
Serail, a seraglio, 
PortaiL gateway, 



Which form their plural in s. 
Nouns of more than one syllable (polysyllables) end- 
ing in yit, most generally form their plural by changing 
the t into s : as. 

Enfant, a child ; enfans, children. 

Conimandement, command ; commandemens, commands. 
But nouns of one syllable only (monosyllables) pre- 
serve the t, and form their plural by adding 5- : as, 
Dent, tooth ; dents, teeth, 

Pont, bridge ; ponts, bridges. 

Tout, adj. all, makes ions, in its plural masculine, toute 
in the feminine gender sing, and toutes in the plural. 

The follov/ing are not conformable to any established 
rule. 

AyevL a grandfather ; ayeiix, grandfathers, 

Betail, cattle ; bestiaux, cattle, 

C?V/, heaven ; cievx, heavens. 

(Eil, the eye ; yeux, eyes, 

■p, ^ , ( des dels de lit,* testers of a bed, 
* ( des ffils de hceuf, ovals. 

There are in French several compound words like the 
last two, which require some attention from the learner, 
in the formation of their plural, the difficulty of which 
may soon be removed by means of reflection 5 for ex- 
ample : 

A noun being composed of a substantive and an ad- 
jective, united by a hyphen, both admit o^ the plura! 
formation : as, 

Un ^eniil'hoinme, a nol)io- des grhfih-hcmmes, noble* 
man ; men, 

A noun compounded of^ two substantives and a pre- 
position, united by hyphens, the first only in French 

* Tkis term is groAvirg obsolete : it is better to '^av, un fond de lit. 



26 



which is generally the last in English, admits of the plu- 
ral formation : as, 

Un arc-en-ciel^ a rainbow *, des arcs-en-ciel^ rainbows. 
Un chef-d'cBuvre^ a master- des chefs-d^czuvrc, master- 
piece, pieces. 
J^, B. Some of these French compound words are 
sometimes rendered in English by one word, in which 
case the formation of the plural in the French is still 
the same ; as, 

Un cul'dt-sac^ an alley (with- des culs-de-sac^ alleys, 
out egress) ; 

Nouns composed of a verb or a preposition and a 
substantive, the substantive only admits of the plural 
formation : as, 



Un avant'toit^ eaves 
Un casse-noisette^ 

cracker ; 
Un garde-fou^ a rail ; 
Monseigneur^ my lord 
Monsieur^ Mr. or gent. 
Madame^ Mrs. or madam 
Mctdemoiselle^ miss 



des avant-ioits^ eaves, 
a nut- descasse-noisettes.mit'Cr2iC\i- 
ers. 

des garde-fmxx^ rails, &:c. 
« C Messeigneurs^ my lords. 
c-^ 1 Messieurs^ gentlemen. 
I -I ^ Mesdames, ladies. 
^ f Mesdemoistlles^ misses. 



CASES. 

There are six cases, viz. 

Le Xominatif^ Nominative. 

Le Ginitif, Genitive. 

Le Datif^ Dative. 

UAccusatif^ Accusative. 

Le Vocatif^ Vocative. 

VAUatif, Ablative. 

The NOMINATIVE and accusative cases have exactly 
the same form, and are always declined with the same 
article ; the only difference between them arises from 
their different positions in the sentence. 

In the natural construction, the nominative always 
precedes the verb, and the accusative follows it. The 



1. 

2. 
3. 
4. 
5. 
6. 



27 

nominative is the subject of the sentence, and the accu- 
sative is the object to which it refers : ex. 
Le roi aime lepeuple^ The king loves the people. 

In order to know the nominative from the accusative, 
I ask, "Who loves the people ? The King (which is the 
answer) is the subject, and consequently the nomina- 
tive. Whom or what does the King love ? Theansv.er 
is The people, which is the object, and therefore the 
iiccusative. 

The GENITIVE and ablative are declined with the 
same article, but the first is always preceded by another 
word on which it depends : as. 

La porte de la chambre^ The chamber door, that is, 

the door of the chamber. 
La muison de monpere, My father's house, &c. 

Or it is governed by a preposition, as, 

Pres du feu^ Near the fire, &:c. 

The last is always put after nouns or verbs expressing 
division, partition, or separation ; and after some prepo- 
sitions. The genitive is known by the articles Je, dw, de 
la, des, of or of the. Sometimes the article is not ex- 
pressed in English, as may be seen in the sentences 
before mentioned. The ablative is known by the arti- 
cles de, du, de la, des, from or from the. 

The DATIVE shows to whom the thing spoken of, is 
given, or to what it is attributed : as, 
Donnez cette pomme a mon Give that apple to my bro- 
frere, ther. 

This case is known by the articles a, au, a la, aux, to 
•r to the. 

The VOCATIVE is used only for calling or naming the 
person to whom the speech is addressed : as. 

Ami, qui itcs-vous ? Friend, who are you ? 

DECLENSIONS OF NOUNS, 

All changes in nouns are formed by numbers and 
cases. To decline a noun, therefore, is to express its 



28 



several variations ; and, under these variations, to point 
©ttt its different significations. 

Some short examples are added to the nouns, that 
learners may more easily understand what has heen said 
respecting the cases. 

JDechnsion of the Article Definite Le (f/ie), before Nouns 
masculine beginning with a Consonant, 

Singular. 



Nom. Le Prince^ 

Le prince est g6n6reux^ 
Gen. Du prince^ 

Les vertus du prince, 

Dat. Au prince, 

Purler au prince^ 
Ace. Le prince^ 

Aimer le prince, 
Voc. prince, 
Ahl. Du prince, 

Recevoir des lettres du 
prince, 



The prince. 

The prince is generous. 

Of the prince. 

The virtues of the prince ; 

or, the prince's virtues. 
To the prince. 
To speak to the prince. 
The prince. 
To love the prince. 
O prince. 
From the prince. 
To receive letters from the 

prince. 



Declension of the Article Definite La (the), before Nouns 
feminine beginning with a Consonant, 

Singular. 



I^om. La princes se, 

La princesse est aimable, 

Gen. De la princesse, 
Les regards de la princesse, 

Dat, A la princesse, 

Donner a la princesse. 
Ace. La' princesse, 

Imitez la princesse, 
Voc. O princesse, 
Ahl. De la princesse, 
■ Eire sipari de la prin- 
ccsse^ 



The princess. 

The princess is amiable. 

Of the princess. 

The looks of the princess i 

or, the princess's looks. 
To the princess. 
To give to the princess. 
The princess. 
Imitate the princess. 
O princess. 
From the princess. 
To be separated from the 

princess. 



29 



Declension of the Article Definite V {the\for both Genders', 
before Nouns beginning unth a Vowel, or an h not asj)i- 
rated. 

Singular. 



Nora. V enfant, 


The child. 


D enfant est timide, 


The child is fearful. 


Gen. DePenfant, 


Of the child. 


Le temperament de P en- 


The child's temper ; or, the 


fant, 


temper of the child.^ 


Dat. A Penfant, 


To the child. 


Attribuer a Penfant^ 


To attribute to the child. 


Ace, L'' enfant, 


The child. 


Admirer Penfant, 


To admire the child. 


Voc. enfant. 


O child. 


Abl. DePenfant, 


From the child. 


S^ eloigner de Penfant, 


To go away from the child. 


The plural of these nouns, whether they begin with a 


consonant or a vowel, is declined, in both genders, by the 


article les (the). 




Nom. Les rois, 


The kings. 


Les rois commandent. 


The kings command. 


Gen. Des 7'ois, 


Of the kings. 


Dordre des rois, 


The order of the kingb : or, 




the kings' order. 


Dat. Aux rois, 


To the kings. 


Envoycr aux rois, 


To send to the kings. 


Ace. Les 7'ois, 


The kings. 


Respectez les rois, 


Honour the kings. 


Voc. rois. 


kings. 


Abl, Des rois, 


From the kings. 


Eire loin des rois, 


To be far from the kings. 


RECAPITULATION OF THE ARTICLE 


DEFINITE. 


SiXGULAR. ^ 


Plural. 


Mas. Fem. Mas. 8l Fern. 


Mas. & Fem. 


Le, la, P ; 


Les, the. 


Da, de la, de P ; 


Des, of or from the. 


All, a la, a P ; 


Aux, to the. 


'3* • 


* 



30 

The definite article must be placed, in French, before 
all nouns used in a general sense, or denoting a whole 
species of objects, though the EngUsh admit of no 
article in this case : ex. 

Vhomme est mortel, Man is mortal. 

Le Danemarc, la Suede, et Denmark, Sweden, and 

VAngleterre, sont les trois England, are the three 

royaumes du nord, northern kingdoms 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

I hate idleness. - - Virtue is estimable. - » 

Je, pro. hais, v. par esse, f. Vertu, f. est,\, estimable, adj. 
Gold is preferable to silver. - - - - Do you^ 
Or, m. preferable, adj. argent, m. 'o>vous,pTO» 

prefer^ England to France ? Corn grows 

pr6firez,v. Jngkterre,f, France, L Bled,m,croit,\\ 
for men, and grass for cattle. - - - - Love, 

pour, p. homme, m. et,c, herbe, f. betail, m. Aimez,Y, 



wisdom. - 

sagcsse, f. 
Avoid 


-- Do '^not^ 
•o' nepas, 
leisure. 


adv. 
She 


neglect* study. - - 
ntgligez, V. itude, f. 
comes from church. - - 


Evitez, v. 


loisir, m. 


Elle, 


pro. vient. v. 


iglise, f. 


We 


speak .of 


America^ and 


not 


Kous, pro. 
of Poland. 


pari(yn.s,v, 
Grant 


Anierique, f. 
us 


nonpas, adv. 
peace. - - « 


Pologne 
Honour 


, f. Accordez, v. 

is due 


nous, pro. 
to kings. - - 


paix, L 


Honneur, m . du, p^ p . 


roi, m. 


7/^, pro. 



come from Africa Pride disgraces man. 

viennent, v. Afrique, f. Orgueil, m. degrade, v. 
Charity patiently^ bears* injuries®, 

Charite,L patiemment^SLdy, souffre,\, injure, f. 

This article is also placed before nouns used in a 

specific sense, or denoting a particjilar object, in whith 

ease the article is likewise expressed in Engii&h : ex. 

Vhomme que vous m^avez The man whom you re- 

recommandi est fori ha- commended to me is 

hilcf very skilful. 



31 

Lts pokes de voire jardin The pears of your garden 
sont excellentes, are excellent. 



EXERCISE UPON THIS AND THE PRECEDING RULE* 

Where is the master of the house ? - - The 
>,^ Ow, adv. maitrej m. maison, f. 

p!ii;^e spoke to the king. - - To the third 
princt^im- parla^ v. troisieme^ adj « 

page olSjje bocJk. - - The* lazy^ do ^not^ 

page^ f. ■'-,^^^re, m. paresseux^ adj. *o^ 

love* woi-k^ Justice is the mistress and 

aiment, v. ouvrage^ m. Justice^ L maitresse^ f. 

queen of virtue. - - Send the child to school. - - 
retwe, f. . EnvQ^ez^y. enfant^m. ecoh^ f. 

Walk in the garden.^ - Tranquillity 

Promenez-vous^v, Jflns, p. jardin^m. Tranquillitl^L 
of soul is the height of felicity. - - Give the tooth 
dme^L comble^m. felicite^L Donnez^y, cure- 

picks to the gentlemen. Education is to the 

dent, m. gentil-homme^ m. Education^ f. 

mind, what ^ ^ cleanHness is to the body. - - Th€ 
esprit, m. ce que, pro. proprete, f. corps^ m. 

life of man is short. - - The enemies were on 

vie, f. coiirte, adj. ennemi, m. efoient, v. sur, p. 

the mountain. - - You admire the beauty of 

montagne,L Vows, pro, admirez,Y^ beauti^f, 
the ladies. - - To the thickness of the walls. - - We 

dame, f, epaisseur, f. mnraille, f. 

go to the park. It is the will of the em- 

aUons,y, parc,m, C''est,y. volonte,{» em- 

peror. - - - The fate .pjj^ations is governed 

pereur,m. sort,m, ^ jmtion,f. gouverne,ip,'p, 

by Providence. - - You play with the boys. 
par,p. Providence, L jouez,v,avec,'p, gargon,m^ 

- - Revenge is the pleasure of a weak^ mind^ - - 

Ven^eance,L plaisir,m. 7in foible, 3.3j, 

Italy is the garden of Europe. - - The most noble 
Italie,i, Europe, L plus, Sidy, noble jO-dj* 



312 

of virtues is charity. - - Carry the grammar to the 

Portez^ V. grammaire^ f. 
boys, and the dictionary to the girls. - - - He 

dictlonnaire^m. fillt^L //, pro, 

comes from the Indies. - - Give me the loaf. 

leient^ v. /nJe, f. mo% pro^ pain^ m. 

This article being declinable in French, and conse- 
quently admitting of different variations, ought to be 
repeated before all the substantives of a sentence, as 
well as before nouns adjective used as substantives, and 
agree with them in gender and number t ex. 

Le sel^ la moutarde, et The salt, mustard, and oil, 

Phuile^ sont sur les tables^ are on the tables. 

Le blanc^ le rouge^ et le noir, White, red, and black, 

sont trois differentes cou- are three different col- 

leurs^ ours. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS AND THE PRECEDING RULES. 

Prefer virtue to riches, friendship to 

Preferez^ v. richesses, f. pi. amitie^ f. 

money, and utility to pleasure. - - The father, mother, 
argent^m, utilite^L joere,m. mere, f. 

and children are dead. - - The men, women, and chil- 

5071^, v.morf^, p.p. femme, f. 

dren of the village were all at the burial. - - - - 

village^ m, tous^adj, o,p. enterrement^m* 
Children generally^ like^ apples and pears. -- 

ordinairement^Kdv. aiment.^Y.pomme^f. poire^L 
I like yellow and grey. - Peace and plenty 

aime^y, jaune^m» gris^m, abondance^L 

make men happy. Wheat and barley 

rendentyV* /tewrewx, adj. Froment^m, orge^L 

are dear. I hate milk, butter, and cheese. - - 

c/ier, adj. lait^m, feeurre, m. fromage^m* 

Bring the knives and forks. Patience 

Apportez^ V. couteau^ m, fourchette^L Patience^T^ 

and perseverance are necessary. The desire 

pe r severance, f. nece^saire, adj . desir, m . 



33 

of glory, riches, power, and pleasure, is a 

gloire^ii pmivoir^ m. tint 

disease of the mind. Have you passed 

maladie^i. dme^L Axez.Y* passe^ip,ip, 

through Spain, Portugal, or Holland ? - - Pre- 

war, {5. Espagne^L Portugal^m, ou Hollande^L 
iet always virtue, prudence, and good sense 

toujours^^diY. prudence^ f. hon .adj . sens^ m. 

t£> beauty, -- Put the wine, beer, and cider on 

J\httez^\,vin^m. hitre^i. cidr€,m,sur,]), 
the table. — (It is said) that America, France, and 

table^i. On dit que 

Spain have made peace with England, 

on/, v,/ai7, p.p. 
On the contrary, this article, though expressed ia 
English, must be omitted in French, before a ncun 
followed by a name denoting a degree of consangviniiy 
or kindred^ or the name of a particular place to \\\i\ch. 
it belongs ; and when it precedes a noun in the nomi- 
native or accusative case, denoting dignity^ office, or 
business : ex. 
Alexandre, Jils de Philippe, Alexander the son of Phi- 

Hp. 
Mon ami demcure a Lon- My friend lives in Lon- 
dres, villc capitale d^An- don, the capital city of 
gleterre, England. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

The Jupiter of the heathens was the son of 
payen, m, ctoit, v. Jils, m, 

Saturn, and the father of the gcds. Robert, 

Saturne,m, .^ dieu,in, 

duke - of Normandy, the brother of Henry, king 
ducm, Normandie,L^ frlre, m. Henri.m, 

«f England, was the son bf William the con- 

Gi'.'.llaume,m, con- 

cjueror. -- My sister lives at York, the cap- 

querant,m,Ma,ipTO, sceur,i. der'icvre,\, a, p. 
ital city of the county of the same name. 

fomte, m. mime, adj. i*om,m% 



34 

Kfr. C***, the rector of the parish of St. James, and 

cure^m, paroisse,L Jdques 

his brother, the dean of the cathedral, were 

son, pro. doi/en.,ni, cdth^drah^f. 

the sons of . Mr. L***, the first lord of 

premier^ adj. stigneur 
the admiralty. 

In several instances, the definite article is neither 

expressed in English nor in French ; and this generally 

Jiappens when nouns common are not taken in the full 

extent of their signification, especially in narrations, 

and after the conjunction m, neither, nor : ex. 

Conscience, honneur, interet, Conscience, honour, inter- 

tout est sacrifie ; il n''a est, every thing is sacri- 

ni justice ni humanite, ficed ; he has neither 

justice nor humanity. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. • 

The town was taken by storm : men, 
ville^ f, fut, V. prise^ p.p. dPassaut, m. 
women, children, old people, (every body) was 

vieillard, m. tout, adj. 

put to death. - - Palaces, temples, publick* build- 

mis, p.p. a mort, f. Palais, edi- 

ings*, private^ houses* (every thing) >vas 

Jice^m, particuliere, ^^, maison,f, (tout) 
destroyed, and the enemies did* * not ^ leave^ stone 
detruit,ip.ip, laissereni,v, pierre,L 

upon stone. — His father wilP spare^ 'neither^ 
5wr, p. -/Son, pro. epargnera,v, ne ni 

pains nor money. - - - He is a fatherless child, 
peine, i. C^est,Y. orphelin ,^dj, *o^ 

he has neither parents nor friends. 
parent, m. ami, m. 

When, in English, two or more substantives, signi- 
fying different things, come together in a sentence, 
having a dependence on each other, and having no 
^top between them, the last (in English) must be placed 



35 

at the beginning of the sentence (in French), and the 
others having the sign of the English genitive, thus 
('s) or (') only, come after it, with the genitive of this 
article before them, according to their gender and num- 
ber: ex. 

Le fils du roi^ The king's son. 

La couronne de let reine^ The queen's crown. 

That is, the son of the king, the crown of the queen. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

I have seen the king's apartments and the 

m,v. TM, p.p. appartement, m, 

queen's picture. The chancellor's son's wife is 

portrait^ m, chancelier, m. 

the prime minister's eldest^ sister* The man's 

premier. amee, adj. s(£ur,f, 

strength is very great. Lend me the 

force^f. grande^adji Pretez^v, mo«, pro. 

maid's cloak My cousin's brother is 

seroante^i. mantelet^m* JJ/on, pro. cousin^m.* 

my uncle's best friend. The title of 

oncZe,m. meilleur^zdi], ami^m. titre^m, 

Dauphin belongs to the king of France's eldest 

appartient, v. 
son. - - Modesty ' is a woman's greatest orna- 

Modestle^i. une ftmme^L plus grand^^dj. ornt' 
ment. 



The genitive of this article is often made in English 
by to, especially before nouns expressing alliance, con- 
sanguinity, or kindred, witness, or inheritance ; and in 
short whenever to may be rendered by the above geni- 
tive; ex. 

Monseigneur le due de ***, My lord duke of ***, bro- 
frm du roi, ther to the king, or the 

king's brother. 



36 



EXERCISE UPON THIS ARTICLE* 



Mr. Richard, brother to the Prince's steward, 

intendantjin, 
has married Miss Prescot, niece to the Constable 
cs, V. epouse^ p.p. niece^ f. connetahle^ m. 

of the Tower. I have spoken to the Marchioness 

Tour^ f. parle, p. p. Marquise, f. 

of ***3 sister to the queen's first Ladj of honour. - - 

Dame^ f. 
Mr. Henry, perfumer to the princess, has made 
Henri^ m. parfumeur^m. " fait^^.p, 

2L 2 considerable ^fortune. The heir to the 

carmc?era6/e, adj. fortune, f, heritier,m, 

crown of Portugal is the Prince of Brasil; - - My 

couronne, f. ^ du Bresil^ m. 

father was witness to that quarrel. 

aefe, p.p. temoin,m, cette^'pro, querelle^f, 

I am a friend to ^ diligent ^scholars, and an 

suis,v, ^^ diligent, a.dj, ecolier^m, •<» 

enemy to idleness. 

cnnemi, m. par esse, f. 

After the adverb hien, when placed before a substan- 
tive and signifying much, a great deal, many, the geni- 
tive of this article must always be used : ex. 
Bien du merite, Much merit. 

Bien des amis, Many friends. 

Bien de P argent, A great deal of money. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

The children make much noise. This man 

font,Y, bruit, m, Ce/,pro. 

has (a great deal) of money, but he has also many 

fat55t,adv, 
enemies. - - - ^ They ^give *you mucU trouble 

donnent,\, r*eine,i\ 

now; but they wilP give^ you* afterward 

d'prsseni,2idv, mais,c» donneront,Y, ensiiiie,-dd.Y* 

much pleasure. - - - - (Tlier* were) many ladies in 
II y awit, V. 



37 

company (last night). Mr. R. has read 

compagnic, f. hier au soir^ adv. lu^ p. p. 

many books, and he has acquired much know- 

livre^tCi, acquis^p»ip* corinois- 

ledge. To teach youth (we must 

nances, f. pi. Pour,T^,enseigner^\, jeunesse^L (iUaut^V. 

have) a great deal of patience. 

avoir^v,) 

If the second substantive in French (which is the first 
in English) serve to denote some particular commodity, 
use, quality, or liquor, then it must be put in the dative : 
ex. 

Lepotau lait. The* milk^-pot^. 

La femme aux pommts, The ^ apple ^ -woman^ » 

Une cruche a Vcau, A water-jug. 

• EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE* 

Tell the servant to brings 

Diies^ v. au or a la domestique, m.&: f. de apporter, v. 
me* thetea-cannister, sugar -dish, cream- 

me,pro. the,m* hoite,L sucre,m, pot,m. crem.e,L 

basin, and coffee - cups. -- Go to the wine-cellar 
bassin,m. cafe,m, tass€,(, Alhz,\. vin,m* cave,L 

and brings us* the vinegar -bottle. (There is) 

vinaigre, m,houieille, f. Voild 
the oyster-woman. - - - 1 live in the hay - market, 

huitre, f. foin, m. marehS, m . 

my cousin in the fish-market, and my sister 

mon, pro. poisson,m, wa,pro. 

in the poultry - market. Give me the oil- 

volaille,L mo/, pro. huile,f. 

bottle, pepper - box, and mustard-pot. The 

poivre,m.boite,L moutarde,L 

butter-boy, the green-girl, the hot - rolls 
heurre,m. legume,m. chaud^Sidj. pain,m, 

man, and the gingerbread-woman, called here. - - 

paind''epices,m. ant pass6,p,p, id, adv. 
We had cabbage-soup, a rice - pudding. a 

eumes, v. chou, m. soiipe, f. riz, m. pouding.m . 
4 



38 

(leg of mutton) with caper - sauce, and ice- 

gigot.m. capre^L sauce^L glace, f. 

cream. - - We shall have pease porridge, a salts 

aurons,Y» pois^m, soupe^L 5a/e,adj. 

cod' with egg-sauce, and a turbot with 

morue^i, auf^m. 

lohster-sfiuce. 1 bought a plum - cake, an 

homar^m, ai achete, raisin.m, gdteau^m, 

apple - tart, and two gooseberry and cherry 
pomme, f. tarte, f. groseilh^ f. cerise^L 

pies. 
tourie, f. 

DECLENSION OF THE ARTICLE PARTITIVE, 

Singular. 
Masculine. 
Nom. Ace. du pain, some bread, t 

Gen. Abl. depain,oi or from some bread. 
Dat. a du pain, to some bread. 

Feminine. 
Nom. Ace. de la viande, some meat. 
Gen. Abl. de viande, of or from some meat. 
Dat. a de la viande, to some meat. 

Masculine or Feminine* 
Nom. Ace. de Vargent, some money. 
Gen. Abl. d^argent, of or from some money, 
Dat. a de Vargent, to some money. 

The plural is the same for both genders. 
N. Ac. des livres. some books, des auUurs, some 
authors. 

G. Ab. de Ihres, of or from, &c. d''auteurs^ of or 
from, &c. 

Dat. a des livres, to, &c. a des aufeurs, to, &c. 
N. B. In asking a question, the English generally 
make use of any, which, in French, must be rendered 
by the same article : ex. 

Y a-t-il du pain ici ? Is there any bread here ? 

Avf^'Vmi's de I0 vi&nde ? Have you any meat ? 



39 

TPhis article must be used wherever the English word 
some, or any, is either expressed or understood, and 
ought to be repeated before every substantive in a sen- 
tence : ex. 
Ihi pain et de Peau hii suffi- Bread and water are suffi- 

sent, cient for him. 

Apportez du vinaigre, de Bring some vinegar, musl- 

la moutarde, de Phuile, et tard, oil, and forks. 

desfourchettes, 
Avez-vous de Vargent d Have you any money to 

nous priter ? lend us ? 

EXERCISE UPON THIS ARTICLE. 

Bread, meat, and water, are things necessary 

sont,y, chose^L nece^^aire, adj. 
to man. - - I drink wine and water. - - She eats 
hois,v. mange,v» 

cheese. - - - Bring me some mustard. - - - Have you 
fromage^m, 

bought some paper, pens, and ink ? - - Send 
ac/ie/e,p.p. papier^m. plume, L encre,L 

him some bread, meat, and potatoes. Do you^ 

pomme de terre,t\ '■<^ 
sell* fruit^ ? - - Buy some tea and sugar. - - 

vendez^y, frvit,m, Achetez,\\ the.m. 
Will you eat some beef with turnips and 

Voulez,y. manger,Y, hczvf.m. navet.m. 

carrots ? - - Do you drink beer ? - - (Is there) any 

carotte,L buvez^v. biere,f. Y a-t-il 

wine in the cellar ? - - - - (Was there) any oil in the 

Y az'oit-il 
bottle ? - - P have'* given^ him^ bread, money, 

c?onne, p.p. /in,pro. 
and clothes. - - She has modesty and prudence. - - 
habtt.m, modestie,f, prudtnce,i. 

He has bought some dishes and plates. Will 

plat,m. assiette,L 

jou have some milk or cream ? - - I eat fish, eggs, 
•^ ceiA/*,m, 



4$ 

artichokes, and asparagus. Bread, mcai 

artichau^ m. asperge, f. 

ish and vegetables, often ^ make* a good 

legume^ m, souvent^3,dv, font^v. 

dinner. 
diner, m. 

If the substantive be preceded bj an adjective, instead 
pidu, de la, des, we must use de or d' ; as, 

Masc. Fern, Masc. or Fern. 

N. Ac. ) De mauvais m», De bonne eau, D*excellent pain, 

G-..Abl, ) Bad wine, Good water, Excellent bread, 

©at. ^ de mauvais vin, Sde bonne eau^ d d'' excellent pain, 

To bad wine. To good water. To excellent bread. 

Plural* 
!N. Ac. ) De bons livres, d%abiles gens, 

G. Ab. J Good books, Learned men. 

Dat. a de bons livres, a d''habile$ gens, 

To good books. To learned men. 

This last rule is not general ; for there are some sub^ 
itantives, which, though preceded by an adjective, re^ 
quire the other article, instead of de. However, in- 
stances of this kind are very few : they never happen 
but when the adjective and substantive present to th^ 
mind one idea only : as, Londres est le centre du bon 
goiit, &LC, London is the centre of good taste, &c. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS AND THE PRECEDING RULES. 

You always^ read^ good books. - - Bad^ wine^ 

touj ours, adv. lisez,\^ 
is* ^not^ worth^ good water. - - He speaks to learned 
vaut,\. parle,Y, 

men. I have heard good news, r - - ^ 

gens,f,* appris,ip,p. 6onne, adj. nou'eelle,L 

You have fine fruit. She has worthy 

avez,y» 6eaw,adj. dz"g'ne,adj. 

friends. - - Bring me good pens. - - Onions, celery, 

Oignons,m, cc7cn,m, 

* Gens^ preceded by an adjective, is of the feminine g^emder ; b^t 
when the adjective follows, it is put in the raasculinev 



41 

leeks, chervil, and plenty of meat make 

poireau^tn, cerfeuil,m. beaucoup^Rdv» font^v, 

what the French call, good 

ce que^pro. Frangois, m, -pi, appellent^v, 

broth. - - - - I prefer good water to bad cider. - - - - 

bouillon^ m . cidre^ m . 

I have discoursed with learned people. - - My father 

conxjer^e, p.p. gens^L 

has in his garden good plums, fine peaches, 
son^ pro. prune^ f* belle, adj . peche, f. 

and very large apricots. Miss 

t7'es,3.dr* gro^,adj. abricot^m* Mademoiselle^^ 

Sharp has fine eyes. 
oeil^m* 

DECLENSION OF THE ARTICLE INDEFLNITE. 
Singular. — Masculine. 
Nom. Ace. Pierre, Peter. 
Gen. Abl. de Pierre, of Peter. 
Dat. a Pierre, to Peter. 

Feminine. 
Nom. Ace. Marie, Maria. 
Gen. Abl. de Marie, of Maria. 
Dat. a Marie, to Maria. 

This article, before a noun beginning with a voV/ei 
dr h not aspirated, is expressed as follows : 
Nom. Ace. Antoine, Antony. 
Gen. Abl. d''Antoine, of Antony. 
Dat. a Antoine, to Antony. 

Nom. Ace. Londres, London. 
Gen. Abl. de Londres, of London. 
Dat. a Londres, to London. 

N.B. It is necessary to observe, that the particle 
To, used after a word signifying coming, going, re- 
turning, or sending to, placed before the name of a king- 
dom, republic, country, province, or county, must be ren- 
dered in French by the preposition en, without smf 
article : ex. 

4* 



42 

Monfrerc est alii en Italie, My brother is gone to Italyv 
// doit bientot relourner en He is soon to go back to 

Amerique, America. 

On the contrary, to must be rendered by de, when 
immediately preceded by the words road, or path-way ; 
ex. 

Le clumin de Londres, The road to London. 

Le chemin de Paris, The way to Paris. 

It must be observed that the proper names of most of 
the islands and other countries both in the East and 
West-Indies, and some few places in Europe, do not 
follow the above rule, but take the definite article, such 
as VAhyssinie, Abyssinia ; le Bresil, Brasil ; le Caire, 
Cairo ; le Canada, Canada ; la Guadeloupe, Guadaloupe j 
la Jamaique, Jamaica ; le Japon, Japan ; la Martinique, 
Martinico; le Perou, Peru; la Firgmic, Virginia; and a 
few others : ex. 

C de PAbyssinie, C from Abyssinia^ 

Venir < du Bresil, to come < from Brasil, 

( du Caire, ^ from Cairo. 

Ca la Chine^ C to China, 

filler < au Canadtty to go < to Canada^ 

(^au Japon, ^ to Japan. 

EXERCISE UPON THESE RULES. 

(Here is) John's brother. - - Speak to Martha. -- 
Fbici, adv. Jean,m* Parlez,v, MartheJ* 

It is Peter's hat. - - - * She goes to Riclunond. - ^ 
C'e5f,v. chapeau^m^ va,Y, 

He comes from Paris, - - - You have Mr. 

vient,v, Monsieur,m» 

Richard's sword. When^ will^ - you^ go^ to 

6pee,L Quand,a.dY, irez,\, 

France ? - - 1 know not, for my father says 

sais,v, nepas,3,dY. car,c, dit,\, 

that he wilP send^ me^ soon to Canada or 
que,c. ?7,pro. enverra,v, bient6t,didY. 

Jamaica. - - Give me Laura's cap. I (am going} 

Luure,i. honn&t ym, '8ai^,y* 



4g 

to Croydori. - - - 1 have found Andrew's waistcoat* 

/roifcue^p.p. Andre^m. veste^L 
She (shall come back) to England (next year) 

reviendra^Y. Pnnnee procJiaine 

to see her brother who is arrived from 
pourvoir^v. qui^i^ro. est^v. arrfje,p.p. 

Japan and China. - - Carry that to Stephen. - - 
Fortez^v, ce/a,pro. Etienne^m, 

(Here is) the road to Clapham My mother 

Ma., pro. 
intends to send my sister to Portugal 

se propose de,\, envoyer^Y. mcJ,pro. 
or Spain, and thence to Rome, and my cousin (is to) 
de Id doit.Y, 

go to Mexico or Cairo. 

aUer^Y, Mexique^m. o-u^c. 

The genitive of this article de is used after noting 
^nd adverbs of qumdify^ whether expressed in English^ 
or not ; after the negation pas or pointy no or not ; the 
words que, what, quelque chose^ something, Wen, nothing | 
before names of countries, kingdoms and provinces, 
when preceded by a noun expressing a personal title, 
or by a verb signifying coming, arriving, or returning 
from : ex. 

Taiit de pommes^ So many apples. 

Tant d'' argent. So much money. 

Point de repos. No rest. 

Quelque chose'^^ de hon, Something good. 

// arrive de France, He arrives from France. 

Rien de mauvais. Nothing bad. 

Le roi d'^Angleterre, The king of England. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS ARTICLE. 

I have boughl six yards of cloth. - - - Bring 

ac/ie/e, p.p. six, aune,L drap,m. 

me three pounds of veal, and two pounds of 

trois, livre,L veau,m. deux, 

* It must be observed, that the word chose, standing by itself, is of 
the feminine gender; butj being joined to the word quelque, it is of 
the JBtta§cu}ine. 



>44 

mutton, She has a great number of child- 

7nouton,m, un ^miw^,adj. nombre^Yn, 

jren. - - - He has (too much) vanity. - - You have 

frop, adv. vanite^f, 

less merit, but more wisdom. - - What 

*nom5, adv. mais^c, plus^zdv, sagesae^L Que 

a noise you make. - - - Do » nof* give' her ^ 

^^>>bruit,m, faites^v, •-©^ 7iepcf5,adv. /wi,pro. 

(too many) pears. - - P have' ^no* daughters.* -- 

trop^ adv. ne point, adv. 

So much pride does *not* become^ him^. - 

ycni, adv. orgueil^m, *<» sied^v, /w2,pro. 

(There is) something noble in his physiognomy. - - 

Ilya,y» sa^ipro. physioncnnie^i. 

We have (so many) grapes. - - They have a little 

raisin, m. un peu, adv.- 

money. - - I know the king of Prussia. - - Did you 

connois,Y» Prusse^L Avez,\, 

sec the dake of Bavaria with the archbishop 
ijw,p.p. duc^vci* Baviere^f* archevique^m. 

of York ? - - He commanded an army of forty 

comniandoit,y,une armie^i, quarantt 
thousand men. -- She* says ^ ^nothing'* true*.--- 

mille, dit,\. nenm,adv. rra?,adj. 

You speak of Alexander, king of Macedonia. - - 

parlez^y. Alexandre^va, Mac6doine,f» 

Do you^ come* from Italy ? No, I come 

«^2^ venez,r» .ATonjadv. viens^v, 

from Africa. 
Afrique, 

De is likewise placed before nouns governed by 
another substantive, of which they express the character, 
sause^ country, matter, nature, and qualitiL; and after the 
adjectives of number, when they are followed by a parti- 
ciple passive : ex. 

Une maison de brique, A' brick^ house^, 

Un bonnet de rmit, A night cap. 

Une cuiller d'^argent, A silver spoo*. 

Dupoisson de riviere, River fish. 

Du vin de Bourgogne, Burgundy^ wine'*^ 

Quatr€ de reryooyes, Four sent away. 



45 



i>xi:rcise upon this article. 

Your" sister^ has^ a* silk^ gown* and a gold 

Votre^ipTO. s(Kur,L a, v. une soie^f, robe^i, un or^tn* 
thimble. - • We drink Champagne wine It is a 

Je,m. huvonSjY* C'e$<,v. 

marble pillar. » They have a country 

marbre^m* pillier^m* une campagne^L 

house built with oak wood. - -» 

maison^L construiie^p^ij^* Je,p. chene^m* bois^m. 
Edinburgh is the capital city of the kingdom 

Edinbmirg^m. capitale^d-dy ville^(, roymime^m. 

of Scotland. - - Shut the fore » door. - - A ladj 

Ecosse^f,. Fermez^Y, devant^m* porte.f* Une 
^f wit is a jewel of worth. ^ - - t^ He is a man 

esprit,Yn, unjoyau^m* prixyin, C^est^w 

of honour, - - - She has bought silver buckles 

argent^m, houcle^L 

and diamond ear - rings. - -^ » - Have you 

diamcfnt^m.^ pmdans-d''oreiIle^xn, Avez,\, 

spoken to the silk-merchant ? - ^ — Give me the 

/>ar/e,p.p. marchand^m* 

upper - crust. - - Bring me my straw - hat and 
dessus^m, croute^L mon, pro. jt)m7Ze,f. chapcav^m. 

my night - cap. - - Miss Brown's chamber - maid and 

nuit^L bonnet^m* chambre^i, fiUe.L 

Mrs. Rose's house-keeper are two sis- 

Madame^L femme de cJiarge^f. deux, 

ters. - - The rich make use of silver plate, 

riche^m, se servent^v, vaisselle^f* 

and the poor make use of iron fcrk^^ 

pauvre^m, fontyY. vsage^m, /e?',m. 

and pewter spoons. The enemies had a 

itain^m. cuiller^L eurent^Y, ^^ 

hundred men killed, seventy wounced, 

cent fwe,p.p. foixante-dix, 6/e55e,p.p. 

forty lost, and five hundred taken pri- 

quarante, fer(iw,p.p. $inq^ ^n>,p»P» f*^*^ 

soners. 



4f 

Dt is placed after the adjectives signifying dimension; 
as epat>, thick ; gros^ big, large ; haut^ high, tall ; larg&^ 
wide, broad ; /wig, long ; and profond^ deep ; though 
there is no article expressed in English : ex. 
Une fable kmgue de dix pieds A table ten feet long and 

et large du huit, eight broad. 

But there is a more elegant way, which is, to tura 
the adjective of dimension into the substantive ; then 
the words of measure and those of dimension are pre- 
ceded by de : ex. 
Une table de dix pieds de Ion- A table ten feet long and 

gueur et de huit de largeur^ eight broad. 

In this last example it may be seen, that the French 
and English are parallel with eacjh other ; therefore, in 
the following exercise, the adjective and substantive are 
put down, that the learner may translate it both ways. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

I saw a tree eighteen ^eei large. 

«/,T. r'W,p.p. un arbre^m. dix-huit pied^m. groa^ 
— - - 1 have a box four inches thick, 
5ei*r*,f. une boite^f, quatre pouce^xn. tpaisseur^L 

ten feet long, and six broad. - - 1 know 

dix pied ^m, long-ueur^L large-ur^f, connois^y^ 

a man seven feet high. (It is) a ditch 

■un sept haut-eur^L Cest^y, unfossi^m* 

nine feet six inches deep and five feet broad. 

nevf profond-eur^f, cinq^ 

(There is) a "room fifty paces long and 

Voila une chambre^L cinquante pas^m, 
twenty broad. - - - The walls of our garden. 

mngt rnurailh^L n«/re, pro. 

are (have) thirty feet three inches high, and two 
sont^Y. ont^v. trente trois deux 

feet broad. - 1 have a tree sixty feet high 

' un arbre^TH, soixante 
and eighteen round. 

dix-huit gros'Seur^ f. 

• ■ ■■ - 3: 

* Read ^i'o*, adjective, grosstur^ substantive, and so of the ©there. 
See the rulef5 to feria tke femkiine geuder, (p. 50.) 



47 



If the learner translate this last sentence by the ad- 
jective of dimension, he must use the word sont^ which, 
is the proper word of the English are^ and follows the 
preceding rule : but if he turn the adjective of dimen- 
sion into its substantive, the word etre^ to be, is to be 
rendered Into French by the verb avoir, to have, and de 
before the word of measure is suppressed. In this last 
case, the word ont, have, must be inserted instead bf sonU 

Example by the adjective : 
Notre chamhre est Jongae 

de vingt pieds tt large 

de douze. 

By the substantive : 
Notre chamhre a vingt pieds Our room is twenty feet 

de longueur et douze de long and twelve broad. 

largeur^ 

When two substantives are joined together, both 
making a compound word in Engh'sh, the first of which 
denotes the form or use of the second, the latter must 
be placed before the former in French, and followed by 
the particle a : ex. 

Un mouUn a papier^ A paper^ mill-. 

Une boite a poudre^ A powder^ box ' . 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE, 

Gun - powder was invented by a monk. 

Canon^m. poudre^f. fut,v* inventee^]},^, par,^, nioine^m* 
The servant has lost the tinder-box. and cannot 

/)e?YZ«,p.p. yWi/,m. ve. sautoit^Y, 

light the candle. If you go to London 

allumer^w chandelleS* Si,c» allcz.v, 

to-morrow, bring me a toupee - iron. - - Have you 

demain, adv. toupet,in, /cr,m. 

seen the water-mill which m^y father has bought ? 

m,p.p. .que,]-}TC>, 

No, but I have seen the wind-mill which your 

.ATon.adv. ve7»t,m. 



4& 

"brother has huilt at Greenwich. - - I have 

fait bdtir^y, d 

fouiid your sister's work - bag, in the eating- 
ouvrage^m* sac,m, manger, m. 

room. William the Conqueror forbade the 

chamhre^L difendit^Y^ au^ 

English to have any fire - arms. 

Jlngloisym* de aucune^Tpro. feu^m. arme^i. 

DECLENSION of UN, HI. UNE,f. A Or AN. 

Singular. — Masculine. 
Nom. Ace. vm livre^ a book. 
Gen. Abl. dhm livre, of or from a book. 
Dat. a un livre, to a book. 

Feminine. 
Nom. Ace. itne plume^ a pen. 
Gen. AbL d^une plume, of or from a pen. 
Dat. a une plume, to a pen. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

I have a hat and a sword. - - - She speaks 

chapcau,m» tp6e,L park,v» 

•fan officer. - - He^ has^ given* it* to^ a 

qfficier,m, ^onne, p.p. /e,pro. 

«ailor. - - (There are) a bird and a cage. - - - 

matdot,m, Voild osieaii,m, cage,i. 

An ungrateful man is a monster in the eyes of a 

ingrat,xn, '^ monstre,m, aux, ml,m, 
sensible^ man ^ .- -Alexander was a great warrior, 
sense, cidy Alexandre, m, etoit,v^ guerrier,m. 

and a very learned philosopher. - - A fine 

tres,3,dY, savant^a^dy philosophe,m* 6em/,adj. 

flower in a garden is an ornament. 
Jleur, f, ornement, m. 

It must be observed, that the English article a or an, 
before nouns of measure, weight, and number, must be 
rendered in French by the definite article, le, la, les ; 
and by the preposition par^ used in the sense of each, 
every, or per ; ex. 



i 



A9 

l)eux chains le ctnt, Two shillings a hundred. 

JJn ecu le boisseau, A crown a bushel. 

Cinq chelins par semaine^ Five shillings a week. 

Une guin6e par mois, One guinea a month* 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

Barley sells for three shillings a bushel. - ^ - 

Orge^L sevend^y* '^^ 
That ale (is worth) six pence a pint. - - - 

Cette^^vo, aile^L vaut^v, sou^m. pinte^L 

Beef costs eight pence a pound. - - - ^ 

J5o5?//,m. cow^v. to7,adj. -^livre^L^^ 

This lace cost a crown an ell. - - He 

Cef^e,pro. dentelle^L couta^v, ecw.,m. mine^L 
sells his best cloth a guinea a yard. - - 

vend^y, 5on, pro. we27/ewr,adj. drap^m. verge,f» 

Burgundy wine (is sold) nine shillings a bottle. - ^ 

se vend^\. r?cr//,adj. 
My shoemaker sold^ me^ two pair of 

jl/on, pro. corf/o?iw>r, m. a "yenrk, p.p. paire^L 

shoes at the rate of ^half ^ a guinea a pair. - - My 
soulkr^m, a raison demi 

master comes twice a week. - - My uncle goes 

vicnt^ V. deux ybi*, ad v. va^ v. 

to France thrice a year. - - She gives three 

troisfois^Sidy, an,m. donne^\* 

shillings a day and ten pence a mile* 

jour^^m. millc^mi 

N. B. A or an is not to be expressed when it imme* 
6 lately precedes a noun in the nominative or accusative 
case, denoting f/7/e, dignity, office, business, or words 
which point out the kind or species of things ; and 
lastly, after the verb etre, to be, unless this verb be pre- 
ceded by ce in tlie third person singular, or the above 
nouns be followed l)y an adjective or any other modifica- 
tion, one of the relative pronouns, ivJio, whoni'^ 7chich, &c. 
or by an adjective in the superlative degree : ex. 
M, D, membre de la cham- M. D. a member of the 

hre des communes^, house of commons. 



50 

Etes'vous :4nglois ? Are you an Englishman ? 

v¥o?2, Monsieur^ je mis No, sir, I am a French^ 
Franfois, man. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

I saw the Duke of C***, a prince of the blood, 
c?wc,m. sang^m, 

who (was speaking) to Mr. i^"., a member of 

•qui, pro. parloit^ v. 

parliament. - - His cousin is a surgeon, and his 

j)arlement^m. Son chirurgien^m* 

brother is a physician, - - My sister i^ a milliner, 

medecin^m, mar chande de modes, f, 

my brother is a tailor, and I am a carpenter. - - - 

iailleur^m, charpentier^m. 

I have read Castor and Pollux, a French opera. - - - - 

t opera,m, 

Bristol, a sea - port, passes now 

mer^L port^m, passe^Y. a present^^dr, 

for the second city of the kingdom of Eng- 

pour,p. 



land. 


The king made^ 


him* 


a bishop. - 




>,v. 


/e,pro. 


eveque, m 


Is 


she a dutchess, or a marchioness ? - - - 


Est,\, 


duchess e,f. 


-marquise^L 


ishe is 


a countess. 
comtesse.L 







No, 



OF NOUNS ADJECTIVE. 
Adjectives form their plural as the substantives. 
Rule to form their Feminine Gender. 

Many adjectives in al have no plural for their mascu- 
line; as conjugal^ conjugal ;/«/«/, fatal ;^/m/, filial ; natal. 
natal ; naval, naval ; total, total ; and some few others, 
with which a little practice will soon acquaint the learner. 
Adjectives ending in e mute are of both genders : ex. 
Un jeune homme, A young man. 

Une jeune femme. A young woman.- 



$1 

Adjectives ending with one of the following lettei^, 



c?, e, i, /, n, r, s, t, ai 


id XI, for 


m their 


an e mute : ex. 






Masc. Grand, 


Fern. 


grande 


Poli, 




polie, 


Aimt, 




aimie, 


Civil, 




civile. 


Demi, 




demie, 


Nu, 




nue, 



great, tall^ large. 

polite. 

loved. 

civil. 

half. 

naked. 

The last two adjectives are indeclinable when they 
precede a substantive, but are declinable when they 
follow it : ex. 

Une demi'livre, A half-pound. 

Une livre et demie, A pound and half. 

JVw tete, bare head, ) la tete nue, 
Nupieds, bare feet, 5 les pieds nus. 
There are a few ending in an, as, el, il, eil, ten, in^ 
es, et, is, on, os, ot, and ul, that double the final letter, 
before an e, mute, for the feminine : ex. 
Masc. Gras, Fem. grass e, fat. 

Gentil, gentille, genteel. 

Eternel, eterneUe, eternal. 

Pareil, pareille, alike. 

Chretien, chretienne, christian. 

Epais, epaisse, thick. 

Bon, bonne, good. 

* When that adjective precedes a substantive singular of the 
feminine gender, beginning with a consonant, we often suppress, in 
French, both in the pronunciation and writing the c, which itt 
supplied by an apostrophe as in the following instances. 
»d grand'' peine^ with hard labour. 

(grand'' /aim, C very hungry. 

jivoir Igrand^ soif^ to be < very thirsty. 

(grarid'' peur, f very much frightened. 

Faire grand'' chere, to live well, to fare sumptuously. 

La grand'* niere^ the grand mother. 

La grand' messe^ the high mass. 

La grand'' chambre, the high court. 

Should however the word grande be preceded by Iris^^fort^ ■^^''T: 
une, one, or la plus^ (he most, then the final e must be added ; as. 
Wne fort grande sallcy A very large room. 



Sou 



Fern. 



grosse^ 
sottts 



foolish. 



The following are very irregular, and cannot be comfr 
prised under any rule, viz. 
Masc. Beau, hd^^ Fern, helle^ 



Benin, 

Favori, 

Fmi^fol^ 

Frais, 

Long, 

Malin, 

Mou, mol^ 

Nouveau, nouvel,* 

Vieux, vieil,* 

Adjectives ending in 
feminine : ex. 



benigne, 
favorite, 
folk, 
fraiche, 
longue, 
maligne, 
molle, 
nouvelle, 
vieille, 

c add hs 



handsome, fine. 

benign. 

favourite. 

foolish. 

fresh, 

long. 

malicicrtig, 

soft. 

new. 

old, 

to the c for tti^ir 



Masc. Blanc, 
FranCj 



Fern. 



Sec, 



white, 
sincere, 
dry, &c. 



Masc. 



blanche, 
franche^ 
secke. 
The four following are excepted. 
Caduc, Fern, caduque, in decay, 

Grec, Grecque, Greek. 

Public, puhlique, public. 

TurCy Turque, Turkish. 

Those ending in / change / into ve for the femi- 
nine : ex. 

Fern, breve, 
naive, 
neuve, 

veuve, 
vive^ 



Masc, 



Bref, 

Naif, 
Neuf 
Veuf 
Vif' 



short. 

plain, ingenuous, 

new. 

widowed* 

quicka. 



Adjectives ending in x, change x into se > ex. 
Masc. Douloureux, Fern, douloureuse, painful, doloroug* 
Heureux, heureuse, happy, &c. 

Jaloux, jalouse, jealous. 



* These adjectives are used before substantives beginning vfiik % 
Towtfl or h not aspirated. -i^ 



Masc, 



53 

The following are excepted 



Doiix, 


Fem. doiLce, 


sweet. 


Faux, 


fausse, 


false. 


Perplex, 


perplexe, 


perplexed 


Prefix, 


prifixe, 


prefixed. 


Roux, 


rousse, 


reddish. 



DECLENSION OF NOUNS ADJECTIVE. 

French adjectives must agree with their substantives 
in gender, number, and case : ex. 

Singular. — Masculine. 
Nom. Ace. Le hon livre, the good book. 
Gen. Abl. Du hon livre, of or from, &c. 
Dat. Au hon livre, to the good book. 

Plural. 
Nom. Ace. Les hons livres, the good books. 
Gen. Abl. des hons livres, of or from, &:c. 
Dat. aux hons livres, to the good books. 

Singular. — Feminine. 
Nom. Ace. La honneplumt, the good pen. 
Gen. Abl. de la honne plume, of or from, &c. 
Dat. a la honne plume, to the good pen^ 

Plural. 

Nom. Ace. Les honnes plumes, the good pens. 

Gen. Abl. des honnes plumes, of or from, &e. 

Dat. aux honnes plumes, to the good pens. . 

exercise on this rule. 

The tall man, the little woman, and the 

petit, Sidy 

pretty children, whom I met yesterday 

j"o/f,adj. (yMe,pro. ai rencontre, p.p. hier, adv. 

with their grandmother (were going) to London: 

alloient, v. 
they were all very hungry and thirsty. --The politer 



34 



inhabitants ' 

habitant^m. 

stransjers 

etranger^m, 

Lean^ 

Maigre,2idj. 

pastures. - - 

pdturage^m* 

application 

application^ f. 



which 



rend^Yi 



coat, 
habit ^ m. 
better 

meilleur^adj, que^c, 
father had bought at 



^ we, pro. 
than 



of that fine city treats \ all the 

cette^pro* traitent^v, 

in a civiP and frank^ manner. ^ - - 

deune manitre^i, 

sheep^ grow fat in good 

brebis^i. deviennemt^Y, dans^^. 
Constant^ studj^ joined 

etude,(, jom/, p.p. 
makes men learned. - - 
savant^2Ldj* 
2 you gave 
avez rforme, p.p. 
the old great-coat 
redingote^L 
his tailor's. - - We 
c/ieZjp. 
yesterday to the high court where we found 

trouvames^Y* 
met. 
a55eTO6/e,p.p. 

As two or more substantives in the singular are 
equivalent to a plural, the verb and adjective, or par- 
ticiple past, not immediately following them, must be put 
in the plural, when they refer to two or more substan- 
tives in the singular, and that adjective or participle is 
to be put in the masculine, if these substantives be of dif- 
ferent genders : ex. 
Lefrere, la sceur^ le neveu, The brother, sister, ne- 

et la niece^ sont tous phew, and nieee are aH 

morts, dead. 



to a great 

- The new 

' me, is 

which my 

went 
alldmes, t. 
all 



the judges already 
dejd,a.d. 



EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

The book, paper, pencil, and penknife, which 
papier^m, crayon^m, canif^m. 

jou lent* me% are excellent. - - - The 

a-yez ^rc^e, p.p. we, pro. exce//enf, adj. 

pen, ruler, inkhorn and grammar which my bro- 
reghyf. ecritoire,L 



5B 

ther has bought, are very good. The king^ 

fre5,adv. 
queen, prince, and princesses were gone. — The 

efo«e7i/,v. ^or^i^p.p. 
eorn^ wheat, rye, pease and beans, in a word, all 

seigle^m, /ere,f. en mot^m. 

the grains which were on the ground, 

grain^m* qui, ^ro, etoient^v. 5wr,p. terre.L 

were frozen. - - My father's house, and my uncle's 
furent^v, g€/e,p.p. 
country-seat are (very much) alike. 

chdteau^m, fc?en,adv. semblable.cidj. 

When two or more substantives of different genderfc 
are immediately followed by an adjective or participle, 
the French language requires that adjective or parti- 
ciple to agree in gender and number with the last sub- 
stantive, except those adjectives or participles implying 
tmi on or collection, such ^s joint uni, reuni, Slc which 
follow the foregoing rule : ex. 

// gouverne avec uw pou- He governs with an abso- 
Toi?' et une autoriti ab- lute power and autho- 
iohie, rity. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

He studies with incredible application anS 

etudie^v. incroyable^cidj, 

courage. — He who has for his guides 

coiirage^m, C«/w?,pro. qui^^no, ^<^ guide^m, 

consummate^ zeal^ and prudence^ deservei 

consonime,a.dy ze/e,m. prudence^L merlte,v» 

the general esteem and applause of his 

estime^L applaudissement^m, ses, pro, 

fellow-citizens. - - - She left the trunk, the 

conciioyen^m, laissa^v, coffre^xn, 

closet, and the room open. - - - I found 

eabinet^m. ckambre^f, onxjerf, p.p. al trouve,p,'p, 

the doors, the windows and the shutters, shut. • 

jporti^i, fenetre^L volets^m* /crme,p.p. 



56 , 

We saw th^ children, father, and mother, well 

vimes,r, 

united. When we arrived on the fron- 

rewm, p.p. Quand,c, arrivdmes,y. . ffon- 

tiers, we found the soldiers, the officers, 

fe'ere,f. trouvdmcs,Y, soldat,m, officier,m, 

and the general in chief, assembled, and 

en chef^m, assemhU,^,^. 
(drawn up) in (battle array.) 
range, p.p. en, p. bataille,f» 

THE PLACE OF THE ADJECTIVE IN A SEN- 
TENCE. 

Some adjectives are always placed before their sub- 
stantives, and others after them ; but there is a kind 
of adjectives, which may either precede or follow their 
substantives, as the euphony of the sentence requires. 

The following must be placed before. 



Beau, handsome, fine. 
Bon, good. 


Saint, holy. 
Tout, all. 


Brave, brave. 

Cher, dear. 

Chetif^ vile, poor, mean. 

Galant, well bred. 

Grand, great, tall. 

Gros, big, large. 

Honnete, honest, civil. 


Joli, pretty. 
Mediant, wicked. 
Mauvais, bad. 
Meilleur, better. 
Moindre, less. 
Petit, little, small 
Vieux, old. 


Jeune, young. 


Vrai, true. 



SXERCISE 05 THR FOREGOING ADJECTIVES^ 

1 have seen a handsome lady, who (was 

iJWjp.p. dame,f^ qui, ipro. 

speaking) to an old gentleman. - - - He had 

parloit,y, gentil-homme,m. //,pro. avoit^r, 

a fine hat and a pretty sword. - - Your little 

diapeau,m*. f^o<re,pro. 



lister deserved 9l better fate. • - I know a youn^ 

mdritoit^v, destm^m. corinois^Y, 

man who has a good horse, but a bad stable. - - - 

eheval^m* icurie^i. 

He* has^ lent* it^ to aii honest man. - - The 

pret6, p.p. /e, pro. 
apostle Paul was a holy man. - - - My brother has 
upotre^m, 

bought a good watch. - - - Your father was a 

0chet6,p,p, montre^L etoit^v, 

brave general, and a well-bred man. * - - You have 

avez^ V. 
lost all your money. - - - Vile creature, I have 

/>erJw,p.p. cr6ature^L 

heard your wicked conversation. 

entendu^^.^, conversation^L 

Some adjectives have different meanings according ag 
they are placed before or after their substantive,^ as, 
une femme sage, a wise woman ; i*ne 'sage femme^ a 
midwife ; and une grosse femme^ a big woman ; unt 
fcmme grosse, a pregnant woman ; un homme honnete^ 
a civil man ; un honnete homme, an honest man ; a lit- 
tle practice will soon remove any of these apparent dil^ 
ficulties. - 

The following adjectives must be placed after theit 
substantives. 

1. All participles used as adjectives; as, 
Untpersonne reconnoissante, A grateful person. 
Du hceuf roil, Roast beef. 

2. All adjectives expressing the shape or form ; a?, 
Une table ronde, A round table, 
Une chanihre carree, A square room. 

3. All adjectives expressing the colour or taste ; as, 
Un chapeau noir^ A black hat. 

Un habit rouge, A red coat. 

Une pomme douce, A sweet apple. 

Une li(j^i{eur amere, A bitter licj^uor* 



50 

4. All adjectives expressing the matter of which « 
thing is composed ; as, 

Des parties sulfureuses, Sulphurous parts. 

Un corps aerien, An aeriel body, 

5. All adjectives expressing the quality oi hearing and 
timching ; as, 

Un instrument sonore^ A sonorous instrument. 

line voix harmonicuse^ An harmonious voice. 

Un hois dur^ A hard wood. 

Un corps many A soft body. 

6. All adjectives expressing the name of nations ; ag, 

D empire Ro-main, The Roman empire. 

La poesie Angloise^ The English poetry. 

7. All adjectives, which, when used by themselves, 
convey the meaning of a substantive, as rich^ blind, &c. 

Un homnu riche, A rich man. 

Une femme aveugle, A blind woman. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

An ignorant young man is despised by (every 

mepme, p.p. ^c,p. tout h 
body.) - - - You have an English hat, and she has a 
^monde^m. w4ng/ow,adj. 

French gown. - -He reads an Italian proverb. - - 

Franpow, adj. rohe^f. lit^v, Italien,Sidj, proverbe^m, 

I like (very much) the German tongue and 

aime^y* beaucoup^3.dY* AllemandjQ.dj, langue^L 
the Spanish dress. - - -- (It is) a square place. - 

Espagnolj adj. habillement^m. Oest^y. carre, adj.^/ace, f. 
She likes sweet wine. - - Your sister has an har- 

aime,\, 6Zowx,adj. Dm,m. 
monious voice. - - - - I have bought a white gown 

voix,i. 6Zanc, adj. ^ 

and a black cloak. - - You have a faithful 

w0*V,adj. mantelet^m, Jidele^ady 



^9 

serrant. I eat green pease, with 

domes tique^TCi, cf,f. mange^v, rer^,adj. 
boiled mutton. - Bring me a pound and a half 
feM/i7/i,p.p« mouton^m, demi^ adj. 

of cherries, and half a pound of currants. - We had a 

cense^L groseille,f. eumes^v, 

kind reception, and we played at a di- 

/arorfl6Ze, adj. accueil^m. joudmes^v, a, p. di- 

verting game. - He lives in a cold country. 

vertissant,3.dj, jeu^m, demeure^v. froid^^dj. pays^m, 

^- You have left the windows and the door 

/flmc,p.p. fenetre^L porte^f. 

open. - - Will you have a bit of roast 

'^>^ morcean.,m* rof?, p.p. 

chicken? - - Do you^ read^ the Punic war? - - 

poulet^m. "^^ lisez^y, Puniqtie^SLdy guerre^L 

He has made a rash vow. - - Your sister 

. y«!V,p.p. temeraire^^dj. vceu^m, 
is an agreeable lady. - - I like a grey stuff. - - 

agt'6able,a,dy gm,adj. etoffe^f, 

(It was) really a tragical history. 

Cetoif^y, reeUemenUa.dv, tragiqiie.^Ldj. histoire^C 

When two or more adjectives belong to one substan- 
tive, the surest way is to place them after it, with the 
conjunction ef, and, before the last ; and if an adjec- 
tive be used in a sentence without a substantive, thii 
adjective must always be rendered in French by th« 
masculine gender. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

We have a just, wise, and bountiful king. - - 
juste^ adj . sage^ adj . bienfaisani^ adj . 

Mr. Brown's daughter is with a sincere and 

Monsieur, m, 5mcer<?, adj. 

generous lady. - - I have a scholar of a solid, 
ge?ieVewa;,adj. _ 6colier,m» solids, adj. 

bright, and lively genius. - - The wicked 
6n7/an/, adj. v?T, adj. esprit, m. mechant, a.dj, 

shall be punished. - - Miss Preston is a 

seronfyT. puniy p.p. Mademoiselle, f. 



young, handsome, and well-shaped lady. - - She has 

hien-fait, adj. 
married a soher^ virtuous, and amiahle 
ej90U5^, p.p. sofcre, adj. vertueux,a.d^, mmcfc/e, adj. 

man. - - The good shall be praised. - - The diligent 

lou6, p.p. diligent^ adj. 

ihall be rewarded. 

r6c(mipens6^ p.p 

DEGREES OF COMPARISON. 

Adjectives and adverts' are the only kind of words 
that will admit of different degrees of more or less in the 
several qualities of persons or things. 

There are two degrees of comparison : 

1. Le cornparatif^ the comparative. 

2. Le superlatlf^ the superlative. 

Some grammarians admit of another degree, whicli 
they call positive : hut this is merely an adjective used in 
its simple signification, without expressing any increase 
or diminution : ex. joli. pretty ; aimahle^ lovely. 

The comparative refers to some other person or thing, 
and shows its equality^ excess, or defect : it is therefore of 
three sorts : 

1 . Le comparatif d^6galit6, The comparative by equal- 
ity. 
;^. Le comparatif d\xct$, The comparative by ex- 
cess. 
S. Le comparatif de defaut, The comparative by defect* 

The comparative by equality is formed by placing the 
lid verbs autant, as much, as many ; aussi, so, or as, before 
an adjective ; and q^ie^ as, after it : ex. 
Votre oncle a autant d''ar- Your uncle has as much 

gent, et autant d'^amis que money, and as many 

mon pere^ ^' friends as my father. 

Ma sceur est aussi amhi- My sister is as ambitious ai 

tieuse que vous, you. 

Mon frtre est aussi savant My brother is aa learned afe 
qy^ U votrcr,, yours. 



6L 

IS.B. — From the preceding examples and the following, 
it will be easily seen that when the. adverbs, tant, autant^ 
as much, as many, plus, more, and moins, less, are imme- 
diately followed by a substantive, that substantive must 
be preceded by de. The learner will also observe that 
si and aussi, so, as : generally precede adjectives, when 
a comparison is made by either ; whereas tant and autant 
are always followed by a noun or verb, the French con- 
junction que, Englished by either as, than.^ or that, being 
the term of the comparison ; plus or moins may precede 
wthcr an adjective, a noun, or verb* 

EXERCISE ON THIS RULE. 

Alexander was as ambitious as Caesar. - - 

£tmt,\. ambitieux^2idj, rjue^c* Cesar, m* 
I am as tall as you. - - My father is as rich 

suis, v. h au /, adj . riche, adj. 

as yours. - - Miss D. has as much liveliness, and she is 

vivacite^L 
as amiable as her cousin. - - If my father were 

s.7, pro. cows me, f. Si,c, etoit^Y* 

as rich as my uncle, he (would make) a better use 

onch, m . feroit, v. usage, m . 

of his riches. -- We have as many books as 

ses,pro. autant, cidy. 

your brothers, and they are as learned as we. - - - 
ros.pro. \ so7it,y, noi/s,pro. 

I am as rich as you, and as honest and civil as 

WfAc.a'dj. 
my companions. 
compagnon,m. 
The comparaiive hij excess is formed by placing the ad- 
verb plus, more, before an adjective : ex. 
Sa couslne a plus cle livjxs Her cousin has more books 
epic fdoi, et cstphi:^ savantt than I, and is more Icarft- 
que ic:',?, ed than you. 

KXMRCl^K urON THIS RULE. 

MiBs A. is liand^omer but more learned than 

mais.c, quc,c. 



62 

her sisters. - - Lucia is taller and more proud 

Jjacie^f. orgueilhux^adt^* 

Ihan her little cousin. His sister is more 

5a, pro. iSajpro. 

covetous than he. Nothing is pleasanter 

Cft5«re,adj. iM2',pro. Rienne^adv, agrea5/e,adj. 

to the mind than the light of truth. - 

esprit^TH, lumiere^f, verite^L 

Nothing is more lovely than virtue, and 

mmafe/e, adj. 
nothing is more desirable than wisdom. — 

desirahle^^idy sagesse^i. 

My daughter is taller than your son by two inches. - - 

de pouce^m. 

Your brother is taller than you by the^ whole* head^. - - 

tete^L 
In winter the roads are always worse than 

En hiver^m, chemiti^m. plus mauvais^^idj* 

in summer. 
€/e,m. 

The cmnparative by defect is formed by placing the ad^ 
verb moins^ less, before an adjective ; or tant, so much, 
so many ; or si, so ; with the negation ne pas, or point, 
not ; or ne, m, neither, nor, before them : ex. 

Wotre cousine est moins noble Your cousin is less noble 

que vous, than you. 

II n^ est pas si orgueilkux que He is not so proud as his 

sasmur, sister. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

Mrs. P*** is less polite than her daughter, 

Madame , f . poli, adj . 

but her daughter (is not) so revengeful as she. 

n^est pas, adv. vindicaiif, adj . 
You are^ ^not^ so dutiful as your brother. 

etes,Y, ne pas,iidv, obeissant,3.dj. 
Mj father is not so rich as yours, but he ha* 

s /eiJo/re, pro. 



63 

aot so much self-love Miss Goodwill has le&g 

amour-propre ^m. 
wit than her mother. - - Paris (is not) so populous as 

pmpU^^i\y 
London. — Your companion is neither so prudent, nor 

ni 
so circumspect as you. 
c?Vc(m5jt>ec/, adj . 

It must be observed, that in sentences in which thfe 
above adverbs more or less are repeated to express a com- 
parison, the definite article the^ preceding either, is to- 
tpJJiy suppressed in French : as, 

Plus on est pauvre^ moins on The poorer people are, the 
a d^embarras, less care they have. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

The more a thing is difficult, the more honour^ 

chose^ f. diffic iie, adj . hono- 

able3 it^ is^.-.The less you give toyourchil- 

rahle^ adj. elle. pro. donnez^v, 

dren, the less they spend. - - - The ^ richer* they^ 

i/5,pro. dipenscnt^Y. 
are 3, the more covetous they are. - - The more a 

arare,adj. 
young man studies, the more learned he grows, 

etudie^v. savant^^dj, devient^r. 

and the more respected he is. --The more a 

respect 6, p. ip. 
drunkard drinks, the more thirsty he is. - - - - 

ivrogne^m. hoit.,v» a/^ere,adj. 

The more odious laziness is, the more we 

odieux. adj . paresse, f. 
should avoid^ it > . - - The less you apply, 

devrians^v. eri/cr, v. /a, pro. vous vous appliquez^v. 

the less you learn. -- The more they know^ you^, 

apprenez^v, connoitront^v, 

the less they will esteem^ you^ . 
estimeront^v. 
The above comparative adverbs, 5?, aussi, tant^ aufant^ 
plus, and moins, must be repeated, in French, before 



6"4 

♦ach adjective, noun, verb, or adverb, in the sentene^i 
ex. 

Voire frere est aussi savant Your brother is as learned 

et aussi eclairi que mon and enlightened as my 

cousin, cousin, 

M' Robert n^a ni tant de Mr. Robert has neither so 

hien ni tant d'asprit que much wealth nor wit as 

M* Dubois^ Mr. Dubois. 

EXERCISE ON THIS AND THE PRECEDIN© RULEjI. 

My father has as many apple - tree^ 

autant, adv. pmnmier, m. <<oi 

and pear ^ trees in his orchard as (there are) 
poirier^m* '^y* verger^m, ilyena^v, 

in yours. - - - - His eldest brother will be moitf 

ame,=adj. se7'a, v. 

attentive, industrious, and rich than he, - - > 

attentif,2iAj, industrieux^adj. /zti*,pro, 

Miss S*** has less wit, less liveliness, and becoms 

vivacite, f. agri^ 

ingness than her sister. - - She has as much virtue. 

wew5,m.pl. 
and good sense as beauty and modesty. - - My 

sens^m. JWo/i, pro. 

cousin is as merry, lively, and amiable as his 

gai, adj. enjoue, adj. ses, pro. 

school-fellows, 
compagnon^m. 

The same rule is to be observed with respect to the 
adverbs used in forming the superlative degree. 

The three following adjectives are comparative by 
themselves, meilleur, better ; pire, worse ; and moindre^ 
less 5 which signify p/w5 hon, plus rnauvais, plus petit. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

The watch which my grand father has bought 
moniiiieS, que.-pro* ^rand-pere^m, at7te/ee,p.p. 



is better than the clock which he gave to 

pendule, f. a doimee, p.p. 

mj mother. - - - - My friend's buckles are better than 

mere, f. houcle^ f. 

those of his uncle, but mine are worse 

celles, pro. oncle, m. les miennes^ pro. 

than his. The life of a slave is 

les siennes^ pro. vie^ f. esclave^ m. 

ten times worse than death itself. - - - - The 

dix fois.:idv. mort^L rrzeme, adv. 

pain which I endure is less than that which 

peine^f. souffre^r. ce/Ze, pro. ^wi, pro. 

is inflicted on galley-slaves. 

?Vt^?gee, p.p. aux galciien^m. 

The superlative expresses the highest degree of any 
quality. There are two kinds of superlatives : 1. The 
relative which expresses the quality of a person or thing 
above all others of the same kind. In this case, one of 
the following articles, le. la. les, de. dit. de la, des, a, an, 
a la^ aux, precedes the adverbs plus^ most, mieux, best, 
mmns, least, before an adjective ; or the adjectives meil' 
leur, best, moindre, least, pire, worse : ex. 
Votre soiur est la plus belle Your sister is the hand- 
ed la meillcure femme de somest and best woman 
la ville^ in the town. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

The vine is one of the most useful* and agree- 

vigne,{, t//?7e,adj. 

able gifts of Providence. - - - Virtue is the most pre- 

dan , m . Prov iden ce, f. pre- 

eious^ things in the world. - - - The Hon is the 

eieux,^dj, chos'e,L du monde,m, 

strongest and most courageous of all animals. 

/br<,adj. courageux,^(\j, animal,m. 

(There is) the handsomest lady in London. - - She is 
Voila^^dv, de 

so touchy. that she will not bear the least 

^ bourru.adj, veut,v, souffrir,v, 

* See the srender of adjective?, p. 60. 
6* 



ee 

joke. - - - Miss P. is the mildest, politest, and most 

railkrie^L cZoitx,adj. poZ?,adj. 

affable of all her sisters. - - - Ingratitude is 

affkble^adj, 565, pro. 

the greatest of all vices. - - - If France were as rich 

vice^m, etoit,\, 

as England, (it would he) the best country in the 

ce seroit^v, pays^m* 

world.* 
monde,m. 

The absolute simply expresses the quality of a persoit 
or thing in its highest degree. This happens when one 
of the adverbs tres, fort, bien, very, infiniment, infinitely^ 
precedes an adjective ; and when any of the compara- 
tives by excess or defect are vpreceded by one of the 
possessive pronouns mon^ ton, son, nofre, votre, hur^ &:c. 
they become superlatives : ex. 

Votre oiseau est tres-joli, Your bird is very pretty. 

Vous ties mon meilleur ami, You are my best friend. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

God is a being infinitely great and perfect. - - * 
etre,m* parfaii,a.dj, 

I am your most humble and obedient 

tres,B.dv, ob6issant,2idj» 

servant. - - - The front of your house is very 

serviten r, m. fagade, f. 

beautiful. - - - You are very good, but your brother 

heau,2idy. 

is very wicked. - - - My uncle has a very fine coun- 
mechant,a,dj. cam- 

try - house, and very spacious^ gardens^. - - - 

pagne, f . spacieux, adj . 

-.*:.■ . ■ ■ ■ •■■ ■ -'■, ... ... , ... mg-r ^ 

* It may be observed in some of these example?, that the preposi-* 
tion in, following an adjective in the superlative degree, must be ren-^ 
dered in French by one of these articles de, du^ de la, des, according 
to the gender and number of the substantive to which it belongs* 
The preposition hy, when it follows an adjective in the comparatiT«i 
degree > is r^ftdered b^ d^ oalj. 



er 

My best friend is dead Our common 

JVo/re, pro. comww?i,adj. 
enemy has the most inveterate^ hatred* against 
invdiere^^dj, haine^L contre^p. 
this country. - - - Their least embarrassments 
ce,pro. Leurs, ipro. emharras jin, 

make their greatest delight. - - - - Pride and 

font, V. delicts, f. pi. Orgueil, m. 

passion are his least defects. 
colere^L ses y^ro, defaut^m, 

OF NUMBERS. 

There are two kinds of numbers : 1st, The absolute^ 
which simply relates the number of the things spokeR. 
of, viz. 

Un, One. 

DeuXy Two. 

Trois, Three. 

Quatrcy Four. 

Cinqy Five. 

Six, Six. 

Sept, Seven. 

Huit, Eight. 

Xeuf, Nine. 

Dix, Ten. 

Onze, Eleven, 

Douze, Twelve. 

Treize, Thirteen. 

Quatorze,^ Fourteen. 

Quinze, Fifteen. 

Seize, Sixteen. 

Dix-sept, Seventeen* 

Dix-huif, , Eighteen. 

Dix-ncvf, Nineteen. 

Vingi, Twenty. 

Vingt et nn, Twenty-one. 

Vingt'deux, Twenty-two. 

Vingt'trois, <^c. Twenty-three, ite^ 

Tr^ntt, Thirty* 



68 



Trente et un^ 

Trente-deux, ^c, 

QuarantCj 

Cinqua7itej 

Soixante^ 

Soixante et un, 

Soixante et deux^ ^c. 

Soixante et dix, 

Soixante et onze^ ^c, 

Quatre-vingt^ 

Quatre-vingt un, 

Quatre-vingt deux^ i/c, 

Quatre-vingt dix^ (S/c, 

Cent^ 

Cent un, (^c» 

Deux cenSf 
Trois ce7iSj 
JSl'cuf cens, 
Mille, mil^\ 
Deux milh, 
Trois milk, ^c. 
Cent mille^ ^c. 

,Neuf cent mille, 
Un million. 



Thirty-one. 

Thirty-two, &c. 

Forty. 

Fifty. 

Sixty. 

Sixty-one. 

Sixty-two, &c. 

Seventy. 

Seventy-one, &c. 

Eighty. 

Eighty-one. 

Eighty-two, &c. 

Ninety, &c. 

A or one* hundred. 

A or one* hundred and 
one, &c. 

Two hundred. 

Three hundred. 

Nine hundred. 

A or one* thousand. 

Two thousand. 

Three thousand, &c. 

A or one* hundred thou- 
sand, &c. 

Nine hundred thousand. 

A million. 



These absolute numbers are declined with the article 
indefinite de, a, and are always placed before the sub- 
stantive to which they are joined ; and they are invari- 
able in their form, except quatre-vingt, eighty ; cent, a 
hundred ; and million, a. million ; which take an s in 
their plural, when immediately followed by a substan- 
tive : ex. 

Quatre-vingts femmts, Eighty womee. 

Deux cens hommes* Two hundred mea. 



* It will be seen by the following, that the English particle a or 
ene is not expressed in French : ex. 

Je Vai vu et lui ai parte cent I have seeiaihim and spoken to him e. 
fois, milk fois, hundred times, a thousand times. 

t Mentioning the date of the year, we must write, mil, and not 
'iwiUt : Cf^J. L'an mil huit-urU quinee^ the year 1815. 



69 



EfCERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 



I was in the company of seven gentlemen and 

compagnie^L 
sine ladies. - - He has spoken to three officers and 

parU.p»v. 
two generals. - - If I had a hundred guineas I would^ 

avois^w guinee^L en 

lend^ you^ eighty. - - The army of our 

priterois^Y* armte^i. ?i05,pro. 

aUies was composed of a hundred thousand 

alli6, m. composee, p.p. 

men of foot, and twenty thousand of horse. - - - 

infanteriej. cavalerie^ f. 

They took fifteen hundred men prisoners, 

p rirent^ v^ p ris onn ie r, m . 

killed four thousand, wounded a thousand, 

en tuercnt^y. . en bless erent^Y. 

and (carried away) above two milhons in specie. - 

ernporttrent^Y. plus de espcceS- 

The battle (was fought) in one thousand eight hun- 

halailh^L se livra^y, en 
4ired and'fourteen, at three o'clock in the morning. 

heure^i, du matin* 

It must be observed, that, when the number wn, one^ 
Gomes after vingt., twenty, trente^ thirty, yuarante, forty, 
&:c. ; the substantive, relating to those two numbers 
taken together, is put in the singular in French, though 
in the plural in English ; and, when the noun singular, 
in French, immediately following the unit^ is attended 
by an adjective, that adjective must be put in the plu- 
ral : ex. 

Vingt-et-un homme^ One and twenty men. 

Vingt-et-un an accomplis, Full one and twenty years 

old. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

I hj^ve found a purse in which (there SVere) 

boursc,L liKjuelle.^ro* il y avoil^Yt 



one and thirty guineas, one and forty crowns, and 
guinee^f, ecw,m. 

one and twenty shillings. I ^w one and fifty 

chelin,m, ai vu^v. 

men assembled before St. James's palace. - - 

St, Jdques^m, 

When my brother died he was one and thirty 

years old. - - - Mr. P*** will pay^'^'^^'^^^^me' one 

•O' payera,y. 7we,pro. 

and sixty guineas well told. - - - - I received 

feim,adv. compties^'p,^. ai repw,v. 
yesterday by the last mail one and ^orty 

hier^ adv. dernier e^ adj . malle^ f. 

letters well sealed, and very interesting. 

kttre^L cachettes^p,^, iTnportantes,a.dj, 

N. B. Such were the opinion and decision of the 
French Academy some years ago ; but now the best au- 
thors write, vingt-et-un sins aecomplis, trente eiuneguin6es 
hien compties. 

However, custom will have us say, in the following 
instances, 

Vingt-ct^n ckevaucc^ One and twenty horses. 

Trente-et-un volumes^ One and thirty volumes. 

The cardinal numbers must be used in French when 
speaking of the days of the month, though the ordinal 
be used in English ; but we must say, le premier, the first, 
ipeaking of the first day of every month : as, 

Le premier de Mai^ The first of May. 

Le deux de Noisemhre^ The second of November. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

My friend will come to see^ us' on the fifth of 

viendra^v, voir^v. '^^ 

next^ ijaonth*. - - Lady - day falls 

^roc/iam,adj. mois^m. Moire dame^L jour^m, tombe^v, 
on the twenty-fifth of March. - - In the leap^ 
'^ Mars,m^ hi^sextih^^dj. 



Tt 



qui J pro, 

is all-saints - 



year' the month of February has one day morfe, 
annee.L Fevrier^m. deplus^^&s^^ 

which is the twenty-ninth. - - The first of November 

Novemhre^xn, 
day, and the fifth of the same month 
la toussaint,L 
is the day of the Gwn - powder 

des poudres^T^h 
Come on the first day of July. 
Venez^ v . Juillet^ m . 

%. The ordinal numbers. This class of numerals, be- 
side the simple notation, signifies the order or jrank of 



weme,adj* 
plot. 
conspiration^ f. 



things, viz. 






Le premier ou unieme^ 


The first. 


Le second ou deuxieme^ 


The second. 


Le troisieme, 




Tne third. 


Le quatriemi, 




The fourth. 


Le cinquieme, 




Tlie fifth. 


Le sixieme^ 




The sixth. 


Le septiemt, 




The seventh. 


Le huitieme* 




The eighth. ' 


Le neuvieme. 




The ninth. 


Le dixieme^ 




The tenth. 


Le onzieme,* 




The eleventh. 


Le douzieme, 




The twelfth. 


Le treizieme^ 




The thirteenth. 


Le quatorzitmt^ 




The fourteenth. 


Le quinzieme^ 




The fifteenth. 


Le seizieme^ 




The sixteenth. > 


Le dix-septieme. 




The seventeenth. 


Le dix'huitiemey 




The eighteenth. 


Le dix-neuvihue, 




The nineteenth. 


Le vingtieme^ 




The twentieth. 


Le vingt-et-unieme^ 




The twent)«first. 


Le vingt-deuxieme, 


4rc. 


The twenty-second, &c. 


Le trentieme^ 




The thii'lieth. 


Le trente-deuxieme, 


^C, 


The thirty-second, &c» 


Le quarantilme^ 




The fortieth. 



* No elision is to be made in the article before o-ic, o/iaiemc ; 'tix.it^ 
hmiieine ; for we say^ le, du^ aw, /a, de /a, d /a, &c. onze, on^iem^r <^C' 



n 

Le cinquantieme, The fifticthi 

Le soixantieme, The sixtieth. 

Le soixante-et-dixieme, The seventieth. 

Le quatre-vingticmey The eightieth. 

Le centieme, The hundredth. 

Le cent unieme, The hundred and first. 

Le cent deuxieme, <^c. The hundred and seco^d^ 

&;c. 

Le deux centieme, The two hundredth. 

Le millieme, The thousandth. 

These ordinal numbers are dechned with the artide 
definite /e, /a, &:c. and are placed before their substan- 
tives : ex. 

Le premier jour da mois^ The first day of the month. 

EXERCISE ON THIS AND THE PRECEDING RULE. 

On the eleventh cf June I received twelve letters^ 
■-^ Juin^ ai regu^v* 

^ut the eleventh ^has afforded^ me^ more 

j3rocwre,p.p. me, pro. /j/i*.9, adv. 

pleasure than the others. Mrs. B. is the fifth 

aw^rc, pro. Madame ^f, 
ladj whom I saw to day, - - - The spring 

que^Tpro, aivue^v, aujourd^hvi^SLdv, printcwps^m* 
begins on the twenty-first or twentj^econd of 

eommence^y, 

March. - - - - He cannot spend the sixth 

Mars, m. ne peuf pas, v. depenser, v. 

part of his fortune. - - - The eleventh of No- 

parth^L 5a, pro. fortune^i, 
vember, which is the eleventh month of the year, 

annte,i,> 
was the dullest! day^ of tlie^ whole^ month^. 
irifite./da], /oiif,adj. 

Speaking of ^Qvereigns, we use the absolute number iir 
French, though the ordinal be used in English, except 
first and second; but v.x place it after the substantive, 
a^ in English, without exprcsging the article the-: ex. 



73 

George Irois^ George the third. 

Louis Seize^ Lewis the Si'iteenth. 

Henri Qiiatre^ Henry the Fourth. 

Henri Premier^ Henry the First, 

George Second^ George the Second, 

and not, Henri Un, George Deux. 
We also say, for the following only, 

Charles Quint, Charles the Fifth. 

Sixte Quint, Sixtus the Fifth. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

Edward the Sixth, the son of Henry the 

Edouard, m. fJs, m . 

Eighth, and the grand - son of Henry the Seventh, 

petit,3.d^. 
was^ 'but^ nine years old when he began 
avoit.v, ne que, an,m, '^^ qiiand,c» commenqa,Y„ 

to reign. Henry the Fifth, King of England, 

a regner,\\ roi,m, 

the son of Henry the Fourth, and father of Henry 

the Sixth, married Catharine, the daughter of 

epousa,Y. Catherine, i\ 
Charles the Sixth, king of France ; conquered the 

conquit^v, 
greatest part of that kingdom, and died 
grand,-Adypartie,L ce.pro. rouaume,m, mourut,\, 
(in the) niidst of his victories. - - (Long live) 

au niMieM ses,ipro, xictoire,L Vixe,Y. 

George the Third, grand - son to George the 

^ 'pdit,2.Ay 

Second. - - - - Charles the Fifth, king of Spain, and 

?o?.m. 
Sixlas the Fifth, pope of Rome, were two 

pape,m. 6toienf,\\ 

great men. 
o^m/tti, adj. 

Tlie definiie article the is also suppressed in Frencli 
before the ordinal number, when it is preceded by a 
aouu uiod to quote a chapter,, article, or page of a book ; 
7 



74 

but, should the ordinal number precede the noun, the 
construction is the same in French as in English, and 
the article is expressed : ex. 

Livre troisume^ Book the third, 

Le troisieme livre, The third book. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

What jou (look for) you (will find^) iV 

Ce que^-pTO, cherchez^y, trouvtrez^v, /e,pro. 

n the Second Book of Samuel, chapter the 

Samuel^ m. chapitre^ m. 
third, verse the ninth, page the . first, and 

verset^m. page^i. 

line the tenth. - - - We read in Telemachus, 
ligne^ f. lisons^ v. TeUmaqu e, m . 

book the seventh, page the hundred and twenty- 
fifth, that Mentor pushed Telemachus into the sea, 

que poussa^Y, merS, 

and threw ^ himself^ (into it^) afterward with 
jeta^y, 5e,pro. y^^dv. ensuile^cidv. 

him. Our master forgives the first time^ 

/u2,pro. JV*o^re,pro. pardanne^v, foisJ, 

threatens the second, and always^ punishes^ 

menace, V. foujours.a.(iv, punit,v, 

the third. 

RECAPITULATORY or promiscuous EXERCISES 
upon all the preceding RULES. 

Ignorance is the mother of admiration, 

Ignorance^f. est^Y* mtre^L admiration^i. 

exror, and superstition. - - - * The covetous de~ 
erreur^L superstition,^, a'yare,adj. w^- 

spise the poor. - - - - Humility is the basis of 
prisent,\. pauvre./dd^* Humilite^L hase^L 

Christian virtues. - Pride is generally the effect 
Chritien.^-^diy Orgueil^m, ^ff^t^^' 

•f ignorance* - - Give me some bread, meal. 

I)enne,z*Yi wo*. pro. 



7^ 

turnips, and water. - - Merit and- favor are 

navet^m* Merite^m, faveur^L sont^y, 

ihe two springs of envy. - - - Interest, pleasure, 

source^i, envie^L Interet^m, 

and glory, are the three motives of the action^ 

motif ^m, 
and conduct of men. - - Is^ it^ 'not* 

conduiie^f, Est^v, cc,pro. nepas,adv, 

Peter's book ? - - - Your father is gone to London, 

a//e,p.p. 
where he has bought a few horses and a great many 
cows, which he intends to send to Canada or 
vache^f, que,ipro* se propose^Y, d^ envoy er^v, 
Jamaica. - - The father's house and the son's g^LV- 

maison^f, jar- 

den (are adjoining.) - - He found the windows 
din^m* sejoignent^v, trouva^v^ 

and the door shut. - - Truth is the bond of 

Viritt^L lien^m, 

union and the basis of human happiness : 

union^L humain,2Ldj» bonheur^m, 

without it (there is no) confidence in 

sans^-p. e//e,pro. il n^y a point confiance^f. 

friendship, and no security in promises. - - 

amitie^f, point^adv, surete^L promesse^L 

The love of liberty and independence is the 

amour ^m, liberte^L 

character of noble minds. - - - Iron, isteel, 

caractere^m, dme^f, Fer^m, aciei-^m, 

and' brass are more useful than gold and 

cuivre^m, 'uh7e,adj. 

silver. - - The smith has at last repaired 

5errwner,m. cnj^n, adv. re/;are,p.p. 

the two jacks, and the cook (is 

tourne-hroche^m. cuisiniere^f, fait- 

roasting) the meat. - - I have seen the inside of the 
rot ir, V , dedans^ m . 

church. - - - Bring me my powder-box, and 

igliseS. mfl,pro. 

my toupee-iron. - - 1 take a lesson three times 

mo?i, pro. prends '"^ 



76 

a week. « - The study of grammar is^ » neither^ so 

etude^L nc rt*,c, 

dry nor so dull as (it is thought.) - - - - 

5ec,adj. triste.3.dj, on se Vvmasine,\, 

Have prudence and patience, and you (will have) 
Ayez^y, aiirez,\. 

fuccess. - - - - A good conscience is to the soul 
succes^m, conscience^f. cme^f, 

what health is to the body. - - Merit and 

ie ^we,pro. santi^L corps^m, 

rirtue are the only source of true 

unique^ adj . r eritahle^ ad j , 

nobility. - - - Religion, commerce, and arni* 

noblesse^i, Religion^L commerce.m, aiine.L 

are proper instructions for a young prince. - - 

j/rqpre, adj. instruction^f, a 

Her father has been made a knight 
San. pro. e^e.p.p. /az^,p.p, chevalier, w, 

of the order of the Bath, and her grandfather 

ordre^m. Bain,m, 

was a knight of the order of the Garter. - - - - 

ttoit^y. Jarretiere^t, 

He has not so much profit, but more honor. - - - 

^«n^, adv. profit^m. 
Fortune's favours are seldom the prize of 

faveurj. rarement,3.dv, prix.m. 

yirtue. - - - Gaming is the son of avarice, and the father 

Jew, m. 
of despair. - - This cloth is equal to silk, - 

descspoir^m. Ce,pro. drap^m. comparable, ^d], soic.f, 
I see the coast of England. -"»-- A forest twenty 

i?ow,v. c6/e,f. foret.L 

miles long and eleven wide. - - - The example of a 
mille.m. ecccmple.m, 

good life is a lesson for the rest of man- 

joour,p. reste,m. genre 

kind. - - Tiie French fleet was destroyed 

humain^m, Francois,3.dj,fotte,{, fi^U^' dttruite^\i,)^, 
by the brave Admiral Nelson, on the first of August. 
Amiral^m. "^^ Aout,m, 

one thousand seven hundred and ninety eight, ----•. 



77 

The eldest son of the king of England 

afne, adj. 
bears the title of Prince of Wales as 

porte,v, titre.m, Galles^ipl, comwc, adv. 

presumptive heir to the crown. - - Lewis 

presomptif.^dj. heritier^m, couronne^f, Louis 

the sixteenth was the grand-son of Lewis the fif- 

pctit^^dy 
teenth. - - William, surnamed the Con- 

Guillaimie.m. surnofHmi^^i,^, Con- 

queror, King of England and Duke of Nor- 

queraat^m, Z)wc,m, JSCor- 

mandy, wa« one of the greatest generals of the 

mandieA\ 
eleventh century. - - - He (was born) at Falaise, and 

sieclc,m, ndqint.v. a 

was the natural son of Robert, Duke of Nor- 

naturel^ady 
mandy, andof Arlotte,a furrier's daughter, - - He 

fourreur^m, fiUeA* 
died at Hermentrude in France, on the ninth of 

mourut.y. a 

September, one thousand eighty-seven. - - IVTrs. Nel- 
ion's servant knows the price of all the provisions. 

servante.f. sait,y, prix^m, (le,tr6ej\ 

- - She bought yesterday some chickens at one shilling 

poulet,m, a 
and three pence a piece. - - She came from America 

vint^ V. 
in three weeks. - - Thomas was formerly a mu-*~^ 
«»^, p» autrefois, adv. mu- 

sician, now he is a dancing - master, 

sicien^m, a present, ^dv. danse,L maitre,m, 

to-morrow he will be a painter. - - This 
rfc?«a?ii,adv. sera,v. peintrc.m. Cette, \)ro, 

water is very agreeable to the smell We 

odurat^m, 
(are going) to Coxheath, to see the camp. - - I 

(dlofi'^^y, ^ ' 'O' ro{r,v. camp,m, 

have in inV^ward-robe five coats, sixteen waihtcoals 



78 

twenty-two pair of stockings, and forty-six hand- 

♦ mou- 

kerchiefs. - - - The road to Croydon is very bad 

choir. m, chemm^m. 

in winter. - - Bring us good wine, good beer, 

en, p. hivej'^m. 

and the oil-bottle. - - The front of the king's pa- 

fagade. f. 
lace (is not) so beautiful as I thought. - * Gene- 

n^est^ pas croyois.w Gene- 

rosity excites admiration. - - Charles the Second, 
rosite^L excite^v, admiration^L 
the son of Philip the fourth, the grandson of Philip 

Philippe 
the third, and the great grand-child of Philip the 

arriere, petit - Jils^m. 
second, left his kingdom to Philip the fifth. - - 

laissa^Y. 5on., pro. 
On the eighteenth of February, one thousand four 
'^^ Fevrier^ 

hundred and seventy-eight, the Duke of Clarence, 
brother to King Edward the fourth, was drowned in 
y>ere,m. fut^y, noye, p.p. 

a butt of malmsey-wine. - The inhabitants of the 

tonneaUyXn, mahoisie^f. halitarit^m, 

city of Dublin have presented a petition te 

ville^f, onf,v.j9r€5ente,p.p. adresse,f, 

the king. It was signed by one-and- 

EUe^pro* etoit^v, 5%ne,p.p. /)ar,p. 
twenty knights and above two hundred citizens. 

plus cZe, adv. citoyen^m, 

' - Good cider is preferable to bad wine. - That 

cidre^m, 
man always w^ears a green hat, a white shirt, red 

c(,v. chemise^ f, 

shoes, and black stockings. He has many children 

bas,m, 5ien,adv. 

and plenty of money. - - - The longer th^ 

beaucoup, 3.dy. argent^m, /ong, adj. 

day isj the shorter is the night. - - You have a finjg 



# 



19 



hat. 
fear 



a mixture 

melange ^m, 

infamy 

iiifamie^L 



of the grief and 
chagrin^m, 
causes. - - - Religion, 
cause^ V. 
fine arts, in a 



Homer 
the 
and 



en, p. 



wordj 
the 



at- 
at- 



was 
fuLv. 
divine 

physical 

physique, a.d\, 
often the 

souvent,a.dj. 

-We sell 

vendons^y* 



nor 



♦^ 



Shame is 

Honte^L 
which 
craintej. que ^ipro, 
morality, government, 
morale^h gouveryiement^m, 
(every thing) is overturned. - 
tout re7irer5e,p.p. 

first poet who personified 

jooe7e,m. personnifia^Y, 
tributes, human passions, 
tribut^m, hu~main.3.dj, 
causes. - - - Pride and vanity are 

xamte^i, 
source of the misfortunes of mankind. 

malheur^m, 
good bread, excellent meat, and very large 

gro5, adj. 
fishes; but^ we^ have* ^neither* gold 

poisson^m, mais.c, avons^y, 

silver. - - (Is there) any beer in 

Y a-t-il c/a7i5,p 

Mrs. B. is a good, virtuous, 

TeWifeua;,adj. 
generous lady: she has a daughter as beautiful as an 

JiUeJ. 
angel, but she has neither so much docility nor af- 
ange^m, 
fability as her cousin. - - Pindar 

Pindare^m 
Thebes, a city of Greece. - Malta 

Grece^L MnIthe,L 
island, but it produces corn, cotton, honey, 

ile^L €//e,pro. produil^v. coton^xn, iniel.m, 

figs, and the fine=t oranges in the world. - - The 
Jigue^L 6eai<,adj. orange^L 

inhabitants of that fine country are all catholics, 
and go every Sunday to hear high mass. - --The 

voni^y, Dimanche^m, «o^ 

kasure of the mind is greater than the pleasure 



the 



cellar ? - - 
cave^L 
prudent, and 



(was born) at 
ndquit.v, 
is a small 



80 

of the bodjr, and the diseases of the mind are 

corps^m, maladie^f. 

more pernicious than the diseases of the body. - - 

^ermczeuo:, adj. 
Health, honors, and fortune, united together, 

Sante^L wm,p.p. ensemble, 3,dy, 

cannot satisfy the heart of man. 

ne peuvent^v. satisfairc^w. ccewr,m. 

(It is) in the sixth page of the second hook, chapter 

Chst.w. 

the third. - - Miss Ws. father, a banker in the 

Strand, is one of the richest men in town, but 

Strand^ m. 

she is prouder and more haughty than 

orgueilleux^ adj . hautain , ad j . 

if she were the handsomest woman in Europe. - - 

etoit^v. * 

Their son arrived yesterday at Portsmouth from 

jLewr,pro. 

Peru and Martinico, in the St. George, a ninety- 
Pcrou Martinique, 

gun ship. Hypocrisy is a homage which 

canon,m»vaisseaii,m. hommage^m, 9we,pro. 

vice pays to virtue. - - A judicious answer 

'oice^vci, rend,y, judicieux,a.dy reponse,L 

does more honor than a brilliant repartee. - - 

fait^v, brillant,a.d), repartie,L 

Give me a knife and fork. - - My father has bought 
one-and-thirty fine grey horses. - -.(He is) an 

gnV,adj. C'c5f,v. 

intrepid man, and a man of honor and pro- 

in^re/yiV?e,adj. pro- 

bity. - - Mr. C***, the queen's jeweller, has a 
hite^f, jouailler^m. 

very prudent wife, and the most faithful, indus- 

Jidele,^(\j, indus- 

trious, and honest servant in London. - - 

irieux,2id), /ionnc/e,adj. * 

* See the remarks on the prepositions in and by, in the note, in tfae 
(degrees of comparison, page 66. ^mp 



81 

He found beauty, youth, riches, wisdom^ 

trouva,y. jeunesst^i, 

and even virtue, united in her per- 

menie,2idv. reKW,p.p, 5a,pro. 

son. - Thomas has discretion, but he has no 

discretion^L ncjaomi, adv# 

wit. - - They have a quantit}^ of apples and pears. - - 

qnantltt^L 
Vienna, the capital of the empire of Germany, 
Vienne^L Allemagne^f, 

is a fine city. - - The more pleasing plays 

agr6ahle,3.d^* spectacle.m* 
are, the more dangerous they are. - - The rich, 

f?angerei(>r,adj. 
the poor, the young, tlie old, the learned, and 

satmnt, a-d], 
the ignorant, are all subject to death. - - - True 

sujei^ adj . 7nort, f. Frm, adj . 
friends are as rare as good kings. - - - The 

rare, adj. 
famous mine of Potosi, in Peru, is above 

fameux^ adj . mi « e, f. plus^ adv. 

two hundred and fifty fathoms deep. - - Henry the first, 

toise^f. Henri 

king of England, and brother to William Rufus, 

leRoux, 
died the richest prince in Europe. - - Paul is taller 



than you by an inch, but Mrs. NichoPs brother is 

the tallest of all. 



* pouce^m. 



SECT. ITT. 
OF PROKOUJsi'S. 

There arc seven sorts of Pronouns ; 

1 . Lcs Pronoms personnels, Pronouns personal. 

2. Les Pronoms conjonctifs, Pronouns conjunctive. 

^ * See the. Note, page 66. 



St 

4. Les Pronoms possessifs^ Protiouns possessive. 

4. Les Pronoms demonstraiifs^ Pronouns demonstrativf^. 

5. Les Pronoms relatifs^ Pronouns relative. 

6^. Les Pronoms inierrogatifs, Pronouns interrogative* 
7. L&s Pronoms indefinis^ Pronouns indefinite. 

OF PRONOUNS PERSONAL. 

Pronouns personal are those vrhich directlj'^ denote tlfe 
persons, and supply the place of them. 
There are three persons : 

The first is the person vrho speaks : ex. 
Jeparle^ I speak. 

J^ous par Ions, We speak. 

The second is the person spoken to : ex. 
flails y\t paries, Thou speakest. 

Vous parlez, Ycu speak. 

The third is the person spoken of: ex. 
II or elle parte, He or she speaks, 

Jls or elks parlent, They speak. 

Both Genders. 

Singular. Plural. 

Jc or moi, I. J^oiis, we. 

Tu or toi, thou. Voiis, you or ye. 

Masculine. 
// or lui, he, it. lis, or eux, they. 

Feminine. 
Elle, she, it. Elks, they. 

These pronouns are never to he used but as nomina- 
tives to the verbs. The resi are declined with the ar- 
ticle indefinite : ex. 

First Person for both Genders. » 

Singular. » Plural^ 

G. A. de moi, of or from me. de nous, of or from us. 
Dat. a moi, to me^ a nous, to us. 

Ace. moi, me. n9ns, us* 

if 



Second Person, tor both Genders* 
Singular. Plural. 

G. A. de toi, of or from thee, de vous, of or from you. 
Dat. a toi^ to thee, a voiis^ to you. 

Ace. to% thee. vous^ you. 

Third Person. 
Singular, 

G. A. de luij of or from him, fPe//e, of or from her."^ 
Dat. a lui, to him, a elk, to her,* 

Ace. lui, him. die, her.* 

Plural. 
Masculine. Feminine. 

G. A. (^'eiix, of or from them, dalles, of or from them. 
Dat. a eux, to them, a elks, to them. 

Ace. eux, them, elks, them. 

There are two other pronouns of the third persoR, 
▼iz. 

Singular and Plural. Both Genders. 

, , ^H A J ' r r S one's self, himself, herself, 
lst.&.A.rf.m,oforfrom^ th;mselves: ' 

Dat. a soi, to one's self, himself, &:c. 
Ace. soi, one's self, himself, &c. 

N. B. Though it have been said, that the personal 
pronouns are used for the names of persons, it must not 
thence be concluded, that they are never employed for 
the names of animals or inanimate objects : this seldom 
happens in the first and second persons ; but the per- 
sonal pronouns, il, elh. Us, elles, may denote every object 
in nature, either animate or inanimate : ex. 

Ce chicn est fort beau, 7iiais That dog is very handsome, 
il est irop gras, but it is too fat. 

>ta.'..: ■ : ■ ■ ■• -.■ . : ■■".--■ • ■ r 

* Her^ when standing by itself, is to be rendered by cUe^ ?^, ovlui ; 
Uut, if joined tg a noun, by the pronoun pos«es«ive^ son^ sa, sts. 



^' 



u 



EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 



This picture is very old, but it is 

Ce,pro. portrait^m, ancien,adj. 

well painted. - - The house which 1 bought 
6ze/i,adv. pemt,p.p. 5we,pro. at achete^^,ip, 

is well situated, but I assure^ you* that it 
5Jiwe,adj. assure^v. que,adv, 

cost^ me* much. The books which 

coute^Y, 'me, pro. heaucoup^3,dv, 
you saw in my library are good 

viles^w 'ma, pro. hibliotheque^f, 

books, but they a,re badly bound. Your 

ma/, adv. re/ie,p.p. Fo5,pro. 

buckles would be much more in the fashion, if 
houcle^L seroient^y, a rrfode^L 

they were smaller* My hat is quite 

etoient^ v. Mon, pro. iout^ adv. 

new, but it is too big. Their 

>iew/,adj. frop, adv. gmwc?,adj. Lewr,pro. 

coach is old, but it is as good as if 

carosse^m, vieux^didj, si^c. 

it were nev/. 

etoit^Y, 

2d. The general and indefinite pronoun, on, one, is 
always considered as a nominative of the masculine gen- 
der, and can never be used (in French) but in the singu- 
lar, though the meaning be plural : ex. Wijen we say, 

On chante^ on mange, They sing, one eats, or people eat ; 
i, e, some men or women sing, eat. 

EXEP.CISE UPON THIS RULE, 

People imagine that when they" are 

Ow,pro. s'imagine^Y, que quand^ady, cst,Y, 

rich, they are happy ; but they (are mistakqp) 

/iewreii>r,adj. se trcmpc^y, 

very often ; for, the more one has, the 

;res,ady. souvent,2L^Y. car,c. 

more one wishes to have. - - - - Wt^^n we are 

veut,y. toi avoir ^Y. ' 



55 

(raised up) to honors, or we are invested 

e7ere,p.p. ou que^c, rez?e/w, p.p. 

with some dignity, we are to expect 

de quelque^ad^, dignite^f, doit^v, s^atteridre^v. 

to be criticised. - - - (Some persons) reported 
a etre, critiqu6,p.'p» On, pro. rapporta^v, 

last week, that in France they 

cZernierc, adj. semaine^(. 

talk of peace. 

parle^v- 

The word mime, self, is very often joined to the per- 
gonal pronouns, to denote, in a more special manner, the 
person spoken of : as, 

Moi-meme, myself. Soi'meme, one's self. 

Toi'meme, thyself. Mous-memes, ourselves* 

iMi-meme, himself. Vous-memes, yourselves, 

Elle-meme, herself. Eux-memes, or eUes-memes^ 

themselves. 
Observations on the Pronouns Je and Moi, Tu and 
Toi, 11 and Lui, lis and Eux. 
Je and m,oi are used in two different senses, though 
both in the nominative case ; Je is always followed or 
preceded immediately by a verb to which it is the nomi- 
native case, and has no need to be joined to another 
pronoun : but moi always requires to be followed by one 
pronoun or more, either expressed or understood : ex. 
Qui a pris mon livre ? ^Yho took my book ? 

C^esi moi, It is I. That is, 

Cest moi qui Vai pris, It is I who took it. 

Moi must be used instead of Je before an infinitive 
mood, or at the end of a sentence, when it is ihtended 
to express something sudden, as grief, &c. ; vdien /, in 
English, is followed by the pronoun relative 7cho or 
whom, or is preceded by the verb etre, to be, used im- 
personally, as c^esi, it is ; and lastly, w henever any differ- 
ence or distinction is intended between persons; in which 
case it must be immediately followed by Je : ex. 
Moi lui parler ! I speak to him or her ! 

Moi qui vous aif/ir. I who love you* 

8 



S6 

// 6toit a pied et moi f6tois He was on foot, and I was 
« cheval, on horseback. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

Who (was calling^) me^ ? - - It was not 

appeloit^Y, we, pro. Ce,pro. ne ptf5,adv. 
I. - - The boy wants to speak^ to you'. - --] 

desire^Y. "o-parler^v. '^^ 
who am older than he, I, go and speak^ 

«ge,adj. /wi,pro. aller^v, «<>> 

to him V! No, I will not go, (let him come) 

Zwijpro. .^on,adv. uewx,v. qu'il vienne^v. 

himself. - - - It is I who am to be rewarded 

dois^v. '^^ recompense^ p.p. 
instead of him. - - - My father commanded the 
au lieu /Mi,pro. conimandoit^y, 

horse, and I commanded the foot He 

cavalerie^ f. infanterie^ f. 

could not do^ it^ in one day, and I 

put^Y, faire^v, /e,pro. en,p. 

did it in the space of three hours. - - 

aifait^Y, dans^ip* espace^m* heure^L 

When the enemy appeared, my companions 

parut^Y. we5,pro. 

(ran away) and 1 remained alone. 
prirent lafuite^Y. resiai,Y. 5ew/,adj. 

The same rule is to be attended to with respect to /o<, 
lui^ eux, &c. : as, 

Toi qui me paries^ Thou who speakest to me* 

Lui queje meprise, He whom I despise. 

Eux que je respccte^ They whom I respect. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

How darest thou answer thy 

Comment^^idY, oses^Y, repondre^ a,v. ^on,pro. 

master in so^ insolent* a^ manner^ ? thou 

cfe, 5«,adv. mso/enf, adj. maniere^f, 

whom he loves, thou for whom he takes 
t/we,pro. aime^Yf pour^ip, qui^ipro, prend^Y, 

sd much pains. - - - - lie and they, not (being able) 
pehie,L pouvant^Y* 



n 

to agree, were obliged to part. - - - - - 

s^accorder^y, furent^y, o6%e,p.p. de se separer^v. 
It is I who wrote the letter, >ut it is he 

ai ecrit^y, lettre^f. 

who carried it. - - - It is^ ^neither^ I, nor 

apoW^e,p.p /a, pro. nem,c. n2*,c. 

thou, nor he, who have broken the windows, 

avons,y. ca55e,p.p. fmUre^i, 

but it is thej who have^ done^ it^. 

on/, V. /m7, p.p. /e,pro. 
After these remarks, it is also necessary to observe 
here, that je, I, never admits of an adjective or participle 
immediately after it, except in ads^ or deeds^ notes, or 
bills, receipts, and the like : ex. 

Je, soussigne, demeurant a I, the undersigned, living 

Londres, declare, <^c. in London, declare, &c. 

Je, soussigne, reconnois avoir I, the undersigned, acknow- 

regu de Mons. D**, la ledge to have received 

somme de — from Mr. D**, the sui» 

of— 

OF CONJUNCTIVE PRONOUNS. 

These pronouns are called conjunctive, because they 
are always joined to some verb by which they are gov- 
erned, and are generally used for the dative or accusa- 
tive case of the personal pronouns. There are three 
persons in the conjunctive as in the personal, which are, 

For the first Person, both Genders. 

Singular. Plural, 

Dat. or Ac. Me, moi,^ me or to me. Nous, us, or to us, 
for a moi, or moi, for a nous, or nous* 

For the second, both Genders. 
Dat. or Ac. Te, Toi,^ thee or to thee, Vous, you, or to you, 
for a toi, or toi, for a vous, or vous. 

* JV/oi and lot must be used instead of me or te, after the second 
person singular or plural of the imperative mood, conjugated with- 
eut a negative : ex. 

^coutez-mrti, hear me. 

mivcz-rnoi^ follow me. 



I 

uline. 
li, ( to him, to it, > 
, ( him, it, 5 



For the third. 
Singular. — Masculine. 
Dat. Lui, ( to him, to it, > for a Im^ 
Ace. Xe, ) him, it, \ lui. 



Feminine. 
Dat. Lui, ( to her, to it, > for a dh. 
Ace. La, \ her, it, \ elh. 

Plural. — Both Genders. 

Dat. Lewr, ( to them, ) for a eux^m, a tiles ^^^ 

Ace. Les, \ them, 5 ^^^? ^^» dJes,f* 

nr.4. ^„ A «^ c S one's self, himself, } r ^ • ^.• 
Dat.orAcc.5e, ^ herself, themselves; J '^"'^ " «"' ""^ ^'"- 

Five of these pronouns are used for the dative or ,'^<q,- 
CKsative case, and are of both genders, viz. 

Me or mm, te or tot, nous, vous, S6 : ex. 
Vous me parlez, You speak to me. 

II vous croit, He believes you. 

Vous mepriez cfe, i^c. You desire me to, &e*. 

In the first example, me is the dative case, because ffev 
may be turned by a moi, to me 5 in the second, vous is 
the accusative, &c. 

Lui and leur are used in the dative only, and ar§ of 
Voth genders : 

Je luiparle, I speak to him or to her. 

Vous leur ecrivez, You write to them. 

The three others are used for the accusative, and may 
"he applied to things animate or inanimate, viz. ^ 

Xe, masc. him, it ; la, fem, her, it ; and les, rnasc* 
and fem. them : ex. 

Je le vois tous les jours, I see him every day. 

Je le sais, 1 know it. 

J^ous la connoissons, We know her. 

II ks enverra ce soir, He will send th<^m tg-nightr 



89 

The pronoun personal may be placed before or after 
the verb, agreeably to the English construction ; but the 
conjunctive pronouns are to be placed (in French) be- 
fore the verbs by which they are governed, though they 
come after them in English : ex. 

Je park, 1 speak. 

Avmis-nous parle, Have we spoken ? 

// me parle, He speaks to me. 

J^ous les connoissons, We know them. 

EXERCISE ON THIS RULE. 

Your brother bought yesterday a very good book, 
acheta^Y. 
and after having^ read^ it% he gave- it* 

apre5,p. avoir, v. ZM,p.p. /e,pro. donna, v, 

to my sister. - - - You speak of my cousin, 

ma, pro. mon, pro. 

do you know him ? - - - I see her and speak 

^O' conno{ssez,y, row, v. parle,w 

to her (every day). - - Do you^ know* your 

tous les jours, -o* savez,Y, i;o^,pro. 

lessons? - - - We know them all. - - I will carry 
leqon,L savons,v, tout,3.dj» menerauv. 

them to my brothers, but I (will write) 

c/iez,p. me5,pro. eciiral^y. 

to them before. I find him more reason- 

auparavant,'ddv. trouve^y, raison- 

able than his sister. - - - Your dog (is. 

7ia6/e,adj. 5a, pro. chien,m, a 

thirsty), shalP P gire^ him* water? -- They are 

soif, do7inerai,r, 

tired, and I give them some rest. 

fatigue,p.ip, donne,\* rcpos,m. 

In the second person singular and the first and second- 
persons plural of a verb in the imperative mood conju- 
gated affirmatively, the conjunctive pronouns come after 
the verb : but if the verb be conjugated negatively, the 
pronouns follow the above rule : ex. 
8* 



41 



90 

DonntZ'lui de Vargent^ Give him money. 

JVe lui donntz pas depain, Do not give him any bread. 

EXERCISE ON THIS AND THE PRECEDING RULES. 

8end them some apples, but do not send 

Envoyez,Y. '<» 

them any plums. - - I give you these books, 

prune^L donne,v, ce5,prb. 

but do not lend them to your brother. - - - - 

preiez^Y» ro/re.pro. 

You may tell it to my father, but do not 

pouvez,v.dire,v, mori,pro. lo. 

tell it to my mother. - - Believe me, go 
dites^v, wa,pro. Croyez^v, allez^v. 

and speak to them, but do not insult them. - - 
<^ parler^v. ^^ insulUz^w, 

Have you returned (to her) the handkerchief 

re7id'w,p.p. mouchoir^m, 

which she has lent you ? - - Send it to-morrow,, 

jorefe,p.p. t^emam, adv. 

do not forget it. - - Bring me some cho- 

ouhliez^v, Apportez^v. cho- 

col ate, but bring* me^ ^no sugar. 
colat^m. 

When two imperatives are joined by either of the 
•onjunctions, ct^ and ; ow, or ; the conjunctive pronoun 
or pronouns must precede the last imperative by which 
it is governed : ex. 
AlUz le trouver^ et lui dites Go to him, and tell him to 

de venir ici^ come hither. 

After the verbs se Jier a, to trust to, penser^ songer a, 
to think of, viser a, to aim at, courir^ accourir a, to run 
to, venir «, to come to, and some of the reflective verbs 
followed by a preposition governing a dative case, the 
pronouns must be placed after the verb, especially if 
used in opposition or contradiction to each other ; or 
denote the order in which a thing ought to be done: 
and if there be more than one dative pronoun, the first 
only may be placed before the verb, and the ©th«r8 
after: ex. 



^M 



91 

FieZ'Vous a mot^ Trust to me. 

J^ous pensons a vous, We think of you. 

Cela s''adresse a toi^ That is addressed to thee* 

Je cours a lui^ I run to him. 

// me parle aussi bien qv/a He speaks to me as well a» 
vous et a eux, to you and them. 

EXERCISE ON THESE AND THE PRECEDING RULES. 

Bring me mj hat, or send^ it^ to me^ hy 

the carrier. - - - - Trust to him, but do not 

voiturie7\Yn, Fiez-vous, v. 
trust to them, and do not believe them. - - Think 

croyez^v, Pensez^y, 

of us, and write to us as soon as you can. - - - 

ecnrez,v. ^o^ ^Gf,adv. pourrez^y. 

Go and see her, and carry her these 
Allez.v, <o> voii'^Y, poriez^v. ce5,pro. 

flowers. - - - Send me my clock, or brings it^ 
fleurs^i, pendule^L 

to me* yourself. Do not give it t^ 

we, pro. 7)au5-meme,pro. donnez^y, 

my sister, give it to me. Why do you prefer her to 

c^ prefirez^y, 
me, and give her all your affection ? 

When two or more of the conjunctive pronouns come 
together in the same sentence, they must be arranged in 
the following order. 

Singular. Plural. 

Me.m. &L f. me or to me. JVow5,m. & f. us or to us. 

Te,m. &L f. thee or to thee. Vous^m, & f. you or to youv 

Se^m.&L f. one's self, him- <Se,m. & f. themselves^ 

self, herself, 
are to be placed before all others.; — next, 

Le,m. him, it, Lc5,m. &l f. them. 
La^L her, it, 

Then, 

Lui^m, & f. to him, to her, Leur,in, & f. to them. 

11 me It promit, He promised it to' me. 

Je vo\^ l&e dormerai^ 1 will give them to you. 



92 



RXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 



My brother (will send) them to you, or he 

enverra^Y, 
fwill bring) them to you himself. - - - He likes 
apportera,y» aime^v, 

your^ house' (very much,^) for we showed 

voire, pro. /or f, adv. car,c. fimes voir,\* 

it to him. - - Carry it to them. - - He wilP *not^ 
Portez^v, veut^y. ne pas 

sfell® it* to them, but he will give it to 

tendre^Y, veut donner,y, 

jou. - - - If they ask a favour, will you 

SiyC» demandent^Y. grdce^f, «oi 

refuse it to them ? - - - Why do you 

refuser ez^Y, Pourquot^^dY. 

give it to him ? Had you not promised 

donnez^Y. Aviez^Y. j^romw, p.p. 

it to her ? - - - He speaks to me, and not to you. - - 

parh^Y. 
If they behave themselves well, I will 

comportent^Y. 
reward them. - - He had promised it to 

recompenserai^Y. avoit^Y, 

him, but he gave it to me. 
a donne^Y* 

N. B. There ar^ three other conjunctive pronouns^ 
commonly called particles relative, or supplying pro- 
nouns ; they are en, ly, and /e. 

En always denotes a genitive or ablative, and relates 
to some object mentioned before: it is rendered in 
English by of or from him^ her, it, them ; about him, her, 
it, &c. ; with or without him, her, it, &lc» ; at it, &c. ; for 
it, &c. ; upon it, &c. ; any, one, ones, none, some, some of, 
&c. ; thence, thereof, and sometimes it is elegantly un- 
derstood in English, especially when immediately fol- 
lowed by a numeral adjective or a noun of quantity, 
though it must be absolutely expressed in French : ex* 



m 



93 



JTous 



mpar 



J^en suis fdchi, 

Donntz-lui e/t, 

Lux en avez'vous porti ? 

JVe lui en envoyez pas, 

Kmis en venous, 

Comhien avez-vous de do" 

mestiques ? Nous en avons 

six. 
Avez-vous un jar din a la 

campagne ? Oui^ nous en 

avo7is un trts joli. 



We speak of him, of her, 
of it, of them 5 about 
him, about her, about it, 
about them. 

1 am sorry for it. 

Give him some. 

Did you carry him or het 
any? 

Send him or her none. 

We come from it or thence. 

How many servants have 
you ? We have six. 

Have you a garden in the 
country ? Yes, we have 
a very pretty one. 



In the third, fourth, and fifth sentences it should be 
observed, that the pronouns of it, or of them, are ele» 
gantly understood in English, according to the object 
©r objects mentioned before. 



EXERCISE ON THIS RULE. 

I have heard that your uncle is arrived. 

-J' • ' ' 

oui mre,v. arr?t;e, p.p» \ 

and P am^ very'* glad* of it^. - - She spoke ^ to 

aise, adj. parla, v. 

him' of it''. - - Taik=» no' more^ of it^, for P 

Parhz,v. ne rfns, c«r,c. 

wilP not^ hear^ of it^ (any more^). - - 

veux^y, ne entendre pari er,\, plus,3.6v, 

I' thank'* you^ for it 3. - - Do you* 'not^ see'* 

remercie^v. "-^ soyez^y^ 

the^ beauty^ of it^ ? - - They are sorry for 

sonf^y, fachc,2Ldj* 

it. - - Since you have no pears in your garden. 

Puis ^;ue, c. poire, f. 

I. (will send) you some. - - They' have" stolen^ 

cjiterrai^y, mit^y, -y«/e,p.p. 



94 

from ua^ the« greatest^ part' of them^. - - My 

^' partie^L ^f on, prdt. 

brother has written a letter to your sister, and 

ecn7,p,p. 
shown^ me^ the^ two^ first^ lines'^ of it^, ^ - ■*- 

a montrc^Y, Ugne,L 

Will you lend me some books ? With all 

Voulez^Y, preter^v, J[)e,p. 

my heart, I will lend you some very pretty 

ccewr,m. preterai^v, 
ones. - - Do you^ think ^ that^ she^ has'' spoken 
to, lo^ croyez^v, ait.v. parle,p,]^» 

to him^ of it^ ? - - If I had money, I would give 

(tvois^Y» donnerois^Y* 

you some, but you know, as weii as I do, 

mais^c, savez^Y, *^ 

how scarce^ it is^ now. - - - Send'* 

cor/i5fen,adv. rarc,a.dj. a present^ ?idY, Envoyez.Yf 
me^ ^none^ *. - - Have=^ you^ any^ ? - - -Do *you^ 

ne en pas Avez^ v. 

remember^ it^ ? 
souvenez^Y. en. 

Y is used for the dative only : it is Englished by to it, 
to them^ of it, in it. upon it, thither, there, t^c. and very often 
not expressed in English, though it must be in French. 
It seldom supplies the place of animate objects, except 
when connected with the verbs fier, to trust ; penser, to 
think ; and the like in a reply : ex. 

J'i/ consens, I agree to it» 

No\is y penserons, We shall thlrik of it. 

JVe vous y jiez plus, Trust them no more. 

EXERCISE ON THIS RULE, 

V ^never^ will^ consent to^ it, and* 

ne jamais, adv. consentirai, v. 

V ^neither* wilP speak^ nor' write* to 

neni 'Deux,Y. parler,Y, 7ii,c. ecrire,Y, 
^him*. - - Believe me, go and see tbem, do 

Groyez,Y, alUz^Y, *^ "^ 



95 

'not^ * confide* in^ it. - - We' have* forced* 

fitzvous^y, avons^y* /orce, p.p. 

them^ to it^. - - I (will carrj^) my^ brother* thither* 

menerai^v, 
myself^. - He^ (will carry^) them^ to you^ thither^ him- 

porter a^v. y 

self. - - Did you think of what you had 

Avez^v^ j^en^e.p.p. a ce que^ipro, aviez^Y, 

promised me ? - - No, but* P will think'* 

/>ror/ii5,p.p. ^071, adv. penseraLv, 

(of it^.) - (It is) a good book, we* read" excellent* 

y C'est^w wi, pro. lit^y, 

things^ in it-, - - Our orchards are very fruil- 

chose^L ^'*05,pro. re?'ge?-,m. fer- 

ful, we see all sorts of fruits in 

/i7«,adj. 071, pro. voit,v, sorte^i, fruit ^m, 

them. - - Since those people have deceived 

Puisque^c* ces, pro. gens^ pi. trmnpL'p,^, 

jou do not trust them (any more). - - When a 

'^ Jlez^Y, jo/w5,adv. 

friend is dead we^ often* think^ of 

mor^,adj. o?i,pro. souvent^aAy, pcnse^v, 
him* ^no longer^. 
^/w5,adv. 

Le which in English is either not expressed, or most 
commonly rendered by 50, likewise prevents the repe- 
tition of one or more words, and supplies the place of 
the same. It is indeclinable when it relates to, and 
holds the place of, one adjective or more, a verb, or a 
whole member of a sentence : ex. 

Voiis irCavez cru helky mais You have thought me hand- 
le ne le suis pas, some, but I am not. 

J^ou^ itions embarrasses^ et We were embarrassed, and 

rwus le somrms encore^. are so yet. 

EXERCISE ON THTS RULE, 

My brothers were ill yesterday, 

4fej,pco* maladey^y frier^adv. 



96 

and are so still to - day. - - - I am 

encore, adv. aujourdVmi^2Ldv. 

satisfied with mv fate, but my sister is not. 
caniew/,adj. de sort^m, m«, pro. 

I had heard that your sister was married, 

avois^v. oul dire^v. que etoit^Y. wa?'ie,p.p. 

but my cousin tells me that she is not. - - *■ 

wiow,pro. dit^Y, 

Our master rewards us when we deserve 

^o/r«, pro. recompense^Y* meritons^Y, 

it. - - - Children ought to apply to their 

dmvejif^Y, s^'appliqner^Y* leurs.^TO, 
studies as much as they can. - - - - I thought 

autant^adY, peuvent^Y. croyois^Y, 

your brother was diligent, but I mistook, 

etoif.Y, we suis irompi^^»^» 

for he is not, and ^ never* will be^ so^. 
jam«?5,adv. sera.Y. 
On the contrary, h is declinable when it relates to, 
and holds the place of one substantive or more ; then 
h is used for the masculine, la for the feminine, and 
hs for the plural : ex. 

Etes-vous le fls de mon Are you my friend Mr. D's 
ami M, D** ? Ow?, je son ? Yes, I am. 
le suis, 
Etes-vous la mere de ce Are you the mother of 
hel enfant ? Oui, je la that fine child ? Yes, 
sw's, I am. 

Etes-vous les tantes de Are you Mr. Brown's 
j¥. Brown 7 Oui, nous aunts ? Yes, we are. 
hs sommes, 
Est-ce Id voire livre ? Oui^ Is this your book ? Yes, 
ce VesL it is. 

EXERCISE ON THIS RULE. 

(It is said) that you are the son of my neighbour 
On dit,Y. TO?«m,m. 

Mr. Peter, are you so ? Yes, Sir, I 

Pierre.m* Monsunr^m, 



97 

am. ^ - Are you the sister of Mrs. Adams ? Yes, 

Madame^ f. 
I am. - - She is very amiable, and so are you. - - 

aimable^ adj. 
Are you the ladies whom my mother expects ? 
dame^L que attend^v. 

Yes, we are. - - These young people are the 

Ce5,pro. jewne,adj. gens^ph 
scholars whom you have taught ? Yes, madam, 
ecolier^ m. ensiegm, p.p. 

they are. - - (Is that) the horse which you bought 

Est-ce Id cheval^ m. que 
from my brother ? Yes, it is. - - - (Are these) the 

a Sont-ce Id 

houses which you built ? Yes, they are. 

avez fait hdtir, v. sont, 

N. B. It must be observed, that the following pro- 
nouns, m^, te, 56, /e, /a, and les, can never be used after 
a preposition ; as we cannot say, fetois avec /e, avec la, 
I was with him, with her ; but we must use the per- 
sonal pronouns, moi, toi, soi, lui, elle, and eux^ or dks^ 
and say, fetois avec lui, avec elles, &c. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

The nosegay which I gathered in our 

bouquet, m. que, ai cueilli, p.p. 

garden is for her, and not for him. - - He 

joou?*, p. noji pas,adv, 

was with me when we received a letter from 

etoit, V. regumes, v. 

them. - - If he do not come soon we (will set 

•^ vient, V. bientot, adv. parfi- 

out) without him. - - - Your sisters have dis- 

rons,v, sans,\). F"o5,pro. mecon- 

pleased me, I am very angry with them, 

^en/e, p.p. /«c7ie, adj. contre,\). 

- - Your brothers have broken these windows, I 
c«55e,p.p» ces, pro. 



98 

am sure of it, for I was behind them, and 

sMr,adj. car,c. derriere^'p, 

John was with me. 
Jean^Tn, 

Y and en always go last in a sentence, except the 
pronoun of the first person moi^ which, in the impera- 
tive mood of a verb conjugated aflSrmatively, is placed 
after «/ and en: ex. 

// vous y en enverra^ He will send some to you 

thither. 

Apportez-y en moi, Bring me some hither. 

N. B. The above pronouns, when governed by two 
or more verbs, must be repeated, in French, before 
every governing verb ; though most generally expiessed 
but once in English, and after the last verb : ex. 

Voire jils vous aime et Your son loves and fears 
vous craint^ you. 

Je k plains et Vencourage, I pity and encourage 

him. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

You have very fine roses in your garden 5 wheii 
avez^v, 
Tam in the country, pray send me some hither. 

serai^y* a de grdce^ envoy ez,\» 

- - May God bless and reward her! said 

Que Dieu, hcnisse^v, recotnpense.^v, dit^v, 

the prince. -- I * neither^ wilP sell® nor*^ give^** 

ne «?, veux,v. vendre^ donner^v, 

®^them^ to *you^. - - Our master rewards and punishes 

punit^y* 
us when we deserve it. - - - Often beauty seduces 

seduitjV, 
and deceives us. - - - A well-bred child, who 

trompe^y* ne,p.p. 

knows the extent of his duties towards his 
connoitjy, etendue^f, devoir ^m, €nrer5,p. 

parents, far from offeniding and vexing 

parentytn* et f. loin dCf offenser^r, molester,, y. 



99 

them, cherishes, loves, honors, respects, and 

cherit^y, honore^Y* respecte^w 

obeys them. 
«6eU,v. 

OF PRONOUNS POSSESSIVE, 

These pronouns are called possessive, because the^^ 
always denote property or possession. 

There are two sorts of possessive pronouns, viz. ab-» 
solute and relative. 

The absolute are so called, because they must always 
precede the substantive to which they are joined, and 
agree with it (and not with the possessor as in English) 
in gmder, yiumber, and mse : — They are. 

Singular. Plural. 

Masc. Fern. Both Genders. 

Mon* Ma, Mes, my. 

Ton* Ta, Tes, thy. 

Son,"^ Sa, Ses, his, her, or it^« 

Both Genders. 
Motre, Nos, our. 

Votre^ Vos, your. 

Leur^ Leurs, their. 

They are declined with the article indefinite Je, d : ex. 
Singular. 
Masculine. 
Nom. Ace. monpere, my father. 
Gen. Abl, de mon pere, of my father, or from, 8iC, 
Dat. a mon pere, to my father. 

Feminine. 
Nom. Ace. ma mere, my mother. 
Gen. Abl. de ma mere, of or from my mother. 
Dat. a ma mere, to my mother. 

'».! I ■ ', It I I ■ ■ ■ . ■ ,. , ■ I ■ , im Li. 

* Mon, ton, son, must be used before a noun feminine beginning 
with a vowel, to prevent the hiatus : ex. 

Mon dme. My soul. 

Ton indifference. Thy indifference. 

Son opinion^ His. or her opinion. 



10« 

Plural. 
Masculine, 
^om. Ace. mes freres^ my brothers. 
Gen. Abl. de mes freres, of or from my brothels^ 
Dat* a mes freres^ to my brothers. 

Feminine. 
Nom. Ace. mes scaurs, my sisters. 
Gen. Abl. de mes sceurs, of oi- from my sisters, 
Dat. d mes sceurs, to my sisters. 

The others are declined as the preceding. 
These pronouns ought to be repeated before evepy 
substantive in a sentence, though but once expressed 
in English ; they must also be used in French, when 
speaking to any of our relations or friends, though they 
be suppressed in English : ex. 

J^ai perdu mon chapeau I lost my hat and gloves. 

et mes gants, 
Bon jour^ mon pere^ Good day, father. 

Etes-vous Id, ma sceur ? Are you there, sister.? 

EXERCISE ON THIS RULE. 

Givft me my dictionary and grammar. - - She 

dictionnaire, m. grammaire, f. 

4iad lost her gloves and fan. - - - - Have 

avoii^y* /JercZu, p.p. eventail^m, Avez. v. 

you found your pen ? His daughter is 

irowre, p.p. plume^i. fdle^i, 

older than my son, but her son (is not) 

Tiewa;,adj. fils^va, nhstpas,y, 

so tall as my nephew. - - - Her brother says 

grand^ady neveu^m, dit,y, 

that he will not refuse you what you ask 

refusera^y, ce que demandez^y, 

©f him. - - Dear father, pray, forgive me. - - My 

»«>^ " de grace, 

ambition is the only cause of my impru- 

amhition,(* 5eu/,adj. cause, L impru- 

dence, - - - I have seen your father, mother^ bro^ 
denceJ, ai,y, -yi^p.p. 



101 



thers, and sisters. - - - Her affection for me is 

affection, f. pour, p. 
false. - - - Good night, cousin, I hope that you 
/ctwa?,adj. soir^m. espere,v, 

will come soon to see my country- 

viendrez,v, 6zen^6?, adv. voir^y, 

house and gardens. Your horses and carriage 

cheval^m, carrosse^m, 

are very heautiful, but the queen's horses and carriages 

6eG5w,adj. 
are much more so. 

beaucoiip, adv. 
When these pronouns are used in a sentence, speak- 
ing of any part of the body, they are not to be express- 
ed in French, but the preposition in and the pronoun 
are rendered by the article definite ; the personal pro- 
noun being sufficient to determine the possession : ex. 

J'at mal aux yeux, . I have a pain in my eyes, 

and not dans mes yeux^ 

II se cassa le hras, He broke his arm. 

and not son bras. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

My mother has (a pain) in her head. - - - I have 
a,v. ma/,m. «,p. tete,L 
2L pain in my ear, and she has a pain in her 

oreille^L 
teeth. - - - When I eat meat, I have always 

dent,t mange,Y, toujours^^dv, 

a pain in my stomach. - - The man who fell from 

estomac^m, tomha,\, 

the roof of our house, disjointed his wrist, 

toit,m, se demit, \, poignet,m, 

broke his right leg, sprained 

droit,^dj, jambe,f. se donna une entorse au 
his left foot, dislocated his shoulders, 

ganche,2idj, pied,m, se disloqna,\. 6paule,{', 
and hurt his head. - - - When I run fast, 

se blessa,v, €ours,v, ri/c,adv. 

9* 



10^ 

f (am afraid) of falling and breaking mf 

crains^y, de tomberyV, de me casser^v, 

arm or neck. 

Its, their, having a reference to inanimate or irra- 
tional objects, and placed in another member of the 
sentence from that wherein the object referred to is it- 
self expressed, are not made iato French by son, sa, ses^ 
&c. but by en : ex. 

Paris est une grande ville, Paris is a large city, but 
mais les rues en sont trop its streets are too nar- 
itroites, row. 

EXERCISE ON THIS RULE. 

Windsor is a fine town, I admire it6 

ville, f. admire, v. 

situation, walks, and streets. - - This 

situation, f, promenade,f, rue,L Ce</c, pro. 

house is well situate, but its architecture 

situe,a.dj, architecture,^, 

does not please me much. - - - His coach is 

toi plait,\, beaucoup,a,dv» carrosse,m, 

beautiful, (every body) admires its painting 

tout le monde,m, admire,v, peinture,{, 
and ornaments. - - - The shops of London are 

(very fine,) foreigners especially see their 
superbe,aidj» etranger,m» sur-tout,SLdy» 

i^iches and cleanliness with pleasure and astonish- 
ment. - - - The walks of your (country-seat) are well 

alUe,L chdteau,m, 

kept, I like their regularity. 
*enM,p.p. regularite,f. 

The relatives are never joined to any substantive ; fof 
the substantive to which they refer is always implied m 
the pronoun. They are, 

Masculine. Feminine. 

Sing. Plur. Sing. Plur. 

he mien, les miens, la mlenne, les miennes, mine. 

he tien^ les iiens, la tienne, les tiennes, thine* 

Le sien^ hs siens^ la sienne^ l^ simnes^ his or h«rt» 



106 



Masculine. 



Sing. 
Le notre, 
Le voire, 
Le leur^ 



Plural. 
les notres, 
les votres, 
les kurs, 



Sing. 
la notre, 
la voire, 
la leur. 



Feminine. 

Plural. 
les no ires, ours. 
les votres, yours. 
les leurs, theirs. 



Thej are declined with the article definite 

Singular. 

Feminine. 



ex. 



Masculine. 
Nom. Ace. Le mien 
Gen. Abl. 
Dat. 



Du mien, 
Au mien, 



Masculine. 
Nom. Ace. Les miens, 
Gen. Abl. De^ miens. 



la mienne, mine. 

de la mienne, of or from mine. 

d la mienne, to mine. 

Plural. 

Feminine. 

les miennes, mine. 

des miennes, of or from mind. 

aux miennes, to mine. 

The rest are declined as the preceding. 

When any one of these relative pronouns is used after 
the verb etre, to be, signifying to belong to, it must be 
expressed in French by one of the pronouns personal in 
the dative ; and when joined to a noun substantive, it 
ought to be rendered by a pronoun possessive absolute, 
and the substantive must be put in the genitive plural : 



Dat. 



Aux miens, 



ex. 



Ce livre est a moi, 
Oest un de mes amis, 



This book is mine. 
He is a friend of mine. 



EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

Your daughter is handsomer than mine, but 
heau,3.dj, 
mine has more wit than yours. - - - Her bouse is 

esprit,m, 
more convenient than ours, but yours is not so 

commocZe, adj. 
well situate as theirs. ^ - - This hat is mine an^ 

C6,pro. 



iOi 



sword is jours and 



not yours, but this 

nonpas ce^/e,pro. 

not his. - - - I lost a book of mine, and a friend 

aiperdu^Y* 
of yours found it. - - - He sold me a knife, 

a trouve^Y. couteau^m, 

but this knife was ' not his, it was a friend of his 

itoit^Y. 
who had lent it to him. 

prtti^Y, 

OF PRONOUNS DEMONSTRATIVE. 

These pronouns are called demonstrative^ because 
they distinguish, in a precise manner, the persons or 
things to which they are applied. They are, 

Singular. 

Feminine. 
cette^ this, that. 
ce//e, she, that* 
celk'Ci^ this. 
celle-ld^ that. 

Plural. 

Feminine. 



Masculine. 

Ce, cet* 
Celui, he, that, 
Celui-ci^ 
Celui-ldj 



Masculine. 

Ceux, ■ 
Ceux-ci^ 
Ceux-ld, 
Ce qu% ce que^ what. 
Cea, this ; ce/a, that.t 
The last two are always of the masculine gender, and 
of the singular number. 



ces^ these, those* 
eelles, they, these, those. 
celles'ci^ these. 
celhs'ld, those. 



* Cet is used before a noun masculine beginning: with a vowel, or 
H mute : ex. cet oistau^ this bird ; cet honneur^ this honor. 

t The word tkat^ whether expres?ed or understood, coming between 
♦wo verbs, and followed by a noun or pronoun, is then a conjunction, 
and njost be rendered into French by que^ which must be placed im- 
mcuii.tely sfter the first verb : ex. 
J-& aais que voire frgre est wanV, I know that your brother is married. 



105 

^ese pronouns are declined with the article indefi- 
nite, (ic, a : ex. 

Singular. 

Masculine. 
Nom. AcG. ce livre^ this or that book. 
Gen. Abl. de ce livre^ of or from this book. 
Dat. d ce livre, to this book. 

Plural. 
Nom. Ace. ces Hvres^ these books. 
Gen. Abl. de ces livres^ of or from these books. 
Dat. a ces livres, to these books. 

Singular. 

Feminine. 
Nom. Ace. ceiteplume^ this or that pen. 
Gen. Abl. de cette plume^ of or from this pen. 
Dat. a cette plume ^ to this pen. 

Plural, 
Nom. Ace. ces plumes^ these pens. 
Gen. Abl. de ces plumes^ of or from these pens. 
Dat. a ces plumes, to these pens. 

Singular. 

Masculine. 
Nom. Ace. celw, he, him, that. 
Gen. Abl. de cehii, of or from hinct* 
Dat. a celui, to him. 

Feminine. 
Nom. Ace. celle, she, her, that. 
Gen. Abl. de celle, of or from her. 
Dat. a celle, to her. 

Plurai^ 
Masc. Fem. 

N. Ace. cewx, celles, they, them, those, such as. 

G. Abl, de ceux, de celles, of or from those. 
Dat. a ceux, a cellesy to those. 

The others are declined as the precediag. 



106 

N. B. He, she, they, him, her, them, being immediately 
followed in a sentence hy who, whom, or that, used in 
an indeterminate sense, not relating to any individual 
mentioned before, and only implying any person, one or 
any body, must not be rendered in French by the per- 
sonal pronouns, il, die, &lc, but by the above pronouns^ 
eelui, celle, &c. 

The same rule must be observed with respect to such 
as, such that, used in English in the same sense as h» 
toho, they who : ex. 
Celui ou celle qui pratique la He or she who practices 

vertu vit heureux, virtue lives happy. 

€eux qui meprisent la sci- Such as despise learning do 

mce n'en connoissent pas not know its value,. 

k prixy 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

He who supports idleness makes himself 

encourage,Y, rend,v» 

despicable. - - - She whom you saw at my 
meprisahle,Rdj, que,^TO. vites,v, chez,]p, 

brother's is not yet married. ----- You 

encore, adv. marie, adj. 

punish him who is not guilty. Men com- 

punissez,\^ coupable,^dj, ordi- 

monly^ hate^ him whom they fear. - - - .- 

nairemeni, adv. haissent,Y. que,pro, craignent,y. 
She whom you hate is my best friend. - - You 

haissez,\» amie,f, 

have punished him who did jiot deserve it, 

pwm,p.p. *^ miritoit,\^ 

and rewarded ber who was guilty. - - We 

recompense, p.p. 
©ught to pray for them who persecute 
devons,Y, ^wi, pro. pers6cutent,v* 

us. - - Of all virtues, that which most^ dis- 

qui,ipTO, leplus,adv, dis- 
tinguishes^ a Christian is charity. - - This book and 
tingue^Y* 



107 

that which I lent you are the two best. - - 

que^ pro. ai pretty v. 
Such as seem to be happy, are not 

^i«,pro. paroissent^v, 6tre^v» 
always so. 

ioajours, ^dy» 

Ce, cette, ces^ this, that, these, those, most always 
precede the substantive to which they are joined, and 
agree with it in gender, number, and case. On the 
contrary, celui^ celle^ celui-ci^ ceUe-ci^ cehii-ld^ celle-ld, this, 
that, &c. either in the singular or plural, are never 
joined to any noun ; for the noun to which they refer 
is always implied in the pronoun : ex. 

J'ai vu le portrait du pere I have seen the father's 
tt cdui du Jils, picture, and that of the 

son. 

EXERCISE ON THIS RULE. 

She who dines with us, is my brother's wife. - ^ 

dine^v, arec,p. femme^f. 

She brought her picture, and that of her 

a apporti^v. portrait ^m, 

husband. - - - I have seen the king's palace, and 
man,m. palais^m. 

that of the queen. - - - That gold watch, which: 

montre^L que,pro* 
you showed me, is not yours, it is that of 

avez montri^v. c'est^v, 

your brother. - - I have lost my buckles and 

perdu^p^p, 
those of your cousin. - - - Your books and those of 

cousin^ m. 
your little sister are torn. - - - I know thii 

^e/i^,adj. d6chir6^p,p» connois^v, 

cap, it is that of your mother. 

bonnet^ m, c'e5/,v. 

N. B. The pronoun that, either in the singular or 
|)lural, is often suppressed in English, and supplied hif 



108 

an apostrophe and an 5, thus ('5), at the end of the noun 
substantive as above, but it must be expressed in French 
hy the above pronouns celui, cellc, and according to the 
gender and number of the object to which it refers : ex. 
7/ a pris mon chapeau et He has taken mj hat and 
celui de mon pere^ my father's, that is, and 

that of my father. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

You have torn my govrn and my sister's. - - 

c?ec/iiVe,p.p. rohe^L 
I have found my hat and my brother's in the 

trouve, p.p. 

room. The thieves came by night 

chambre^L ro/ewr,m. entrerenl,\, c?e nm7, adv. 

into my father's house, they broke open my room 

ouvment^Y, «oo 
and my mother's, and stole my watch and 

volerent^v. 
my sister's. - - Vou may, if you please, take 

pouvez^Y. vouhz^y, prendre^y. 

your grammar and your brother's, but leave 

laissez^ v. 
mine and my friend's. - - - - Our oranges and Mr. 

orange^i. 
Savage's are the best that you can 

Sauvage, on, pro. puisse^y* 

find. 
trauver^y. 

Sometimes the particles ci, M, here, there, are also 
joined to the substantive following the pronouns, ce. 
cette, ces^ to distinguish with more precision the objects 
to which they are applied : ex. 

Ce chapeau'ci, this hat ; cette ville-la^ that town, &c. 

N. B. The two following expressions, the former, 
ceiui-la,m» ceUe-laS. ceux-la.,xY\. celles-Id^L ; the latter, 
celui-ci^m, ctllc-d^L ceux-ci^m» celhs-ci^L referring to 
substantives mentioned in a preceding sentence, are 



I 



109 

degantly used in French, and agree with the nouns, 
instead of le premier, le second, the repetition of which 
they avoid : ex. 

Un Francois et un Ecos- A Frenchman and a Scotch- 

sois se' hattirent hier a man fought yesterday with 

Vepee, celui-la, fut hlessi swords, the former was 

a Pepaule, et celui-ci au wounded in the shoulder 

brers, ' and the latter in the arm. 

« 

EXERCISE ON THIS RULE. 

Learn this lesson, it is not so difficult 

Apprene2,\\ difficiie,2Ldj. 

as that. - - - I prefer this way to that road. - - - 

chemin,m. route,L 

This room is much larger than that parlour. - - 

graad,2id], salon,m. 

These candles are better than those. - - - 

chandelle.L 
(There was) a great battle between George 

II y eut,v, comhat.m. €ntre,-p, 

and Stephen ; the former had a broken nose, 

Etienne.m. eut^v, le ca^^e.p.p. nez,m, 

and the latter lost a tooth. - - In the engagements 

pe rdii, v. bataille^ f. 

which took place between the Austrians 
qui,\n'o. eurent^y, lieu^m. Autrichien,m, 

and the French. the former lost two 

Franrois.m, perdirenf^v, 

thousand men, and the latter fifteen hundred. - - * 

ho/nmc.m. 
Among the peaches w^hich you sent me at two 
Parmi.p, pechej. que.pro, a 

different times, I observed that the former 

dijf6rent,3.d), fois.f. airemarqu6^\\ 
were better than the latter. 
itoient,\, 

Ce qui, in the nominative case, ce que, in the accu- 
sative, what. This pronoun is never joined to any noun ; 
it always may be turned into that which, or the thin^r 



110 

which -J and ced, cela, this, that, are only used when 
speaking of things, the word thing being always under- 
stood : ex. 

Je sais ce qui est arrive, I know what has hap- 
pened. 

Savez-vous ce que je Do you know what I 
pense ? think ? 

Ceci me plait, ■ This pleases, me ; i, e, 

this thing, &c. 

Ccla me fait peur, That frightens me; i, e. 

that thing, &c. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

May I know what causes your grief 

Puis^v* s avoir, y* cause, v, chagrin,m, 

and sadness? - - - Your father has (a good deal) 
tristesse,L beaucoup, a.d\\ 

of friendship for you; for, he * never* 

car,c. ne jamais,adv, 

refuses^ you^ what you ask of him. - - - - 

refuse,v, demandez,\* *<» 

You seem much dejected, tell me what 

paroissez,v» bieti,a.dY, ahattu,^dj, dites-w,m 
vexes you. - - - Go and tell my father what 

fdche,y. Allez,\» v5^ direa,Y. 

has passed here and do not forget what you 

s^est pass6,v, icr,adv. «o^ ouhliez,v, 

have seen, and what you have heard. Give 

e7itendu,p»p. 
me this, and take that. - - - I prefer this to 

prenez,y. prefere^r* 

that. 

OF PRONOUNS RELATIVE. 

These pronouns are called relative, because they 
have always a reference to some other roiin or pronoun 
in the discourse, either expressed or implied. They 
are declined as follows ; 



Ill 

Singular and Plural* 
Both Genders* 
Norn. qui, who, which, that. 

Gen. de qui,OT dont, of whom, whose,* of whichi 

Dat. a qui, to whom, to which, 

Ace. que, qui,1 whom, which, that. 

AhL de, qui, dont, from whom, from which. 

Ace. quoi, que, what. 

Gen. Abl. de quoi,or dont, of or from what. 

Dat. a quoi, to what. 

Singular. 
Mascuhne. Feminine. 

Nom. Ace. lequel, laquelle, which. 

Gen. Abl. duquel, or dont, de laquelle, of or from, &;c. 
Dat. aiiquel, a laquelle, to which. 

Plural. 
Nom. Ace. lesquels, lesquelhs, which. 

Gen. AbL desquels^ordont, desquelles, of or from, &c. 
Dat. auxquels, auxquelles, to which. 

The noun, or pronoun, to which the pronoun relative 
has a reference, is called the antecedent, with which it 
must agree in gender and number : ex. 
Je connois un homme qui doit I know a man who is to go 

aller voir le camp, and see the camp. 

In this sentence qui has a reference to homme, man, 
because I can say, lequel homme, which man, &c. 
J-ai lu la lettre que vous I have read the letter (that) 

m'^avez envoyte, you sent me. 

In this last sentence que has a reference to lettre, letter, 
because it may be said, laquelle lettre, which letter, &:c. 

* Whose^ being used interrogatively, must be rendered in French 
by (i qui : ex. 

A qui est ce Urre ? Wliose book is this ? 

t Qui, whom, is never used in the accusative but when it is govern- 
ed by some of the prepositions : ex. 

AvRC qui^ With whom. Pour qui, For whom. 

or when it signifies what person : ex. 

Amentz qui rous roudrez, Bring whom you please; 

tBat is, i*/ia/ iiersen you please. 



112 

The relative que^ whom, which, or that, is sometimei 
understood iu English, but it must always be expressed 
in French : ex. 

La dame que vous connoissez The lady you know is BT- 
€st arrivee, rived. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

The man who sold me these pens is vei^ 

a vendu^v. 
cunning. - - - The lady of whom you speak 
rit5e,adj. dame^L parlez^v^ 

is not handsome. - - Miss D***, whom you love 

aimez^y, 
10 much, is very ill. - - - The person t<f> 

.<fl?n/,adv. ?7ia/a(ie,adj. personne^L 

whom I wrote last year has answered 

ai ecrit^Y. passe,ip,p, ann6e^(, repondu^ip,^, 

me this morning. - - He who was with you, related 

matin^m» itoit^Y. a raconie^Y), 

to me (every thing) that had passed. - - - 

tout ce s''6ioit,Y. passe,ip,Tp, 

She will not hear of the lady whona 

veut^Y, entendre parhr^Y, 

he (is going) to many. Shun vice, and 

ija,Y. ipouser^Y, Evitez^Y. vice,m, 

love what is good. - - - Who was with 

aimez^Y, 5on,adj. etoit^Y, avec,-p. 

you? - - - It was a gentleman, whose^ name^ P 

Ce monsieur ^Td, now,m. 

know* ^not^. - - Men generally^ love^ him 

sais^Y, g6n6ralement,2idY. 

who flatters them. - - The man I sent you was 

fiatte^Y. ai envoy e,Y. 

honest. - - Whose ^ sword* is^ this^ ? - - You speak 

parhzyY, 

of the lady whose husband has been so ill. 

man,m. e/e,p.p. 

These pronouns, like the personal and conjunctive, 

when governed by two or more verbs, must be repeated 

(in French) before each governing verb, though most 



113 

commonly expressed but once in English, and before 
the first verb : ex. 

Le Dieu que nous aimons The God whom we love 
et que nous adorons^ and worship. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

The man who caresses and flatters you is the 
caresse^Y, 
most dangerous being I know. A man 

plus^^^y. etre^m, comioisse^v. 

whose manners are innocent, and behaviour 

W(EMr5,f.pl. innocent, a,dj, conduite^L 

is blameless, is the man whom we ought to che- 

irreprochable^3.dj, devons^v, ^<^ chi- 

rish and honor. - - - - The letters which jou have 
riV,v. respecter^ v. 

written, and showed me, were tole- 

ecn7e5,p.p. mon/re^5,p.p. etoienf^v. passa- 

rably well. - - - The woman to whom 1 have 

6/emen^,ady. femme^f, 

lent so much money, and spoken so often, 

jprefe,p.p. parZe,p.p. 

is dead. - - - Servants are men or wc- 

morf, adj. Domestiques ^xn*eif, m(,c. 

men whom we keep and reward 

nourrissons^Y, recompensons^v, 

for the services which they do us. 

/>OMr,p. rendent^Y. 

When the words to zohich^ to what, at which, at xchat^ 
in zchich^ in zvhat, have a reference to inanimate things, 
and when they can be expressed by zohere, whereto, 
iohereat, or wherein, they are to be rendered in French 
by the adverb of place, oii : ex. 
Je vous monlrerai la niai- I will show you the house 

son ow il demeure, in which he lives ; that 

is, where he lives. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

The state of misery to which he was reduced 

riduit, p.p. 
10* 



114 

has touched me to the quick. - - The town t# 

four's, ('.p. au vif,m, ville^f, 

which he is gone is precisely the same 

a'/e,p.p. precisement,3,dv» 7?2ewe,adj. 
place through which we went in (coming up) 

pJac'^L par^^, oil passames^v. en,^,venant,ip,a.ct, 

to London. - - (This is) the door through which 

Fold, adv. 
the thi'^'ves went into the house. - - The pri- 

vof(^ii. r, m. entrc'^ent^ v. 
son in which ^) r v used to shut up 

on^pTO. avoit coufume^v, de renfermeryY* 
the prisoneis, has been demolished. 
prisonniei , rrs. deiruite^ p.p. 

Qiioi, what, and s« metimes that or which, is never 
used in the noniinative case : in the other cases it is 
generally used in an indeterminate signification, and 
is never expressed except in speaking of inanimate 
thiri:>-s, and especially when it has for its antecedent, 
ce or rien : ex. 

Ce&'i a quoi je vous con- It is what I advise you to 

sdlJc de penser^ think of. 

II n^y a rien a quoi il ne There is nothing for which 

soit dispose^ he is not disposed. 

EXERCISE ON THIS RULE. 

Of what does your^ sister^ complain* ? - - - What J 
too se plaint^v, 

you dare answer me thus ! - - For what do 

osez^v, repondre^w mn5i,adv. Powr,p. «-s>^ 

you call me ? - - Why did you 

appellez^y* Pour quoi ^2idv, avez^v, 

bring that man before me ? what is he 

amene^ p.p. devant^ p. 

guilty of? - - What is your brother sorry 

coupable^adj, ^ac^e, adj. 

for? - - At what were* you^ playing*, when I cam« 
4e « jouiez^y, ^'^'^ 



115 



in ? - To what shalP we^ apply^ ourselves ? - • 

tntre^Y, appliquerons^v, nait^jpro. 

('There^ is^) 2 nothing^ for which he is not 

II y «,v. ne nm,adv. a soit^Y. nft 

fit. - - - In what do you intend to spend 

jorqpre,adj. ^ ^^ proposez-vousyV, de passer ^v, 

your holidays ? 
vacance^L 

When we speak of irrational beings or inanimate 
things in the genitive, dative, or ablative cases, we 
make use of Icquel, laquelle, which, &c. instead of mii ; 
also after a preposition, and when who, Vv hem, or which, 
refer to one or more objects on which the choice is to 
be formed : ex. 



Le cheval miqiiel vous don- 

nez a boire, 
'La fenetre sur laquelle 

vous vous appuyez, 
Apportez lequel vous vou- 

drezs 



The horse to which yo« 

give some drink. 
The window upon which 

you lean. 
Bring whom you please. 



EXERCISE ON THIS RULE. 

The trade to which you apply, 

commerce^m, vous vous appliquez^r* 

and the profession to which you are devoted, 

professions^, c?erowe,p.p. 

are very honorable. - - (Is that) the hcrse for 

Eet<e !d,v, 
-which you gave a hundred guineas ? 



is a vice for which young 



people 

gens.pl. 

- The 



Mensonge^m 



Lying 
hnso'i 

ought to 

doivent^v, <<» 

table, upon 



have the greatest horror. - 

horreur^f, table J, 5i/r,p, 

which you write, is broken. - - - The reasons 

ecrivez^v, ca^^e, p.p. 

upon which you ground your system arc 

appayez^ v. sysfeme, m: 

satisfactory. - - - (There are) four drawings, which 
satisfaisant^^d^, Fo*7djadv» desseitiyiQ, 



116 

do jrcHi choose ? - - (Here are) two pears, which 

•^ choisissez^v, Voic{,a.d\, poire^f. 

will you have ? - - They are two sisters, which 

X)oulez,y» io> sont^y, 

do you like the best ? 

«<jo aimez^y,, le ?wiewa?,adv. 

OF PRONOUNS INTERROGATIVE. 

They are called interrogative^ because they are used 
only in asking questions, and have no antecedent : they 
are declined with the article indefinite. 

Singular and Plural. 

Both Genders. 

Nom. Ace. qui, who, whom. 

Gen. Abl. de qui^ of or from whom. 

Dat. a qui, to whom, whose. 

Nom. Ace. quoi, or que, what ;* 

Or, qu'est-ce qui, qu^est-ee que. 
Gen. Abl. de quoi, of or from what. 
Dat. a quoi, to what. 

Singular. 
Masculine. Feminine. 

N.A. quel, or lequel, quelle, or laquelle, what, which, 
G.A. de quel, &c. de quelle, 8ic. of or from, &c. 

Dat. a quel, &c. a quelle, &c. to what, which. 

Plural* 
Masculine. Feminine. 

N.A. quels, or lesquels, quelles, or lesquelles, what, which. 
G.A. de quels, &c. de quelles, &c. of or from, &c. 

Dat. a quels. Sac* a quelles, &c. to what, which. 

Qui, who, whom, as an interrogative pronoun, al- 
ways refers to persons, and never to things ; and it may 
be expressed by quelle personne ? what person ? Qu&i 

* When ivhat, in English, signifies How much, it must be 
Expressed in French by cambim. 



117 

and que^ what, have always a reference to things and 
never to persons, and may be expressed by quelle chose f 
what thing ? According to the French idiom, quoi can 
never be pat befojye a verb as its accusative, it is always 
que : ex. 

Qui est'ld ? Who is there ? 

De quoi parlez'vous ? What are you speaking of? 

Que voulez-vous ? or, quhst' What do you want ? 
ce que vous voulez ? 

EXERCISE ON THIS RULE. 

Who was the first king of France ? - - Who can 

/u/,v. peut^Y, 

give credit to a young man who does not speak 

ajouter^ v. /of, f. dit^ v. 

the truth? - - - Of whom were^ you^ speaking % when 

V erite^ f. parliez, v. 

I came ? - - - To whom did you lend my 

vins^y, ' avez^y, |?re/e,p.p. 

slate ? - - - Whoni do you seek ? - - W' ho told 
ardoise^i. "o^ cherchcz^v. adit^Y. 

it to you ? - - From whom do you know it ? - - - What^ 

'<^ savez^y, 

are^ you^ doing^ ? - - - W hat do you say ? - - What 

faites,y, difes^y, 

do you ask of me ? - - Who is the man 

demandez^y, usn 

who can boast of being without defect ? - •• 

peut^y, se vanter^y, de etre^y, sans^-p, defaut^m. 
What is the name of your father ? - - - What is hit 

nam,m. 
occupation ? - - What are his amusements ? - - What 
occupation^L sont^y, plaisir^m. 

is his business ? - - In what city does he^ live^ ? - - 
«^«tre5,pl. ville^L ^^ deme.ure,t» 

What is the country in which he was born ? 

pai/Sj m. ft pris naissancu 



118 

In the last instances it may easily "be seen, that qud^ 
or quelle, what, is always joined to some substantive with 
which it must agree in gender and number. 

In order to avoid repetition, lequel, laquelh^ which are 
elegantly used as suhstantives for quel, or quelle, and the 
substantive to which it is joined ; and then lequel must 
always be followed by a genitive, either expressed or 
understood : ex. 

line de mes scaurs est One of my sisters is mar- 

mariee, ried. 

Laquelle est-ce ? that is, Which is it ? that is, 

laquelh de. vos ^ccur^ which of your sisters 

est'Ce? is it ? 

Exercise on this rule. 

Oiie of your cousins is arrived from the 
cousm,m, arW'i?e,p.p. 
continent ; which is it ? - - An aunt of yours was 
continent, m, 6toit,r. 

ill last week ; which was 

malade,adj, c^ermerc, adj. semaine,f. 
it ? - - I have heard that two horses of yours 

oui dire,v, 
were lost : tell me which. - - My brother 

6toient,y. perdu,^,ip. dites,y, 

wrote to me, that two of your sisters (are going) 

6crivit,v. vqnt,Y* 

to learn French ; which are they ? - • 

apprendre,v, Frangois,m* sont,Y, 

They (were speaking) of a relation of his, and 

parloien t, v. parent, m. 

of one of my friends ; which were they ? 
amie, f, 

OF PRONOUNS INDEFINITE. 

These pronouns are called indefinite or indetermmate, 
lx€cau«e they geneially are subsiituted ^<^i^ tbe name of 



I 



119 



a vague and indeterminate object. Among them some 
are used as nouns adjective, being always joined to a 
noun substantive ; others are sometimes used as pro- 
nouns without a substantive, and sometimes as adjec- 
tives with a substantive. 



Aucun, aucune^ 

Jlutre, 
Autrui, 
Chacun^ chacmie, 

Chaque^ 
Vun Pautre^ 



jes uns- 



-les auires^ 



IjU7i et Vautre^ 
Dun ou P autre, 
JVi Pun ni Pautre, 
Nul, nulle, 
Pas un, pas une^ 
Personne^ 

Laplupart c?e, des^ 

Plusieurs, 

Quelconque, 

Quelque, 

Quelque chose^ 

Quclque — que^ 

Quel — que, 

Quelle — que, 

Quelque chose qui or que, 

Quoi que, 

Quo't que ce soil que, 

Tout ce qui, or que, 

Quelqu^un, quelqu'unt^ 

Quiconque, 



None, no one, not one, not 

any. 
Other, any other. 
Other, other people. 
Each, every one, every 

body. 
Every, each. 
One another, each other. 

Some others. 

Some some. 

Both. 

Either. 

Neither. 

None, 

No one, not one. 

Ngbody, none, no one, any 

one, any body. 
Most. 

1\Iany, several. 
Whatever. 
Some, any. 

Something, any thing. 
Whosoever, whatsoever, 

whatever, however, 

howsoever, though, &c* 



Whatever, whatsoever. 



Some, some one, some- 
body, any body. 
Whoever, any bouy. 



no 



Qui que ce soit^ orfut, 



Quoiqu6 ce soil, or fut. 



Rien, 

Tel, telle, 

Tel qii% 

Telle qui^ 

Tout, 

Tout le monde. 

Tout que, 



Whoever, nobody in the 
world, nobody at ail, 
any body whatever, no 
man living, let him be 
who he will, or be who 
he may, &c. 

Whatever, nothing in the 
world, nothing what- 
ever. 

Nothing, any thing. 

Such a one, such. 

Such as he, she, they^ 
who, that, &c. 

Every, every thing. 

Every body, any body. 

As — as, for all, although, 
however, &c. 



Observations on some of the above Pronouns. 

Aucun, aucune, is never used but in the singular, and 
always negatively ; it relates tp a person or thing men- 
tioned before ; but in some sentences, and when it ex- 
presses a doubt, it is used without a negation : ex. 

Aucun ne s''est encore avise No one has yet thought of 
de vous contredire, contradicting you. 

Y a-t-il aucun {ou aucune) Is there any of you wh© 
de vous qui le souffrit ? would suffer it ? 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 



Not one of the books which you saw me 

avez rw,v. 
buying, pleases me. - - - Of all the apples 

acheter^y, plait,v. pomme,L 

which you gave me, none is yet 

avez Jonne,p.p. encore, ad v. 

fit to eat Is there any of you who 

Sonjadj, a manger, v. Y a-t-il, 



121 

applies to study as much as he can ? - - Among 

s'^applique^Y. etude,t\ peut^y, 

all the ladies you know, is there any one who 

dame J. connoissez^Y, 

would have married him ? - - Philip is cer- 

eiit voulu^Y, ipousti\Y, Philippe. m. cer- 

tainly a very wicked man, for none 

iaitiement,3.d.v. mec/i«nf,adj. c«r,c. 

of his friends speak well of him. Do you 

parle^v, ' 'o^ 

know any news ? No, sir, I know 

savez^v. nouveUe^f, monsieur^ sais^v. 

none. - - I was in trouble, and none of 

etois^y, dans,-p, emharras^m. 
my friends have relieved me. 
5ecoitr(i,p.p- 

Xid, pas im, are always accompanied by a negation, 
and can only be used as a nominative to the verb : Per- 
Sonne is likewise attended with a negation, except in 
sentences of doubt, admiration, or interrogation : ex. 

J\^ul nepeut se flatter d''itre No one can flatter himself 

agreahle a dieu, to be agreeable to God. 

Pas un ne le croit, Not one believes it. 

Personne shst-il jamais ex- Did ever any body express 

prime avec plus de grace himself with more grace 

que Sheridan ? than Sheridan 2 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE* 



No one in this world 

e/i,p. monde^m, 

fault, - - - No one can pretend 
defauf^m, pretendre^v 

fectly happy in 

faitement^adv, dans, p. 

•rery. - - All the sailors perisb 
matelot.,m» ontpe 
U 



is free 


from 


exempt ^-SLdj. 
to be 


per- 


V. itre^v. 
this land 


par- 
of mi- 


terre^f. 




led at 


sea, 


:n,v. mr.p. 


wer, f» 



122 

not one escaped. - - - - The soldiers are all re- 
a echappe^Y, soldat,m. re- 

turned, not one has remained behind. - - - 
'z;enw,p.p. est^y*. re5fe,p.p. <^emere,adv. 

Nobody can boast of being without im- 

se vanter^Y. etre^Y, sans,p. 

perfections. - - As nobody speaks to you, 

Comme, adv. parle^Y, 

you ought not to speak to any body. Did 

devez,Y. parhr^Y, A-t-il 

ever any body know in what happiness 

cowiWjp.p. en, p. bonheur^m, 

consists ? 
consiste^Y, 

Autre refers to persons and things, but autrui refers to 
persons only ; the latter has neither gender nor number, 
and can only be used in the genitive or dative case : ex. 

Cette plume n'^ est pas bonne, This pen is not good, give 

Monnez lui en une autre, . him another. 

JVe prenez pas le hien d-au- Do not take other people's 

irui, goods. 

EXERCISE ON THIS RULE. 

Your brother has lost his books, shall I 

percfii,p.p. 
give him others ? - - - As you broke my 

donnerai, v. avez cass6,Y, 

penknife, you will give me another. - - Other peo- 
canif,Yn* donnerez,Y, 

pie's opinions are not the rule of mine. - - - - 

sentiment,in, regh,{. 

Do not speak ill of other people, if you 

parlez, v. mal, adv. 
will have nobody speak ill of you. - - - 

voulez,Y,que parle,Y. 

Always^ remember^ that principle of na- 

souvenez-voiis de ce principe,m, na- 



^^ 



123 

tural law, do not to others what you 

<Mre/,adj. loi,L faites^v, 

would not wish that (they should do) to you. - - 

v9^ voudriez^v. . on fit^v. 

What are other people's troubles, if (they he com- 

peine^L si^c, on les com- 
pared) with ours. 
pare^Y, aux 

Chaque and chacun are used indifferently ; c^uiqiit 
always requires a substantive after it, and cJiacun is used 
substantively in a general or limited sense, botli men- 
tioning persons or things. 

Chaque langue a ses idioines Each language has its pe*- 

pdrticuliers, culiar idioms. 

Chacun a son tour^ Every one in his turn. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

Every thing in its time. - - Every virtue has 

chose^i, dans^ip, tems^m* 
its reward, and each vice has its punishment. - - 

recompense^ f. * chdtiment^ m. 

Let every soldier keep his post to 

Que se tienne,v» a poste^m. pour.ip. 

avoid any surprise from the enemy. - - 

eviier^v, <OKf,adj. snrprise^L dc la part de Veimemi^m, 
Every one thinks and acts for him-self. - - Do not 

pense^v, ajyit^c, soi, •o^ 

speak all at once, hut each in your turn. - - - 

a la fois, 3idv. a 

England expects every man will do his duty 

attend^y. fera^v, devoir, m, 

in case of danger. - - Trees bear their fruits 

en Arhre^m. portent ^y, 

each in their season. - - Let us give to every 

dans^\), oo, rejidons^v. 

one what belongs to him. - - Let every one 

apparticnt^y. Que 

meddle with his own business. 

se meh.y. de propre.adj, aff}nrcs,\)L 



1^4 



^ Uun f autre express a reciprocity in the action, and 
may be applied to persons or things ; and if there be a 
preposition in English, it must be placed between 
them : ex. 

Jh se haissent Vun Pantre^ They hate each other. 
lis parlent mal Vun de They speak ill of one 
Pauircy another. 



EXERCISE ON THIS RULE. 

Fire and water destroy one another. -- My 

se detruisent^w 
*isters can not bear each other. — 

peuvent,\» se souffrir^v. 

Love one another, said our Lord 

Aimez-^ous^Y, dit^y. Seigneur^m, 

to his disciples. - - - The seasons follow each 

disciple^m., saison^i, se siiivent^v. 

other without interruption. Thieves alway^^ 

sans^p, Voleur^m, 

mistrust^ one another. - - They do jus- 

se defientj Je,v. se rendent^y, 

tice to one another. - ^ It is rare to hear 

rare, adj. de entendrt,y^, 
two authors speak well of one another. - - - 

auteur^m, dire, v. du 5zen,m. 
Multiplication teaches to multiply two 

jMultiplicaiion,L enseigne.y. a midiiplicr^y. 

numbers by each other. The columns 

nombre^m, par^p, colonne^i. 

were close against one another. 

eioient^y.. serre, adj. con/re, p. 

Vun et Pautre always require the verb in the plural, 
and may likewise be applied to persons or things ; ni 
Pun ni Pautre require the verb to be put in the singular, 
if that pronoun be placed before the verb, and in the 
plural, if it come after it ; but in both cases the verb 
must be preceded by the negation nej ex, -^ 



125 

Vun et i'^ autre ont raison^ Both are in the right. 

M Pun ni Vautre ne repond, Neither of them answer. 

or Us ne repondent ni Pun 

ni Pautre, 

N. B. The preposition must be placed between 
them, and both is not expressed in French when it pre- 
cedes two nouns or pronouns united by the conjunction 
and: ex. 
Sonfrere et sa sceur sont Both his brother and sis- 

morts^ ter are dead. 

EXERCISE ON THIS RULE. 

Both serve to the sftme purpose. - - - I 

servent^Y, ?neme,adj. usage,m, 

called on your cousins, and I heard 
aipasse^v* chez cousine^L ai appris^v, 

that both had been married a week be- 

que avoient^v, mane,p.p. semauie^L au- 

fore. - - - Honor your father and mother 

paravanf.,adv» Respectez^v* 
and endeavour to please both. - Do you speak 

tdchez^Y* deplaire^v. a ^<?^ parhz^w 

of my brother or sister? I speak of both. - Apples 

parle^v* Pomrm^L 

and pears are good fruits, but peaches are pre- 

poire^L piche^i. pre- 

ferable to both. - I wrote to both, but neither of 
ferable, adj . ai tcrit^ v. 

them answered my letters. - Yesterday I expected 

arepondu^y, attendoisjV. 

my two best friends, but neither of them came. - - I 

vinrent^v. 
will give it to neither of them. - - Do you prefer 
donnerai^Y* --on 

currants to cherries? - - I like neither (of them.) - 
groseille^L cerise^f, aime^Y, ^<» 

Both religion and virtue are the bonds of eivi! 

society. 

11* 



126 

Quelque — que* Quelque immediately joined to ^ 
noun followed by que^ expresses an indeterminate qua- 
lit}' or quantity ; it is declinable before a substantive and 
indeclinable before an adjective, and requires the verb 
to be put in the subjunctive mood : ex. 
Quelques fautes que vous Whatever faults you may 

ayez faites, on vous par- have committed, they 

donnera, will forgive you. * 

Quelque grandes que soient However great your faults 

vos fautes^ on vous par- be, they will forgive 

donnera, you, 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

^Whatever efforts people make to hide 

effort^m, on, pro. fasse^v, powr,p. voilei\\* 
truth, it (is discovered) sooner or later. - Whatr 

se decouvre^Y. ^of.adv. tard,3.dv. 

ever services you may have done to your 

servlce^m* ayez^y. rendus^^,^. 

country, it will reward you for them. - - What- 

pafrie^i, recompensera^v, t 

ever capacity a man may have, he ought not to 

puisse,v, doit^Y, se 

boast. - - However equitable your^ offers^ be% 
vanter,Y» offre^L soient, v, 

I do not believe they will be accepted. - - ^ Though* 

lo^ crois^y* soient^y, acceptee^ip,p. 

kings^ be^ ever so powerfuP they die 

soient, y, ^o* puissant^3.dj. meurent^y, 

as well as the meanest of their subjects. - - However 

■ H 'r5t7,adj. sujet,m» 

learned those ladies may be, they sometimes^ 
sasanf.s.dj, quelquefois^zdy* 

mistake \ 
se trompent^y. • 

Quel que, quelle que must be thus divided, when it is 
immediately followed by a verb or a personal pronoun, 
and agree in gender and number with the noun to which 
it relates ; it likewise requires the verb to be put in the 
subjunctive mood ; ex. 



127 

Quelle que soil votrefaute, Whatever your fault maj 
on vous pardonnera^ be, they will forgive )ou. 

Whatever the enemy be, whose malice^ you' 
ennemi,m, malice^ f, 

dread,^ you ought to rely on your 

apprehendez^y, dtvez^v, vous reposer^v, sur^^» 

innocence. - - Laws condemn all criminals, 

condamneni^Y, crirninel^m, 

whoever they may be. - Whatever your inten- 

puisscnt^Y, inien- 

tions may be, I think that you (are in the wrong), 
tion^f. aveztort. 

Whatever the reasons be, which you may allege, 

raison^f. alleguiez^v. 

they are not sufficient. - - Whatever these books 

suffisant^ adj . livre, m. 

be, send them to me. - Whatever her fortune be, 

fortune^L 
he says he never will marry her. 
dit^Y. 6pousera,Y, 

Quelque chose qui or que^ quoi que, quoi que ce soit 
que, tout ce qui or que, always relate to things, and 
never to persons ; with this difference, that, in 
French, we generally begin the sentence with either 
quelque chose que or qui, quoi que, or quoique ce soit 
que, with the following verb in the subjunctive mood : 
ex. 

Quelque chose qii'on vous Whatever may be said' to 
dise, tie le croyez pas, you, do not believe it. 

Quoi que ce soit qu'^on vous Whatever they may say to 
dise, ne le croyez pas, you, do not believe it. 

EXERCISE ON THIS RULE. 

Whatever may happen to you in this world, 

puisse,Y, ar river, Y, monde,m, 

never murmer against divine providence, for 

murmurez,Y, contre,^, car,c» 



"# 



128 

wliatever we maj suffer, we deserve it. - - What- 

sovffrions,Y» miritons^w, 
ever I may do, you always blame me^ - - Who i& 

fasse,Y, hldmez^v, 

the man who has stolen his money ? I know not ; 

ro/e,p.p. sais<,y. 

but whoever he may be, and Whatever he may say, 

dise^T. 
if my father catch him, he shall be punished. - ^ 

attrappe^v, 
in whatever your master employs you, do it 

^ empl^e^Yt faites^v, 

heartily. - - - * Whatever you may say, your 
c?e ton ccEwr, adv. disiez^v, 

brothers shall be punished, if they deserve it. 
seront^v, meritent^v* 

On the contrary, we always make use of tout ce 
qui or qucy when whatever can be turned into all that 
iohich^ or every thing which ; and may be placed either 
tt the beginning or in the middle of a sentence, accord- 
ing to its situation in English, with the following verb 
in the indicative mood : ex. 

// fera toujours tout ce He will always do what- 
quHl vous plaira, ever, or every thing, you 

please. 

BXERCISE ON THIS RULEi 

In whatever you do, be guided by ho- 

faites^r* guide^p.^, hon^ 

liesty and probity ; and in whatever you say, 

yxttete^L dites^y,, 

never deviate from the path of truth. - - 

vous ecarfez^v, sentier^m* 

Whatever is pleasing , is not always useful. - - - 

agreable, Q,dj. w^t7e,adj. 

Tell me whatever you think of me, and I will 

Dites^Y* ptnsez^Y, di* 

tell you whatever I think of you. - Never speak 
^<%v. ^ 



of whatever has passed between us both. - -. She is 

s''est passe^y, en^re,p. deux, 

so curious, that she will know whatever I 

cwnew.r,aclj. veut^Y, savoir,y. 

do. - - Whatever glitters is not gold. - - I will pay 
fais^v. luit^Y. payerai^Y, 

you to-morrow whatever I owe you, 

dois^Y, 

Quelqiie always expresses an indeterminate significa^ 
tion, and is generally joined to a substantive with which 
it agrees in number ; and quelqu^un., qudqu'une^ make 
quelques'uns^ quelques-unes^ in the plural. 

EXERCISE UPON THtS RULE. 

When he comes to see us, he has 

(Juan J, adv. vient^y, ^<^ voir^y. 

always some tale to tell us. - - He promised 

conte^m, a faire^y, aprmnis^y, 

to bring me some filberts and chesnuts. - - - Have 
de aveline^f. chdtalgne,f, 

you heard any news ? - - Somebody knocks 

aj:>prw, p.p. nouvdh^L frappe^y, 

at the door, go and open it. - - Is there 

allez^y, ^-o^ ouvrir^y, Y a-t-il,y, 

any of these ladies who has found my colour-box? 

da?ne, f. a f /, v. con h u r, f. 

- Have you any (raspberry trees) iiryour garden ? I have 

framboisier^m, 
some. - - Has he any vines ? Yes he has some. 
A't-il, vigne^ f. Oi«, adv. 

Qui que ce soit^ speaking of persons only, may be 
Englished different ways ; but when by tu/ioerer, what 
person soever, it must always be followed by the pronouns 
i7, elle or qui, and sometimes by both, unless it be gov- 
erned by a verb or proposition : ex. 

Qui quc.cesoitqui^ne tr9mp6^ Whoever deceives me 
il sera puni, shull be punishoil; 



130 



EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 



Whoever despises the poor, is himself dea- 

meprise^y, lui-mimt me- 

picable. - - Whoever speaks to you, do not answer. - - 

prisable^aAj, *<y> repondez^\» 

Whoever may presume to ask you any question 

Gsera^y, question,(, 

concerning that affair, pretend not to know any 
touchant^T^. feignez,v, de savoir^Y, 

thing about it. - - Of whomsoever you speak, 

parliez^y. 
always speak the truth. - - - To whomsoever you 
dites^v* vous 

apply, every body will tell you the 

adressiez^\, tout le monde^m. dira,\\ 

same thing. - - - With whomsoever you be 

chose^L Avec^ip, soyez^Y* 

always behave well. 

comportez'Vous^ v. 

When the above pronoun is Englished by nobody in 
the world, no man living, &lc, ; it must be attended 
with the negation ne before the verb ; and when 
speaking in the past tense, qui que ce fat must be 
used : ex, 

Je n'^en ai parli a qui que ce I mentioned it to no man 
soit, living, to no one. 

Cesar ne vouloit se Jier a qui Csesar would trust to no- 
que ce fut, body whatever. 

EXERCISE ON THIS RULE. 

I spoke to nobody whatever ; for I saw 

ai parle^Y, aivu,Y, 

neither father, mother, n6r children. - Charity bids 

ordonne, v. 
us to (speak ill) of nobody whatever, and to do 

de medireyY, defaire,v» 

harm to no man living. - - Never speak ^ to anj 
de ma/jm. parlez^v. 



131 

body whatever of what I told you, - - He acquainted 

Jit part a,v. 
nobody in the world with his projects. - - My brother 

(h projet^m. 

was so honest, that he mistrusted nobody at 
ttoit^v, . se dejioit^ Je,v, 

all. - - Cromwell would trust his life to nobody 

voulut^y, conjier^x, vie^L 
whatever. 

The above observation is to be made with respect to 
quoi que ce soit^ quoi que ce fut^ only used in speaking 
of inanimate objects. Quiconque is indeclinable, and 
always used in the singular. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

My brother enjoys so^ good^ a* health*, that 

jouit de,v, si 
(for these) three years he never complained 

depuis, p. s''es t plain /, v. 

of any thing whatever. - - - - He is so lazy, that 

he applies to nothing whatever. - - - You 

s^applique^Y. 
may go and take a walk in the garden, 

ponvez^v, alter, v. "^ vons promener^y. 
but do not touch any thing whatever. - - Who- 

touchez a,v. 
ever believes every thing which (he is told,) is 

croit^y, on lui dit^y, 

often deceived. - - - He (is ordered) to stop 

fro?npe, p.p. c ordre^y, de arreter^y. 

every one that shall [ro that way. 

passera^y, rrir-la. 

It must be observed, that the numeral adjective 072«, 
used as a pronoun indefinite, and admitting of a plural 
termination, is not to be expressed ii; French, wbeii it 
immediately follows an adjective of cr loUr, or any other 
expressing the shape or size of the object which it im- 
plies ; but the adjective must be put in the same number 



132 

and gender as the substantive which is understood in 

English 1 ex.- 

Quel habit acheterez-vous ? What coat shall you buy ? 
un hteu ou un vert ? a blue one or a green 

one ? -^' 

Pai trouv6 deux nids d^oi- I have found two birds^ 
staux ; dans Pun il y avoit nests ; there were eggs 
des aufs^ et despetits dans in one, and young ones 
Vautre^ in the other. 

EXERCISE ON THIS RULE. 

What kind of a hat will you have ? a black 

espece^L vs?> v^^ noiV, adj. 

®ne, or a white one ? a round one, or a 

fe/anc,adj, ro?if?,adj. 

cocked one ? - - My father has sold 

.re<roMS5e,adj. vendu^i^.]), 

one of his horses ; which is it ? the black one or 

ce 
the gray one ? - - Were there many flowers in 

j^m, adj. Y avoit-il 

his garden ? Yes, there were very fine ones, 

/re5,adv, 
^hich my father had sent him from Hol- 

enTOt/e.p.p. 
land. - - Here are several pair of shoes, which 

Foici, adv. s&ulier^m, 

will you have ? the red ones, or the white 

ws^ rous^c, adj. 

Ones ? I prefer the black ones. 
priftre^y. 

Tout — que. Tout^ preceding a noun immediately 
followed by qut^ is indeclinable in the masculine and 
declinable in the feminine, before nouns beginning: with 
a consonant, and must be repeated before every noun in 
the sentence r^ex. 
Tout sa-cant qu''il est, il As learned as h0*- |f , he 

Sb trompe qmlquefois-. sometimes mistalces. 



133 

Toide sAvante qu'elle est^ For all she is learned, she 
die se trompe quelque- sometimes mistakes. 
fois, 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE, 

For all my sister is ugly, she gets friends 

/arc?, adj. sefait^v, 

cvery-where. - - As amiable as she is, she 

par-tout, Sidy » aw?zaWe,adj. 

does not please me at all. - - - For all they are 
coi plait ^Y* du tout^^dv. 

rich, they give nothing to the poor. - - - 

donnent, v. pauv re, adj . 

Your mother, although she is young, appears 

paroit^y, 

old. As generous as he is he has not given 

%e,adj. «,v. c?orme, p.p. 

me one farthing. - - His aunt, for all she is angry 

liard^m. tante^L yac/ie,adj. 

with him, a^II forgive him his faults, as great 
€ontre,p. pardonnera^v, faute^L 

as they are. - - - As young, amiable, handsome, 
50ien i,subj.pr. fecaw,adj. 

and rich, as my friend's sisters are, they were 

etoient^v. 
not yet married the last time I saw 

enco?*e,adv. fiis^U vis^v* 

them. 

N. B. This will be seen again among the conjunc- 
tions. 

To the above pronouns may be added the three fol- 
lowing expressions, which are generally used in an in- 
definite or indeterminate manner : 

Je ne sais qui, I know not who, whom, 

Je ne sais quoi, I know not what. 

Je ne sais quel, quelle,Sic, I know not which or what. 

Je ne sais qui is only said of persons, and signifies a 
^perion we do not know. Je ne sais quoi is only said of 
12 



134 

things, and signifies an object which cannot precisely 
be named or defined : Je m sais quel is said speaking 
of both persons and things ; lastly, we sometimes put 
iin before Je ne sais qui, and indiflferently un or le be- 
fore Je ne sais quoi : ex. 
Je ne sais qui me park, I know not who speaks to 

me. 
Jlparle deje ne sais quoi, He speaks of I know not 

what. 
Je vis je ne sais quel homme, I saw I know.not what man. 
II park d\m je ne sais qui, He speaks of I know not 

whom. 
J'^ai lu una comedie intitu- I have read a play which 
lee, leje ne mis quoi, has for its title I know 

not what. 

EXERCISE ON THIS RULE. 

When I paid a visit to my friend, I addressed 

rendis,v, ^^^ adressai,v, 

myself to I know not whom. - - He (keeps company 

fr6que7ite,v, 
with) I know not whom, and that displeases her. - - 

deplait, v. 
Whilst she was speaking to him, she was 

Pendant que,c, parloit,v, 

accosted by I know not whom. - - There is 

a6orJe,p.p. par,p, II y a, v. 

I know not what mean in that behaviour. - - - 

Je 605, adj. ct)nduite,f. 

He complains of I know not what. - - W^hen I 

se plaint, y, 
went in, I saw I know not what man, what wo- 
entrai,Y, 
man, what pictures, what figures. - - She speak 

portrait,m.* Jigure,(. 

to I know not whom. - - There is in that I 

la-dedans, didr, 
kaow »ot what that pleases me. 
plait,y. 



135 



RECAPITULATORY or promisrMous EXERCISES 
■' upon all the PRONOUNS. 

I speak French. - - You speak English. - • 
parle.Y, parlez,\. 

We do not understand what they say to m» - - 

K?» comprenons^v. clisenl,y. 

She speaks to you, and robs you (at the same) 

parle,v. vole^y, en mSme 

time. - - We have not seen them. - - Your 

tems^m* avons^y. rw5,p.p. 

mother came to see me yesterday, and I 

vint.y, ^^ voi7\y, ^2er,adv. 

will go to see her to-morrow. - - Is there any body 

irai^y, d^main^a.dy» Esi-il^y, 

that esteems her more than I do? - - Attention, 

estime^y. "^ 

cares, credit, money, I have put every thing 

soin^m, wi5,p.p. 

in use. - - They are happy, but we are 

ew,p. usage^m, /ieiirettvT,adj. 

not so. - - Every body thinks I am the mother oi 

croit^y, 
that child ; I assure you I am not. - - - Ladies. 

Mesdamcs^fL 
are you the companions of Miss le Noir ? Yes, 

ite^^ V. campagne^ f. 

we are. - - That dictionary costs me tjiree guineas, 

coute,y, 
but I owe much to it. - - Whatever may be 

dois^y,beaucoup,3.dy, £oient,y, 

your troubles, you ought to write to me more 

peine^L devriez^y, ecrire^y, 

frequently. - - I will lend you the book which she 
50Mrc7i/,adv. preterai^y, 

has sent me. - - Believe me, he is yery 

enrobe, p.p. Croyez^y. 

ill. - - - I shall be very glad to go 

.?im/flri[e^adj. eerai^y, «?5e,adj. de aUcr.r, 



136 

tbere with jou 5 for 1 have something to tell 

iirec,p. car,c. *. adire^r* 

ibim. - - 1 love your sister, and I owe her re^ 

aime^v. res- 

ipect. - - Give me my hat and cloak. - - - 

pect^m, chapeau^m. mantelet^m. 

I have dined with your father and mother. - - 

(iiwe,p.p. 
They^ often^ procure^ me^ that plea- 

souvent,a,dv, procurent^v* 

*ure. - - If it be not an indiscretion on my part, 

ce est,Y. de 

pray tell me what passed between you 

de frrdce, s'est passi^Y, entre^'p, 

and them* - - They have sent you good apples : 

pomme^ f. 
Yes, there were some good ones and some bad 

II y avoit^Y, mauvais,a.dj» 

ones. - - Write to me, do not write to her. - t 

Ecrivez^Y. ^-o^ 

Carry some to your sister. - - I will do whatever 
Portez,Y, ferai^Y. 

you please. - - - The Thames ia a very fine 

plaira^Y, T&mist^i, 

river ; it divides London into two parts. - - - 

riviere.L divise^Y. en, p. partie^f, 

London is the capital of England, as Paris is that 

capitale^L 
of France ; it is a fine city, but some of its streets 



rue, f. 



are very inconvenient and narrow. - - Brest 

incommode, adj . etroit, adj . 

is a fine sea - port, in France, but its entrance 
7?2er,f. porf,m» entree^L 

is difficult and dangerous. - - Brother, these 

dijficile^cidj, 
books are mine, and not yours. - - Your 

non p«5,adv. 
exercise is better than mine, but it is not m 
tMme.m., ^ 



137 

good as your sister's. - - Do you think of 

6zen,adv. . ^ pensez.v, a 

me ? Yes, I do. - - You do not know what vexes 

pense^ v. ^^ fdche^ v. 

me. - - I will not accept of any of the 

veux^v, accepter^y. ^-o^ 

terms which they offer me. - - Whom ought 
condition,L offrent^v, devons^v. 

we to worship ? God, who is the father of 

adorer, v. Dieu, m. 

them that love him, and the protector of those 

a'mient, v. 
that fear him. - - Of all those who contend 

Graignent^Y. disputent^v, 

against religion, some do it because it per- 

conire,ip, font^y, parceque.c, em- 

plexes them ; others, «- because they wish to 

harrasse^y, veulent,y, 

have the glory of perplexing its defenders. - - 

embarrasser, v. defenseu r, m . 

Those trees are well exposed to the sun, 

arbre^m, expose^ip.-p, sohil^m, 

nevertheless their fruits are not good. - - I believe 
cependant, adv. crois. v, 

your uncle is arrived. - - His ability is not so 

onc/e,m. arnt)e,p.p. habileti^L 

great as yours. - - Two rivals are generally 

gmnc?,adj. rival,m, 

enemies of one another. - - Sister, who gave you 

a donne^y, 
that letter? Our uncle's servant. - - - What does 
lettre^L domes ti que ^m, 'o* 

he write to you ? That his library is at our 

icrit^ V. biblioiheque, f. 

service ; and I assure you that he has a very good 

<?e5,adv. 
one. - - His letters please me so much, that I 

plaisent^y. 
wish to increase their number. - - Both my 

i?ewa;,v. aus;menter,y* 

12* 



135 

father and aunt are now at Rome ; the former 

a present 
writes once a week, the latter scarcely writes 

ecr{t,v» unefois^L a peine 

to me twice a year. - - - He that wants 

deux fois manque de^Y, 

virtue wants (all things). - - - That lady pleases 

tout^m. dame^i. plait,v» 

you, for you^ are^ always'* speaking^ of her^. - -- 

car,c. 
The beauty of the mind creates admira- 

beautej, esprit^m^ donne,v, 

tion ; that of the soul gains esteem, and that 

ame,f. donne^y, estime^f, 
of the body love. - - - - Most friends are more 

corps^m, amour, m, 
attached to our fortune, than they are 

«^toc/ig, p.p. que-ne^ci 

to our person. - «• - Whoever is without virtue^ 

.9aw5,p. 
seldom^ values^ menj and whoever is 

rarement,s.dy, estime^v. 

too good, values them (too much). - - - It 

i?ro^,adv. ^ irop,adv. Ce 

is she who told me that this house is not 

a dit,y. maison^i, 

yours. - - You believe that Mrs. D. is in your interests^ 
croyez,y, inter et^m^ 

and I believe nothing of it. - - - Ambition 

crois^y, ne-rien, adv. 
(tramples upon) wisdom, honor, probity, and on 
foule aux pieds sur, p» 

their ruins, it lays the foundation of its great- 
ruine^f. eleve^y, fondement^m. gran- 

ness. - - Whatever her intention may be, P do 

deur^L soit^y* vs^ 

/'not® love^ her^ the less' for it*. - - I assure you that 

aime^y. ^^ 

I have answered both her letter and her brother's. - - • 
Kobody ili the world has complained of your con* 
9^cst,y, plaint yi^*^i 



I 



13^ 

duct. - - When you read the history of the Roman- 

Quand^c, lirez^v. histoire^L Romain,2Ldy 

emperors, you will find one (of them) whose name 
empereur^m. trouverez^v, 

was Nero. - - - The study of geography is absolute- 

geographie^ f. absolu- 

\y necessary to him who has a taste for his- 

we w f , ad V. du gou t^ m . 

tory. - - - He that sold us this clock did not 

a veudu,v. penduleS, a 

cheat us. What do you think of it ? - - - 

frompe, p.p. "^ pensez^v. 

Whoever cheats me shall repent (of it). - - - 

trompe^y. se repentira^v. 

Every body thinks we shall have peace^ - - When I 

croit^v. aurons^v, paix^f, 

went in, the members of the assembly were 
entrai^y, etoient^v. 

seated every one in his place I, who did not 

«5m,p.p. a «o^ 

know that they were reconciled, was much 
savois^y. que^e, recowci'Zie^, p.p. /i/^,v.ybr^,adv, 

surprised to see them together. England owes 

de voh'^y* ensemhle,a.dv. doit^t, 

her riches to her naval strength and the encourage- 

ybrce5,f. pi. 
ment she gives to her commerce. - - We speak 

donne,y. par Ions, y, 

of what has happeijed to him. - - Well ! if he 

est^y, «rnre,p.p. Eh bien^int, 

spend other people's money, he does not spend 

depense^y, 

yours Mj house is like others, it has its 

maison^f. a, v. 

beauties as well as its inconveniences. - - - She who 
heauU^L ^ incommodite^L 

(was speaking) to you is not yet mar- 

parloit^y, encore, adv. 

ried. - - Her father, mother, brothers, slaters, uncles, 



14(& 

and aunts, in short, all her relations, are dea<|, 

tante, f. enfin, c. parent^m, &, f. 

and have left her a considerable fortune. - - 

ont^v, laiss6,T^,'p» 
Those gentlemen have fine horses, but mine are 

cheval^m, 
finer than theirs. - - Do you know any of 

connoissez^Y, 
those ladies ? Yes, I know some of them. - - - - 

connois^r. 
For all they are young and handsome, they have a 

ont,y. 
great deal of modesty and virtue. - - Yes, niece, but 

niece^ f. 
they are both rich and proud. ------ Desire 

orgueilleux^zdj, Priez^v, 
him to bring them here. - - - Is that the gown 
de amtner^y, Est-ce robe^f, 

for which you gave five guineas ? - - If I 

pour^ip. avez donne^v* 

had been in your place, I (would have) 

eusse^v* e/e,p.p. a aurois^v, 

preferred the white one to the black one. - - * 

jore/ere,p.p» 
How many books are there in that library ? There 

y a-t-il bibliotheque^L 

are three thousand seven hundred and twenty-sevea 
in the library, fifty-two upon the table, and nineteen 
in my room. - - Whose house is this ? It belongs 

* appartient^ v. 

to I know not whom. - - There is I know not what 

Ilya.Y. 
in the colour, which pleases much. - - To what 

c?«n5,p. plait^y. 

(does he apply himself) ? - - This apple, and that he 

s'applique-t-il^Y, 
gave you, are very good. - - - Give me either 

donna, v. Donnez, v. 

of them. - - I will send you Some thither. - - - 
«^ mvaraiyr^ 



I 



141 

I cannot «ell it ta you for so^ small^ a^ 

nepeuxpas^v. vendre^v, |>oitr,p. 

gum'*. - - I prefer the beauty of the mind to that 

somme, f. prefere, v. 

of the body. - - Some love one thing, some another. 
airnent^Y, 

- - She says she hates that man ; many think she 

dit^Y, hait^Y. 

loves him. - - He whom nobody pleases, is more 
aime^Y^ a plait^Y, 

unhappy than he who pleases nobody. - - I 

malheureux, adj . a 

was near your sister when that happened 

etois^Y, aupres de^ip, quand,c. arriva^Y, 

to her. - - Both his father and mother died 

moururent^y, 
on the same day. - - - - As covetous as he is, he 

ai:;are,adj. 
gave me a guinea. - - - 1 here are many people 

a donne, v. II y a 

whom we esteem, because we do not know them. - - 

parceque^c. 
Whatever has happened to you, I am very sorry 

soit^Y, fdche,3.(\j, 

for it. - - He would do it in spite of any 

voulut^Y. faire^Y, en, p. depit^m* 
body whatever. - - Learning is preferable to riches, 

Science^ f. 
and virtue to both. - - - Some philosophers have 

philosophe^m, oaf^ v. 
thought that the fixed stars were so many 

cnA,p.p. fixe.^d'y itoik^i, etoienf.Y, 

suns. - - See with what care, attention, and per- 

Voyez^ V. 
severance, every animal (rears up) its young ones. 

eleve^Y. ^ petit^a.dj. 

- - Here ^ are two grammars, which do you pre- 

Foic?", adv. -^ 

fer ? I prefer this to that. - - - - Both are very 

good. -. - - He believes nothing of what you 

qro^v. ne nerijadv. 



142 

told him. - - You blame him who docs 

a-otz dit, V. hldmeZfV* 

not deserve it. - - - Friend, to whom did you 

merit e^v, avez^v. 

speak ? I spoke to nobody ^ for I saw 

paWe,p.p. ai parU,v» car,c. ai vu,v. 

neither of them. - - Each country has its peculiar 

pai'iiculier^ad^, 
customs ; in France, they eat with the fork, in England, 
coutume^f, 

we eat with the knife ; in France, they ©at the meat « 
well done ; in England, we eat it half raw. 

CMii,p.p. (i moitie cru^^dj* 



SECT. IV. 

OF VERBS ANB THEIR DIFFERENT SORTS. 
Verbs are usually divided into seven sorts, viz. 

1. Les verbes auxiliaires^ auxiliary. 

2. Les verbes aciifs, active, 

3. Les verbes passifs^ passive. 

4. Les verbes neutres^ neuter. 

5. Les verbes refleckis^ reflective. 

6. Les verbes personnels^ personal. 

7. Les verbes im'per sonnets^ impersonal. 

Some of them are regular, that is to say, they follow 
the general rule of the conjugation to which they be- 
long ; others do not, and are called irregular. 

The auxiliary verbs are, avoir,^ to lave, and e/re, to be. 
These two auxiliaries are used to conjugate all the com- 
pound tenses of the other verbs. 

The active verbs, — In this class, the action is transi-^ 
tive, that is, it passes from the subject to the ob- 
ject : ex. 

Lt maitre punit hs ecoliers The master punishes the 
paresseux^ lazy scholars. 

The active verb sometimes governs two cases : one 



143 

to which the action directly refers, or which is the di- 
rect object of the action, and is therefore called the 
direct or absolute case ; the other, to which the action 
refers but indirectly, and it is called the indirect or r«- 
lative case ; ex. 
Votre saur 2l ecrit une Your sister wrote a long 

longut lettre a monfrere, letter to my brother. 

Ji long letter is the direct or absolute case, and to my 
brother^ the indirect or relative case, of the verb wrote. 
The direct case can be no other but the accusative of a 
•noun or pronoun, but the indirect is either the genitive^ 
dative, or ablative. 

In the passive verbs, the action is received or suffered 
by the subject : ex. 
Les ecoliers pares seux seroTit Lazy scholars shall be 

punis, punished. 

In the neuter verbs, the action is intransitive, that is, 
it remains in the agent : ex. 

Vous voyagez, You travel. 



Je dors, I sleep. 

Jious etudions. We study. 



Elle soupire. She sighs. 



In the reflected verbs, the action returns upon the 
agent that produces it : ex. 

// se repent, He repents himself. 

Elle se hue. She praises herself. 

These verbs have always se before their infinitive, 
and are conjugated with a double pronoun. 

The personal verbs are those which are conjugated 
with three persons, in the singular and plural, through- 
out all their tenses. 

The impersonal verbs have but the third person of the 
singular number. 

JV. B, There is a kind of verbs which may be distin- 
guished by the name of reduplicative, always expressing 
a repetition of the action : ex. 

Kecommencer, To begin again, 

Kefaire, To do again, &c. 

In these verbs, the English word again ii to be 



144 

rendered in French bj the syllable re prefixed to the 

radix of the verb, and not by encore. 

All the above verbs may be simple or compound* 

A verb is simple which cannot be divided without 

losing its meaning : as, 



Appthr^ 


To call; 


FoiV, 


To see ; 


Bdtir, 


To build ; 


Prendre^ 


To take ; 


Meniir^ 


To lie ; 


Vivre, 


To live ; 



which would mean nothing, if they were divided. 

A verb is compound when it is preceded by one or 
more syllables, as. 



"Rappeler, To recall. 
Kehdtir, To rebuild. 

Dementir, To 6elie. 



Pre-DoiV, To foresee* 

Eiitreprendre,To undertake, 
Surviv re, To 0Mrii'Ve,&c » 



These last verbs are generally formed by prefixing to 
them part or the whole of a preposition. 

CONJUGATION OF VERBS. 

To conjugate verbs is to give them different inflec- 
tions or terminations, according to their moods, tenses^ 
persons^ and numbers, 

MOODS. 

Mood or mode, in the sense it is taken here, is a gram- 
matical term, which means the manner of affirming, or 
denoting, in the verbs, by different inflections. 

There are, in the French language, four moods, abso- 
lutely distinct from each other, by the several inflections, 
or by some other difference. They are : 
LHnJlnitif, The infinitive. 

LHndicafif, The indicative. 

LHmperatif, The imperative. 

Le suhjonctif, ou The subjunctive, or con- 

conjonctif, junctive. 

Of the Infinitive Mood. 

This mood is so called, because it only expresses 
the action or signification of the verb in an indefnife 
and indeterminaie manner, that is, without affirmation, 



145 

and without any relation as to time, number, or person : 
ex. 

Parler, To speak. 

Chanter^ To sing. 

Danser^ To dance. 

Of the Indicative Mood. 

This mood is thus called, because it not only indi- 
mtes the affirmation in the different tenses of the verbs, 
but likewise the time, number, and person ; without 
being preceded or governed by either conjunction or 
verb : 

J'ecWs une lettre^ I write a letter. 

II chante une chanson^ He sings a song. 

Ecris and chante are two verbs in the indicative 
mood, because they do not require to be preceded by a 
conjunction* or another verb to make a complete sense. 
The definition of this mood will be better understood, 
by comparing the little that has been said with what is 
going to be said with respect to the subjunctive mood. 

Of the Imperative Mood. 

The name which has been given to this mood, is de- 
rived from a Latin word which signifies to command ; 
and the imperative is in fact but a manner of denoting 
in the verbs the action of commanding^ entreating^ pray- 
ings exhorting^ and sometimes forbidding : ex. 

J^e meprisez pas les avis Do not despise the advice 
que je vous donne, which I give you. 

It is easy to perceive that this manner of speaking is 
but an exhortation, as if I had said, 
Je vous exhorte,je vous prie^ I exhort, I entreat you, not 

de ne pas mepriser mes to despise my advice. 

avis, / 

This mood has no first person in the singular, because 

* Among the conjunction?, sotne govern the indicative, others the 
subjunctive : this will be explained hereafter. 
13 



146 

it is impossible for a man to command himself ; and if 
it have the first person plural, it is because we speak as 
much to others as to ourselves ; as when we say, 

Evitons tout ce qui pourroit Let tts avoid every thing 
offenser les autres^ that might offend others. 

The second person singular and the first and second 
plural admit of no pronouns before them ; as to the 
third, in both numbers, it is always preceded by the 
jpronoun il or e//e, &c. and the conjunction que* 

Of the Subjunctive, or Conjunctive. 

The name of subjunctive, or conjunctive, sufficiently 
conveys what its use is in a sentence. Tt may be de- 
fined thus ; a manner of expressing the different tense« 
of the verbs without any affirmation. In fact, the sub- 
junctive never affirms; it is always preceded by, or 
subject to some conjunction; and if it should be met 
with in a sentence containing an affirmation, that af- 
firmation can only be expressed by the verb that pre- 
cedes the subjunctive, which is used but to modify that 
affirmation, in the subsequent sentence, 

Je travaille afin que vous I work that you may rest 
vous reposiez, yourself, 

the affirmation is only expressed by je travaille^ I work, 
and what follows only expresses the end which I propose 
by working, viz. to procure you some rest. Again, 

Je desire que vous fassiez I wish that you may d0 
voire devoir^ your duty ; 

I affirm that I wish ; but it is clear there is no affirma- 
tion in these words, that you may do your duty^ since I 
do not say that you do, that you have done, that you 
will do your duty ; but only that I wish you may do it* 
My wifih is not doubtful ; but it is very doubtful whether 
you will or may do yoitr duty* 






147 

TENSES. 

There are, strictly speaking, but three natural and 
proper tenses in the verbs : viz. 

Le passe, The past. 

Le present^ The present. 

Le futur, The future. 

In the French language, the tenses are divided in the 
following manner, viz. five in the infinitive mood ^ 
three of them are simple, the two others compound. 

In the simple tenses, the verb is expressed in one 
word : ex. 

Parler, To speak. 

Chantant, Singing. 

Danse, Danced. 

The compound tenses are conjugated with some one 
of the auxiliary verbs, avoir, to have, or etre, to bcj 
joined to a participle passive : ex. 

jivoir parle, To have spoken. 

Ay ant chant6^ Having sung. 

Eire aime, To be loved. 

Etant aime, Being loved. 

Simple Tenses. 

Le present, The present. 

Le participe actif. The participle active. 

Le participe passif. The participle passive. 

Compound. 
Le pr6tirit, The preterite. 

Le participe passi ou The participle past or com- 
composS, pound. 

There are ten tenses in the indicative mood, viz. five 
simple and five compound : they are, 

Simple. 
Le present, The present. 

LHmoarfaity The imperfect. 

Lq preteri^y The preterite. v 



y 



Lt future, The future. 

Le conditionnel, The conditional. 

Compound. 

Le present, The present. 

LHmparfait^ The imperfect. 

jLe preterit, The preterite. 

Le futur, The future. 

Le conditionnel, The conditional. 

JV. J5. The imperatire admits of no tense but the 
present. 

The subjunctive mood has four tenses ; two simpl<& 
and two compound. 

Simple. 

Le present, The present. 

Le preterit^ The preterite. 

Compound. 

Le present. The present. 

Le preterit, The preterite. 

Before we proceed any further on the conjugations^ 
it has been thought proper to explain the different uses 
of the above tenses, as one cf the most important arti- 
cles in a language, the precision of which partly de- 
pends on the difference which custom sets between one 
tense and another with regard to the sense of the sen- 
tence. We shall endeavour to be short and concise, 
and say nothing but what is useful, in hopes that the 
following explanation will be sufficient to remove a 
difficulty which constantly puzzles the learner. 

TENSES of the INDICATIVE MOOD. 
Simple. 
Present. 
This tense is used when the state, action, or im* 



149 

pression, mentioned by the verb, is existing, doing, or 
happening, at the very time we are speaking : ex. 

Je me porte bien, I am well. 

Votre sceur est malade, Your sister is ill. 

Xous nous promenons, We are zvalking. 

Vous ecrivez, You are writing, 

lis jouent, They are playing, &LC. 

The present is also used, 

1. When speaking of actions or things v/hich we 
habitually do, are accustomed to do, or can do : ex. 

Jsl'ous dinons toujours a deux We always dine at two 

heures, o'clock. 

Elle etudie Phistoire, She studies history. 

Vous parlez Frangois^ You speak French. 

Lit-i7 VAnglois ? Does he read English ? 

2. When speaking of actions which are to be done 
in a very short time, we generally use this tense instead 
of the future : ex. 

Je pars ce soir pour la I set out this evening for the 

campagne, country. 

Que faites-rot^^ demain ? What do you do to-morrow ? 

Instead of 

Je partirai ce soir pour la I shall set out this evening 

campagne, for the country. 

Que feiez-vous demain ? What will you do to-mop- 
row ? 

3. This tense is also constantly used in French in- 
stead of the preterite and compound of the preterite, 
especially in oratio/is or set discowses, and in poetry, in 
order to represent a past action or event as present to 
the mind of the hearers or readers. 

Imperfect. 

This tense has two uses; in the first, which probably 
is the origin of its name, it expresses an action present 
or doing at the time of an action that is past : as when 
I say, 

13* 



150 

Man frere apprenoit sa My brother was karntn^ 
legon quand vous arri- his lesson when you 
vdtes, arrived. 

In the above sentence, the act of learning, though 
past with respect to my narration, was present at the 
moment your arrival took place ; therefore this tense i» 
Ibut imperfectly preterite and imperfectly present. 

In the second, the imperfect is employed every time 
we speak of actions of habit, or actions reiterated at a time 
which is not defined: ex. 

Quand J'etois a Londres, When I was in London, I 
j'allois souvent voir mes often went to see mj 
amis, friends ; 

that is, I often we J to go, or I frequently weni, &c. 

The imperfect is likewise used when we speak of the 
character, or some inherent and distinctive quality, of 
persons or things no longer existing ; and after the 
English conjunction if, though the verb be preceded 
by should, could, would: ex. 

Philippe, pere d'^Alexan- Phillip, the father of Alex- 

dre le Grand, etoit le ander the Great, was the 

plus fin politique de son deepest politician of his 

temps, time. 

Cesar avoit je we sais quoi Caesar had I know not what 

de grand dans la phy- of great in his physiog- 

sionomie, nomy, 

Carthage faisoit un pro- Carthage carried on a pro- 

digieux commerce par digious trade by the means 

le moyen de ses vais- of her ships, which went 

seaux, qui alloient jus as far as the Indies. 
qu' aux Indes, 

Palmireet Persepoliseioient Palmyra and Persepolis 

de grandes et belles villes, zwere large and fine cities. 

(S'*7 venoit, je le paye- If he would come, or camsj. 

fois^ I would pay him. 



151 



Cfeorge IL etoit d/unt 

taille pluiot petite que 



moyenne 



il avoit les 



yeux tres-saillans^ le nez 
grand, et une belle com- 
plexion ; il etoit doux, 
modere et humain ; sohre et 
regiilier dans sa maniere 
dt vivre : il se plaisoit 
dans la pompe et dans 
Vappareil militaire, et etoit 
naturellement brave ; il 
aimoit la guerre comme 
soldat, /'etudioit comme 
une science, et avoit, sur ce 
sujet, une correspondanct 
ctablie avec quelques-uns 
des plus grands gcniraux 
que VAllemagne ait pro- 
duif. 



George II. was, in his pCF- 
son, rather lower than the 
middle size ; he had 
remarkable prominent 
eyes, a high nose, and a 
fair complexion ; he was 
mild, moderate and hu- 
main; in his way cTliving, 
sober and regular : he de- 
lighted in military pomp 
and parade, and was 
naturally brave : he 
loved war as a sol- 
dier, studied it as a 
science, and had, on this 
account, a settled cor- 
respondence with some 
of the greatest generals 
that Germany had pro- 
duced. 



From the above instances it might confidently be 
believed, that every difficulty attending the use of thig 
tense will be entirely removed ; I shall however add, as 
a farther illustration, that whenever the verb, which in 
English is in the preterite, can be rendered by the past 
tense of the verb to be, and that preterite changed into 
the participle active, or when that preterite can be 
turned into the verb in the infinitive mood preceded by 
used, that past tense must be made in French by the 
imperfect. 

Preterite. 

This tense is so called because it always expresses an 
action done at a time determined or specified by an adverb, 
or some circumstance in the speech, and so entirely 
elapsed, that notiiing more remains of the time when 
that action was doinor: ex. 



Je fus malade hier pendant 
diux hmres. 



I was ill yesterday for two 
hours. 



152 



ha derniere fois que nous al- 
lames h voir, nous eumes 
un accueil favorable, 

Vous ecrivites a voire frere 
il y a huit jours, 

lis essuyerent de grandes 
pertes /'annee passee, 



The last time we went to 

see him^we had a kind 

reception. 
You wrote to your brother 

eight days ago. 
They underrvent great 

losses last year. 



Future. 

This tense simply expresses that an action will be 
done at a time that is not yet come : ex. 

Je vous verrai demain a I will set you to-morrow in 

Londres, London. 

Mon frere vous ecrira la My brother m//wn7e to you 

semaine prochaine, next week. 

In French, as well as in English, we sometimes ex- 
press an action that is to be done instantly, by the verb 
aller, or s'en aller, to go, immediately followed by an 
infinitive : ex. 

Je vais, or je m'en vais I am going to write to my 

aunt. 
I am going to set out. 



ecrire a ma tante, 
Je vais, or je m'en vais 

partir. 

Which signify, 
Je lui ecrirai tout presen- 

tement, 
Je partirai dans Vinstant, 



I will write to her immedi- 
ately. 
I will set out instantly. 

To express an uncertainty in a future tense, that is, 
to express that it is not decided that such a thing will 
be done, we make use of the verb devoir immediately 
followed by a verb in the infinitive mood, and that is 
the only instance wherein devoir does not imply obliga- 
lion, necessity, ^c. : ex. 



Le roi doit partir pour 
Cheltenham vers le mi- 
lieu du rnois de Juillet, 
et ne doit revenir qu^a 
la fin du rmie d^Aout, 



The king is to set out for 
Chelteiiham about the 
middle of July, and is 
not to return till the lat- 
ter end of August. 



U3 ' 

That is, 

On suppose que h roi par- It is supposed that the king 

lira, &LC, et quHl ne re- will set out, (^c. and will 

viendra, &c. not return till, (^c. 

Conditional. 

The name of this tense is a true definition of it : in 
fact, it is always used to express some condition or sup- 
position, and has always a reference to the present, be- 
cause, l3y supposing the condition effected, the action, 
mentioned by the conditional, becomes present : ex. 

Je lirois, si favois des livouldread,i£lh3.dhooks» 

livres, 

Vous auriez la Jlevre, si You would have a fever, if 

vous mangiez de ce . you ate of that fruit. 

fruit, 

Je serois mortijie, sHl per- I should be mortified, if he 

doit son proces, should lose his law-suit. ^^ 

# 

It is sometimes used, instead of the future, after the 
conjunction que : ex. 

II a promis qu'i7 vien- He has promised to come^ 
droit, or that be zoill come. 

This tense is often called the uncertain tense, because 
it expresses an action made uncertain by the conditional 
that follows it ; and some grammarians place it among 
the tenses of the subjunctive mood, though it is very 
certain that it never is governed by any of the conjunct 
tions which require a subjunctive mood after them. 

COMPOUND TENSES. 

Compound of the Present. 

The compound of the present is employed in two 
different manners, 

1. It expresses an action past in an indeterminate 



154 

time, but not very far distant from the tiine we apeak : 
thus we must say, 

J'ai vu mademoiselle voire I have aeen your sister, and 

s(Bur^ et lui ai parity spoken to her. 

he roi de Prusse a conquis The king of Prussia hcts 

la SiUsie^ conquered Silesia. 

Cela s'est passe avanta- That has passed advanta- 

geusement pour votr^ geously for your cousin. 

cousin^ 

In the above sentence, the action is certainly past, 
but the time when it passed is neither determined nor 
specified. 

2. It expresses a time definite and determinate, but 
of which there yet remains some part to elapse : ex. 
Les fruits ont tres-bim Fruits have very well sue*- 

reussi cette annee, ceeded this year. 

J^ous n'avons pas eu beau- We have not had much 

coup de neige cet hiver, snow this winter. 

// a plu toute cette semaine, It has rained all this week, 

tout ce mois, all this month. 

J^ous avons vu d^itranges We have seen strange 

choses dans ce siecle, things in this century. 

In the above sentences, this year^ this week, this 
winter, &c. are times which still last, and are not yet 
elapsed. 

To express an action recently past, we sometimes 
make use of the verb venir immediately followed by de^ 
and the verb in the infinitive mood : ex. 

Je viens de le voir passer, I have just seen him go by, 
he roi vient d'arriver, The king Z5 hut just arrived, 

Elle vient d'expirer, She is but just dead. 

The same tense may be expressed by the verb faire^ 
preceded by the negation ne and followed by the con- 
junction que^ with an infinitive preceded by de : ex. 

// ne fait que d'arnrer. He is but just arrived. 

Je, m fj^is que de sortir^ J hav€ but just gone out* 



N. B. This particle de is here indispensable, because, 
without it, the expression would have quite another 
sense, and would express a continuation or a frequent 
reiteration in the action : ex. 

Vous lie faites que soriir, You do nothing hut go out. 
EUe ne fait que jouer et She does nothing but plaj 
danser^ and dance. 

Compound of the Imperfect. 

This tense expresses an action past before another 
which is past also, but with this diiference, that the 
action expressed by this tense is the principal object of 
the person who speaks, and the following sentence is 
subordinate to that expressed by the compound of the 
imperfect. So that, though the time of that subordinate 
sentence be defined, that of the principal sentence is not 
the less indeterminate, because the former has no influ- 
ence on the latter. As when we say, 

^ous avions dine lorsquHl We had dined when he 
arriva^ arrived, 

our principal object is to express the action of dining 
as past, without determining at what time, but only be- 
fore an action which is past also, without, however, 
the latter being a consequence of the former ; for, we 
do not mean to say, that he stayed, or waited, till we 
had dined, to arrive. 

Compound of the j^reterite. 

This tense also expresses an action past or done be- 
fore another which is likewise past ; and Jt is detcr- 
mined by the following sentence, which is the princij^/al 
object of the attention. Thus when we say, 

Quand Us eurent acheve When they had dene piay- 
de jouer ^ Us s& mirent a ing, they began singing j 
chanter^ 



156 

we mean at first to convey that they began singings and 
that it was not till they had done playing : in which case, 
the action of having done playing is subordinate to this, 
they began singings and consequently the latter determines 
the time of the other. 

The following observation is very plain, and will in 
some manner fix the use of the above tense, viz, that 
it is hardly ever used except after the conjunctions 



Aussitot que, ^ 

U'abord que, > As soon as ; 

Dcs que, 3 



Apres que, After ; 
Lorsque, > ^hen • 
Quand, 5 ' 



which never precede a compound of the imperfect, un- 
less the verb express a custom or habit. 

Lastly, we must use the compound of the preterite 
when the adverb bientof, soon, precedes or follows the 
verb was or had, to express an action or thing as done 
and accomplished : ex. 

V affaire fut bientot faite, The business was soon over. 
Tms bientot fini de man- I had soon done eating. 

Compound or the Future. 

The name of this tense seems at first to convey a con- 
tradiction : what is meant by it is, not that an action 
can be future and past at the same time, but only that 
the action, which is to come, will be past when another 
action happens, or even before it happens : ex. 

Je serai parti quand vmxs I shall be gone when you 

reviendHkz, come back. 

Quand vous aurez fini vos When jou -have done your 

affaires, vous viendrez business, you shall come 

me trouver, to me. 

In the first sentence, / shall be gone, which is a 
future time with respect to the present we speak 



in^ will be a past time by the time you will or purpose 
to arrive, &c. 

Compound of the Conditional. 

This tense generally supposes a condition, as the con- 
ditional present, with this differeitce, that the condi- 
tion taking place, the action expressed by the verb in 
the conditional is accomplished and consequently in a 
past time : ex. 
Je voiis aurois ecrit il y a I would have written to you 

un mois, si feusse sii a month ago, if I had 

voire adresse^ known your direction. 

The indicative mood has another tense, formed 
by the compound of the present of the verb arozV, joined 
to a participle passive, which has not been inserted 
in the preceding tenses, on account of its being seldom 
used : ex. 
Quandfcii eu dine,je suis parti, When I had dined,} set out. 

But it IS more elegant and natural to say, 
Apres avoir dine, je suis After I had dined, I set 

parti, out, 

TENSES of the SUBJUNCTIVE or CONJUNCTIVE 
MOOD. 

The sul)junctive or conjunctive has no future dis- 
tinguished from the present, because the present of 
the subjunctive likewise expresses a future tense : ex. 

Je ne crors pas qui! vi- I do not think he will 
enne, come. 

Add the following observations to the latter : 
1. When the verb wl.ich precedes the conjunc- 
tion is in the present or future of the indicative, and 
wh%n we do not mean to express an action passed in 
the second verb, wc must put this last verb in the pre- 
sent of the subjunctive mood : ex. 
Je souhaitc que vous reus- I wish you may succeed in 

sissiez dans voire entreprise, your undertaking. 
Jhtliendrai qiCil vienne, I will wait till he come. 
14 



158 



2. When the verb which is before the conjunction is 
in some of the past tenses, or conditional, and we wish 
not to designate by the second verb a past time more 
distant than that of the first verb, we mast put this second 
verb in the preterite of the subjunctive: 



Alexandre ordonna, que tons 

ses sujets /'adorassent 

comme un dieu^ 
Je voulois que vous ecrivis- 

siez a voire saur, 
II souhaiteroit que vous 

prissiez des mesures plus 

convenahles^ 



Alexander ordered, that all 
his subjects should wor- 
ship him like a god. 

I wished you to write to 
your sister. 

He would wish you io take 
more becoming meas- 
ures. 



3. The compound of the present of the subjunctive 
mood is used when we speak of an action past and ac- 
complished, with regard to the tense of the verb which 
precedes the conjunction ; and this tense is generally 
the present, compound of the present, or future of the 
indicative : ex. 



Je doute qu'aucun philo- 
sophe ait jamais bien 
connu Vunion de Vdme 
avec le corps, 

11 a fallu que jaie consul- 
te tous les medecins^ 

Je n^aurai garde d''y aller^ 
que je n'aie re9u quel- 
que assurance d'^itre hicn 
4iccueiUu 



I doubt whether any philo- 
sopher have ever well un- 
derstood the union of the 
soul with the body. 

I was obliged to consult all 
the physicians. 

I shall by no means go thi- 
ther, till I have received 
some assurance of being 
welcome. 



4. After the imperfect, preterite, compound of the 
imperfect, of the indicative, or one of the two condi- 
tionals, we use the compound of the preterite of,.:the 
subjunctive mood; likewise after the conjunction' if^ 
when preceding a compound tense : ex. 

JHgnorois que vous eussiez I did not know you had 
embrasse cette profes- embraced. that profes- 
&i9vAa. • sion. 



Tons n'avez pas cru que je You did not believe 1 

fusse arrivee avant vous^ should have an-'tvedhefore. 

you. 

J^ous aurions ete fdches We should have been sorry 

que vous vous fussiez if you had applied to any 

adresse a d^autres qu'a others but us. 
nous^ 

NUMBERS AND PERSONS. 

A tense is composed of numbers ; that is, the singu- 
lar and the plural. 

That there are three persons, has already been ob- 
served under the personal pronouns ; we have only to 
remark, that some of these three persons are always 
joined to the verb as its nominative case, therefore the 
verb must agree with that nominative in number and 
person : ex. 



Jefais^ I do. 
Tufais, Thou dost. 
Ilfait^ He does. 



Nous faisons, We do. 
Vous faites^ You or ye do. 
lis font, They do. 



The pronoun vous, you, denotes the second person 
singular and plural, with this difference, that when we 
speak to a person only, the attribute, or qualifying noun^ 
must be put in the singular : ex. 
Vous etes ^narii, and not You are married. 

maries, 
Vous etiez general de Var^ You were general of the 

mee and not generaux, army. 

But we must say maries and gencraux, if we speak to 
many. 

When the verb has two or three nouns or pronouns 
as it nominatives, it must be put in the plural, though 
all these nominatives be in the singular ; because two 
or more nouns in the singular are equivalent to a plural, 
with regard to verbs as well as to adjectives : ex. 
Monfrere et ma sceur sont My brother and sister are 

partis, gone. 

This has already been mentioned in the adjectives. 



i6d 



If, among these nominatives, one is of the first per- 
ion and the other of the second, or one is of the second 
and the other of the third, the verh must agree with the 
first in preference to the second, and with the second 
in preference to the third ; observing that, in French, 
the person spoken to, must be named first ; and the per- 
son speaking is to be mentioned the last : we must 
therefore saj, 



C^est vous et moi qui avcns 

dicouvert tout ce complot^ 

Ge n'est 



nt vous ni ma 



It is jou and I who hate 

discovered all that plot. 
It is neither you nor my 

sister who hate opened 

the door, &c. 
You, my father, and I, will 

set out to-morrow. 



sceur qui avez ouveri la 
porte^ 
Vous^ mon pcre^ et moi, 
partirons demain, * 

The pronoun relative qui, in these and the like sen- 
tences, always takes place of "he first or second person, 
and only agrees with the others in number ; it is for this 
reason we must sav. 



Ccst 7noi qui suis cause de 

ce malkeur, 
Cest TOILS qui avez rivcU 

ce secret, 
Ce litest ni lui ni moi qui 

/'avons fait, 

There are four conjugations in the French language. 
Each is distinguished by the termination of the verb in 
the infinitive mood. 

The first makes er. 



It is I who am the cause 
of that misfortune. 

It is you who have reveal- 
ed that secret. 

It is neither he nor I who 
\ave done it. 



The second 
The third 
The fourth 



evoir, 
re, 



as donner, to give, 
as pum'r, to punish, 
as recevoir, to receive, 
as rend7'e, to render. ' 

N* B. It is necessary that the learner should be 
well acquainted with the manner of conjugating the 
two following verbs, because of the frequency of 
their occurrence in sentences, and in forming the com- 
pound tenses of all other verbs. 



161 



CONJUGATION of the AUXILIARY VERB 

AVOIR, TO HAVE. 

Infinitive Mood. 



Present. 
Avoir, to have. 

Participle active. 
Ayant^ having. 

Participle passive. 
Eu, had. 

Indicative Mood 
Present. Singular. 
J'fii, I have. 
Tu as, thou hast. 
// a, he lias. 
ElU a, she has. 

Imperfect. Sing. 
J\ivois, I had. 
Tu avois, thou hadst. 
// avoit, he had. 



Compound of the present. 
Avoir en, to have had. 

Compound of the past. 
Ayant eu, having had. 



Plural. 
Js^ous avons, we have. 
Vous avez, you or ye have. 
lis onf, 
Elles ont. 






have. 



Preterite. Sing. 



Plural. 
Nous avions, we had. 
Vous aviez, you had. 
lis avoient, they had. 

Plural. 

J^cus eumes, we had. 
Vous eutes,- yon had. 



lis eurent, they had. 



Teus, I had. 

Tu eus, thou hadst. 

// eut, he had. 

Future. Singular. 
J^aurai, I shall or will have. 
Tu auras, thou wilt (^c, have. 
// aura, he will, <^c, have. 

Plural. 
Mous aurons, we shall, S^c, have. 
Vous aurez, you will, (^-c. have. 
//^ auront, they will, (^c. have. 

Conditional. Singular. 
Taurois, I should, could, would, or might hai^. 
"" Tu aurois, thou wouldst, <^c, have/- 
II auroit, he would, (^c, have. ?.. 

14* >• 



Plural. 

Nous aurions, we should, <^c. havcr 
Vous aufiez, you would, ^c. have. 
lis auroient, they would, c^c. have. 

Compound Tenses. 
They are formed by adding the participle passive, eu^ 
had, to the preceding : ex. 

Compound of the Present, 

Tai eu, Sic, I have had, ^/-c. 

Compound of the Imperfect. 

Tavois ew, &c. I had had,, ^c. 

Compound of the Preterite. 
Jhus ew, &:c. I had had, ^c» 

Compound of the Future. 
J^aurai ew, &c. I will or shall have had, ^c. 

Compound of the Conditional. 
J'^aurois eu, &c. I would, should, could, or might have 
had, ^c. 

Imperative Mood. 
Present. Singular. 
Aie, have thou. 
QuHl ait, let him have. 
Qu^elle ait^ let her have* 

Plural. 
Ayons^ let us have. 
Ayez^ have ye or you. 
I QuHls or elhs aient, let them h^xe^ 

Subjunctive Mood. 

Present. Singular.^ 
Igwe faie, that I have, or may have. 
iu aies, thou mayest have. 
il aii^ he may have* 



163 

Plural. 
Que nous ayons^ that we may have. 
vous ayez, you may have. 

Us aientj they may have. 

Preterite. Singular. 
Que feusse, that I might have or had. 
tu eusses, thou mightest have. 

il eut, he might have. 

Plural. 
Que nous eussions, that we might have. 
vous eussiezj you might have. 

Us eussent, they might have. 

Compound Tenses. 
They are formed hy adding the participle passive ew, 
had, to the two preceding : ex. 

Compound of the Present. 

Que fate cw, &c. that I may have had. 

Compound of the Preterite. 
Que feusse eu, &c. that I might have had. 
The learner ought to conjugate the preceding ver¥ 
with a negation : ex. 

Je n'ai pas, I have not ; 

J^ous Ti^avons pas, We have not ; 
always placing ne before the verb, and pas after it, 

CONJUGATION of the AUXILIARY VERB 
ETRE, TO BE. 
Infinitive Mood. 
Present. Compound of the Present, 

JB^re, to be. Avoir ete, to have been. 

Participle active. Compound of the Past. 

Etant^ being. Ayant etc, having been. 

Participle passiye* 

£tt6 ))€€«• 



164 

Indicative Mood. 

Present.' Singular. Plural. 

Je suis^ I am. ^ous sommes, we are. 

Tu es, thou art. Vous etes, you are. 

// est, he is. lis sont, thej are. 

Imperfect. Sing. Plural. 

Tetois, 1 was. Nous etionsj we were. 

Tu etois, thou wast. Vous etiez, you were. 

II etoit, he was. lis etoient, they were. 

Pret. Sing. Plural. 

Je fus, I was. Nous fumes, we were. 

Tu fus, thou wast. Vous futes, you were. 

II fut, h'? was. lis furentj they were. 

Future. Singular. 
Je serai, I shall or will be. 
Tu serns, thou wilt, S/c. be. 
// sera, he will, S^c» be. 

Plural. 
Nous serons, we shall, <^c. be. 
Vous serez, you will, ^c. be. 
7/5 seront, they will,.4§'c. be. 

Conditional. Singular. 
Je serois, I would, could, should, or might be. 
Tu serois, thou wouldst, Sfc^ be. 
// seroit, he would, ^c. be. 
Plural. 
Nous serions, we should, Sfc, be. 
Fcm5 seriez, you would, (^^c. be. 
7/5 seroient, they would, <^c. be. 

Compound Tenses. 
'They are formed by adding the participle passive of 
this verb, ete, been, to the simple tenses of the indica- 
tive mood of the verb avoir : ex. 

Compound of the Present. 
J'm 6U, &c. I have been, ^*c. 

Compound of the Imperfect. 
J^mois 6t6y &,€. I had been, §'c. 



Compoimd of the Preterite. 
Tev.s et% &,c. I had been, Sfc, 

Compound of the Future. 
J'^aurai e7e, &;c. I shall or will have been, <Sfc, 

Compound of the Conditional. 
J'^aurois ete^ &c. I should, could, would, or might 
have been, &c. 
Imperative Mood. 
Present. Singular. 
Sois, be thou. 
Qu^il soit, let him be. 
Plural. 

ScyonSj let us be. 

Soyez^ be ye. 

QuHls soient. let them be. 

SuBJT7:xCTIVE MoOD. 

Present. Singular. 
Queje sclf^ that 1 be, or may be. 
tu sots, thou mayest be. 

il soif, he may be. 

PluraJ. vj 

Que nous soyons, that we may be. . ■ 

vons soyez, you may be. 

ils soient, they may be. 

Preterite. Singular. 
Que je fusse, that I might be, or were. 
J tu fusses, thou mightest be. 
ii fut, he might be. 

Plural. 
Que nous fussions, that we might be. 
vous fussiez, you mi{>:ht be. 

ils fussent, they might be. 

Compound Tenses. 
They arc formed by adding the participle past of this 
verb, ete, been, to the two simple tenses of the sub- 
junctive mood of the verb avoir : ex. 

Compound of the Present. 
Que faic e7e, that I may have been. ^'c. 



166 

Compound of the Preterite. 
Que feussc 6te^ &c. that I might have been, ^c. 
This verb, as well as the preceding, is to be conju- 
gated with the negation : ex. 

Je ne suis pas, I am not, 

J\''ous ne sommes pas, We are not, 
J^, B, llere it is pecuharly necessary to observe, that 
the two above verbs, avoir ^ to have, and e/re, to be, 
are only auxiliaries when they are joined with some par- 
ticiple passive of another verb ; otherwise, etre may 
properly be called a suhsiantive verb ; that is, a verb 
which only expresses the affirmation, without any in- 
herent quality ; and the verb avoir is an active one, 
which signifies to possess, 

EXERCISES on the two AUXILIARY VERBS. 
GENERAL OBSERVATION, 

Every verb must agree with its nominative case in 
person and number ; but after collective nouns, such as 
amas,foule, injlnite, nonibrc^ la plupart, &.c. followed by a 
genitive, the verb must agree with that genitive in 
number : ex. 
La plupart de ses amis Pont Most of his friends have 

ahandonne^ forsaken him. 

In order to ease the learner, the different simple 
tenses are marked in the following exercises as far as the 
irregular verbs, when it is hoped every difficulty will 
be removed by practice and attention. The second per- 
son singular, being seldom or never used in conversa- 
tion, has been omitted throughout the exercises on the 
rerbs. 

Indicative Mood. 

Pres. I have a book, - - I am happy. - - He has 

/lew rewa?, adj. 
a. hat which is too big. - - - We have no 

frop,adv. grrtn J, adj. 

money. - - - We are not ambitious. - - - - You have 
urgent.m, «m6?toa:,adj. 



167 

a sword. - - You are very proud. - - - - Those girls 

orgiieilhux^adj. 
have modesty ; they are virtuous. 

7nodestie^ f. vertueux^ adj. 

Imp. I had a friend. - - 1 was grateful. - - - My 

reconnoissant^ adj . 

sister had no work, she was lazy. We hM 

ouvrage^m, pares seux^adj, 

a holiday, we were very glad of it. - - - You had 
»o^ conge^m, a{se,n.dj, 

company, but you were not ready. - - Your brothers 
compagnie,(. mais^c, jore%adj. 

had learning, they were loved by every body. 

savoir^m* air?ie,p.p. de 

Pret. (As soon as) I had a fine horse I was 

Des que^c, de bonne 

merry. - - - My cousin had a little garden, he 
hum eu r, cons in^m, 

was ingenious. - - As soon as we had bread we 

adroit., ad] * pain^xn, 

were satisfied. - - You had fine weather, you were 
ras5a5ie,p.p. terns ^m, 

pleased. Your friends had beautiful flowers 5 

content ^ady 

they were very careful of them. 

soigneux^ady 
FuT. I shall have discretion; I shall be prudent. 
discr6tioi}^L 
- - Miss White shall have a bird that will be very 

oisean^xn, 
tame. - - - We shall have no books, we shall not 
apprivoise^ad'y 
be learned. - - You shall have pens and paper : you 

savant^ady 
will be busy. ----- The English will have a good 

occwjoe.adj. 
admiral ; they will be victorious. 
rtmim/,m. victorieux^ad'y 

CoNi). I could have a pretty dog. - - - I would 
joU.) adj • chien , m . 



168 

not be troublesome. - - - - Mr. Thomas would have 

impor tun, a.dj, 
good wine ; it would be a delicious thing. - - We 

ce delicieu/ap,2id'j, chose^L 

would have a dictionary : we would not be negligent. 
- - - You would have good officers ; you would be 

invincible. These ladies should have a better 

invincible, Sid j. 

reception ; they would be thankful. 

accueil, m. reconnoissant, adj. 

Imperative Mood. 
Have pat'-ence and be indulgent. - - Let her have a 
gown ; let her be happj. - - Let us have at least 

uu moins^adv, 
some gratitude ; let us be diligent. - - Let them 

reconnoissancej. 
have partridges ; let them be merry. 

perdrix^L joyeux, adj. 

Subjunctive Mcod. 
Pres. That I may have riclics. That I may 

be charitable. That he may have scholars. - - - - 

That he may be attentive. Tiiat we may have a 

attentif^ady 
good house. - - - That we may be well lodged. - - 

6im,adv. /oge,p.p. 
That you may have your money ; that you may 

argent ^m, 

be paid. That they may have apples : that 

/ja7/e,p.p. 
they may be ripe. 

mil r 5 adj. 

Pret. That I might have generosity. - - - That I 

generosifLL 

might not be poor. That he might have no 

paavre,2id\, 

pleasure. - - - That he might be uneasy. That 

plaisir^m, inguicf, adj. 

we might have our share. - - - - That we might not 
parf,t 



169 

be deceived. - - - That you might liave a couple 

<ro7npe, p.p. couph.L 

of fowls. - - - That you might be pleased. - - - That 

con/en]{, adj. 
they might have no pension. - - - That they might 
not be rewarded. 

recomj3ense,p.p. 

Promiscuous EXERCISES upon the COMPOUND 

TENSES. 

I have had (a great deal) of trouble 5 I have not 

peine^L 
been rewarded. - - - Your brother would have had 
leave, if he had been diligent. -- - - If you had 
ptrmission^L 

married him, you would have had a tyrant 
ipousi^^,^, tyran^m, 

instead of a husband ; you never could have been 
aulieu^ip. maW,m. ne jamais 

happy. - - - - If we had fought, we could not 

co'mbattu^p,-p, 
have been conquered. - - - Thomas has had two 

raincw, p.p. 
holidays, because he has been very active. - - - 

conge, m. parceque^c, actif^a,dj. 

Your friend could have had a better watch, he 

montre^i. 
would not have been cheated. - - - Your uncle and 

frow^e, p.p. 
my brother have been wet. - - - You could have 

woui//e,p.p. 
killed a hare, if you had had a gun. 
^Me,p.p. llevre^m. fusil^m. 

After these exercises, the learner ought to conjugate 
the two foregoing verbs, throughout the several tenses 
of the indicative mood only, first with an interrogation 
affirmative, and then with an interrogation negative : 

lo 



170 
Singular. 

Affirmativelj. 

Ai'je? have I? \ Suis-je? ami? 

J't-il 7 has he ? | Est-xl ? - is he ? 

Monfrlre a-t-il ? has my hrother ? 

Sajille est-elle ? is her daughter ? 

Negatively. 

K'^ai'je pas ? have I not ? I Xe suis-je pas ? am I not ? 
N^a-t-il pas 7 has he not ? | »N"^est-il pas 7 is he not ? 

vAfa soewr n/a-i-elle pas 7 has not my sister ? 

Foire cousin 'nPest-il pas 7 is not your cousin ?, 

Plural. 
Affirmatively. 



Avons-nous 7 have we ? 
Avez-vous 7 have you ? 
Ont-ils 7 have they ? 



Sommes-nous 7 are we ? 
Etes'vous 7 are you ? 
Sont-ils 7 are they ? 



Vos freres ont-ils 7 have your brothers ? ^'C. 

Ses Jllks sont-elles 7 are his daughters ? ^^c. 

Negatively. 

M'^avons-nous pas 7 have we not ? 

M^avez-vous pas 7 have you not ? 

Woni'ils pas 7 have they not? 

5e5 enfans n^ont-ils pas 7 have not his children ? 

JVe sommes-nous pas 7 are we not ? . 

Jsf^etes-vous pas 7 are you not ? 

JVe sont'ils pas 7 are they not ? 

.¥ e5 5C8ur5 Tie sont-elles pas 7 are not my sisters ? i^-c. 

N. B. In the interrogations, it must be observed, 
that when there is a noun standing as a nominative 
to the verb, the pronouns i7, elk, nous^ vous^ ils^ 
tlles^ though not expressed in English, must be 
expressed in French immediately after the verb, ac- 
^.ording to the person and number; and when the 
Verb terminates with a vowel, a -t- is to be added in 



171 

the third person singular between the verb and the pro- 
noun, the noun beginning the phrase : ex. 

Votre onch a-t-il des en- Has your uncle any chil- 

fans ? dren ? 

that is, Your uncle, has he any children ? 

Mon cousin aura-i-il conge ? Will my cousin have a 

holiday ? 
that is, My cousin, will he have a holiday ? 

The same- rule must be observed in the conjugation 
of the other verbs : ex. 

Voire frere joue-t-il du Does your brother play on 

violon ? the violin ? 

Sa sccur dinera-t'eWe ici Will her sister dine here 

mtjou rd'hui ? to-d ay ? 

But if the sentence begiti with que interrogative, or 
an adverb followed by a noun, the pronoun is not to be 
expressed, and that iioun is to be put after the verb ; ex. 

Que fait xotre sceur ? What is your sister doing? 

Comment se jpori,e votre Hozc does your brother ? 
frere ? 

When, in French, we make a general interrogation 
. concerning a sudden pain^ misfortune^ accident^ &c. 
we say, 
Qu''est-ce que c'esi ? What is the matter ? 

But if speaking to or of a person, we must use the 
\^erb avotr, and follow the above rule : ex. 
Qu^avez-vGus ? What is the matter with 

you? 
Qu* a-t-il ? What is the matter with 

him? 
Qu'^aviez-vous ? What was the matter with 

you? 
Qu'^avoit 'cotre saur ce What was the matter with 
matin ? your sister this morning ? 

The learner will have no trouble in going through 
the other simple tenses of the indicative mood ; and as 



172 - 

for the compounds, it needs only to be remarked, that 
«w, had, or e/e, been, is to be added to the simple tenses 
»f the verb avoir, to have : ex. 

Ai-je eu ? have I had ? 

N'^ai-je pas eu? have I not had ?&:,€, 

Ai-je ete ? have I been ? 

N^ai-jepas ete? have I not heen?&Lt» 

Promiscuous EXERCISES on the preceding 
RULES. 

Have I my books ? - - Am I not unhappy to 

malheureux, adj . de 
have lost his friendship ? - - Has he no money ? 

joerJw, p.p. amitie^L 

Is my sister arrived ? - - Has not your father a great 

arrive,]).^, 
deal of friendship for you ? - - What is the matter 
with you ? - - Have not your parents sent you 

en'uoi/e,p.p. 
all the money which you wanted ? - - - - Have we 

avoir^v.besoinde 
not a garden? - - Are we not very happy? - - - 

Have you a good gun ? Are you dexterous ? - - 

adroit, 3idy 
Have not my brother and sister a beautiful coach ? •• •• 
Are not Paul and Thpmas two pretty children ? - - 

JQ/»",adj. 
Are your brothers arrived ? - - Are you not glad 
to see them ? - - What is the matter with him ? 
de voir,Y* 
Have they not spoken to him ? - - Hfed you not a 

par 16, ip, p. 
little dog ? - - Was not your paper very good ? - - Are not 
the English ladies generally handsomer than 

generalement, adv. 
the French ? - - Shall you have occasion for your dic- 

hesoin,m, de 
tionary ? - - Shall I not have the pleasure to see 

de 



173 

you to-morrow ? - - - Were you not in the room ? - - 
demain, adv. c/i ambre, f. 

Shall we not have leave ? - - - - Will they not be 
angry ? - - Gould you not have had a better watch ? 
y«c/ie,adj. 
- - - If France were as rich as England, would 

5^,c. 
it not be the best* country in the world ? - - - 
ce,pro. 
Will you not be ashamed ? - - - - Has not your 

honteux^2.dj, 
friend had bad vv^eather ? - - - What was the 

mauvais^^d}, terns, m, 
matter with him this morning ? - - - - Had not our 
admiral better seamen than yours ? - - Has he been 

matelot^m* 
victorious ? - - Would not your hat be too big ? - - - - 
-victorieux^s-dy grand, 3.dj. 

Is not your sister older than mine ? - - Are you 

«ge,adj. 
not happier than if you were married ? - - - Shall 

mane, p.p. 
not John have a holiday, if he be diligent ? - - Has not 

Jean 
your cousin more money than you ? - - - Was not your 
wine very dear ? 

The learner will soon be convinced how necessary il 
is to know these two verbs perfectly well ; because, in- 
dependently of being constantly used, the compound 
tenses of all the others are formed with them. When 
he is well acquainted with their usage, he will only have 
to add the participle passive to any of their tenses : 
ex. 

Tai aime, I have loved, or did love. 

Je n'ai pas chaute, I have not sung, or did not sing. 



-^ See the Degrees of Comparison, page 60. 
15* 



.4i'je parle ? have I spoken ? or did I speak ^ 

J^^aije pas etudie ? have I not studied ? or did I not 

study ? 
Avez-vous danse ? have you danced ? or did^you dance ? 
N''avez-vous pas ecrit ? have you not written? or did yoU 

not v\rrite ? 
Je 5«i5 jo?xw2, I am punished. 
Jt ne suis pas attendu, I am not expected, 
Suis-je aime ? am I loved ? 
JVe suis-je pas perdu ? am I not undone ? 
Etes-vovs marie 7 are you married ? 
J^''etes-vous pas convaincu ? are you not convinced ? 

REMARK on the Verb ETRE, to be. 

In English, when this verb immediately precedes 
any noun, signifying old^ hungry^ thirsty^ cold, hot, ©r 
afraid, it should be rendered in French by avoir, tc^ 
have, and the adjective must be changed into its sub- 
stantive : ex. 

Quel age Q,Yez-voiis ? How old are you ? 

J'ai sept aiis, I am seven years old ? 

Awez'vous faim ? Are you hungry ? 

Nony maw j'ai soif. No, but I am thirsty, &c. 

EXERCISES. 

How old is your daughter ? She is sevea 

Que/, pro. Jilh,L 
years old. - - - My son will be eleven years old 
o?i,m. t<s^ fils^m, 
(in the) month of April. I was very 

au mois,m* Avril,m. grand.adj. 

hungry when I arrived. Were you not 

quand,c. suis arriv6,\* 
very thirsty ? - - He is not afraid. - - You will 

gran J, adj. peur,L 

soon be warm. - - - Are you not cold ? - - - - 

hient6t,Q,dy. chaud,m» froid,m. 

How old are these two young children ? Tke 

enfant^m* 



m 



r75 

one is three years old, and the other is not yet 

encore, adv. 
four. - - - Was not my sister more than ten years old 
when she died ? 

quand^3idv, mourut^y, 

FIRST CONJUGATION. 

Infinitive Mood. 

Present. Parl-er, to speak. 

Participle active. *ant^ speaking. 

Participle passive. e,m. ee,f. spokeit. 

Compound Tenses. 

Present. Avoir parity to have spoken. 
Past. Ayant parlc^ having spoken. 

Indicative Mood. 
Present. Singular. 
Je parW, I speak, or I do speak, or^ I am speaking.f' 
Tu es, thou speakest. 
// e, he speaks. 

Plural. 
J^ous *onSj we speak. 
Vous ez, you speak. 
lis ent^ they speak. 

* Verbs in this conjue;ation, the root of which terminates in o or c, 
immediately succeeded by A or o, require, for the softening of their' 
sound, that an E be added to the g, and a cedilla to the 9. Stars 
Are placed where these alterations are required. 

t When in English, a participle active is joined to any of the tenses' 
of the auxiliary verb to foe, to express the continuation of the action, 
the auxiliary must be left out in French, and the participle put in the 
same tense, Sec. with the auxiliary that is suppressed : 
Je parity I am speaking ; Je priois^ I was desiring ; 



V^ous paries^ you are speaking ; 
Xous danstri^s^ we sbalj be dan- 
cing ; ' 



JVous chant ions, we were singing ; 
lis ^criroient, they should be 
writing ; 



and not Je suis parlant^ vous ties parlanly j'etois priant^jiGBnous 
sferoiis dunsant.^ iU ssroitnt ecTivaiit^ &c. 



yjc^nc 



176 

Imperfect. Singular. 
Je parl-^ois, I was speaking, spoke, or did speak. 
Tu *ois^ thou wast speaking, (^c, 
II *oit, he was speaking, ^c. 

Plural. 
J^ous ions, we were speaking, Sfc. 
Vous iez, you were speaking, Sfc, 

Us *oient, they were speaking, Sfc» 

Preterite. Singular. 
Je parl-*m, I spoke, or did speak. 
Tu *as, thou spokest. 
II *«, he spoke. 

Plural. 
J^ous *dmes, we spoke. 
Vous *dtes, you spoke. 
Us erent, they spoke. 

Future. Singular. 
Je parl-erai, I shall or will speak. 
Tu eras, thou shalt or wilt speak. 
II era, he shall or will speak. 

Plural. 
J^ous erons, we shall or will speak. 
Vous erez, you shall or will speak. 
lis eront, they shall or will speak. 

Conditional. Singular. 
Jc parl-erow, I should, would, or might speak. 
Tu erois, thou shouldst, Sfc, speak. 
// eroit, he should, Sfc. speak. 

Plural. 

Jstous erions, we should, Sfc, speak. 
Vous eriez, you should, Sfc, speak. 
Us eroient, they should, SfC speak. 

Compound Tenses. 
Present. J'' ai parte, I have spokea. ^^ 

Imperfect. J^avois parle, I had spoken. 
Preterite. J''eus parle^ I had spoken.- 



177 

Future. J^aurai parle, I shall or will have spoken. 

Conditional. J^aurois parle, I should, would, could, have- 
spoken. 

Imperative Mood. 
Present. Singular. 
Parl-e, speak thou. 
QuHl e, let him speak. 

Plural. 
*ons^ let us speak. 
ez, speak ye. 
QuHls ent, let them speak. 

Subjunctive Mood. 
Present. Singular. 
Que je parl-c, that I may speak, or I speak. 
tu es, thou mayest speak. 

il e, he may speak. 

Plural. 
710US ions, that we may speak. 
vous iez, you may speak. 

Us ent^ they may speak. 

Preterite. Singular. 
Queje parl-*«55e, that I might speak, or I spoke. 
tu *asses, thou mightest speak. 
il *dt, he might speak. 

Plural. .. 
nous *assions^ that we might speak. 
vous *assiez, you might speak. 

Us "^assent, they might speak. 

CoMPOuxD Tenses. 
Present. Quefaieparle^ that I may have spoken. 
Preterite. Que feusse parle^that 1 might have spoken. 

After the same manner are conjugated about 2700 
regular verhs. The following are excepted : viz. 

Aller^ being very irregular^ will be geeii among the 
irregular verbs. 



178 

Envoyer is only irregular in the future and conditioa- 
al present ; as, instead of saying, fenvoyerai, I will send, 
Sfc, shnvoyerois^ I would send, ^c. according to this con- 
jugation, we say, 

Future. 
Singular. Plural. 

Tenve,rrai^ I will send. J^y^ous envtrrons, 
Tu enverrasy Vous cnverrez* 

II enverra^ lis enverront. 

Conditional. 
Singular. Plural. 

Tenverroisy I would send. Nous enverrions. 
Tu enverroisy Vous envcrriez* 

II enverroity lis enverrolenf. 

' PuER {sentir mauvais). This verb is only used in 
the infinitive mood, present tense, imperfect, future of 
the indicative, and conditional. Formerly this verb 
was irregular in the three persons of the present tense 
of the indicative mood ; as je pus, iu pus, il put ; cus- 
tom has, however, reformed the abuse, and will have it, 
Je puc, tu pucs, il pue. 

Verbs ending in ayer and oyer, as essayer, to try, 
tnvoyer, to send, change the y into i wherever the let- 
ter y is immediately followed by an e mute : ex. fessaie^ 
tu essaies, il essaie^fenvoie, tu envoies, il envoie, &,c. 

The learner, having conjugated a verb affirmatively 
and negatively, ought to conjugate two others, with an 
interrogation affirmative and negative, in the indicative 
mood only, and so on through the other conjugations, 
before he attempts the exercises : ex. 
Affirmatively. 
Manges-iu ? dost thou eat ? 
Mange-t-il ? does iie eat ? 
Parlons-nous ? do we speak, <^c. 
Negatively. 
J^e parl6-je pas 7 do I not spreak ? 

Ma sceur ne chante-t-ellc pas ? does not my sister sing. 

N, B, In many verbs, common usage does not admit 
an int§i"ro§fation i^ the first person singular, presentj ©f- 



179 

the indicative mood. — Instead of saying, Mangi-je ? ©o 
I eat ? Punis'je ? Do I punish ? &c. we say, 

Est-ce que je mange ? Est-ce qiiejepunis ? &:c. 
Some verbs, ending in e mute, in the first person 
singular, present, in the indicative mood, change the 
e mute into e with an acute accent, and je after it 5 as 
parli-je. 

It has before been observed, that the compound 
tenses are easily formed, by adding the participle passive 
of the verb to any of the tenses of the auxiliaries a-ooir^ to 
have, or itre^ to be, as they have been conjugated, either 
affirmatively, negatively, or interrogatively : ex. 
Affirmatively, 
J'ai danse^ I have danced, or I did dance. 

Negatively. 
Je n'aipas parle, I have not spoken, or I did not speak. 

Interrogativel} -affirmatively. 
Avez-vpus chante ? Have you sung, or did you sing ? 

Interrogatively-negatively. 
N'^a-t-ilpas mange? Has he not eaten, or did he not eat ? 
Observe, that we make use of 

Mener, To take, to carry, 

Amener^ To bring, 

Erhmener^ To carry, or take away, 

and all the compound veibs of mener, whenever we 
speak of rational or irrational beings to which nature 
has given the faculty of walking, if they be not deprived 
of it through illness or accident : in ail other cases we 
make use of 

Porter, To carry, to 'take, 

Apporter^ To bring, 

Emporter, To carry, o?* take away, 

and all the compounds oi porter^ 

N. B. It must be necessarily observed here, previ- 
ously to the learner^s translating the following exercises, 
that the English auxiliary verbs, have, am, do, did, will, 
shall, can, let, may, zuould, could, should, might, and often 
ought^ are most commonly used, in that language, t* 



avoid that repetition of a preceding verb, or in answer 
to a question or foregoing sentence ; to avoid the repe- 
tition of that verb, and often of one or more pronouns ; 
but in French, the verb, expressed in the first member, 
©r part of the sentence, must always be repeated, as well 
as the pronouns which it may govern : ex. 



Je vous prie. de porter de- 
main ceite lettre a 
Monsieur D, 

Je la lui porterai avec 
plaisir^ 

Vous ne pourriez pas ap- 
prendre cette legon en 
dix jours^ 

Jl me semble que je pour- 
rois Papprendre^ 

Attendez-vous vos sceurs 

auj6urd''hui ? 
Oui, nous les at tendons^ 

Voire frere icrit-il a M. 

rootre pere ? 
Owi, il lui ecrit a present^ 

Apprenez'vous le Franqois? 
Ouijje Papprends^ 

Avez-vous achete hs livres 
dont vous nCavez parle ? 

Non^ je ne les ai pas en^ 

core achetes^ 
JVe devroient-ils pas faire 

s avoir a hur pere que 

le'ur frere est dans la de- 

tresse 7 
Certaincment^ Us devroient 

h lui faire savoir^ 



I beg of you to carry that 

letter to-morrow to 

Mr. D. 
I will, with pleasure, {carry 

it to him^) understood. 
You could not learn that 

lesson in ten days. 

It seems to me as if I 
could {learn it,) under- 
stood. 

Do you expect your sisters 
to-day ? 

Yes, we do, {expect them,) 
understood. 

Is your brother writing to 
your father ? 

Yes, he is now, {writing to 
him,) understood. 

Are you learning French ? 

Yes, I am {harming it,) un- 
derstood. 

Have you bought the 
books which you men- 
tioned to me ? 

No, I have not yet, (bought 
them,,) understood. 

Ought they not to let their 
father know that their 
brother is in distress ? 

Certainly, they ouglit, {to let 
him know it,) understood. 



EXERCISES ON THIS CONJUGATION. 

Indicative Mood. 
Pres. I play sometimes, but I ne- 

jou-er^Y» 'quelquefois^3.dv, mais^c. nejcir 

ver win. - - - How much does your brother 

mai5,adv. gagn-er^Y. Comhien^^dy. -o^ 
give for his board ? - - We do not command ; 

donn-er^v, pension^L *<>^ command-er^v, 

we entreat. - - You always borrow ; you 

pri-er^v. tonjours^^idv^ emprunt-ei'^v, 

never lend. You are always speaking when 

pret-er, v. quand, adv. 

I write. - - - Why do you not grant 

ecris^v. Pourquoi^B.dv» ^o^ accord-er^v, 

him that favour ? - - - What do they ask 

grdce^ f. demander, v. 

you? 

Imp. I was desiring them to sing a song. - - 

pri-er^Y, de chant-er^Y, chanson, f. 

She was not speaking to you. - - Were we not jok- 

badin- 
ing ? - - Were you not scolding them when I came ? 
cr,v, grond'Cr^Y* vins^y* 

Yes, I was. - - - They were eating fish. 

mang-er^Y, poisson^m, 
Pret. I spoke to them (a long while). - - - Did 

long-tems, adv. 
not the king forgive them? - - No, he did not, > 

roi,m. pardonn-er^Y* 
We wept for joy when we found her. - - - 

pleur-er^Y* de joie,L trouv-er^y. 

Why did you not play on Friday last ? - - They 

^oo Vendredi^m, dernier^^dj, 
fastened the man to a tree, and then 

li-cr,y» arbre^m, ensiiite,a.dY, 

robbed him of his watch, gold ring, and all the 
vol-ey^Y, <o^ montrc^L bague^L 

money he had in his pocket. - - The soldiers first 
pochc^L 
16 



i82 

pillaged the town, and then slaughtered without 
j)ill-er^v. 6gorg-er,v, 

pity the old men, women, and children. 
jfitic^L vieillard,m* 

FuT. I will buy a watch the first time I 

achet-er^v. fois^f, 

go to London. - - Will not your father send 
irai^Y, envoy-er^v, 

you to school this winter ? - - - What shall we give 

icole^L hiver^m. 

him ? - - - Will you not carry the children to the 

men-er^Y* enfant^m. 
play ? - - - They will empty the bottle if yon 
comidie^f, vid-er^y, houteille^U 

do not take it away, 

v^ emport-er^Y, *<» 

Coi^D. I would lend them money if 

pret-er^Y. 
they were not so idle. - - - - Would not your 

paresseux^2iAy 
mother despise such a conduct ? - - Why should 

mepris-er^ v. tel, adj . -conduite, f. 
we send them thither ? - - - I am sure you would 

sur^ adj. 

marry her, if she were rich. Would they 

6pous-er, v. nc/ie, adj . 

liot pay us, if they had money ? 

pax/^cr^Y* 

Imperative Mood. 

Bridle my horse, and bring him t# 

Brid-er.v. cheval^tn. amen-er^v. 

jqtje. - - - Give a chair to that lady. - - Let her not 
chaise^ f, dame^L 

(come up,) for I am engaged* - - - Let us catry those 

moni-er^Y, engage, p,p» 

peaches to Mrs. D**** - * * Do not neglect yoio- 

peche^ f* neglig-er, v* 



183 

affairs. - - 1 promise that I will not. - - Let them hunt. 
affaire, f. promds, v. ^^^^'^^^ ^'• 

Subjunctive Mood. 
Pres. That I may help you. - - Though* he 

aid-er,v. Quoique.c. 

do not approve of my plan. Provided* 

approu-v-er^y. -^ planum, Pourvu que^c, 

we avoid their company. - - - That you may 

6vit-er,v. compagnie^L 

try that gun. - - - That they may not com- 

iprouii'^r^Vt 
xnand. 

Pret. That I might change my opinion, - - - 

chang-er^ opinion^ f. 

That he might eat an apple. - - - That we might not 

pomme^f, 
fall into their hands. - - - That you might 

tomh-er^v. dans^ip. main^i, 

encourage the industrious. - - • That* they might 

encourag-er^y* industrieux^adj* 

exercise their talents, 
exerc-er^y* tahnt^m. 

Promiscuous EXERCISES on the COMPOUND 

TENSES. 

I have forgotten to hring your penknife. - - - 
ouhli-er^y, de canif^m. 

He has not yet spoken to us. - - Has she brought 

encore, adv. '^>- 

her work with her ? Yes, she has. - - Have we not gain- 

gagn- 
ed our cause ? - - Why have you not yet begun _ 
cr,v. commenc-er^y. 

your exercise ? - - You had taken the mustard 

theme^ m . moutarde^ f. 

* Conjunctioas which require the subjunctive mood, as will be seen 
hereafter. 



awaj. - - - You would have judged more favour* 

juger^v, favor- 

ably of him. - - Stay here till* 

abhment^adv, Rester^Y, ici, ?idv, jus qu^ a ce qve^c. 

we have dined. - - - Could we not have assisted 
din-er^ v. aid-er^ v. 

that family ? - - They have broken all the panes 

famille^L cass-er^v, carreau^m, 

of glass in their windows, because they had 

vitre^L c?c,p. fenetre^L parceque^c. 

not illuminated as it had been ordered. - - - 

illumin-er^Y » com?ne, adv. ordonn-er^Y. 

I shall have dined soon. - - - We would have 

bientot^adv. 
sent them to prison, if they had resisted. - - 

invoy-cr^v, en prison^i'. risist-er^Y, 

That we may have denied the fact. - - - Had you 

ni-tr^Y, fait^m, 
not imitated their manners ? - - They had not exe- 
imit-er,Y, maniere^f, coci- 

cuted his commands. -, - - Had I not light- 

cui-er^Y. commandement^m, allum' 

ed the fire ? - - They would have carried him to 
er,v. yew,m. 
the concert if I had not hindered them 

empech-er^Y, 
(from it). - - We might have accepted of his 

671 acGep^er,v, «<>^ 

offers. - - Why did you not ? 
offre^ f. 

SECOND CONJUGATION. 

Infinitive Mood. 

Present. Pun-fr, to pnnish. 

Participle active. issant^ punishing. 

Participle passive. «,m. ie,f. punished* 

Compound Tenses. 
Present. Avoir pun% to have punished. 
Past. Ayant puni, having punished^ 



185 

Indicative Mood. 

Present. Singular. 

St pun-ts, I punish, I do punish, or I am punishing. 
Tvi, is^ 
li itj 

Plural, 

J^ous tssonsy we punish, &c. 
Vous issez, 
lis issenty 

Imperfect. Singular. 
Je pun-mow, I did punish, or I was punishing;, &c'. 
Tu issoisy 
II issoit, 

Plural. 
J^ous issionsy we did punish, &:c. 

Vous issiez^ 
lis issoient, 

Preterite. Singular. 
Je pun-w, I punished, or I did punish. 
Tu is, 
II it, 

Plural. 

Nous imes, we punished, &:c. 

Vous lies, 

lis irent, ) 

Future. Singular. 

Je pun-i'm, I shall or will punish. 
Tu iras, > 

II ira, 

Plural. 

Nous irons, we shall or will punish. 
Vous irez, 
Its iront, 

16* 



Conditional. Singular, 

3t pun-zVo?5, I should, would, could, or might punish. 
Tu irois^ 
II iroit^ 

Plural. 

Jious irions^ we should, S^c, punish.. 
Vmts iriez, 
lis iroieni^f 

Compound Tenses. 

Present. J^aipuni, I have punished. 

Imperfect. J'^avois puni^ I had punished. 

Preterite. Jhus puni^ I had punished. 

Future. J^aurai pun% I shall, &c. have punished. 

Conditional. J^aurois puni^ I should, &c. have punished. 

Imperative Mood. 
Present. Singular. 

Pun-w, punish thou. 
QuHl isse, let him punish. 

Plural. 
issons, let us punish. 
issez, punish ye. 
Quails issent^ let them punishi 

Subjunctive Mood. 
Present. Singular. 
Que je -pvLTi'isse, that I may punish, or I ptmisli. 



tu 


tssesy 


il 


isst^ 




Plural. 


"tlOUS 


isfions^ that we may punislf, 


txms 


issuz^ 


ih 


issmif 



1«7 



Preterite. Singular. 

Que je piin-755s, that I might punish, or I punishelEJi 
iu isses. 
il it, 

Plural. 

nous issions, that we might punish. 
vous issiez, 



ils 



IS sent. 



Compound Tenses. 

Present. Que faie puni, that I may have punished. 
Preterite. Que feus se puni, that I might have punished, 



After the same manner 
hundred regular verbs ; the 
being irregular : 

Acquirir^ to acquire. 

Assaitlir^ to assault. 

Bouillir^ to boil. 

Courir^ to run. 

Cueillir^ to gather. 

Dormir^ to sleep. 

Faillir^ to fail. 

jPw7>, to flee, to avoid. 

Mentir^ to lie. 

Mourir, to die. 

Offrivj to offer. 



are conjugated about two 
following are excepted, as 

Ouvrir, to open. 
Partir^ to set out. 
Se repentir, to repent. 
Sentir, to smell. 
Servir, to serve. 
Sortir^ to go out. 
Souffrir^ to suffer. 
Tenir^ to hold. 
Venir, to come. 
Vetir, to clothe. 
And their compounds^ 



EXERCISES UPON THIS CONJUGATION. 

Indicative Mood. 
Pres. I always finish my work 

toujours^3.dv, fin-ir^v* ouvras:e,m, 

before the others. - - Your friend does not succeed 
nvant^ip, a7m,m. reuss-ir^v* 

in his undertaking. - - Do we not furnish arms 
dans,^, entreprise^f, fmirn-ir^Y^arme^i* 

against ourselves ? - - Why do you hate him ? • - 



185 

They cure the diseases of the body, and 

■guer-ir^v, maladie^L corps^m, 

not those of the mind. 

Imp. I was building my house when 

hdt'ir^Y, maison^L ^w«nc?,adv'» 

you demolished yours. - - Was he not enjoying 

demol-ir^v, jm-ir dc,v, 

a good estate ? - - We hated him, because he did 

hien^m, parceque^c. 

not act kindly towards us. - - On 

ag-ir^y. honnetement^B,dv. envers^p. *Swr,p. 

what were you reflecting ? - - The mountains were 

reflech-ir^v* montagne^L 

resounding with their cries. 
retent-ir^Y* de cn,m* 

pRET. I warranted them very good. - - Did not 
garant-ir^ v. 
your master accomplish his promise ? - - We (leap- 
accompl'ir^v* promesse^f* frau' 

ed over) the ditch, and seized the guilty. - - - 
chirpy* foss6,m, sais-ir,y. coupable^^dj. 

Why did you not applaud that pretty act- 

applaud'ir^y* a jo/i,adj. act' 

ress ? I did, with all my might. - - - Did not the sol- 
Wce,f. (?e,p. ybrce5, f. pi. sol- 

diers obey the commands of their gene^ 

dat^m, ohi'ir^y, aux cammandementjin, 
ral ? 

FuT. When shall I banish all these 

bann-ir^y* toiit,3,dj. 
thoughts from my mind ? - - This plant will soon 

pensee^L plante^L 

blossom, if you water it often. - - - We shall 

Jieur-ir^y, arreser^y, souvent^ady, 

Avarn your relations of it. - - - Shall you not 

avert-ir^y. parent,m, 

enjoy, as we do, the pure ple# 

jouir comme,adT* ^^ des /?wr,adj. 



18S 

sines of the country ? - - Her children will bless 

b6n-ir,y, 
her for it. 

CoND. I would choose this cloth, if I 

chois-ir^w drap^m, 

were in your place. - - Would he not blush, if he 

roug-ir^Y, 
acted so ? - - - - We would not punish them, if they 

am^z", adv. 
were diligent. - - Would you not act with less 

firec,p* mof«^, adv. - 
severity p - - - They could furnish us with arms an^ 
siviriti^ f. «©^ 

troops, if we wanted any. 

troupe^f. avoir besoin^v* 

Imperative Mood. 

Do not fill the glasses. - - - Let him enjoy 

rempUir^Y, xerre^m, 

the fruit of his labours. - - Weil ! let him, I do not 

fravail^m. Eh 6?'c?i,int. 
hinder him from it. - - - Let us reflect on what we 
empech-er^v, 

have to do. - - Let them define the question* 

a /aire, v. dejin-ir^ v. 

Subjunctive Mood. 

Pres. That I m.ay not perish. - - - I wish 

p6r'ir^\\ souhait-er^ V. 

he may succeed. - - - That we may not (bear hard- 

r6uss-ir,v, pdt-ir^w 

ghips). - That you may not hate us. - > Provided they 
do not (grov/ tall.) 
grand-lr^Y, 

Pket, That I might refresh my memory. - - 

rafrauh'h\y, vximoireyU 



190 

That she might not roast the meat. - - That we might 

(become younger). - - That you might punish the 

rajeun-ir^v. 
idle. - - That they might not (grow old). 

vieill-ir^y*. 

Compound Tenses. 

I have filled my cellar with good wine. ■. - - 

rctnpl-ir^Vt cave^f, de 

Has he not leaped over the ditch ? - - We had finished 
our work. - - - - They would have seized him. • - • 

ouvrage^m. 
We should hare perished without any assistance. - - 

sans, p. secours,m» 

When shall I have built my house ? - - I have 

hdt-ir, V. 
(very much) weakened his courage. - - Though 

beaucoup,2Ldv. affoibl-ir^v, Quoiqne^c* 

they have adorned their gardens to dazzle 

emhell-ir^v, jardin^m, pour eblou-ir^y, 

the vulgar, they have not succeeded, because 

vulgaire,m. parceque.Q* 

they have disobeyed their father and mother, 
desoh6-ir,y, a, 

THIRD CONJUGATION. 

Infinitive Mood. 

Present. Rec-erozV, to receive. 

Part, active. evant, receiving. 

Part. pass. %,m.we,f. received. 

Compound Tenses. 
Present. ^voir recu, to have received. 

Past. Ayant regu^ having received. 

* Verbs of this conjugation, the root of which terminates in c, re- 
quire for the softening of their sound , that a cedilla be added to the 
» (^9)j whewever it b fallowed h^ ^ or f. 



191 

Indicative Mood. 

Present. Singular. 

J'e teq-ois^ I receive, I do receive, or I am receiving, 

Tu ois, 
II oit, 

Plural. 

J^oiLs evons, we receive, <f/-c. 
Vous evez^ 
lis oivent, 

Imperfect. Singular. 

Je rec-evois, I did receive, or I was receiving. 
Tu evois^ 
11 evoit, 

Plural. 

J^ous evions^ we did receive, (^c* 
Vous eviez^ 
lis evoient, 

Preterite. Singular, 

Je re^-wj, I received, or I did receive. 
Tu us^ 
II Mi, 

Plural. 

}^ous umes, we received, <^c. 
Vous utes^ 
lis urentj 

Future. Singular. 

Je rec-evrai) I shall or will receive* 

Tu evraSf 
II evra, 

Plural. 

Kmis evrons, we shall or will receirCo 

Vous evreZj 
fh eitrqnt: 



192 
Conditional. Singular. 

Je rec-errow, 1 should, would, could, or might receive. 

Tu evrois^ 
II evroit^ 

Plural. 

Jsl'oiis evrions^ we should, ire, receive. 

Vous evriez^ 
lis evroient^ 

Compound Tenses. 

Present. J'^ai recu, I have received. 

Imperfect. J^avois regu^ I had received. 

Preterite. Tens requ^ I had received. 

Future. J'^aurai regu^ I shall, <^c. have received. 

Conditional. J^aurois regu, I should, <^c. have received 

Imperative Mood. 
Present. Singular. 

Re9-oj5, receive thou. 
QuHl oive, let him receive. 

Plural. 

evons^ let us receive. 
evez, receive ye. 
Quails oivenf^ let them receive. 

Subjunctive Mood. 
Present. Singular. 

Que je recj-owe, that I may receive or I receive. 

tu oives, 
il oive, 

Plural. 

nous evions^ that we may receive. 

vous eviezj 
ih oiventf 



idt 



t^cterite. Singular. 
Que je req-usse^ that I might receive, or I received. 



tu 

il 


usses^ 
ut, 

Plural. 


nous 


ussions, that we might receive* 


'VOUS 


ussiez^ 
ussent, 



Compound Tenses. 
Present. Quefaie recu., that I may have received. 
Preterite. Quefeusse regu^ that I might have received. 
Rccevoir des nouveUes de To hear from somebody. 

quelqu^un^ 

After the same manner are conjugated seven verbs 
only : the following are excepted, being irregulars : 



Asseoir^ to sit down. 
Dec^ioir^ to decay. 
Falloir, (verb impersonal,) 

to be needful. 
Mouvoir, to move. 
Pleuvoir^ (v. imp.) to rain. 



Pouvoir^ to be able. 
Savoir, to know. 
Vrdoir, to be worth, 
Voir^ to see. 
Vouloir^ to be willing. 
And their compounds. 



EXERCISES ON THIS CONJUGATION. 

Indicative Mood. 

pRES. I entertain great hopes from his 

conC'CVoir^Y, espirance^L 

conduct. - - - I am to write to your brother to- 

conduite^L * ecrire^v, 

morrow, to let him know that your father is 

pour fair c^Y» savoir^v, 

arrived. - - A commander ought to be intrepid 
commandant^m. d-evoir^ v. 

* When the verb to be is used in the present ov imperfect ten-es of 
the indicative mood, and precedes another verb in the infinitive mood, 
denotiji;^ a futurity in the action, it is to be rendered in French by the 
same t( nscs of Ihe verb devoir^ and not by eh-e. : ex. 

Je dois nller au pare, I am to g-o to the park. 

JVom devions iui ecrire^ We were to write to him. 
17 



194 

in the midst of dangers. - - He is to go 

au milieu^m, aller^r, 

and breakfast at my uncle's next Sunday, 

u>> dejeuner, Y* chez,^, 

and he is to come and sup with us. - - - We 

venir^Y, ^o^ souper^Y, 
sometimes entertain a hatred for persons who 
quelquefols, adv. d& la h aine, f. 

deserve our friendship. - - - Do you not per- 

miriter^Y, amiti6,L . ajo- 

ceiv'e a mountain beyond that tree ? - - Yes, 

perc-evoir, v. derriere, p. 

I do. - - We are to remit him the value in 

remettre^Y, ^ vahur^L e/i,p« 
goods or in money. - - Are you not to dine 

marchandise^L 
with my father and mother to-morrow ? - - Men com- 

dejnain.^dY, 
monly owe their virtues or their vices to edu- 

d-evoir^Y* 
cation (as much as) to nature. ^ - - Are these young 

autant que^c* 
ladies to go to the ball ? - - No, they are not. - - 

aller^Y, hal^m, 

A young man ought to love the society of those who 

socUt6.L 
are the most learned and modest. 

Imp. I owed four guineas to your aunt when she 
guin&e^L 
■died. - - Vfas not your brother to receive that mo- 
mourut.Y, 
iiey last Thursday ? - - "We received his tiresome 

Jeudi^m, ennuyant, adj. 

visits, because we were oj^jiged to it. - - Were you 

-'^diger^Y, 
not to let them know it sooner ? - - They were 

yair«, V. savoir, v. 

Hot to stay above six weeks. 

resfcr.Y* j)lus de^a-dr* 



Idif 

Pres. I received yesterday, with (a great deal) 

of pleasure, the books you sent me. - - As soon 

envoy er, v. 
as we perceived the danger, we warned him of it. 

averiir^v, 
- - - They heard yesterday from your brother. 

FuT. I shall entertain a bad opinion of 

mauvuis,3.di» 
you if you do not avoid Mr. R5'***'s company. - - 

eviter^ v. 
We shall owe him nothing more after this 

apres.^, 
month, - ■^ - I hope you will receive all my letters dur- 

ing my absence, and they will hear from their 

father in (a short) time. 

£?an5,p. peu^ady. 
CoND. I should answer your brother's 

* repondre^Y, a 
letter, but I have not time. - >■ - Ought not 



your sister to give your mother an account 

renc?re,v. «-<=^ compie.m, 

of all her actions? - - - She would soon per- 

hient6t^2,dv, 

* When the wonl .?/iow/</ expresses a duty or necessity, or can with 
propriety be turned into ought, it is rendered in French by the condi- 
tional present of the \erb devoir : ex. 

Je devrois aller le voir^ I should^ or ought to go and see him. 

Fouj devriez h secourir dans sa Y ov. should^ ov ought to helphirain. 

miscre^ &c. his misery, &c. 

The word should^ or ought^ when joined to the verb to have^ imme- 
diately followed by a participle passive, must be rendered by the con- 
ditional past of the above verb, with the participle passive turned 
into the present of the infinitive mood: ex. 
i/'aurois du Vobliger <i rtsier ici^ I should^ or ought to hare obligecl 

him to stay here. 
JS'f^us auriortp dii revenir plufof^ We should^ or ought to have come 

brick fooncr. 



ceive fhe danger, if she knew the eoasequenees 

savoit^ V. 
of it. - - Children should every day learn 

apprendre, v. 
iomething by heart. - - You should not despise 

cwur^m. mtpriscr^Y, 

the advice that he gives you. - - Should they, 

after what they have done, expect to 

apres^^» yai7,p.p. s''attendre^w a 

receive favours ? - - Grammar, geography, history, 
music, are sciences and arts which ladies should 
Bever neglect* 

Imperative Mood. 
Receive this small present as a token of my 

marque^f, 
friendship. 

Subjunctive Mood. 
Pres. and Fret. Though I perceive ships 

Quoique^ c. vaisseau^ m. 

(afar off,) I cannot distinguish them. - - He 

de /oin, adv. ne saurois^y, ^^ 

wrote to us by the tirst post, that we might 

ecrivit^v, ordhiaire^va, 

receive his orders (in proper time.) 
a km^, adv. 

Compound Tenses. 
I have not yet received his answer. - - - 

enco?'e, adv. rtponse^L 

You should have (been making) your theme this 

* faire^Y, 

morning instead of playing. - - He has entertained 
matin^m, au lieu^p, 
the hope of living here all his life. - - She ought 

■ vivre^v. icz,adv. vie^L 

to have thanked him for the good advice he 
remercitr^y* cZe,p. 



197 

gave her. - - - When did you hear from jour sister r 
We have not heard from her since her de- 

depuis^^. de- 

parture. - - - Your uncle should not have obliged 

partem, oncle^m, 

him to pay half the expenses. - - - We should 

ct moitie^L /ra?V,m.pl. 

have owed hiin one hundred livres. I beg 

livre,f. demander^y. 

your pardon, I ought not to have made you 

faire, v. 
wait so long. - - - Ought not we to have 

attendre,v» long-fems,2Ldv, 

employed our time better than (we did) 
employ er^v. nous n'avons fait^ 

the last three months we were in France ? 

FOURTH CONJUGATION. 

Infinitive Mood. 

Present. Vend-re, to sell. 

Part, active. ant^ selling* 

Part, passive. ti,m.i(€,f. sold. 

Indicative BIood. 

Present. Singular. 

Jt vend-5, I sell, I do sell, or am selling. 
Tu vend-,?, 
II vend^ 

Plural. 

^"01^5 ons^ we sell, c^c. 
Vous ez, 
Us ent, 

Imperfect. Singular. 

Je vend-o?5, I did :ii or was selling. 
Tu ois^ 

II oitj 



1^8 

Plural. 
Xoiis vend-ion5, we did sell, ^/-c, 

Vous iez. 



Preterite. Singular* 

Je yend-is, I sold, or did selL 
Tu is, 

II itj 

PluraL 
Jsfous imes, we sold, <^c» 
Vous lies, 
lis 



I rent. 



Future. Singular,. 

Je vend~m, I shall, or will sell* 

Tu ras, 

II ra^ 

PluraL 

J^ous ronsy we shall, or will selL 

V'ms rtz, 
lis ront^ 

Conditional. Singular, 

Je vend-roiV, 1 should, could, would, or might sell* 
Tu rois, 

II roity 

Plural. 
Nous fions^ we should, <^'C. 

Vous riez, 
lis roient, 

Compound Tenses* 

Present. J^ai vendu, I have sold. 

Imperfect. J'^avois vendu, I had sold. 

Pre'terite. J'^eus vendu, I had sold. 

Future. J'^aurai vendu, 1 shall, ^'C, have solcj. 

Conditional. J'^aurois vmdu^ 1 should, c$/e, have s^liJv 



Imperative Mood* 
Present. Singular. 

Vend-s, sell thou. 
QuHl e, let him sell- 

Plural. 





ons^ let us sell. 




ez, sell ye. 


Qu'ils 


enf, let them sell. 


- 


Subjunctive Mood. 




Present. Singular. 


Que je vend-e, that I may sell, or I sell. 


tu 


es, 


il 


c, 




Plural. 


nous 


ioiis^ that we may sell. 


tons 


iez, 


Us 


ent. 




Preterite. Singular. 


Que je vend-w5e, that I might sell, or I soli* 


tu 


isses^ 


il 


it, 




Plural. 


710US 


issions^ that w^e might sell. 


VOUS 


issiez^ 


ils 


is sent, 




Compound Tenses. 


Present. Que f 


'me vendu, that I may have sold. 


Preterite. Que j 


^eusse vendu. that I mi^ht have sold 



After the same manner are conjugated about forty 
Yerbs. The following are excepted as being irregular. 
Absoudre, to absolve. 1 Boire, to drink. 
Mnttr$y t€) h^^U \ Circonciref to circumcise. 



200 



Condure, to conclude. 

Conduiy-e^ to conduct. 
And all the verbs ending 
in mVe. 

Confire^ to preserve. 

Connoitre, to know. 
And all those ending in 
oitre, 

Coudre^ to sew. 

Craindre^ to fear. 
And all those ending in 
indre* 

Croire^ to believe. 

Dire^ to tell. 

Ecrire, to write. 

Faire, to make, to do. 

Frire^ to fry. 



Lire, to read. 

Mettre, to put. 

Moudrie, to grind. 

Naitre, to be born. 

Paitre, to graze, to feed. 

Plaire, to please. 

Prendre, to take. 

Rire, to laugh. 

Svffire, to suffice, to be suf- 
ficient. 

Suivre, to follow. 

Se taire, to hold one^S 
tongue. 

Traire. to milk. 



Vaincre 



, to conquer, 
to live. 



And their compounds. 



JV*. B. Verbs of this conjugation, the root of which 
terminates in p, as romp-re, corromp-re, &c. take a t in 
the third person singular of the present tense indicative 
mood : ex. je romps, tu romps, il rompt : the rest are 
conjugated as vendre, 

EXERCISES ON THIS CONJUGATION. 
Indicative Mood. 

pRES. 1 do not mean to wrong 

pr6tend-re,Y. ^o^ faire tort, v. 

iiim. ♦• - - Is your mother coming down ? We 

ZW,pro. descend-re,v, 

expect our friend, Mr. A***. Do not you 

attend-re,Y, 

forbid her to go there ? - - - They sell 

defend-re,\, de alhr,\. 

bad fruit. 

mauvaxs,2i^]» 

Imp. Did I not interrupt him, while 

inter romp're,Y» pendant qu€,€^ 



he was answering them ? ^ - - She was mehing int* 
repond-re^v, fond-re^v, en, p. 

tears, when you arrived. - - ? Were we not losing 
larmeA. arriver^v* perdre^y, 

our time ? - - You were not spreading your nets. - - 

tems^m, eiend-re^v, Jilet^m, 

Did they corrupt our manners ? 

corromp-rc^Y, mceMr5,f. pi. 

Pret. (As soon as) I had received my money, I 
Des que^c, 
returned them what they had lent me. - - - Did 

reiid-re^v. preter^v, 

he not hear you ? - - - We (waited for) them a 

entend-re^y* attend-re^\. 

month. - - (For how much) did you sell it to them ? - - 
motV,m. Co7n6zew,adv. 

They spilled all the wine. 

r6pand-re^\, 

FuT. I shall shear my flock (in the) 

tond-re^v, tronpeau^m. au 

month of May. - - - If you do not take care, 

Mai^m, prenez^v, garde, f, 

the dog will hite you. - - Shall we not lose, if 

mord-re,y, 
we play ? - - You will melt it, if you put 

fond-re.^y, meftez^v, 

it into the fire. No, 1 will not. - - They^ shalP not^ 

dans^ip, 
hear^ * of* me"^ (any* more). 

entend-re parler^y, plus, adv. 

CoND. Should I not do him the jus- 

rend-re,y* 
tice he deserves ? - - Would he not interrupt you ? - - 

meriter, v. 
We would defend • them if we could. - - - Why 

defend-re,y, pinivions^y, 

would you jnot answer, if 1 were speaking to 

repond-re^y. 



202 

joii ? - - - Your hens vrould (kj eggs) ererj day, if 
pcMle^f, pond-re^Y, 

they were not so fat. 

gra5, adj. 

Imperative Mood. 

Give^ God'* thanks^. - - - Let he v not come 
Rend-re^Y, Dieu^m, grdce^L 
down. - - Let us (give in) our accounts faith- 
rcnd-re^ v. comple^ m. fideh- 

fully. - - - Do not lose m}- book. Let them hear 

men?, adv. 

the voice of the Lord. 

voix^L Seigneu7',m, 

Subjunctive Mcod. 

Pres. and Pret. Speak loud, that 1 maj hcaji- 

what you say. - - She plays (upon the) harpsichord, 

dites^Y. du clavecin^m* 

though you forbid her to do it. - - ■> 

quoique.c, de faire^M, 

He wrote to us, that we might not expect him» 
icrivit^Y, 

Compound Tenses. 

I have lost my book ; have you found 

ptrd-re^Y* trouver^Y, 

it ? - - - She has broken her fan. - - - Have you 

romp-re^Y. eventail^m, 

not interrupted me several times ? - - - I had not 
then answered his lettej*. - - - If they (had 

alors^3.dY, etoient 

gone) there, would they not have lost their time ? 
alUs^ V, 
Yes, they would. - - He says he would have sold us 

dit^Y. 
very good wine. - - - Had you not forbidden her to 

d^ 
speak ? - - That they might have waited for \m 



503 

lltcapitulatory EXERCISES on the rts^ular xtrhs (yf 
the four CONJUGATIONS. 

Indicative Mood. 

Pres, I love attentive scholars, but 1 punish 
a^/cH/i/*,adj. ecoiicr^m, mais^c» 
severely laziness and inattention. - - Your 

sevei'cinent^ adv. parcsse, f. 
brother does not receive this news with plea- 

nouvelle^ f. 
&ure, - - Do we not expect your mother to-day ? - - 

mere^i. 
We hope (that) you will succeed in your un- 

esperer^Y. 
dertaking. - - Why do you not fulfil 

Pourquoi^ adv» accompUr^ \, 

your promise ? - - Are you to expect the least 

promesse^ f. 
favour from your parents and friends ? - - They per- 
grdce^L ap' 

ceive the danger, and they do not endeavour 

percevoir,v» tuchgr.y, 

to shun it. 
xk evitei'.v. 

Imp. I was speaking of your aunl when you 

tante^i, 
(came in), and was doing her the justice she 

entrer, v. rendre. v. 

deserves. - - Mr. N. did not act tovrards your 

mirittr^Y, agir^v, 

son with much tenderness. - - Mr. P. and I were 
fils^m, tendressej, 

answering your letters when you arrived. - - Yoti 

arj'iver^v. 
undoubtedly entertained great hopes from hi* 
sans rfo7i/c,adv. 

last voyage* - - They were spending their 

dtrnier^ adj> depcnser^ v. 



204 

mon^y ia trifles, instead of buying 

en, p. bagatelle, f, an lieu Jcjadv. acheter^V, 

"icoks. 

Pret. I built this house in one thousand seven 
maison, f. 
hundred and seventy-nine. - - Your fatlier yesterday 

/i2er,adv. 
received agreeable news. - - She burst into tears 

fonclre,y. 
after your cousin was gone. - - We sent him 

apres que^c. parii^y^i). 

a great deal of money unknown to ycur mo- 

a Tm*! ?'.,p. de 

ther. - - Why did you not finish your work soon- 

ouvrage, m. 
er ? - - (As soon as) they perceived us, they (ran 

Des que,c, prirent la 

away.) 
fuite. 

FuT. I will (give in) my accounts (at the) be- 
au . 
g^inning of next week. - - My friend, 

prochain, adj . semaine, f. 

Mrs. R. will dine with me next Wednesday. - - We 

Mercredi^m* 
shall seize the first opportunity to thank him 

saisir^v, occasion^L pour remercier^w* 

for his kindness. - - You will soon entertain 

de hontc^L hientot^aHv, 

a better opinion of bim. - - Will not your sister 

scBur, f. 
(come down stairs) to day ? 
descendre^Y. 

CoND. I would lay two guineas, your 

gager,y. 
uncle is not yet arrived. - - If my father were rich, he 

ar river ^Y, 



205 

would rebuild his country-house. - - Should we \iot 

rehdtir^Y. Devoir^v. 

Express our gratitude toward those who 

exprimcr.^ v. reconnoissance^ f. 

do us good ? - - If you would, you could ren- 

font,v, bien^m, vouliez,v» ren- 

der great services to your country. - - I am cer- 
dre^y, pays^m, 

tain (that) they would reward you, if you 

rieOmpenser^Y. 
deserved it. 



Imperative Mood. 

Discharge with equity the duties of your 
Remplir^v. equite^f* devoir ^m. 

office. - - Let him receive the punishment due 
char^c^ f. punii ion^ f. du^ p.p. 

to his crime. - - Let us give God thanks for the 

rcndre^v, grdce^L de 

good news we received yesterday. - - Imitate the great 

hier^adv. 
actions of your ancestors. - - Let them enjoy the 

ancetres ^in^ joidr,Y,de 

fruit of their labours. 

Subjunctive Mood. 

pRES. Write to me by the first post, 

Ecrivez^ v. ordinaire^m, 

that I may receive your letter before my de- 

afin qnc.c. avant^Tp, de- 

parture from London. - - Though he hear 
partem, Quoiquc^c. entendre^Y* 

what you say, yet he does not understand you. - - 

dilcs^Y, coniprcndrc^Y. 

She is never pleased, though we obey her in 

conle.nt.^.d], e?i,p* 

(every thing). I will tell it to you, pro- 

tout dirai,y, pour- 

18 



20G 

vided yon do not speak of it to your sister. - - 

vu que,c. 

He will pay them, provided they wait a 

altendre^ v. 
little longer. 

long'tems^ adv. 

Pret. I wrote to your father (some time ago), 
tcrivis^Y, il y a quelque terns 

that he might engage Mr. W. to come and 

afin quejC. *oo 

spend tTie holidays with us. - - That she might 
passerby. vacance^L 
reflect "km her own conduct, and not on that of 

prop re, adj. 
others. - - He would not come to see us, lest 

voulut^y. <o^ de peur que, G^ 

we should perceive his had designs. - - Your uncle 

onc/6,m. 
desired that you might sell his two horses to 

ordonner,\. 
Mr. B. - - I should be very sorry if they fell 

quc,c. tomber, v. 

into had hands. 
en 

Promiscuous EXERCISES on the COMPOUND 

TENSES. 

1 have spoken to my father of it, hut he has not 
yet given me any answer. - - Have I nut faith* 

encore, Cidv. 

fully executed your orders ? - - Has your sister suc- 
ceeded in her undertaking ? - - Yes, she has, ^ and I 
have congratulated her upon it. - - We have not yet re- 

filiciter^y* de 

i-eived any remittance from America. - - Mrs. N. told 

remise,(, 
juQ you had already sold the half of you 

dSja^adv, moUie.i* 



^07 

' goods. - - - Why did you not pay those poor 
marchandise, f. 

people ? - - He would have been punished, if 
ge^^s,m, et,L pi. 
I had not defended his right. - - They have sold 

droit ^m, 
him four dozen of handkerchiefs at an exorbitant 

mouchoir^xn. a 
price, but they have warranted them fine and 

fn 
prix, m. garan i rr, v. 

well worked. - - We thought you Avould have 

travaUlei\ v. croyions^v, 

brought your brother with you. - - Have we not 
been obliged to (v»-ait for) Miss A. ? - - If you had 

de attendre^Y, 
trusted them with your goods, they vrould have 
conjier^v, leur «>^ 
stolen the greatest part of them. - - It is for 

partie^L Cc,pro. 

that reason my father has not (thought fit) 

jugcr^y, a-propos 
to send them to you. - - Mr. D. had represented to 
him all the danger of it. - - Mrs. F. has gained her 

gagner.y. 
cause, but she has lost all her wealth. - - Had I 

perdre^Y, bieii.m, • 

not finished my work when she came in ? - ~ 

ouvrage^m. entrer^Y. 

You would have received your money (a month ag^o), 

// y a un mois 
if the mail had not been robbed. - - Mrs. P. told me 

maUe,f, vohr.Y, 

she would have paid you some time ago, if she had 
sold her goods. 



208 



CONJUGATION OF THE PASSIVE VERBS. 

Verbs passive are very easily ccrijiigated ; it require* 
only that the participle passive of the verb, which is to 
be conjugated, be joined to the auxiliary verb etre^ to be^ 
through all its moods, tenses, numbers, and persons. 
It is to be observed, that in French the participle pas- 
sive varies according to the gender and number of the 
noun or pronoun, which stands as the nominative to the 
rerb : ex. 



etre 
etre 
itant 
etant 
avoir 
moir 
ay ant iti 
ay ant iti 



Infinitive Mood 
aim-e, 
pun-?, 
aim-e, 



iti 
iti 



ee, to be Iov6d. 
ie^ to be punished* 
ee, being loved. 
/>, being punished r' 
ic^ to have been loved. 
ie, to have been puniihed* 
iij having been loved, 
I'g, having been puniihed* 



Singular. 



pun-?, 
aim-4 

pUD-l, 

aim-^, 
pun-2'j 

Indicativs Moop* 
M. P, 

Je mis aim-e, e/', &c. I am loved. 

Je suis pun-/, ?e, &c. I am punished. 

Plural. 
JVoii5 sommes aim-ei, ees^ &c. we are loved. 
Ji'ous sommes pun-f^, ies, &c. we are punished* 

COMPOXJKD Te^"SES. 

M. F, 
J'm 6(6, pardonn-e, ec, I have been forgiven, 
J'ai €/e, pun-?, ?>, I have been punished, 

Jsfous avons iti aim-e.?, ee.?,We have been loved, &c, 

OF NEUTER VERES. 

The conjugations of the above verbs are, like all 
others, distinguished by their terminations, and conju- 
gated in the same manner* 



209 

Learners may easily know a neuter verb from an 
active one ; because the latter generally has, or can 
always have, a direct case after it ; whereas the neuter 
verb never has, nor can have, but an indirect case ; for 
instance, 

Dormir^ to sleep,. 
Venir, to come, 
Voyager, to travel, 
are neuter verbs ; because we cannot say, 

Dormir nne maison, to sleep a house. 

Venir un livre, to come a book. 

Voyager la chambre, to travel the room, &c„ 
In the same manner, 
Jouir, to enjoy, 

Profiler, to profit by, to take advantage of,^ 
Parvenir, to attain, to reach, 
are neuter verbs, because they can only govern an indi- 
rect case : ex. 

Jouir d'wne grande repu- To enjoy a great reputa- 

tation, tion. 

Profiler du temSy To take advantage of ihr 

weather. 
Parvenir a son hut. To attain one's end. 

As it is impossible for the neuter verbs to govern an 
absolute case, it follows that every verb of this kind, 
which governs an absolute case, can no longer be looked 
upon as a neuter : ex. 

Pleurer, to weep, to bewail, 

Soriir, to go out, 

Monter, to go up, or com^e up, 

Plaider, Sie, to plead, 

are neuter verbs, but become active when they govern 
any object in the absolute case, or accusative : ex. 
Elk pleure ses pichis, She bewails her sins, 

Sortez ce cheval, Bring out that horse. 

11 plaidasa cause lui-mtmt, He himself pleaded ys 

cause* 
18* 



210 

But there are some neuter verbs which can never 
liave an active signification, and which we are obliged 
to conjugate with the verb /aire, when we wish to express 
an action passing from the subject who acts : ex. 

Ferai-je bouillir ou rotir Shall I boil or roast that 

cette viande ? meat ? 

Faiks-la bouillir, Boil it. 

Some of the neuter verbs conjugate their compound 
tenses by tlie auxiliary verb avoir, to have ; others by 
the verb etre, to be. 

The general rule to know what neuter verbs conju- 
gate their compound tenses with the auxiliary avoir^ 
and which are the others that are conjugated with the 
verb etre^ is to pay attention to the participle passive of 
the neuter verb which is conjugated. 

If this participle be declinable, that is, if it can be 
applied to a man or a woman, or any other animated 
object, the compounds of its verbs are conjugated with 
the verb etre : ex. 



Arriver, to arrive, 
Mourir, to die, 
Jsfaitre, to be born, 



Tomher, to fail, 
Venir, to come, <t'<:. 



take the auxiliary verb etre ; because we can say; 

Un homme arrive, a man arrived. 

Unefemme morte, a woman dead. 

Un enfant pe, a child born. 

JJn cheval iombe, &c. a horse fallen. 

If, on the contrary, the participle be indeclinable, that 
is, if it cannot be said of any anim.ate object, the com- 
pound tenses of that verb must be c onjugated with the 
verb avoir : ex. 

Dormir, to sleep, 

Languir. to languish, to linger, 

take the auxiliary verb avoir ; because we cannot say 



Regner, to reign, 
Vivre, to live, <!^ c. 



211 

Un komtne dormi, a man slept, (part, pass.) 

Unefemme lans^uie^ a woman languished, or lingered. 

Un enfant regne^ a child reigned. 

Un cheval vecu, &c. a horse lived. 

The verb courir is in the last class, when it signifies 
the rapid motion of the hody, moving in a certain di- 
rection with ail the swiftness of its legs ; as we cannot, 
in this sense, say, 

Un homme count, a man run, (part, pass.) 

Unefemme courue^ a woman run, 

nor je suis couru^ fetois couru^ &,c. but fai coiirii^favois 
couru, &c. 

When we say in French, un homme couru, une femme 
courue, we mean a man or woman much sought after* 
a person or thing we are very eager to see : ex. 

Ce predicateur est fort ccuru ; 
Cette danscuse est fort courue ; 

that is, people are very eager to hear that preacher, to 
see that dancer. 

In the above general rule are not included some neu- 
ter verbs, which sometimes take the auxiliary avoir, and 
sometimes the auxiliary etre ; these are. 



■Montcr, to go or come up, 
Descendre, to go or come 

down. 
Sortir, to go out. 
Rester, to stay^ to remain. 



Demeurer, to live, to re- 
main. 
Perir, to perish. 
Passer, to pass, to go by. 
Echapper, to escape. 



Monter and descendre often govern an absolute regi- 
men ; in which case they are considered as active verbs, 
and conjugated with the auxiliary avoir : ex. 

J'ai monte les degres, I have ascended the stairs, 

or gone up the stairs. 
JS'ous avons dcscendu Ift We have come down the 
montagne, mountain* 



212 

When the above verbs are employed without regimen, 
their compounds are conjugated with etre, ex. 

Je suis descendu, I am down. 

Elk est dejd montee^ She is up already. 

Sortir is conjugated with the verb e/re, when it signi- 
fies to quit, to leave the place wherein one was dwelling, 
or living ; but it is conjugated v/ith the verb a-yoir, when 
we wish to convey that we have been from home, and 
that we are come back again : ex. 

// est sorti de prison^ He is out of prison. 

J'ai sorti ce matin a dix I went out this- morning at 

heures, ten o'clock. 

Ayez-vous sorti ce matin ? Did you go out this morn- 
ing ? 

Psoras n'avons pas sorti de We have not been out all 

tout lejour^ day. 

Le roi n'a pas sorti de sa The king has not been out 

charnhre^ of his room. 

Demturer and rester take the auxiliary avoir^ when 
\Ve mean that we were, but are no longer, in a place : 

ex. 

J'ai demeure deux arts a la I lived two years in the 

carapagne^ country. 

Jl a rest6 vingt ans a Rome, He resided twenty years 

at Rome. 

On the contrary, they take the auxiliary Sire, while 
the person or persons are still in a place : ex. 

II est demeuri a Londres He has remained in Lo*- 
pour y solliciter un eve- den to solicit a bishop- 
c/ie, ric. 

J^ous sommes rest6s a York We have tarried at York 
pour y finir nos affaires, to conclude our affairs. 

Perir indifferently takes either the auxiliary avoir ov 
ttre : &%• 



213 



11 est peri deux vaisscaux 
sur mer, 

Trois homines out peri par 
cefte tcrnpetc^ 

La plupart dcs equipages 
sont peris dans les ciidcs^ 
h reste est peri de mi- 
sere^ 



Two ships have been lost 
at sea. 

Three men have perished 
by that storm. 

Most of the crew perish- 
ed in the weaves, the 
rest perished through 
misery. 

It seems, however, that the auxiliary avoir is more 
generally used. 

Passer sometimes governs an indirect case, or is im- 
mediately followed by the preposition par, or som.e 
other, attended by a noun or pronoun; in which case 
its compounds are conjugated with the auxiliary verb 
avoir, vrhether it be used in its proper signification or 
in a figurative sense ; ex. 



Le roi a passi par Ken- 
sington pour alhr a 
Windsor, 

J^'^ous avons passe dcvant 
Veglise, 

Elle a passe pres du pare 
de St, Jdques, 

l^a couronne de Naples a 
passe dans la maison de 
Bourbon, 



The king went through 
Kensington to go to 
Windsor. • 

We went by the church. 

She v>'ent by St. JamcsV 
Park. " 



The 



crown 



of 



ipies 



passed to the house., of 
Bourbon. 



In all other cases, passer takes the auxiliary 



ex. 



Lc roi est passe, vou$ ne 

sauriez le voir, 
Jje beau terns est passe, 
l^os chagrins sont jjasses, 



The king is gone by, 

cannot see him. 
The fine weather is ovvi 
Your Sorrows are over. 



We sometimes say, ce mot csj passe, when we nit-.n 
that it is no longer in use ; but when we say, ce moi a 
passe, we understand in the langvage. which signiiie^ 
that it has been received or adopted, 



214 

Passer is often a reflected passive verb, when its 
compound tenses follow the rule of the reflective 
Verbs . 

Passer, in several- cases, becomes an active verb, and 
governs an absolute case : ex, 

Passez cela sur lefeu, Pass that over the fire. 

Les ennetnis ont passe la The enemies have crossed 

riviere, the river. 

Passer Tepee ati travo's dii To run one through the 

corps, body. 

Echapper has two signiijcations : sometimes it is used 
in the sense of iviter^ to avoid, when it is conjugated 
with the auxiliary avoir, and governs the dative case ; 
sometimes it signifies to come or go out by force or strat- 
agem from a place in which one was confined or shut up 5 
in this case it takes the verb etre for auxiliary : ex. 

Vans avez echappc-Id a un You have escaped a great 

grand danger, danger. 

Jl a tchappt a la morf, He has escaped death. 

lis sont echappes de Icur They have escaped from 

prison, or, their prison, or, made 

lis se sont ichappis de leur their escape. 

prison, 

On la tenoit depuis quel- They had her for some 

ques jours, mais elle est days, but she has es- 

echappee, or, elle 5'est caped, or, made hey 

cchappee, escape. 

N. B. Exercises on the neuter verbs will be found 
among the irregular, whenever they occur. 



REFLECTED VERBS. 

We call refected, or reflective, a verb whose subject 
and object are the same person or thing ; so that the 
subject that acts, acts upon itself, and is at the same time 
the agent and the object of the action : ex,. 



215 

Je me connois^ I know myself, 

Tu te loues, Thou praisest thyself, 

// se blesse, He wounds himself. 

^ous nous chauffons^ We warm ourselves, 

are reflected verbs, because it is I who know, and who 
am known ; thou who praisest and who art praised ; he 
who wounds and who is wounded, &c. 

In order to express the relation of the nominative to 
the verb with its regimen or object, we always make use 
of the canjunctive pronouns, me, te, se, myself, thyself, 
himself, herself, itself, for the singular ; nous, vous, se, 
ourselves, yourselves, themselves, for the plural. But it 
frequently happens, that in English, the second pro- 
noun is implied, though it must be expressed in French : 
ex. 

Je me souviens, I remember. 

Elle ne veutpas se marier. She v/ill not marry. 

J^ous nous plaignons, Si.c. We complain, &c. 

The reflected verbs may be divided in the following 
manner, viz. 

Verhes rejicchis par la sig- Verbs reflective by sig- 

nification, nification. 

Verbes . reflechis par Vex- Verbs reflective by ex- 

pi-ession, pression. 

Verbes rejleckis directs, Verbs reflective direct. 

Verbes rcjltchis indirects, Verbs reflective indirect. 

Verbes rSJlcchis passifs, Verbs reflective passive. 

A verb reflected by signiflcation is properly a verb 
wherein the person or thing that acts is at -the same 
time the object of the action : ex. 

Je me chavffe, I warm myself, 

Elle se blesse. She wounds herself, SiC, 

* 
A verb is reflective by expression when we add to it 
the double pronoun, without the person or thing that- 
acts being the object of the action : such as. 



2.16 

Je me repens, I repent, 

listen xa, . He is going away, 

Eile se meurf^ She is dying, 

J^ous nous appercevons de We perceive our error, 
noire erreur., 

•which merely signify Je suis repentant, il va, elk meurt^ 
nous appercevons notre erreur. 

Vvlien the conjunctive pronoun is the objective case 
of the verb reflective by expression, we say it is a verb 
reflective direct ; when tlie same conjunctive pronoun is 
the indirect regimen, (that is, governed in the dative 
case), we call it reflective indirect : thus, 

Je me floatte, I flatter myself, 

Ta te vantes, Thou boastest, 

// se filicite, He congratulates himself^ 

are verbs refl.eciive direct* — On tlie contrary, 

II se donne des louanges, He gives /li'm^e//' praise, 

J^ous nous promettons un We promise ourselves 

hon succes, good success, 

Vous vous arrachez une You draw one of your 

dent, teeth, 

are verbs refltctive indirect, because it is as if we 
said, II donne des louangcs a soi, nous promettons un 
hon succes a nous, vous arrachez une dint a vous, 

&:c. 

Verb reflective passive. This verb is so called, be- 
eause it not only expresses a passive sense, but that 
sense can only be rendered by a passive verb : ex. 

Cela se voit lous tes jours. That is seen every day. 
Cela ne se dit point. That is not said. 

Ce livr^ se ve/dd blen. That book sells well. 

Ce h'uit se ripand, , That rumour is spread. 
Ces fruits se mangent en These fruits are eaten in 
hiveri^ winter. 



217 

Vet homr)U s'^est irouvc in- That man has been found 
nocent du crime dont on innocent of the crime 
Paccusoif, with which he was ac- 

cused. 

It is as if there were cda est vu tons hs jours ^ cela n'^est 
point dit^ &LC, which exactly correspond with the idiom 
of the EngUsh language. 

This last verb is of great use in the French lan- 
guage, because, as it has been observed before, there 
are properly no passive verbs in that language, and we 
are often obliged to supply the want of them by the 
above verb, or by the pronoun general on^ to avoid am- 
biguity or false sense : if, for instance, instead of saying, 
ecs fruits se mangent en kiver^ ou, on mange ces fruits 
en hiver^ I said, ces fruits sont manges en hiver, one 
might understand that those fruits are already eaten ; 
whereas, I only wish to express the proper season for 
eating those fruits. 

Some authors call reciproque, reciprocal, all those 
reflected verbs ; but this denomination to me has ap- 
peared insufficient to determine accurately the nature 
and use of these verbs. Others limit the reciprocal 
verb to signify what two persons or two things recipro- 
cally do to each other : thus, 

Pierre et Jean se haltent^ Peter and John are fight- 

ing, or beating each 
other, 

Paul et Robert &-aiment Paul and Robert love each 

other, 

Lefeu et Peau se detruis- Fire and water destroy 
ent, each other, 

are reciprocal verbs, because it is as if We said, Pierre et 
Jean se batient reciproquemcnt Pun Pautre^ Paul et 
Robert s'^aiment reciproquement, &lc» 

This distinction of the reciprocal verbs may be 
adopted, observhig at the same time, that wc often 
19 



218 



prefix the preposition entre to the verb, the better to ex- 
press the reciprocity : ex. 



Pierre et Jean s'entr'az- 

ment^ 
lis s'^entrelouent^ 
Elles s''entrehmssent^ 

'entrec?e- 



Peter and John love each 

other. 
They praise each other. 
They hate each other. 
Fire and water destroy 

each other. 



Le feu et Veau 

truisent^ Sic, 

All the reflected and reciprocal verbs, without ex- 
ception, are conjugated with the auxiliary verb etre ; 
hence it may be supposed how much French people are 
shocked to hear any one, v»^ho has learned that language, 

say, 



I bought mj self a horse ; 
I had hurt myself ; 
He has hurt himself; 
She had laughed at me ; 



Je m'ai acheie un ckevah 

Je m'avois blesse^ or 

// ^'a fait mal^ 

Elle 5'avoit moque de moi, 

&c. 
expressions too commonly made use of by many English 
people, who speak without knowledge of the principles 
of tiie language ; w^hereas we muet say, 

Je me suis achefe un cheval^ 

Je m'etois hhsfte^ or 

// 5'est fait mal^ 

Elle 6'etoit moquee de moi, 

Js'ons nous sommes informts, 

lis se sont promenis^ 

11 .s'est passi 

ehoses depuis 

part, 
II s''est passe hien des annecs 

depuis que far out parhr 

de cctie affaire^ 

It must be owned, that in the compounds of most 
part of tliese verbs, the verb etre is but the substitute 
of the verb rt-yrjfr ; but it is impossible to use avoir as 
auxiliary to a verb which has for its objective case a 
conjunctive pronoun that relates to the principle 



d'^efranges 
voire de- 



We have inquired. 

They have walked. 

Strange things have hap- 
pened since your de- 
parture. 

Many years have elapsed 
since I heard of that af- 
fair. 



219 

of the action of that A'erb, and which precedes the aux- 
ihary ; for, though we say, 

II a voutu se iwer, He would kill himself; 

yet, if we change the place of the pronoun, we musl 
say, // s'est voidu iuer^ which is the idiom of the lan- 
guage. 

CONJUGATION OF THE REFLECTED VERBS. 

The conjugation of the following verb may serve as 
a model for all the reflected or reciprocal verbs. 

Infinitive Mood. 

Present. Se promcner^ to a^alk. 
Part. act. Se pronienant^ walking. 

M. Sing. F. 
Part. pass, promm-i^ £e, walked. 

M. Plural. F. 
Part, pass, promen-es, 6es, walked. 

Compound Tenses. 

Pres. S'^eire promene, to have walked. 
Past. S^ttant promene^ having walked. 

Indicative Mood. 
Present. Singular. 
Je me promenc^ I walk, or do walk, or am walking. 
Tu te promhies^ 
II se promene^ 

Plural. 
J^ous nous promenons^ we walk, &c. 
Vous vous promencz, 
Us se promenent^ 

Imperfect. Singular. 

Je me promenois^ I did walk, or walked, or was walking. 
Tu te promeaois^ 
II SG promenoit. 



220 

Plural. 
<Noiis nous promenions, we did walk, c^v. 
Vous vous promenieZy 
lis se proinenoient^ 

Preterite. Singular. 
Je me promenai, I did walk, or walked* 
Tu te promenas^ 
Jl se prcfmena, 

Plural. 
.A^oM5 nous promendmesj we did walk, ct"c» 
Fow5 vous promendtes, 
Us se promenerent^ 

Future. Singular. 
Je me p7'07nenerai, I shall, or will walk. 
Tu ie pr omen eras ^ 
II se promtiura^ 

Plural. 
^ow5 nous promenerons'^ we shall, or will walk* 
Vous voii-' prmneyierezy 
Jls se pro?nentrontj 

Conditional. Singular. 
Je me promenerois^ I would, should, or could walk. 

Ttt ie promcnerois, 
II se promeneroii^ 

Plural. * 
JVoi/5 nous promenerions, we would, <^c. walk, 
F^otii- vous promhieritz^ 
lis se promenerolent^ 

Compound Tenses. 
Present. Je me suis promen-i, ee, I have walked. 
Imperfect. Je m''etois promen-e, ee, 1 had walk'ed. 
Preterite. Je mefus pronun-e^ ee, I had walked. 
Future. Je me serai promen-i^ ee, I shall or will have 

walked. 
Conditional. Je me 5em5|)romen-e, ee, I should, <^c. have 

walked, 



^ 221 

Imperative Mood. 
Present. Singular. 

Promene-toi*^ walk thou. 
Qu'il se promeiie, let him walk. 
Plural. 

Promenons-nous*^ let us walk. 

Promenez- vous*, walk ye. 
QuHls sepromment, let them walk. 

Subjunctive Mood. 
Present. Singular. 
Que je me promene, that I may walk. 
iu te promenesy 
il se promene^ 

Plural. 
ncms nous promenions^ that we may walk. 
row5 vous prvmenieZj 
ils se prominent, 

Preterite. Singular. 
Que je me promenasse, that I might walk. 
hi, te promenasses, 
il se promendtj 

Plural, 
nous nous promenassions, that we might walk, 
rows vous promenassieZy ' 
Ils se promenassent. 

Compound Tenses. 

M. F. 
Present, Que je me sois promen-6 ee, that I 

may have walked. 
Preterite. Que je me fusse promcn-t ee, that 1 

might have walked. 
The learner may here be again reminded, that it is 

* When the verb is coDJugatcd with a ne^ation^ these ihree pro- 
nouns are put before the verb; ex. ?ie vous promcncs pas^ «<© Hot 
walk ; and toi is chant^ed into te : ne te vromene pas, 
19* 



222 *» 

necessary to conjugate this verb with a negation and in- 
terrogation : ex. 

Je ne me pr omen e pas, I do not walk. 
Y ous promenez-vous, do you walk ? 
JVe se promene-t-il pas ? does he not walk ? 

Compound Tenses. 

Me suis-je promene ? Have I walked ? or did I 

walk ? 
.A^e vous etes-vous pas Have you not warmed 
chaufe 2 yourself ? or did you 

not warm yourself? 
Mon cousin s^est-il infor- Has my cousin inquired ? 
we ? or did my cousin in- 

quire ? 
Voire frlrt ne s\si-il pas Has not your brother re- 
repenii ? pented ? or did not your 

brother repent ? 
We say in French, 
Se promener a cheval, en To take a ride, an air- 
carrosse, ing on horseback, in a 

coach, 
Se prornener sur Veau, sur To go upon the watei', on 
la riviere, the river. 

EXERCISES UPON TPIE REFLECTED VERES. 

N, B, Verbs marked thus * are irregular : see the irre- 
gular verbs. 

Indicative Mood. 

Pres. I rise (early) every 

^e lever, y, de bonne heure,zdv, 

morning. - - Does not your brother remember 
matin, m, se ressouvenir,Y.'^' 

to have seen me ? - - My sister is not jveil, she 
t5W,p.p. sceur,iA 

t When we mean to express the state of a person's healtli, instead 
of the verb elre^ we must uj^e the reflected one se porter : 
Ma saw ne se porte pas bien, My sister is not >velL 



^ 223 

applies herself (too much) to study. - - - We 
s''appliquer^ v. trop^ adv. 

rejoice at the good news he has brought 

serejoinr^\,de nouvelle^L apporte^p,ip. 

us. - - When do you intend to go and see 

se proposer ^v, cleaUer^v, «>^ voir^v, 
Mrs. H. ? - - Do 3 ou not repent of what you 

se 7'epentir,v.* de 
have done to her ? - - I believe your brothers 

/rti7,p.p. croire^w* 

are not well ; for I have not seen them this 

t car.c, rw,p.p. 

week. 
semaiiie^f. 

Imp. I was riding on horseback in the park 

parc^v. 
when I met him. - - Was he not warm- 

quand^c, rccontrer^w se chavf- 

ing himself when you (came in) ? - - We did not 
fer^v. entrer^y* 

imagine he would succeed so well. - - You were 
sHmaginer^ v. rcussir^ v. 

boasting too much of what you have done for 
se vanter^Y. fait^^,p. 

him, - - They did not expect that they should 

s-attendre^v. 
meet us. 



Pret. I inquired after you yesterdaj^ - - - 

s'' informer, v. de A 2 e r, ad v. 

Did not my son behave well in the last 

56 comporter^v. dernier^adj. 

war ? - - Corn w as sold yesterday for twelve shil- 

guerre, f, sevendre^v, ^o^ 

lings a bushel. - - We saw ourselves surrounded by 

se voir,y,* en/oi( re, p.p. 

more than twenty persons in an instant. - - Did you 

er?.p. 



224 

not find yourselves obliged to go 

se t7'ouver,v, o6/ige,p.p, de allergy* 

there ? - - They did not stop one minute. 

s'^arreter^Y. 

FuT. I will not complain of you, if you 

se plaindre,y,* 
promise me to behave better. - - Will your 

promettre^Y,* de inieux^adv, 

bird (grow tame) ? - - Shall we submit our- 

oiseau^m, s'apprivoiser^Y, se soumettre^Y,* 

selves to his judgment ? - - You will ruin your- 

jugeme7it,m. se miner ^y. 

selves if you continue (gaming). - - Will they not 

continuer^Y. dejouer^Y, 
perceive it (as soon as) they come into the 

s''apper avoir jY» en des que^c, entrer^Y* 

room ? 

CoND. If I were in your place, I would 
a 
not vex myself. - - - Would she not (make her 

se chagriner^Y* s'^echap- 

escape) ? - - We would embark (this day) 

ptr^Y* s''emharquer^Y» aujonrd^hui^zdY. 

if the weather (would permit). - - Would you so 

tems^m. le permettoit^Y. 
soon ? - - Why would you expose yourselves to their 
/o/,adv. s'^exposer^Y, 

fury ? - - They would agree very well, 

furtur^i, s'^accorder^y, hien^a.dY, 

if they were not so proud. 

orgueilkux.Rdj, 

Imperative Mood. 

I give you leave to go out, but 

donner^Y* pcrmisston^L de sortir^Y.mais^c, 

do not overheat yourself. - - Let him amuse him^ 
s'^cchauffer,Yi ^ 's'amw*er,r.r 



I 



226 

self a little in my garden. - - Let us remem- 

wn^eii,adv. jardin^m, se ressou' 

ber what we are to do. - - Endeavour to 

venirde^Y.''*' t faire^v, S'^efforcer^v* de 

please your master, and do not so often mis- 
plaire,\',d maitTe^m, setrom- 

take in the tenses, numbers, and persons of the 
per,v. 

verb. - - Let them (fall asleep). 
s^endormir^Y. 

Subjunctive Mood. 

Pres. I must ^pply myself to the 

Ilfautque s'appliqucr^Y* 
French language. - - I will hide it, lest 

langue^i, cacher^v* depeurque^C* 

she should perceive it. - - Provided 

s''appercevoir^y. e?i, pro. Pown^u que^c, 
we remember to ask him how his 

de deriiander.v. comment, ?idv, 

mother does. - - (In order that) you may not 

seporter^v, Afm qiie,c» 
boast (so much). - - 1 have told them who you 

sevanUr^Y, 'fanf,adv. c?27,p.p. 

are, that they may b(!have better another time. 

afn que^c. fols^L 

Prkt. That I might not ruin myself. - ^ - 

St ruiner^Y, 
That he might not meddle with my affairs. - - - 

se miler^Y, de 
That we might excuse ourselves. - - That you 

s''excuser,Y. 
might not go away. - - - That they might not 

s^en a//cr,v.* 
repent too late. 

se repentir^Y,^ trop tard^adv. 



t See the reference * ia the exerois<^ upon the tjiird conjugation, 
pa^e 193, 



226 
Compound Tenses. 

1 have inquired after you and your hi^ior. - - - 
sHnformer,v, de 
He says you have not been well while you 

dit^v, pendant que^c, 

were in the country. - - - Has not your cousin 

a ca?npagne, f. covs m , m . 

laughed at me ? - - Did we not get up at six 

se moquerjV, de se lever, v, a m 

(o'clock) ? - - They have perceived the trick, ^ut J 

heure^L du detonr^m, 

it was too late. - - Did you remember me ? 

se ressouxemr,Y» de 
I had not applied myself enough. - - - Had 

s''appliquer, v. assez, adv. 

not your sister imagined, that they would have 

sHinaginer^v, 
found themselves obliged to go to France ? - - 
se trouver^v, o6/i^'e,p.p. de t 

Many things (have been said) of them which 

Si, dire,Y» 
are not true. - - - - We had thought ourselves 

se croire^y,^ 
able to resist them, but we have 

capable^zdj. de r6sistei\Y, leur mnis,c, 

(been deceived). - - - Did you not hide your- 

se tromper^w se cacher^v, 

selves in order to surprise them ? - - When 

de surprendre,y. Quand^didy, 

I (shall) have Vv'aiked five or six minutes in the gar- 

jar- 
den, I will rest myself. - - - Why did you 
C?m,m. se reposer^y, 

exhaust yourself as you have done ? - - - Our 
s^epuiser^Y. fait.i^,^, 

sailors would have behaved with more reso* 
matelot^m. 

t See the indefinite tiriicle. p. 41 . 



227 

lutior. - - Would you not have excused yourself. - - 

s''€xcuser,Y, 
When they have repented (of) their faults, I 

sc repentir^v, 
will forgive them. - - If I had been in your place, I 

a 
would not have meddled with their affairs. - - - 

se mehr^w de 
Your friend would not have complained of you, 

■^e plaindre^v.^ 
and you never would have fallen out for so 

se brcuiUer^Y, 
«mall a matter. 
chose J, 



CONJUGATION OF THE IRREGULAR VERBS. 

These are called irregulars because their conjugation 
deviates from the general rule, either by their termina- 
tions, or the want of some of their moods, tenses, per- 
sons, or numbers. 

VERB OF THE FIRST CONJUGATION. 
JLLER, TO GO. 
Infinitive Mood. 
Present. Mlkr^ to go. 

Part. act. AUant^ goJ»g» 

Part. pass. AlU^ ee, gone. 

Indicative Mood. 
Present. 
Sing. Vais^ ras, -va, I go, do go, or am going. 
Plur. Allans, ullez vont, 

Imperfect. 
Sing. AlJois, allots, allolt, I did go, or was going. 
Plur. Anions, alllcz, alloient, 

Preterite. 
Sing. Allai^ eJla^, alia, I went, or did go. 
Plur. Alldints, alldtes, allerent ■; on 



228 



Sing. 


Fus, 


Plur. 


Fumes, 


Sing. 


Irai, 


Plur, 


Irons, 


Sing. 
Piur. 


hois, 
Irions, 




Sing. 




Plur. 


5ing. 
Plur. 


Que, 

Aille, 

Allions, 


Sing. 
Plur. 


Allasse, 
Alias bio 



fus, fat, I went, or did go* 
fates, farent. 
Future. 
ira, I shall, or will go. 



iras, 
irez. 



iront. 
Conditional. 



irois, iroit, I should, could, 

iriez. iroient. 



would, or 
might go. 



Imperative Mood. 
Fa, go thou ; 
quHl aille, let him go. 
Allans, allez, qu'ils aillent. 
Subjunctive P/Iood. 
Present. 
que, que, 

ailles^ aille, that I maj go. 

alliez, aillent, 

Preterite. 
allasses, alldt, that I might go. 
allassiez, allassent, 

Among the compound tenses of this verb, it is to be 
remarked, that those which are formed by the participle 
&U6, signify that we are or were yet in the place men- 
tioned at the tinrie we are or were speaking. Whence 
it follows, tliat the first person of the compound of the 
present, 

Je mis alii, I have gone, &c. 

7m es alle, &c. 
can seldom be used in discourse ; for we cannot natural- 
ly say that we are still in a place which can only be 
mentioned in a past time, after we have left it ; there- 
fore we make use of the compound tenses of the verb 
^trc, as fa'} etc, tu as etc, feus 6t6,favois 6(6, faurois ete, 
&c. for when wc say, 

// est alU a Londrcs, He is gone to London, 

we give to underFfand, that he is still ^i London, or is 
OB his v/ay, going to London : on the contrary, 



229 

// a iti a Londres, He has been, or gone U 

London, 

means, that he has gone to London, but is re^ 
turned. 

The above verb is also conjugated as a reflected one, 
with the particle en : ex. 

iS'en aller, to go away. 

Je w'en vais, I go or am going away. 

Tu fen vas, thou goest or art going away. 

II 5'en t?a, he goes or is going away. 

J^ous nous en allons^ we go or are going away. 

Vous vous en allez, you go or are going away. 

lis s'en z?on^, they go or are going away. 

Negatively. 

Je ne m'en vais pas^ I am not going away. 

II ne 5'en vapas, he is not going away. 

J^ous ne nous en allons pus, we are not going away. 

Vous ne vous en alhzpas, Sic, you are not going av/ay, &c. 

Interrogatively. 

5'en va-t-il ? Is he going away ? 
Foit5 en alhz-vous ? 4'c. are you going away ? &c. 
.ATe 5'en vont-ils pas ? <^c. are they rot going away ? Scd 
The imperative mood is thus conjugated : 
Singular. 
Fcf-i'en, go thou away. 
Qm'j7 5'en m7/e, let him go away. 

Plural. 

Allons-nous en, let us go away. 

Allez-vous en, go away. 

QuHls 5'en aillent, let them go away. 

Its compound tenses are, 
Je m'en suis alle, I have gone away. 
Je m'en yu5 a//e, I had gone away. 
Je m'en iiois alle, I had gone away. 
Je m'en ^erai alle, I shall have gone away, &c. 
20 



230 

VERBS OF THE SECOND CONJUGATION. 
ACQUERIR, TO ACQUIRE. 

Infinitive Mood. 
Present. Acquirir^ to acquire. 

Part. act. Acquerant, acquiring. 

Part. pass. Acquis^ acquired. 

Indicative Mood. 

Present. 

Sing. Acquiers, acquiers, acquiert, I acquire, or am ac- 

Plur. Acquerons^ acquerez^ acquierent, quiring. 

Imperfect. 
Sing. Acquerois^ acquerois, acqueroit, I did acquire, or was 
Plur. Acquerions, acqiieriez, acqueroient, acquiring. 

Preterite. 
Sing. Acquis, acquis, acquit, I acquired, or did ac- 
Plur. Acquimes, acquites, acquirent, quire. 

Future. 
Sing. Acquerrai, acquerras, acquerra, I shall, or will ac- 
Plur. Acquerrons, acquerrez, acquerront, quire. 

Conditional. 
Sing. Acquerrois, acquerrois, acquerroit, I should, would, 

or could acquire, 
"plur. Acquerrions, acquerriez, acquerroient, 

Imperative Mood. 
Sing. Acquiers, acquiere, acquire thou. 

Plur. Acquerons, acquerez, acquierent, 

Subjunctive Mood. 
Present. 
Que que que 

Sing, Acquiere, acquieres, acquiere, that I may acquire. 
Plur. Acquerions,acqu6riez, acquierent, 

Preterite. 
Sing. Acquisse, acquis ses, acquit, that I might ac- 
PluT. Acquissions, acquissiez^ acquiss^^t, quire. 



231 

QUERIR, TO FETCH. 

The primitive of the above verb is never used but in 
the present of the infinitive mood : ex. 

Envoyez-moi querir, Send for me. 

CONQUERIR, TO conquer ; REQUERIR, to require; 

are conjugated like ACQUERIR. 



BOUILLIR, to boil: 
Infinitive Mood. 

Present. BouUlir^ to boil. 

Part. act. BoiiUlant^ boiling. 

Part. pass. Bouilli^ ie, boiled. 

Indicative Mood. 
Present. 
Sing. Bous, hous, bout^ I boil, or am boiling. 
Plur. Bouillons^ bouilhz^ bouilhnt, 

Imperfect. 

Sing. Bouillois, houillois, bouilloit, I did boil, or was 
Plur. Bouillions^ bouiiliez, bouilloient^ boiling. 

Preterite. 

Sing. Boiiillis^ boidllis^ bouillit, I boiled, or did 
Plur. Bouillimes^ bouillites^ bouillirent^ boil. 

Future. 

Sing. Bouillirai., bouilliras^ bouillira^ I shall or will boil. 
Plur. Bouillirons^ bouillirez, bouilliront^ 

Conditional. 

Sing. Bouillirois, houilUrois^ bouilliroit^ I should, would, 
Plur. Bouillirions^ bouilliriez^ bouilUroient^ or could boil. 

Imperative Mood. 

Sing. BoHs, houille^ boil thou. 

Plur. Bouillons, houilkzj bouilknt^ 



232 

Subjunctive Mood. 
Present. 

Que que que 

Sing. Bouilhj houilles, bouille, that I may boil. 
Plur. Bouillions^ houilliez, bouillenf^ 

Preterite. 

Sing. Bouillisse^ houillisses^ houillit, that I might boil. 
Plur. Bouillissions, bouillissiez^ houillissent, 

This verb, as well as its compound rebouillir^ to boil 
again, is but seldom used, except in the third person 
singular or plural, and its infinitive mood, which is 
commonly joined to the verb Faire : ex. 

Faites bouillir cette viande^ Boil that meat. 



COURIR^ TO RUN. 
Infinitive Mood. 

Present. Courir^ to run. 
Part. act. Courant^ running. 
Part. pass. Couru^ we, run. 

Indicative Mood. 
Present. 
Sing. Cours^ eours, court, I run, or am running. 
Plur. Courons,eoure2j courent, 

Imperfect. 
Sing. Courois, couroit, couroit, I did run, or was 
Plur. Courions^ couriez^ couroientj running. 

Preterite. 

iSing. C(Mru$, courus, courut, I ran, or did run. 
Plur. Courumes^ courutes, coururent, 

Future. 

Sing. Courrai, courras, courra, I shall or will run. 
Plur. Courronsj courrezy courront^ 



23a 

Conditional. 

Sing. Courrms, eourrois^ c&urroit^ I should, would, or 
Plur. Courrions, courriez^ courroient, could run. 

Imperative Mood. 

Sing. Cours, coure, run thou. 

Plur. CouronSj courez, courent. 

Subjunctive Mood. 
Present. 
Que que que 

Sing. Coiire, coures, coure, that I may run. 
Plur. Courions, couriez^ courent, 
Preterite. 
Sing. Courusse, courusses, cmirut, that I might run. 
Plur. Courussions, courussiez^ courussent, 

The compounds of this verb are, 

Accourir^ to run to. 
Concourir^ to concur. 
Discourir^ to discourse. 
Encourir^ to incur. 



Parcourir, to run over. 
Recourir, to have recourse 

to. 
Secourir, to succour, to 

assist. 



COUVRIR, TO COVER. 

See OUVRIR, to open. 



CUEILLIR, to gather. 

Infinitive Mood, 
Present. Cueillir^ to gather. 

Part. act. Cueillant^ gathering. 

Part. pass. Cueilli^ ie, gathered. 

Indicative Mood. 
Present. 
Sing. Cueille^ cueilles^ cueille, I gather, or am gath- 
Plur. Cueillons^ cueiUez^ cueilknt, ering. 

20* 



234 

Imperfect. 

Sing. Cueillois, cueillois^ cueilloif, I did gather, or was 
Piur. Cueillions, cueilliez^ cueilloient^ gathering. 

Preterite. 
Sing. CueilUs, cueillis, cueiUit, I gathered, or did 
Plur. Cueillimes^ cueillites, cueillirent, gather. 

Future. 
Sing. CueiUerai, cueilleras, cueillera^ I shall or will 
Plur. Cueilkrons, cueillerez^ cueilleront^ gather. 

Conditional. 
Sing. Cueillerois, cueillerois^ cueilhroit^ I should, would, 

or could gather. 
Piur. Cueillerions^ cueilleriez, cueilhroient, 

Imperative Mood. 

Sing. Cueille^ cueille, gather thou. 

Plur. Cueillons, cueillez, cueilhnt, 

Subjunctive Mood. 
Present. 
Que que que 

Sing. Cueille^ cueilles^ cueille, that I may gather. 
Plur. Cueillions^ cueilliez, cueillent, 

Preterite. 
Sing. Cueillisse, cueillisses, cueilUt, that I might 
Plur. Cueillissions^ cueillissiez^ cueillissent, gather. 

The compounds of this verb are, 

Accueillirj to make w^l- Recueillir^ to gather to- 
come^ gether. 



BORMIRj TO SLEEP. 

Infinitive Mood. 
Present. Dormir, to sleep. 
Part. act. Dormant, sleeping. 
Part. pass. Dormiy slept. 



235 

Indicative Mood. 

Present. 
Sing. Dors^ dors^ dort^ I sleep, or am sleeping. 

Plur. Dormons, dormez, dorment^ 

Imperfect. 
Sing. Dormois, dormois^ dormoit, I did sleep, or was 
Plur. Dormions, dormiez^ dormoient^ sleeping. 

Preterite. 
Sing. Dormis^ dormis^ dormit, I slept, or did sleep. 
Plur. Dormimes, dormites^ dormireni, 

Future. 
Sing. Dormirai, dormiras, dormira, I shall or will 
Plur. Dormirons^ dormirez^ dormiront, sleep. 

Conditional. 
Sing. Dormirois, dormirois, dormiroit, I would, could or 
Plur. Dormirions^dormiriez^ dormiroient, should sleep. 

Imperatiye Mood. 
Sing. Dors^ dorme, sleep thou. 

Plur. i)ormon5, dormez^ dorment^ 

Subjunctive Mood. 
Present, 
Que que que 

Sing. Dorme, dormes^ dorme, that I may sleep. 
Plur. Dormions, dormiez^ dorment, 

Preterite. 
Sing. Dormisse^ dormisses^ Jormi^, that I might sleep. 
Plur. Dormissions^ dormissiez, dormissent, 

The compounds of this verb are, 
Endormir^ to make sleep. Se rendormir, to fall asleep 
S^ndormir^ to fall asleep. again. 



EXERCISES ON THE FOREGOING VERBS 
AND THEIR COMPOUNDS. 

Where are you going ? - - - I am going to the 
Ow,adv. 



236 

play. - - I would go with you, if I had time. - - Why 

cmn6die,{, 

are they going away so soon ? - - Will not your father 

ioi,adv. 
be angry, if you go there without him ? - - We were 
/ac/ie,adj. 

going to Miss D 's, when we met you. 

chez^ip, rencontre,Y, 

- - These men went yesterday from house to house. - - 

en, p. 
Believe me, sir, do not go to see them. - - Your fa- 
Croire,v» voir^v, 

ther told me, you will go to France and Italy as soon 

dire^v, 
as the war (is over). - - My sister and I went last 

serajinie, cZernie?*,adj. 

Wednesday to Vauxhall.* - - If you had gone thither 
an hour sooner you would have heard fine music. 
plut6t^3,dY, entendre^Y, 

- - Your uncle has acquired a great name in America. 

7iom,m. 

- - My father went to pay your uncle a visit 

rendre^Y. 
last week, and he did not welcome him (as a) friend. 

en, p. 

Did he not ? I am sorry for it. Mr. Dubois, 

the king's silversmith, has brought the watch : it 

ar gentler ^m, 
now goes very well. - - Go and fetch me 

maintenant,^ adv. 

the letter I left in my room. - - Boil this chicken, 

laisscr^Y, poulet^m, 

and roast that goose. - - At last we have conquered. 

rotir^Y, 02e,f. £nj?n,adv. 

. - This water will soon boil. - - Boil that meat 

5ienf6^,adv. 
again, it is not done enough. - - Do Hot run so 

CM?7,p.p. 

fast, you will be tired. - - - They always ruft 



237 

when they go to see their aunt. - - Your brother 

tante^(» 
runs faster than I. - - When he heard that his 

apprendre^v. 
friend was in danger, he ran instantly to him. - - 

aussitSt^adw 
Let us not discourse any more on that subject. - - I 

i<>i sujet^vn» 

would assist him with all my heart, if I could. - - This 

poiivoir, 
gentleman is a great traveller : he has run over all 

voyageur,m» 
Europe. - - Let him go away, for I do not wish to 

car,c. '<^ veux,v* 

speak to him. - - If you do it, you will incur your 

faire^v. 
father's displeasure. - - That would concur to the pub- 

deplaisir^m, 
lie good. - - When children are guilty, they generally 

6ien,m. coitpa6/e,adj. 

have recourse to some falsehood. - - For whom are you 

Trie no on era -,vOi. 

gathering those charming flowers ? - - I gather them for 

fleur,L '': 

my mother. - - Why do they not gather some roses ? - - 

rose^ f. 
Mrs. P. aMBjI^ave gathered some, but the gardener 

^^^^ jardinier^m» 

told her he would gather them himself. - - Of all na- 
tions none has welcomed the poor French clergy bet- 

c/erge,m. 
ter than the English. - - Do not make any noise, for my 

/«ire,v. c«?',c. 

sister (is asleep.) - - I hope she will sleep better to-night. 
dorrnir. cesoir,m. 

She would sleep much better, if she were in her bed. 

/i7,m. 
If I do not walk a little, I shall fall asleep. - - Mj 

se prommer^v, 
mother, sister, brother, and I, went yesterday to 



238 

Croydon, to see Miss Keen. - - Did jou go thither 

to^ Mademoiselle^^, 
on foot? - - No, mj mother and sister went in a 
fi- en, p. «^ 

coach, and my brother and I on horseback. 

a cheval^m* 



fuir, to run away, to shun, to avoid, to flfie. 

Infinitive Mood. 
Present. /\«V, to flee. 

Part. act. Fuyant, fleeing. 
Part. pass. Fui^ ic, fled. 

Indicative Mood. 
Present. 
Sing. Puis, fuis, fuif, I flee. 
jTiur, Fuyons, fuyez, fuient, 

Imperfect. 
Sing. Fuyois, J^^yois, fayoit, I fled, or did flee. 
Plur. FuyioKi^^ f^^V^^^-) fuyoient, 

Preterite. 
This tense is conjugated with the verb Prendre and 
the substantive fuiie : ex. 4ii^ 

Je pris la fuite, I Jled, or ran away. 
Future. 
Sing. Fuirai, fuiras, fuira, I shall or will flee. 
Plur. Fuirons^ fuirez, fuiront, 

Conditional. 
Sing. Fuirois, fuirois, fuiroit, I should, would, or could 
Plur. Fuirionsy fairiez, fuiroient, ' flee. 

Imperative Mood. 

Sing. Fuis, fuie, flee thou. 

Plur. Fuyons, fuyez, fuient, 



239 

Subjunctive Mood. 

Present. 
Que que que 

Sing. Fide, fuies, fuie, that I may flee* 
Plur. Fuyions^ fuyieZj fuient, 
Preterite. 
Je prisse la fuite, &c. that I might Jlee, 



MEjYTIR, to lie. 

Infinitive Mood. 

Present. Mentir, to lie. 
Part. act. Mentant, lying. 
Part. pass. Menti, lied. 

Indicative Mood. 

Pre^nt. 
Sing. Mens, mens, ment, I lie. 

Plur. Mentons, mentez, mentent, 

Imperfect. 
Sing. Mentois, mentois, mentoit, I did liqwHras lyings 
Plur. Mentions, mentiez, mentoient, ^r 

Preterite. 
Sing. Mentis, mentis, mentit, I lied, or did lie. 
Plur. Mentimes, mentites, mejitirent, 

Future. 
Sing. Mentirai, mentiras, mentira, I shall or will lie. 
Plur. Mentirons, mentirez, mentiront, 

Conditional. 
Sing. Mentirois, menfirois, vientiroit, I would, could, or 
Plur. Mentirions, mentiriez, mentiroient, should lie. 

Imperative Mood. 

Sing. Mens, menfe, lie thou. 

Plur. McntonSf mentez, m^ntent, 



540 
Subjunctive Mood. 



Que 
Sing. Mente, 
Plur. Mentions, 


Present. 

que que 

mentes, men fe, that I may lie. 

mentiez, mentenf, 




Preterite. 


Sing. Mentisse, 


mentisses, mentit, that I might lie 



Plur. Mentissionsy mentissiez, mentissent, 

The compound of this verb is 
Dcmentir, to give one the lie, to belie, to contradict. 

MOURIR, TO DIE. 

Infinitive Mood. 

Present. Mouri^r, to die. 

Part. act. Mourant, dying. 
Part. past. Mort, died, or dead. 

Indicative Mood. 

.j^ Present. 

Sing. Meurs, meurs^ ■ meurt, I die, or am dying. 
Plur. Mourons, mourez, meurent^ 

Imperfect. 
Sing. Mourois^ mourois^ mouroit, I was dying. 
Plur. Mourions, mouriez, mouroient^ 

Preterite. 
Sing. Mourus, mourus^ mourut^ I died. 
Plur. MourumeSy tnourutes^moururent^ 

Future. 
Sing. Mourrai, mourras, mourra, I shall, or will die. 
Plur. Mourrons^ mourrcz, mourront. 

Conditional. 

Sing. Mourrois^ mourrois^ mourroit^ I should, could, or ^ 
Plur. Mourrions, mourrieZf mourroientf would die. 



241 



Pkr. 



Imperative Mood. 

Meurs, 
mourez. 



meure, die tliou. 



Mourons, mourez^ meurent, 

Subjunctive Mood. 
Present. 
Que que que 

Meure^ meures^ meure, that I may die. 

Mourions^ mouriez^ meurent^ 

Preterite. 
Sing. Mourusse^ mourusses, wow?*^/, that I might die. 
Plur. Mourussions^ mourussiez, mourussent^ 
Se mourii'j to be dying. 



«;,• 



ing, 
Plur. 



Sing. 
Plur. 



Sing. 
Plur. 



Sing. 
Plur. 



Sing. 
Plur. 



Sing. 
Plur. 



OFFRIR, TO OFFER. 

Infinitive Mood. 
Offrir, to offer. 
Offrant, offering. 
Offertj erte^ offered. 

Indicative Mood. 

Present. « 

offres^ offre, I offer, or am offering. 

offrez, offrent, 

Imperfect. 
offrois^ offroit, I did offer, or was of- 
offriez, offroient^ fering. 

Preterite. 
offris^ offrit^ I offered, or did offer. 
offrites, offrirtnt^ 

Future. 
offrirasj offrira, I shall, or will offer. 
offrirczj offriront, 
Conditional. 
offrirois, offriroit, I would, could, or 
Offririons^ offririez, offriroicnt, should offer. 

21 



Present. 
Part. act. 
Part. pass. 



Offre, 
Offrons, 

Offrois, 
Offrions, 

Offris, 
Offrimes, 

Offrirai^ 
Off r irons, 

Offrirois, 



242 

Imperative Mood. 

Sing. Offre^ offre^ offer thou. 

Plur. OfronSj ofrez, ^rent, 

Subjunctive Mood. 
Present. 

Que que que 

Sing. Offre, offres, offre, that! majr^ offer. 

Plur. Offrions^ offriez, offrtnt, 

Preterite. 

Sing. Offrisse^ qffrisses, offrit^ that I might offer. 
Plur. Offrissions, offrissiez, offrissent, 



OUIR, TO HEAR. 

This verb is never used hut in its participle passive, 
joined to some of the tenses of the verb avoir, to have, 
preceding the verb dire^ to say : ex. 

J'ai oui dire que, I have heard, that, <J-c. 
In general we make use of apprendre. 



OUVRIR, TO OPEN. 

TTiis verb, as well as its compounds, 

Couvrir, to cover, Recouvrir, to cover again. 

x> , • (to discover, 
D&Gouvnr, i . „v.^^,r«„ 
' ( to uncover, 

is conjugated like OFFRIR. 



PARTIR, TO SET OUT, TO GO AWAY. 

And its compounds, 

Dipartir, to depart, to | Repartir, to set out again, 
impart, | to reply ; 



243 
Se REPENTIR, TO repent j 

SENTIR^ TO FEEL, TO SMELL, 

And its compounds ; 



Consentir, to consent, to 

agree, * 

Pressentir^ to have a foresight of, 

are conjugated Uke MetUir 



Ressentir^ to be sensible 
of, to resent, 



EXERCISES ON THE FOREGOING VERBS ANP 

THEIR COMPOUNDS. 

As soon as they saw us coming they ran away. 
voir^v, venir^v, 

- - - Avoid bad company. - - He does not love your 

compagnie^L 
sister, because she lies. - - If you forgive me this time, 
parce que^c, foisA. 

I never will lie any more. - - I cannot believe him .5 

tc^ pouvoir^v, 

for he contradicts himself at every instant. - - Tell 
car,c. . Dire^v* 

me what she has done to you ; but above all do not lie. 

5wr,p. 

- - If you do not behave better, your mother will 

se comporter^v, 
die with grief. - - Mrs. S. died at Paris on the seventh 

de chagrin^m, a ^o> 

of August, one thousand seven hundred and eighty. 

- - Misfortune often seeks those who avoid it, and 

Malheur ^m. chercher^v. 

sometimes avoids those who seem to seek it. - - 
fjuelquefois,a.dy, sembler^v. 

Were I in your place, I would not offer her any money. 
Si f 6 tots a 

- - Why do you not open the door for your sister ? 

Powr^Moi,adv. a 



244 

-^ Your brother was no sooner arrived in London, than 

plut6t,a,dv. a 

I offered him mj services. - - Your actions never belie 
your words. - - Open the window. - - I had heard vou 
were going to Holland at the beginning of next 

au commencement, m. 
month. - - I hope you will never discover what I have 

espcrer^v, 
told you. - - Cover my hat, and put it upon that 
dire^Y. mettre^Y, 

chair. - - I will set out to-morrow morning at seven 
(o'clock). - - Do not set out without me. - - Let us go and 

heure,L 
see Mrs. D**, I have heard she is dying. - - Your sister 
repents much of having sold her books. - - Gather that 

d^ avoir 
pink, it smells charmingly. - - Her mother says she 
(eiUet^m, bien ban^Rdv, 

never will consent to it. - - If you do not take 

prendre,y, 
care, you will repent of your imprudence soon or 
garde^L ^ /of, adv. 

late. - - Let us die for our country, arid our death will 
2rtrJ,adv. patrie^L 

be glorious. - - Every citizen ought to be disposed to 

g/oWeua?,adj. 
sacrifice himself for the publick good ; it is at this 

ce,pro. a, p. 
price only that (a man) acquires a lawful right 

on legitime^aSj, droit, m. 

to. the advantages of civil society. - - I should die 
satisfied, if I knew you were happy. - - - 
cordent,^dj, savoir^Y. (by the subj.) 

You soon felt the effect of it. - - My cousin set out 

effet,m, 
from here yesterday morning at nine o'clock. - - I 

tc?, adv. 
offer you ray house, it is at your service. - - - You 
may rely upon her, she will never discover 

pouvo-ir^Y, compter ^y* 



• 245 
your secrets. - - I will never offer you my^ borse' any 

to* 

more*. - - - He will feel it in his turn, when he 

a tour,m, 

is old. 

(by the fut.) 



SERVIR, TO SERVE, TO HELP TO. 

Infinitive Mood. 

Present. Servir. to serve. 
Part. act. Servant, serving. 
Pa^t> pass. Servi, ?e, served. 

Indicative Mood. 

Present. 

Sing. Sers, sers, serf, I serve, or am serving. 

Plur. Servons, servez, servent, 

Imperfect. 

Sing. Servois^ s.trvois, servoit, I did serve, or was 
Plur. Sei-vions, serviez^ servoient, serving. 

Preterite. 

Sing. Servis, servis, servit, I did serve, or served. 
Plur. Servimes, servites, strvii'enty 

Future. 

Sing. Sei-virai, strviras^ servira, I shall, or will serve e 
Plur. Servirons, servirez, servirontj 

Conditional. 

Sing. Servirois, servirois, serviroit, I would, should, or 
Plur. Servirions, strviriez, serviroient, could serve. 

Imperative Mood. 

Sing. Sers^ serve, serve thoii* 

Plur. Servons^ servez, scrvent, 
21* 



S46 

Subjunctive Mood* 

Present. 

Que que que 

Sing. Serve, serves, serve, that I may serve. 

Plur. ServionSj serviez, servent, 

Preterite. 
Sing. Servtsse, servisses, servit, that I might serve* 
Plur. Servissions, servissiez, servissent, 

The compounds of this verb are, 

Desservir, to do an ill office, to clear a table. 
Se servir, to make use, to use. 



SORTIR, TO GO OUT, 

is conjugated like MEJSCTIR, 



SOUFFRIR, TO SUFFER. 

is conjugated like OFFRIR, 



tenir, ,t0 hold, to keep. 

Infinitive Mood. 

Present. Tenir, to hold. 
Part. act. Tenant, holding. 
Part. pass. 7 e?m, ue, held. 

Indicative Mood. 

Present. 
Sing. T'kns, iiens, iiant, I hold, or am holding. 
Plur. Tenons, tenez, tiennent, 

Imperfect. 

Sing. Tenois, tends, ^eno*^,* I did hold, or was holding* 
Plur. Tenions, teniez, tenoient, 
Preterite. 
Sing. Tins, tins^ tint, I held, or did hold^. 
Plur. Tinmcsy tint^s^ tinrmt, 



247 



Future. 

Sing. Tiendrai, tundras^ tiendra^ I shall, or will hold. 
Plur. Tiendrons^ iiendrez^ tiendront, 

Conditional. 

Sing. Tiendrois^ tiendrois, tiendroit, I should, could, or 
Plur. Tiendrions, tiendriez) tiendroient, would hold. 

Imperative Mood. 



Sing. Tiens, 

Plur. Tenons, Untz^ 



tienne^ hold thou. 



tiennenU 



Subjunctive Mood. 
Present. 



Que que que 

Sing. Tienne, iiennes^ tienne, that I may hold. 
Plur. Tenions^ teniez^ tiennent. 

Preterite. 

Sing. Tinsse, iinsses, tint, that I might hold. 
Plur. Tinssions, iinssiez^ tinssent, 

The compounds of this verb are, 



S^ahstenir, to abstain. 
Appartenir, to belong. 
Contenir, to contain. 
Detenir, to detain. 
Entrelenir, to keep, to en- 
tertain. 



Maintmir, to maintain. 
Obtenir, to obtain. 
Retenir, to retain, to keep. 
Smiienirj to maintain, to 
hold, to support. 



TRESSAILLIR, to start, to leap for* 

Infinitive Mood. 
Present. Tressaillir. to start. 



Part. act. 
Part. pass. 



Tressaillant, 



starting. 



Tressailli, ie, started. 



248 



Sing. 
Plur. 



Sing. 
Plur. 



Sing. 
Plur. 



Sing. 
Plur. 

Sing. 
Plur. 



Sing. 
Plur. 



Sing. 
Plur. 



tressaille^ I start. 
tressaillent, 

tressailloit^ I did start. 
tressailloientf 

iressaillit, I started. 



Indicative Mood. 
Present. 
Tressailh, tressailles^ 
Tressaillonsj tressaillez, 

Imperfect. 

Tressaillois^ tressaillois, 
TressaillionSj tressailliez, 

Preterite. 

TressaiUis^ tressaillis, 

Tressaillimes, tressaillites^ tressaillirentj 

Future. 

Tressaillirai, tressailliras, tressaillira, I shall, or 

will start. 
Tressaillirons^ iressailUrez^ tressailliront^ 

Conditional. 
Tressaillirois, tressaitlii'ois, iressailliroit, I should, 

would, (^'C, start. 
Tressaillirions^ tressailliriez, tressailliroient, 

Imperative Mood is wanting. 
Subjunctive Mood. 
Present. 
Que que 

Tressaille, tressailhs^ 

Tressaillions, tressailliez. 

Preterite. 

TressaiUisse, tressaillisses, tressaill% that I might 
Tressaillissions^ tressaillissiez, tressaillissent^ start. 



que 

tressaille, that I may 

tressaillent, start. 



ASSAILLIR, TO ASSAULT, is conjugated as above. 

SAILLIR, TO JUT, or jet out (term in architecture), 
is conjugated like TRESSAILLIR, hut is only used 
in the third person of some tenses and its infinitive 
mood. 



249 



N. B. SAILLIR^ TO gush out, (speaking of 
liquid), is regular, and conjugated like PUNIR, 



any 



Convenir^ to agree, to be- 
come, to fit, to suit, 
Contrevenlr a, to infringe, 
Devenir^ to become,* 
Disconvenir^ to disagree, 
Intervenir, to intervene, 
Parvenir a, to attain to, 
Prevenir^ to prevent, to 
prejudice, to anticipate, 
to prepossess, 
Provenir^ to proceed, 



VENIR, TO COME, 

And its compounds, 



Revenir^ to come back, to 
return, 

Se souvenir^ to remember, 
to remind,! 

Se ressouxeyiir^ to recol- 
lect, 

Siibvenir^ to relieve, to 
assist, 

/SurreniV, 
happen 



to befall, to 
unexpectedly, 



to come to, 



are conjugated like TENIR* 



VETIR, TO CLOTHE. 

This verb is seldom used but in the present of the 
infinitive mood, and participle passive, vein, clothed ; 
therefore the conjugation of its compound REVETIR, 

TO INVEST V7ITH, TO GIVE OTHER CLOTHES, wiU be 

given in lieu of it. 

* This verb in English is most generally accompanied by the pre- 
position o/, governing the noun or pronoun: but it must be observed, 
that, in French, the preposition must be suppressed, and the noun or 
pronoun become the nominative to the werh dtveiiir : ex. 
JVe vous informez -point de ce que Do not inquire about what will 



je deviendrai^ 
Que dtviendra votre cousin, si son 

pert Vahandonnt ? 
!Si cela arrivoit^ je ne sais ce que. 

nous deviendrions, 



become of me. 
What will become of your cousin^ 

if his father forsake him ? 
Should that happen, I know not 

what would become of us. 



t When this verb, in English, governs a noun or pronoun in the ac- 
cusative case, it must be put in the infinitive mood, and preceded by 
the verb /aire in the same tense, number, and person, as the verb to 
remind: ex. 
Tdites-moi sonvemr de passer ches Memind me to call upon your 

votre tante^ aunt. 

Oui^je vous en ferai souvenir, Yes, 1 will remind you of it. 



250 
Infinitive Mood. 



Present. Revetir, to invest, to give other clotljes. 
Part. act. Revetanf, investing. 
Part. pass. RevStu, we, invested. 



Sing. 
Plur. 



Sing. 
Plur. 



Sing. 
Fiur. 



Sing. 
Sing. 



Sing. 
Plur. 



Revets, 
Revctons^ 

Revitois, 
Revetions^ 

Revetis^ 
Revetimes, 

Revetirai, 
Revetirons, 

Revitirois, 
Revetirions, 



Sing. 

Plur. Revetons, 



Que 
Sing. Revete^ 
Plur. Revetions, 



Indicative Mood. 

Present. 
revets, revet, I invest. 
revetcZj revitent* 

Imperfect. 
revetois, revetoit, I did invest. 

revetiez, revetoient, 

Preterite. 
reveiis, revetit, 1 invested, or did in* 
reveilles^ revetirent, vest. 

Future. '< 

revetiras, revetira, I shall, of will in- 

revetirez, revetiront^ vegt. 

Conditional. 
revetirois, revetiroit, I should, would, 
revetiriez, revetiroient^ &-c, invest. 

Imperative Mood. 

Revets, revete, invest thou. 
revitez^ revetent, 

Subjunctive Mood. 
Present. 



que 

reveies, 

revetiez. 



que 

revete, that I may invest. 

revetent^ 



Preterite. 
Sing. Revetisse, revetisses, revetit, that I might invest. 
Plur. Reveti$sions,revetissieZj reveiissent^ 



251 

• EXERCISES ON THE FOREGOING VERBS 
AND THEIR COMPOUNDS. 

Youi*^frierid Mr. H***, does not serve me well. - - 
ami^m, *o» 

Shall I help you to a little bit of lamb, 

«2^ morceau^m. agvcau^m. 

or a wing of that chicken ? - - - We would 

aile^L poulet^m, 

serve him with all our heart, if we could. - - - 

pouvoir^y, 
I shall go out in half an hour. - - If we go to-daj 

aujourtThui, adv. 
to Richmond, we will make use of jour coach. - - My 

carrosse,m. 
sister went out this morning at nine o'clock, and is not 

maiin^m, 
yet returned. - - Nobody knows what we suffered in our 

savoir^ v. 
last voyage. - - If I were as ill as you, I would 

voyage ^m, ma /a Je, adj. 

not go out of my room. - - Why do not you 

chambre^L Pou)'quoi,^dy» 
serve your friends, since you may do it ? - - 

puisque,c» pouvoir^v. 
Should they forsake you, what would become of 

ahandonner^y* 
you ? - - I would make use of your horse, if you were 

cheval^m* avoir 

so kind as to lend it to me. - - - The more we are 
la bonte de 

above others, the more it becomes us to be 

au dessus c?e,p. 
modest and humble. - • My aunt and I came yester- 

tante^L 
day to see you, but you were not at home. - - I 
hope you will keep your word, and'come 

parole^f, 
to-morrow. - - I assure you Mr. R**'3 father holds 
demow,adr. assurer ^r* 



%m 



252 

the first rank in the town, hut the son will never 

rang-^m, 
attain to his father's reputation. - - Men aci^ire, hy 

'" Homme^xn, 

long labours, knowledge which often becomes 

/ ravai /, m . liuni ere^L 
fatal to them. - - I maintain, and will always 

maintain, that you v/ill not be happy without 

/ie?/rewa:,adj. sans^-p. 
virtue. - - We were coming to see you, but you have 
anticipated all my designs. - - She leaped for joy when 

_ de 

she saw her. - - At last she has agreed to pay her 

EnJin.Tidv, * de 

an annual pension of twenty pounds. - - Her mother 
started up at these words, and became furious. - - - 

•-oo a, p. parole,{. furieux^Q.dj. 

Come on Friday morning at nine o'clock. - - 

«oi Vendredi.m. 
This house will beldlag to me after her death. - - 

apres^ip, mort^L 

You will obtain leave to go out another time, 

permissions^ de fois,f. 

if you come back s^on. - - This box contains all 

6iM^6/,adv. 
my jewels. - - I agree, Miss N. is the prettiest of the 

6i;oMa:,m.pl. 
family ; but she is so proud, that I know not what will 
become of her. - - Who knows whether they will re- 

savoir^y. si,c» 
member it or not ? - - They assaulted the town (in the) 

au 
middle of the night, and all their officers, even 
milieu^m, weme,adv. 

the general, agree that they have acquired much 

acquerir^p.p, 
glory. - - Remember that, if you infringe the law, you 

* See the neuter verbs for the formatioji of the compound tensesj 
page 212. 



253 

will incur the punishments decreed bj the law. - - - 

Your illness proceeds from a great heat. - - - The 

chahur^L 
first time you come to see me, I will keep you 

(bythefut.) 
two or three days. - - Mr. B. desired me to tell you, 

prier^v, de 

that he will not come back to-day. - - - When the 
surgeon had opened his vein, the blood gushed 
chirurgien^ m . sang, m . 

out' with an extraordinary impetuosity. - - That poor 
man will bless you, if you give him other clothes. - - 

benir^y. 
He is so prepossessed against me, that he will not 

contre.ip. vouloir^Y, 

agree he is in the wrong. - - We should certainly 

certainement^adv, 
have come back yesterday, had we had time. - - You will 

hier, adv. 
become a great man, if you continue to study with 

continuer^V, de 
the same assiduity. - - He would have come to see u$ 

assiduite^f, * 

last week, if it had not rained. - - The first time 
semaine^f. p/i(,p.p. fo'^s^f, 

I go out, remind me to call on your bro- 

(bythefut.) de passerby* chez^-p, 

ther. - - That hat would suit you very well, if you 
were a little taller. - - - Do not go out to-day, you 
will suiBfer much if you do. - - - I should not suffer 

beaucoup,a.dv, foAre, v. 
(so much) if it were fine weather. - - Why do not 

ian/, adv. faisoit^y, 
you abstain from drinking ? - - The king has invested 

6oi?'e,v. 
that nobleman with all his authority. - - You may 
seigneur, m, de pouvoir^v, 

set out this morning, but remember to come back 

22 



254 

at night. - - Were I in your place, I would detain 

Ge soir^m. place, f, 

him here a little longer ; for he always keeps 

long-tems^zdy, car^c, 
himself shut up in his house. - - I do not think that 

en/erme, p.p. croire^v, 

colour suits your sister. - - When will she return 

(by the subj.) Quand^2.Av. 

from the country ? - - She wrote she would come next 
Saturday, if the weather were fine. 



VERBS OF THE THIRD CONJUGATION. 

ASSEOIR, TO SIT DOWN. 

Infinitive Mood. 

Present. Asseoir, to sit down. 

Part. act. Asseyant, sitting down. 

Part. pass. Assis, ise^ sat down (or seated). 

Indicative Mood. 

Presents 

Sing. Assieds, assieds, assied, I sit down. 
Plur. Aisseyons, asseyez, asseient, 

Imperfect. 

Sing. Asseyois, asseyois, asseyoit, I did sit, or was sit- 
Plur. Asseyions, asseyiez, asseyoient, ting down. 

Preterite. 

Sing. Assis, assis, assit, I sat down. 

Plur. Assimesy assiies, 'assirent, 

Future. 

Sing. Assierai, assiiras, assiera, I shall, or will sit 
Plur. Assicrgns^ assierez, assUront, ^ down# 



255 

Conditional. 
Sing. Assierois^ assierois, assieroit^ I should, would, or 
Plur. Assierionsy assieriez^ assiiroient^ could sit do\yn. 

Imperative Mood. 

Sing. Assieds^ asseie, sit down. 

Plur. Asseyons^ asseyez, asseient^ 

Subjunctive Mood. 
Present. 

Que que que 

Sing. Asscie, asseies^ asseie, that I may sit down* 
Plur. Asseyionsj asseyiez^ asseienty 

Preterite. 
Sing. Assisse, assisses, assit, that I might sit down. 
Plur. Assissions, assissiez^ assissent^ 

Asseoir is most generally conjugated as a reflective 
verb, which may easily be done, by the learner adding 
a double pronoun to the different tenses, and forming 
the compound ones by the verb etre^ as in se prome- 
ner : ex. 

Je m^assieds, tu Vassieds, il s^assied ; 

Kous nous asseyons^ vous vous asseyez^ Us s^asseient* 

Compound Tenses. 

Je me suis assis, tu Ves assis^ il s'^est assis ; 

Nous nous sommes assis^ vous vous etes assis^ &c. 

The compound of this verb is, 

Se rasscoir, to sit down again. 

SEOTR, TO FIT WELL, TO BECOME, TO TIT, the 

primitive of asseoir^ is never used in the present of its 
infinitive mood ; and in its other tenses is conjugated as 
follows : 

Part. act. Siant^ fitting well, fitting, or becoming. 
Part. pass. Sis^ (never used but in the sense of situate, 
or lying.) 



256 

Indicative Mood. 

Present* II siedj Us sieent^ it becomes, they her 

come, <Jrc. 
Imperfect. II seyoit^ Us siyoient, it was becoming, i^c» 
Preterite wanting. 

Future. II siera, 4/5 WeVon^, it or they will become. 

Conditional. // sieroit, Us sieroieni, it or they would be- 
come! 

The other tenses are never used. 

SURSEOIR^ TO SUPERSEDE, TO PUT OFF, a com* 
pound of seoir^ is only used in law, and is thus con- 
jugated : 

Part. act. Sursoyant, 

Part. pass. Sursis^ isei 

Indicative Mood. 
Present. 
Je sursois, &c. nous sursoyons, &c. 

Imperfect. 
Je sursoyois, &c. nous sursoyions, &C. 

Preterite. 
Je sursis, &c. nous sursimes, &;c. 

Future. 
Je surseoiraiy &c. nous surseoirons, &c. 

Conditional. 
Je surseoirois, &c. nous surseoirions, &c. 

Imperative Mood. 
Sursois^ &c. sursoyons, &c. 

Subjunctive Mood. 

Present. 
Queje surseoie^ &c. que nous sursoyions, &c. 

Preterite. 
Queje sursisse, &c. que nous sursissions, &c* 



-Hi 



dechoir, to decay, to decline* 

Infinitive Mood. 

Present. Dcchoir, to decay. 

Part. act. wanting. 

Part. pass. Dechu, we, decayed* 

Indicative Mood. 
Present. 
Sing. Dechois^ dechois, dechoit^ I decay. 
Plur. Dechoyons, dechoyez, dtchoient, 

Imperfect is wanting. 
Preterite. 
Sing. Dichus, dechus, dechut, I decayed, or did 
Plur. DechumeSy dechutes^ dechurenf^ decay. 

Future. 
Sing. Decherrai, decherras^ decherra^ I shall, or will 
Plur. Dccherrons, decherrez, decherront^ decay. 

Conditional. 
Sing. Decherroisy dicherrois, decherroit, I should, would, 

or could decay, 
Plur. Decherrionsy dicherriez^ decherroienf^ 

Imperative Mood is wanting. 

Subjunctive Mood. 
Present. 
Que que que, 

Sing. D6choie, dechoies^ dechoie^ that I may decay. 
Plur. Dechoyions, dechoyiez, dcchoient. 

Preterite. 
Sing. Dichusse^ dechusses, dechut, that I might decay, 
Plur. Dechussions^ dichussiez^ dechussent, 

CHOIRy the primitive of the above verb is obsolete, 

ECHOIR, to fall out, to chance, is conjugated 
like DECHOIR. Its part. act. is ichimU 
22* 



258 

MOUVOIR, TO mo\:e. 

Infinitive Mood* 

Present. Mouvoir, to move. 
Part. act. Mmivantj moving. 
Part. pass. Mu^ we, moved. 

Indicative Mood. 

Present. 
Sing. Meus^ mens, meut, I move. 

Plur. Mouvons^ mouvez^ meuvent, 

Imperfect. 
Sing. Mouvots, mouvois, mouvoit, I did move. 
Plur. Mouvions^ mouviez, rnouvoient, 

Preterite. 
Sing. Mus^ mu$, mut^ I moved, or did move. 

Plur. Mumes, mutes ^ murenty 

Future. 
Sing. Mouvrai, mouvras, mouvra, I shall, or will move* 
Plur. Mouvronsy mouvrez^ mouvront^ 

\ Conditional. 

Sing. Mouvrois^ mouvrois^ mouvroit, I should, could, or ^ 
Plur. Mouvrions^ mouvriez^ mouvroient^ would mov^. 

Imperative Mood. 

Sing. Meus^ meuve, move tho^. 

Plur. Mouvons^ mouvez^ meuvent, 

Subjunctive Mood. 
Present. 
Que que que 

Sing. Meuve^ meuves^ meuve, that I maj move. 
Plur. Mouvions, mouviez^ mmvent^ 

Preterite. 
Sing. Musse^ musses, mut, that I might moYe. 
Plur. Mussions, mussiez, mussent, 
The compound of this verb is, 

Emouvoir^ to stir up, to more. 



259 

POUVOIR, TO BE ABLE, TO HAVE IN ONE's POWER. . 

Infinitive Mood. 
Present. Pouvoir^ to be able. 
Part. act. Pouvant, being able. 
Part. pass. Pw, been able. 

Indicative Mood. 

Present. 
Sing. Puis^ oTpeux^ peux^ pent, I am able, I can or may. 
Plur. PouvonSj pouvez^peuvent, 

Imperfect,. 
Sing. Pouvois^ pouvois, pouvoit, I was able, or I couldv 
Plur. Pouvions, pouviezj pouvoient, 

Preterite. 
Sing. Pus, pus, put, I was able, or I could. 

Plur. Pumes, putes, purent, 

Future. 
Sing. Pourrai, pourras, pourra, I shall or will be able. 
Plur. Pourrons, pourrez, pourr&nt, 

Conditional. 
Sing. Pourrois, pourvGis, pourroit, I should be able, I 
Plur. Pourrions, pourriez, pourroient, could or might. 

Imperative Mood wanting. 

Subjunctive Mood. 
Present. 
Que que que 

Sing. Puisse, puisses, puisse, that I may be able, or 
Plur. Puissions, puissiez, puissenf, I may. 

Preterite. 
Sing. Pusse, pusses, put, that I might be able, or 
Plur. Pussions, pussiez, pussent, I might. 

When the words can, may, could, or misjit, express 
an absolute or permissive power, or a possibility of doing 
a thing, can and may are rendered by the present tense 
of the indicative of this yerb : ex. 



260 

Je puis vous vendre un hon 1 can sell you a good horse, 

cheval, si vous en avez if you want one. 

besoin d^un, 
Vous pouvez aller au hal^ You may go to the hall, 

mais revenez a dix heures^ hut come hack at ten 

o'clock. 

N. B. May, expressing a wish, is rendered hy the 
present tense of the suhjunctive : ex. 

Puissiez-zJ0W5 etre heureux ! May you he happy ! 

Could is rendered hy one of the following tenses, 
viz. the imperfect, preterite, definite or indefinite, or 
conditional present ; and might by the last tense : ex. 
Je ne pouvois pas mieux I could do no hetter. 

faire, 
II ne put pas venir avec He could not come with us 

nous la semaine passee, last week. 

Vous pourriez vous tromper You might mistake as well 

aussi hien que lui, as he. 

Could or might, being joined to the verb to have, im- 
mediately followed by a participle passive, must be ren- 
dered by the conditional past of the above verb, with 
the participle turned into the present of the infinitive 
mood ; ex. 
J'aurois pu vous le dire hier I could have told it to you 

au soir, last night. 

Vous auriez pu le faire en You might have done it 

trois jours, in three days. 

S A VOIR, TO KNOW something. 
Infinitive Mood. 
' Present. Savoir, to know. 
Part. act. Sachant, knowing. 
Part. pass. Su, ue, known. 

Indicative Mood. 
Present. 
&ng. Sais^ sais, sait, I know. 
Plur. Savons, savcz, savent^ 



S>61 



Sing. Savois^ 
Plur. Savions, 

Sing. Sus, 
Plur. Sumes, 

Sing. Saurai, 
Plur. Saurons^ 

Sing. Saurois^* 
Plur. Saurions^ 



Sing. 

Plur. Sachons, 



Que 
Sing. Sache^^ 
Plur. Sachions^ 

Sing. Susse^ 
Plur. Sussions^ 



Imperfect. 
savois, savoit^ I did know, or knew. 
savieZy savoient, 

Preterite. 
5W5, sw^, I knew, or did know. 
5wfey, surent, 

Future. 
sauras, saura^ I shall, or will know. 
saurez, sauront, 
Conditional. 
sanroisj sauroit^ I should, would, of 
sauriezy sauroient^ could know. 

Imperative Mood. 
Present. 
Sache, sache, know thoa. 
sacheZj sachenty 

Subjunctive Moop. 

Present. 
que que 

saches, sache, that I may know. 

sachiezy sachent^ 
Preterite. 
susses, sut, that I might know. 

sussiez, siissenty 



VALOIR, TO BE WORTH. 

Infinitive Mood. 



Present. 
Part. act. 
Part. pass. 



Valoir, to be worth. 
Valant, being worth. 
Valu, been worth. 



* This tense, conjugated negatively^ is often Englished by cannot : 
ex. 

Jene saurois vous le dire^ I cannot tell it to you. 

t We sometimes employ the present of the subjunctive of this verb 
instead of the indicative ; but it is never to be used without the ne- 
gation pas^ and most commonly in answering a question : ex. 

Le roi ira-t-il d la couUdu ? "Will the king go to the play ? 

tas queje. sache, Not that I kn9w of. 



262 

Indicative Mood. 
Present. 
Sing. Vaux<f vaux^ vaut^ I am worth. 
Plur. Valons^ valtz^ valent, 

Imperfect. 
Sing. Valois, valois^ valoit, I was worth. 
Plur. Valionsj valiez, valoient, 

Preterite. 
Sing. Valus, valus^ valuta I was worth. ■ 
Plur. Valumes^ valutes^ valureni^ 

Future. 
Sing. Vaudrai, vaudras^ vaudra, I shall, or will he 
Plur. Vaudrons^ vaudrez^ vaudront^ worth. 

Conditional. 
Sing. Vaudrois, vaudrois, vaudroit, I should, c^'C. be 
Plur. VaudrionSy vaudriez, vaudroient, worth. 

Imperative Mood. 

Sing. Vaux, vaille^ be thou worth. 

Plur. Valonsj valez, vaillent^ 

Subjunctive Mood. 

Que que que 

Sing. Vaille^ vailles, vaille, that I may be worth* 
Plur. Valions, valiez, vaillent, 

Preterite. 
Sing. Valusse, valusses^ valut^ that I might be worth. 
Plur. Valussions^valussiez^ valussent, 

The compound of this verb is, 

Prevaloir, to prevail, which is conjugated as VA- 
LOIR : but we say much better in the present tense of 
the subjunctive. 

Queje preval-e, e^, e ; ions^ ieZy mL 



263 

VOIR, TO SEE. 

Infinitive Mood* 
Present. Voir, to see. 
Part. act. Voyant, seeing. 
Part. pass. Vu, ue, seen. 

Indicative Mood. 

Present. 

Sing. Vois, vois, voit, I see. 
Plur. Voyons, voyez, voient, 

Imperfect. 
Sing. Voyois, voyois, voyoit, I did see# 
Plur. V-oyions, voyiez, voyoientj 

Preterite. 
Sing. Vis, vis, vit, I saw, or did see. 
Plur. Vimes, vttes, virent, 

Future. 
Sing. Verrai, verras, verra, I shall, or will see. 
Plur. Verrons, verrez, verront. 

Conditional. 
Sing. Verrois, verrois, verroit, I should, 4^e. sefe. 
Plur. Verrions, verriez, verroient, 

Imperative Mood. 

Sing. Vois, voie, see thou. 

Plur, Voyons, voyez, voienf. 

Subjunctive Mood. 

Present. 
Que que que 

Sing. Voie, voies, voie, that I may see. 
Plur. Voyions, voyiez, voient. 

Preterite'. 
Sing. Visse, visses, vit, that I might see. 
Plur. Vissions, vissiez, vissent, 

Entrevoir, to have a glimpse of. Prevoir, to foresee. . 
Rcvoir^ to see again. Pourvoir, to provide y 



264 

PRE VOIR differs from VOIR in the future : ex. 

Sing. Prevoirai, prevoiras, prevoira, 

Plur. Pr6voironsy privoirez, privoiront ; ' And, 

Conditional. Present. 
Sing. Prevoirois, prevoirois, prevoiroit, 
Plur. Prevoirions, prevoiriez^ prevoiroient. 

POURVOIR makes in the Preterite, 

Sing. Pourvus, pourvus, pourvut* 
Plur. Pourvumes^ pourvutes, pourvurenL 

Future. 
Sing. Pourvoirai, pourvoiras^ pourvoira. 
Plur. Pourvoirons^ pourvoirez, pourvoironU 

Conditional. 
Sing. Pourvoirois<f pourvoirois^ pourvoiroiU 
Plur. Pourvoirions, pourvoiriez^ paurvoiroient* 

Subjunctive Mood. 
Preterite. 
Sing. Pourvusse^ pourvusses, pourvut, 
Plur. Pourvussions^pourvussiez^ pourvmsenf. 



voulotr, to be willing. 
Infinitive Mood. 

Present. Vovloir^ to be willing. 
Part. act. Voulant, being willing. 
Part. pass. Voulu, we, been willing. 

Indicative Mood. 

Present. 
Sing. Veux, veux, veut^ I am willing, or I will. 
Plur. VouloiiSj voulez, veulent. 

Imperfect. 
Sing. VouIqis^ vonlois^ vouloit I was willing, or I would, 
plur. Voulions^ voulkz, voxdoient^ 



^2Q5 

Preterite. 

Sing. Voulus^ voulus, voulut, I was willing, or i 
Plur. Voulumes^ volutes^ voulurenf^ would. 

Future. 

Sing. Voudrai, voudrasj voudra, I shall be willing, or 
Plur. Voudi'ons^ voudrez^ voudront, I will. 

Conditional. 

Sing. Voudrois, voudrois^ voudroit^ I should be willing, 
Plui% Voudrions^ "voudriez^ voudroient^ or I would. 

Imperative Mood is wanting. 

Subjunctive Mood. 

Present. 

Que que que 

Sing. Veuille, veuilles^ veuille^ that I may be willing. 
Plur. VouUons^ voulkz^ veuillent^ 

Preterite. 

Sing. Voulusse, voulusscs^ voulut^ that I might be wil- 
Plur. Voulussions^voidussiez^vouhissent^ liiig* 

When the words will or would signify a will, choice, 
or deliberation in the agent, and can be expressed by 
choose or chose^ will is rendered in French by the present 
of the indicative mood, or future of this verb ; ex. 

Je veux y aller^ et lui par- I zcill, or choose to, go 
ler moi-meme^ there, and speak to him 

myself : 
II ne veut pas mangeu He will not eat, or does 

not choose to eat : 

and would by one of the following tenses, viz. the Im- 
perfect, Preterite, Conditional, or Compound of the 
Present, 

23 



266 



Si je voulois, je vous chrois 

oil elle demeure^ 
II voulut absolument pariir 

hier^ 



que ji 



If I would, or cJiose, I could 

tell you where she lives. 
He would absolutely, or 

absolutely chose to, set 

out yesterday. 
What would you have me 

do? 



Que voudriez-roM5 
fisse ? 

When would is joined to the verb to have immedi- 
ately followed by a participle passive, they are to be 
rendered by the compound of the imperfect or com- 
pound of the conditional of the above verb, with the 
participle passive turned into the present of the infinitive 
mood : ex. 



-Si j'avois voulu luiparlcr, 



Vous ?ii'auriez pas voulu 

prendre les armes, si, Slc, 
Jstous aurions pu Parreter si 
nous eussions voulu, 



If I would have spoken to 

him, or had I chosen to 

speak to him. 
You would not have taken 

up arms, if, <^c. 
We could have stopped 

him, if we would, or 

had chosen. 



EXERCISES ON THE FOREGOING VERBS AND 

THEIR COMPOUNDS. 

Why do not you sit down, sir ? - - You 

Pourquoi, adv. 
come to see me very seldom. - - Let us sit down upon 

r«rewen/, adv. 
the grass. - - Do not make (so much) noise, I cannot 

herbe,L faire,v, iant,a,6v, 

learn my lesson, t - Do you know what has hap- 

apprendre,v, arri- 

pened to her ? - - No, I do not. - - As soon as he saw 
<z;er,v. Aussitot que,c, 

he could not make her hear reason, he went 

entendre,v, s'^en 

away. - - We went there ourselves, and soon knew 
alUr^Y* feienfo^,adr. 



267 

what she asked. - - See the letter she wrote me. - - Wc 

ecrire,v, 
will not sit down till you have determined to set 

que ne se neierminer^v. a 

out. - - The first time I saw your sister, she pleased me. 

fois^L plaire^v, 

- - I would sit down upon the grass, if it were not so 
damp. - - Mrs. P. desired me to tell you she could 
/iitmic?€,adj. prier^w, dire^Y. 

not come to see you this week, but she would cer- 

semaine^ f. cer^ 

tainly come at the beginning of nerd 

tainement^2idy. commencement^m. 

month. - - Cannot you lend me three or four 

moi5,m. preter^v. 

guineas ? - - If I would, I could soon know 

guinee^L bieiit6t,a.dv. 

whether Mrs. D. has seen your aunt or not. 

51, c. tante^L 

The last time I was in the park, I could not distinguish 
her on account of the trees, that were between 

a caM5c,p. . 
her and me ; (I had only a) glimpse of her. - - - 

je n'aifait que ^^^ 

This cloth is not worth five shillings a yard, but its 

drap^m, 
colour becomes you very well. - - Do you not see the 
defects of it ? - - When you know your lesson, 
defauf^m, (by the fut.) 

come and repeat it to me. - - Did you not know that 

«<» repeter^v. 
Mr. A. was to marry Miss B. ? - - I knew it, but 

epouser^ v. mais^ c. 

I was not willing to tell your brother of it. - - I be- 

parler^ v. 
lieve you could learn your lessons much bet- 

app rmdre^ v. bcaucoup^ a dv. 

ter, if you would. - - Could you lend me your horse 

p7Xier,v, 



268 

for two or three days ? - - If your brother come wifh 

jour,m, avec^ip, 

me, will he be able to follow me ? - - What will you 

suivre^Y. 
lay that he will not come without his sister ? - - This 
parier^v* 
-room can contain about a hundred people. - - Could 

e?zi;iVon, p. pe rsonne, f. 

they see so great an alteration, without being 

changement^m, sans^-p, 
vexed (at it) ? - - It is better to be unfortunate than 
/ac/?e,p.p. en, pro. valoir^v, malheureux ^Sidj. 

criminal. - - He is incapable of commanding others, who 
cannot command himself. - - His best . coat was not 

hahit^m, 
worth two-pence when he arrived from Germany. - - - 

soi(^m» AlhmagneA. 

We saw them yesterday. - - They did not foresee 

/n'er,adv. 
what would happen to them. - - We ought to 

arriver^v, deiwir^y, 

make a judicious choice of those friends, to 
/aire, V. judlcieux, adj . c/icia?, m . 
whom we intend to give our confidence. - - Do you 

V on loir, V. confian ce, f . 

know where Miss B. lives ? - - Yes, 1 do (know it), 

oi), adv. demeurer. v. 

and I see her every day at her window. - - Why will 

fcnelrc^L 
Tou not tell it me ? - - She would marry him in 

epouser^v. e«, p. 

spite of all her relations. - - It is for this reason 
demt^xn, parent^m. Ce,pro. 

her father says he will never see her again. - - I 

dire^v. 
have spoken of your wine to two friends of mine : 
one has money, but he will not buy ; the other would 
buy, bat he has no money. - - Some told me that 
7our brother could not pay me, others told me that 



^69 

he woald not ; in short, I find that, when people 

eiifin^ adv. 
will not pay, we have much trouble. - - We regularly 
pay all that we owe, but he says that he will pay >;,|. 

nobody. - - All the finest talents united are not j"^'' 

reunir^Y, '. } 

worth one virtue. - - Virtue is a quality which we can- 

o?2,pro. 
not praise too much. - - Severity and rigour may 

louer^Y. <rqp, adv. S6verite,L rigueur^t 

excite fear, but not love. - - You saw with what 

crainte^L amour ^m. 

goodness she received him. - - I would not tell her : 

honti^L recevoir^v. 

what I think about it, for fear of giving her the least ; 

(?e, p. 
subject of complaint. - - if you foresee the danger, 

plahite^i, 
why do you not endeavour to avoid it ? - - They were 

idcher^v. deeviter^v. 
willing to withdraw but your brother hindered 

56 retirer^Y, . empecher^Y, 

them (from it), and desired them to sit down again. 

prier^Y. dc 

- - You can* speak to Mr, B. whenever you 

parler^Y. quandj2.dY. 

please, but I may not take that liberty. - - - 

vouloir^Y* prendre^Y. 

Why may you not ? - - - You knov/ the esteem 

estime, f. ; 

and friendship that I have for him : you know 
that his father is one of my oldest friends ; 

anaew,adj. ^'.^ 

you yourself know the merit of both. - - He would ''- 

not sell me these buckles under four 

vendre^Y* bouclej. a moins c?e,p. 

guineas. - - I will not see your brother (any more), 

/>/it5,adv. 
but I will see you again as soon as I can. - - - 

(by the fut.) /. 

^3* 



270 

Every body tihinks, that, if they would hare ptirstiei 

poursuivre^y, 
the enemy briskly, they might have ended 

vigoureusement^a.dv, Jinir^v* 

the war on that day. - - Should we see ourselves re^ 
ooo re- 

duced to so great difficulties ? - - If I would have be- 
duire,v, 

lieved him, he would have persuaded me to go to Italy 
cmre.v. de 

with him. - - He could have done his work in less 

faire,v» en, p. 

than ten minutes, if he had not amused himself in 

s''amuser,v, a 

reading. - - If you want that book, you may take 
lire^v, avoir besoin de 

it, it is at your service. - - If he sold all his horses now, 

a 
the best of them would not be worth ten guineas. - - - 

We might have danced till (twelve o'clock) if 

jusqu^d^ip, minuit,m, 
that had not happened. - - Oh ! my children, may you 
be happy, and never bewail the mojnent of your 

heureux, adj . pleurer, v. 

birth ! I spoke to her (a long while), but could 

naissance^ f. long-terns^ adv. 

not persuade her to come with me. - - May I go 

de 
and see him? - - Yes, you may, but come back 

as soon as you can. 
uussiiOt que^c, (by the fut.^^ 



♦ 



271 

VERBS OF THE FOURTH CONJUGATION. 

ABSOUDRE^ TO absolve, to acquit. 

Infinitive Mood. 

Present. Absoudre^ to absolve. 
Part. act. Absolvant^ absolving. 
Part. pass. Absous^ ou absout, oute, absolving". 

Indicative Mood. 
Present. 
Sing. Absous^ absous^ absout^ I absolve. 

Plur. Absolvons^ absolvez, absolvent, 

Imperfect. 
Sing. Absolvois^ ahsolvois, absohoit, I did absolve. 
Plur. Absolvions, absolviez, absolvoient, 

Preterite is vranting. 

Future. 
Sing. Absoudrai, absoiidras, absoudra, I shall, or will 
Plur. Absoudrons, absoudrez, absoudront, absolve. 

Conditional. 

Sing. Absoudrois, absoudrois, absoudroit^ I should, fee. ^M 
Plur. Absoudrions^ absoudriez, absoudroient, absolve* ^^^ 

Imperative Mood. 

Sing. Absous, absolve, absolve thou. 

Plur. Absolvons, absolvez, absolvent, 

Subjunctive Mood. 
Present. 
Que que que 

Sing. Absolve, absolves, ftfe^o/re, that I may absolve. 
Plur. Absolvions, absolviez, absolvent, 

Preterite is wanting. 

SOUDRE, to solve, (the primitive of this verb), 
is used only in the present tense of the infinitive mood. 



272 

The other compounds are, 
Dissoudre, to dissolve. Resoudre, to resolve* 
Dissoudre has the same tenses wanting as absoudre* 
Resoudre has its participle passive, resolu : its pre* 
terite is, 

Sing. Resolus^ resolus^ rtsolut, 
Plur. Rcsolumes^ resolutesj resolarent* 

Subjunctive Mood. 
Preterite. 
Sing. Resolusse, resolusses, rtsolut* 
Plur. Resolussionsy resolnssiez^ risolussent* 



ASTREINDRE, to oblige; 

ATTEINDRE^ to reach, to hit, to attain, 
TO overtake, and 

AVEINDRE^ to reach, to fetch out, 

are conjugated like CRAINDRE. 

The three foregoing verbs are growing obsolete. 



B ATT RE, to beat. 
Infinitive Mood. 

Present. Battre, to beat. 
Part. act. Batiant, beating. 
Part. pass. Battu, we, beaten. 

Indicative Mood. 

Present. 
Sing. Bats, hats, hat, I beat, or am beating. 
Plur. Battons, hattez, hattent. 

Imperfect. 
Sing. Battois, hattois, hatioit, I did beat, or was beating* 
Plar. Baitionsy hattuz, hattoient, 



:^' 



273 



Preterite. 
Sing. Battis^ haitis^ battit, I beat, or did beat. 
Plur. Battimes^ battites^ battirent^ 

Future. 
Sing. Batirai, battras^ battra, I shall, or will beat* 
Plur. Battrons^ baUrez^ battront, 

Conditional. 
Sing. Battrois, battrois, battroit^ I should, &LC, beat. 
Plur. Battrionsy battriez, battroient, 

Imperative Mood. 

Sing. Bats, batte, beat thoii. 

Plur. Battons, battez, battent, 



Subjunctive Mood. 
Present. 

Que que que 

Sing. Batte^ baites, batte, that I may beat. 
Plur. Battions, battiez, battent, 

Preterite, 
Sing. Baflisse^ battisses, battif, that I might beat. 
Plur. Battissions^battissiez^battissent, 

The compounds of this verb are, 



.Ibaltre, to pull down, 

to throw down. 
Combattre, to fight. 
Debatire, to debate. 



Se debaltre, to struggle. 
Rabattre, to abate, to beat 

down. 
Rebattre. to beat again. 



BOIRE, TO DRINK. 

Infinitive Mood. 



Boire, to drink. 



Present. 

Part. act. Buvant^ drinking. 

Part. pass. Bu, ue, drunk. 



274 ^,, 

Indicative BIol?^ '^"'^ ^ 

Present. 
Sing. Bois^ hois, boit, I drink, or am drinking. 
Plur. Buvons, buvez, hoivent, 

Imperfect. 
Sing. Buvois, huvois, buvoit, I did drink, or was drink- 
Plur. Buvions, huviez, buvoient, ing. 

Preterite. 
Sing. Bus, bus, but, I drank, or did drink* 
Plur. Bumes, butes^ hurent, 

Future. 
Sing. Boirai, hoifas, hoira, I shall, or will drink. 
Plur. Boirons, boirez, boiront, 

Conditional. 
Sing. Boirois, boirois, boiroit, I should, &c. drink. 
Plur. Boirions, boiriez, boiroient, 

Imperative Mood, 

Sing. Bois, boive, drink thoii. 

Plur. Buvons, buvez, boiveiit. 

Subjunctive Mood. 
Present. 
Que que que 

Sing. Boive, boives, boive, that I may drink. 
Plur. Buvious, buviez, boivenf. 

Preterite. 
Sing. Busse, busses, but, that I might drink. 
Plur. Bussions, bussiez, bussent, 

N. B. Boire dans quelque chose, is, To drink out of 
something. 



BRAIRE, TO BRAY. 

This verb is seldom used, except in the present 
tense of the infinitive mood, and the third persoR 



275 

singular and plural of the present, future, and con- 
ditional, of the indicative mood. 

Infinitive. Braire, to bray. — Present, indicative. 
// 6?*«?7, Us braient, — Future. // braira, Us brairont, — 
Conditional. 11 brairoU, Us brairoient. — This verb ex- 
presses the discordant cry of an ass. 



BRUIRE, TO ROAR, TO MAKE A GREAT NOISE. 

This verb is used only in the present of the infinitive 
mood, and in the third person of the imperfect, indica- 
tive : il bruyoUy Us bruyoient. Its participle active, 
bruyant, is often but a mere adjective. 



CEINDRE, TO GIRD, 
And its compound, Enceindre^ to inclose, to encom- 
pass, are conjugated like CRAINDRE. 



CIRCONCIRE^ TO CIRCUMCISE, 

is conjugated like COKFIRE, 

but has its participle passive ending in w, ise^ instead of it. 



CONCLURE, TO CONCLUDE. 

Infinitive Mood. 

Present. Conclure, to conclude. 
Part. act. Concluant, concluding. 
Part. pass. Conclu, ue, concluded. 

Indicative Mood# 

Present. 
Sing. Conclits^ conclus, conclut^ I conclude. 
Plur. ConcluonSy concluez^ concluent^ 

Imperfect. 
Sing. Concluoisj concluois, concluoU, I did conclude. 
Plui% Concluions, conduiezi cancluoienfi 



276 



Preterite. 
Sing. Conclus, conclus^ conclut, I did conclude, or 
Plur. Conclumes^ conclutes^ conclwent, concluded. 

Future. 
Sing. Conclurai, concluras, conchira, I shall, or will 
Plur. Conchirons^ conclurex^ concluront^ conclude. 

Conditional. 
Sing. Conchirois, conclurois, concluroit^ I should, &c. 
Plur. Conclurions, conduriez, conclurount^ conclude. 

Imperative Mood. 

Sing. Conchis^ conclae, concl^ide thou. 

Plur. Concluons, concluez, concluent^ 

Subjunctive Mood. 
Present. 
Que que que 

Sing. Conclue^ conchies, conclue, that I may con- 
Plur. Concluions, concluiex, conckient, elude. 

Preterite. 
Sing. Conclusse, conclusses, conclut, that I might con- 
Plur. Conclussions^conclussiez^conclussent^ elude. 



conduire, to conduct, to lead, to carry. 
Infinitive Mood. 



Present. 
Part, act. 
Part. pass. 



Sing. Conrfuis, 
Plur. Conduisons^ 



Sing. Conduisois, 
Plur. Conduisiomi 



Conduire, to conduct. 
Conduisant, conducting. 
Conduit, te, conducted. 

Indicative Mood. 

Present. 
conduis, conduit, I lead, &c. 
conduisez, conduisent, 

Imperfect. 
conduisois, conduisoit, I did lead. 
conduisieZf conduisoimtj 



277 



Sing. 
Plur. 



Sing. 
Plur. 



Sing. 
Plur. 



Conduisis^ 
Conduisimes, 



Conduirai.) 
Conduirons^ 

Conduirois, 
Conduirions^ 



Preterite. 

conduisis, 
eonduisites^ 

Future. 
conduiras^ 
conduirez^ 



eonduisit, I led, 
conduisirent, 



Sing. 
Plur. 



Sing. 
Plur. 



Sing. 
Plur. 



conduira^ I shall, or 

conduiront, will lead. 

Conditional. 

conduirois, conduiroit, I should, 

conduiriez, conduiroieni^ Slc, lead. 

Imperative Mood. 

Conduis, conduise, lead thou. 
Condiiisons, conduisez^ conduisent, 

Subjunctive Mood. 
Present. 

Que que 

Conduise^ conduises^ 

Conduisions, conduisiez, 

Preterite. 
Conduisisse^ conduisisses, conduisit, that I might 
Conduisissions^ conduisissiez, conduisissenf, lead. 

its compound is 
Reconduire^ to lead again. 



que 

conduise^ that I may 

conduiscnt, lead. 



Present. 
Part. act. 
Part, pass 



Sing. Confab 
Plur. Coiifison^^ 



confire^ to preserve. 
Infinitive Mood. 
Confire^ to preserve. 
Confisant, preserving. 
CoTifit^ fe, preserved. 

Indicative Mood. 

Present. 
conjlsy conjit, I preserve, 

co7iJisez, confisenty 

Imperfect. 



Sing. Confisoisy confisois^ 

Plur. Confismis^ confisiez, 
24 



confisoit^ I did pre- 
confsoienty serve. 



278 

Preterite. 
Sing. Confis, conjis^ confii, I preserved. 
Plur. Confimes^ confites, confirent, 

Future. 
Sing. Conjirai, conjiras, coiifira, I shall, or will pre- 
Plur. ConJiroiiSj conjirez, confiront, serve. 

Conditional. 
Sing. Confirois^ confirois^ confiroif, I should, &c. pre- 
Plur. Confirions^ confiriez^ confiroient, serve. 

Imperative Mood. 
Sing. Confis, confise^ preserve thou. 

Plur. Conjisons, confisez, conjisent, 

Subjunctive Mood. 
, Present. 

Que que que 

Sing. Confise, confises^ conjise, that I may preserve* 
Plur. Conjisions, confisiez, confisent, 

Preterite. 
Sing. Conjisse, conjisses, confit^ that I might preserve. 
Plur. ConJissions,confissiez^confissenty 



COKNOITRE^ to know, to be acquainted 
WITH, somebody* 

Infinitive Mood. 
Present. Connoitre, to know. 
Part. act. Connois^ant^ knowing. 
Part. pass. Connu, we, known. 

Indicative Mood. 
Present. 
Sing. Connois, connois, connoit^ I know. 

Plur. Connoissons, connoissez^ connoissent, 

Imperfect. 
Sing. Connoissois, connoissois, connoissoit^ I did know. 
Plur. Connoissionsyconnoissiez^ connoissoient, 



f€ 



27» 

Preterite. 

Sing. Connus^ connus, connut^ I knew. 

Plur. Connumes, connutes, connurent, 

Future. 

Sing. Connoitrai, connoitras^ connoitra, I shall, <t'c. 
Plur. Connoitrons, connoitrez^ connoitront^ know. 

Conditional. 

Sing. Connoitrois, connoi trots ^ connoifroit^ I should, &:c. 
Plur. Connoiirions, connoitriez, connoitroient, know. 

Imperative Mood. 

Sing; Connois^ eonnoisse, know thou. 

Plur. Connoissons^ connoissez, connoissent^ 

Subjunctive Mood. 
Present. 

. Que que que 

Sing. Connoisse, connoisses, connoisse, that I may 
Plur. Connoissions^ connoissiez, connoissent^ know. 

Preterite. 

Sing. Connusse^ connusses^ connw^, that I might know, 
Plur. Connussions^ connussiez^ connussent, 

The compounds of this verb are, 

Miconnoitre^ to take for I Reconnoitre^ to acknowl- 
another. | edge, to know again. 



CONSTRUIRE, TO CONSTRUCT, TO BUILD, 

is conjugated like CONDUIRE. 



CONTRAINDRE^ to constrain to compel, 

TO FORCE, 

is conjugated like CRAINDRE. 



286 



Sing. 
Plur. 



Sing. 
Plur. 



Sing. 
Plur. 



Sing. 
Plur. 



^r^ing. 
Plur. 



(30UDRE^ TO SEW, TO stitch. 
Infinitive Mood. 
Present. Coudre, to sew. 
Part. act. Cousant, sewing. 
Part. pass. Cousu, ue, sewed. 



Couds, 
Cousons^ 

Consols^ 
Consions^ 

Cousis, 
ConsimeSj 

Coudrai, 
Coudrons, 

Coudrois, 
Coudrions^ 



Sing. 

Pinr. Cpusons, 



Indicative Mood. 

Present. 
eouds, coud, I sew, of am sewing. 
cousez, consent, 

Imperfect. 
consols, cousoit, I did sew, or was sew- 
cousiez, cousoient, ing. 

Preterite. 
eousis, cousii, I sewed. 
cousites, consirent, 

Future. 
eoudras, coudra, I shall, or will sew. 
coudrez, coudront, 

Conditional. 
coudrois, coudroit, 1 should, &c. sew. 
coudrieZj coudroient, 

Imperative Mood. 

Couds, const, sew thou. 
cousez^ consent. 



Subjunctive Mood. 

Present. 
que 



I 



^^« que que 

S[ng,*Qouse, couses, const, that I may sew, 
Plur. 'Qousions, cousiez, coustnt, 
Preterite. 
Sing. Cousisst, cousisses, constt, that I might sew. 
Plur. Cousissions,cousissiez,cousissent, 

Its compounds are, 
Becoudre, t® unsew. Recmdrtj to sew again. 



281 



EXERCISES ON THE FOREGOING VERBS AND 

THEIR COMPOUNDS. 

I know several persons in this country who 

plusieurs,^dj, pays^m, 

speak as good French, as if they had been (brought up) 

6/e?i,adv. e7ere.p.p. 

in France. - - - Do you know Mr. A» ? - - - 
Yes, we know him very well ; and, though he is 

Oui, adv. 

rich, I assure you he is not the more charitable for 
it* - - He has been beaten (soundly). - - If you 

comme il faut^ 
knew the question, you would resolve it in two 

question^f, en 

Words. - - I will soon conclude, if you think as 
mot,m, comme, adv. 

your brother does. - - We should beat them, if they 

did not fight in their own country. - - Do not 

j5ropre,adj. 
beat him any more, he acknowledges his fault. - - - 

<<» faute,(. 

We ran for above two hours, but at last 

pendant.]^, phis de^^idv. eri^n,adv. 

your brother overtook him, and brought him back. - - 

ramener,v. 
You would never see him again, if you knew him. - - 
He struggled a long while, but he was soon obliged 

u» ;em5,m. 

to (cry for) mercy. - - This mortification has pulled 
de demander^Y, grdce^i, 
down his pride, I assure you : however, the judge 

cepe?iJanf,adv. 
has acquitted him of the accusation falsely 

fansscment^ adv. 
brought against him. - - Mr. R. told me some time 
w<enfe,p.p. co/i/re,p. 
24* 



ago, that he would build a ship on a new plan. - - - 
What will you drink ? - - I will drink nothing but 

ne que 
water. - - Do not drink so much. - - If your father 

/an^,adv. 
were here, you would not drink (at all). - - - 

du tout. 
Let us fill our glasses, and drink our friend's health. - - 

vei're^ui. sante^f. 

We beat them because our troops were better dis- 
parceque^c. dis- 

ciplined than theirs. - - Come with us, y^e shall 
€ij?/me,p.p. 
see whether she will know you again or not. - - If you 

s?*,c. non 

knew her, I am certain she would please you. - - - 

plaire^v. 
The English drink as much tea as the Venetians 

autani,a.dv, the^xn. V6nitien,m* 

drink coffee. - - - After tea we conducted the ladies 

cafi^tn. 
to the concert. - - - When they had explained to us 
all that had passed, we acknowledged we (were in the 
se passerby. avoir 

wrong). - - - Your brother's coat was torn, 
tort, dechirer^Y, 

but our tailor sewed it up again so skilfully, 

tailleur^m, <^o* adroitement,^2Ldv, 

that his father did not perceive it. - - - Unsew 
that gown. - - I will sew it to-morrow. - - - The 
Jews and the Mahometans circumcise their 
Juif^m, Mahometan^m, 

children a few days after their birth. - - - Why 

too pew, adv. naissance^L 

do not you preserve some fruits this year ? - - - He 

annee^ f. 
would not know you if he saw you now. - - - Did 

a pr6sentj^dy. 



283 
you ask him whether he was acquainted with any of 

52, C. 

these ladies ? - - I know Mr. Y. but I dd not trust 

sefer. v. 
to him. - - You will force your father to punish you 

a 
if you do not behave better. - - - The last 

^e comp07'ter,y, 
time we went to Vauxhall, we drank three bottles of 
Champaigne-wine. - - - The enemy beat us on the 

eighteenth, but we beat them again two days after. 
- - What will you drink, ladies ? - - We shall willing- 

madame^L volon- 

ly drink some wine ; for we have not drunk 

iiers,a.dv. 
any since our departure from France. - - - 

depuis,])» depart^m. 

Drink, said she to me, (out of) that cup, the 

dans coupe^L 

only tokeir which your father has left 

5ew/,adj. marquc^L laisser^v. 

us of his love. - - - Virtue in indigence is like 

nffection^L c?an5,p. commt 

2i traveller whom the wind and rain compel to 

pluie^f, de 

wrap himself up in his cloak. - - I would have 

envelopper^v. ^o^ de, manieau^m. 

preserved some fruits this year, but sugar is too 

^ro/9,adv. 
dear. - - Thence we concluded you could not come 

De Z«5adv. 
to-day. - - I know nobody in this neighborhood. - - I 

voisinagc^m, 
knew your sister again as soon as I saw her. - - Though 

Quand^c, 
you should take three dozen of them, I could 

douzaine^f. 



284 



not abate a farthing. - - The wind was so great that 

liard^m. vent^m, 

it has thrown down one or two trees in our garden* 



GRAIJsfDRE, TO fear, to be afraid. 
Infinitive Mood. 

Present. Craindre, to fear. 
Part. act. Craignant^ fearing. 
Part. pass. Craint^ ainie, feared. 

Indicative Mood. 

Present. 

Sing. Crains, crains, craint, I fear, or am afraid. 

Plur. Craignons^ craignez^ cruignent^ 

Imperfect. 

Sing. Craignois, craignois^ craignoit^ I did fear, or 
Plur. Craignions^ craigniez, craignoierit, was afraid. 

Preterite. 

Sing. Craignis^ craignis, craignit^ 1 feared. 
Plur. Craignimes^ craignites, craignirent^ 

Future. 

Sing. Craindrai^ craindras, craindra, I shall, or will 
Plur. Craindrons^ craindrez^ craindront^ fear. 

Conditional. 

Sing. Craindroisj cramdrois, craindroif, I should, ^c, 
Plur. Crairidrionsj craindriez^ craindroimt, fear. 

Imperative Mood. 

Sing. Crains^ craigne^ fear thou. 

Plur. Craignonsy craignez^ craignent^ 



285 i 

Subjunctive Mood. 

Present. 
Qut que qut 

Sing. Craigne^ craignes^ craigne, that I may fear. 
Plur. Craignions^ craigniez, craignent^ 

Preterite. 
Sing. Craignisse^ craignisses, crm^m^, that I might fear. 
Plur. Craignissions, craignissiez^ craignissent^ 



CROIRE, TO BELiEvt:. 
Infinitive Mood. 

Present. Croire^ to believe. 
Part. act. Croyant, believing. 
Part. pass. Cru, tie, believed. 

Indicative Mood. 

Present. 
Sing. Crois, crois, croit^ I believe. 
Plur. Croyons^ croyez^ croient. 

Imperfect. 
Sing. Croyois^ croyois, croyoii^ I did believe. 
Plur. Croyions, croyiez^ croyoient^ 

Preterite. 
Sing. Crus, crus, crut, I believed. 
Plur. Crumes, crutes^ crureni, 

Future. 
Sing. Croirai, croiras^ croira^ I shall, or will believe, 
Plur. Croirons^ croirez^ croiront^ 

Conditional. 
Sing. Croiroisj croirois^ croiroit^ I should, <^c. believC. 
Plur. Croirions, croiruz, croiroimt^ 



^ 286 

Imperative Mood, 

Sing. Crois, croie, believe tbou. 

Plur. Croyons^ croyez^ croient, 

Subjunctive Mood. 

Present. 
Que que que 

Sing. Croie, croies, croie, that I may believe. 
Plur. Croyionsj croyiez, croient^ 

Preterite. 
Sing. Criisse, crusses, crut, that I might believe. 
Plur. Crussions, crussiez^ crussent, 



CROITRE, TO GROW, 
And its compounds. 



Recroitre^ to grow again, 



Accroitre, to accrue, 
Decroitre, to decrease, to 
grow less, 

are conjugated like CONNOITRE. 



CUJRE^ TO BAKE, TO BOIL, often EngUshed by 

TO DO, 

And its compound Recuire, to boil again ; 

DEDUIRE^ TO DEDUCT, TO ABATE, 

and DETRUIRE, to destroy ; 
are conjugated like CON DU IRE. 



DIRE, TO SAY, to tell. 

Infinitive Mood. 

Present. Dire, to saj. 
Part. act. Disant, saying. 
Part. pass. Dit^ te, said. 



2«7 

Indicative Mood. 
Present. 



Sing. Dis^ 
Plur. Disons, 


c?w, fZiV, I saj, or am saying. 
dites^* disent, 


Sing. Disois, 
Plur. Disions, 


Imperfect. 
disois, disoit^ I did say, or was saying 

disiez^ disoient, 




Preterite. 


Sing. Disj 
Plur. Dimes, 


Jj>, <??V. I did say, or said. 

Jf/e5, dirent, 




Future. 


Sing. DiVai, 
Plur. Dirons, 


diras^ dira^ I shall, or will say. 

fiirez, diront, 




Conditional. 


Sing. Dirois, 
Plur. Dirions 


dirms, diroit, I should, ire, say. 
, diritz, diroient, 




Imperative Mood. 


Sing. 

Plur. Disons, 


Dis, dise, say thou. 
dites* disent, 




Subjunctive Mood. 




Present. 


Que 
Sing. Dwe, 


que que 

dises^ dise, that I may say. 



Plur. Disions, disiez, disent, 

Preterite. 
Sing. Disse, disses, dit, that I might say. 
Plur. Dissions^dissiez, dissent^ 

The compounds of this verb are, 



Contredire, to contradict, 
Se didire, to unsay, to re- 
tract, to recant. 



Interdire^ to interdict, td 

forbid. 
Predire, to foretell. 



* AU the above compound? (Redirt excepted, which is conjugated 
like its primitive) make isez instead of iten ; and Mavdire doubles its 
s through the whole verb ^ ex, JS'mis mav.dissons^ voxls mauduses, Us 
tnatidisscnt, &c. 



28S 



Midire de, to slander, to 

speak ill. 
Maudire^ to curse. 



Redircy to say, or tell, 
again. 



ECLORRE, TO HATCH, TO OPEN, TO COME 
TO LIFE. 

This verb is seldom used but in the infinitive mood, 
present tense, and the third persons of the following 
tenses* 

Infinitive Mood. 

Present. Eclorre, to open, to hatch, to come to life. 
Fart. pass. Ecios, ose^ 

Indicative Mood. 



Sing. 
Plur. 


// eclot. 
lis eclosent. 




Future. 


Sing. 
Plur. 


// iclorra, 
lis idorronL 




Conditional. 


Sing. 
Plur. 


II eclorroit, 
lis idorroient. 


Subjunctive Mood. 




Present. 


Sing. 


QuHl edose. 



Plur. QuHls idosenU 

It is only /Used when speaking of oviparous animals 
or of flowers. 

The primitive of the above verb is Clorre^ to shut, 
to surround, and another compound, Endorre, to shut^ 
to surround, with walls, hedges, or ditches. 



289 



ECRIRE, TO WRITE. 

Infinitive Mood. 

Present. Ecrire, to write. 
Part. act. Ecrivant, writing. 
Part. pass. Ecrit^ ite, written. 

Indicative Mood. 



Sing. Ecris^ 

Plur. Ecrivons, 

Sing. Ecrivois^ 

Plur. Ecrivions, 

Sing. Ecrivis^ 

Plur. Ecrivimes^ 

Sing. Ecrirai, 

Plur. Ecrironsy 

Sing. Ecriroisy 

Plur. Ecririonsy 



Sing. 

Phir. Ecrivonsy 



ecriSy 
ecrivez, 



Present. 

ecrity I write, or am writing. 



tcrnenL 



Imperfect. 



ecrivoity I did write, or was 
WTiting. 



wrote, or did 
write. 



ecnvGiSy 

ecriviezy ecnvoierity 

Preterite. 
ecrivisy ecrivity I 
ecrivitesy ecrivirenty 

Future, 

icrirasy dcrira, I shall, or will write. 
ccrireZy ecriroiity 

Conditional. 
ccriroisy ecriroity I should, &c. write* 
ecriiieZy ecriroientf 

Imperative Mood» 

Ecrisy ecrivey write thou, 
ecrivez. ecrivent* 



Subjunctive Mood, 
Present. 



Sing. 
Plur. 



Sing. 
Plur. 



Que 

Ecrive. 



que 

ecrives. 



que 

ecrivey that I may write. 
EcrivionSy dcrivieZy ccriventy 

Preterite. 

EcrivissCy ecrivissesy ecrivity that I might write. 
EcrivissionSy ecrivissiezy ecrivtssenty 

25 



290 



The compounds of this verb are, 



JDccrire, to describe. 
Inscrire, to inscribe. 
Prescrire^ to prescribe. 



Proscrire, to proscribe, to 

outlaw, to banish. 
Souscrire^ to subscribe. 
Transcrire^ to transcribe. 



EKDUIRE, TO DO OVER. 
is conjugated like CONDUIRE. 



ETEINDRE, to put out, 
is conjugated like CRAINDRE. 



EXCLURE, TO EXCLUDE, 

is conjugated like CONCLURE. 
Its participle passive is exclus. 



faire^ to make, to do. 

Infinitive Mood. 

Present. Faire^ to make. 
Part. act. Faisant, making. 
Part. pass. Fait^ te, made* 

Indicative Mood. 

Present. 
Sing. Fais, fais, fait, I make, or am making. 
Plur. Faisons, faiies, fonf, 

Imperfect. 
Sing. Faisois, faisois, faisoit, I did make, or was mak- 
Pliir. Faisionsjfaisiez, faisoienty ing. 

Preterite. 
Sing. Fis, fs, fit, I made, or did make. 
Plur. Fimes, fites, firent, 



291 



Future. 

Sing. Ferai, feras^ fira, I shall, or will make. 
Plur. FeronSy ferez^ feront^ 

Conditional. 

Sing. Fcrois, ferois^ feroit^ I should, cj^c. make. 
Plur. Ferions^ feriez^ feroient, 

Imperative Mood. 

Sing. Fais^ fasse, make thou. 

Plur. Faisons^ faites, fassent, 

Subjunctive Mood. 

Present. 

Que que que 

Sing. Fasse^ fasses, fasse, that I maj make. 
Plur. Fassions, fassiez^ f assent^ 

Preterite* 

Sing. Fisses^ fsses^ fit^ that I might make. 
Plur. Fissions, Jissiez, Jissent, 

The compounds of this verb are, 



Contrefaire, to counterfeit, 
to mimic. 

Defaire, to undo, to de- 
feat. 

Se defaire, to get rid of, to 
part with. 



Refaire^ to do, or make 

up again. 
Redtfaire, to undo again. 
Satisfaire, to satisfy. 
Surfaire, to exact, to ask 

too much. 



FEIJ^DRE, TO FEIGN, TO DISSEMBLE, TO 
PRETEND, 

IS conjugated like CRAmDRE. 



292 

FRIRE, TO FRY. 

This verb is more elegantly used in its present infini^ 
tive with the verb faire conjugated : ex. 

Faites frire cepoisson, Fry that fish. 

Its participle passive is frit, ite, fried. 



INDUIRE, TO INDUCE, 
IMSTRUIRE, TO INSTRUCT, 

and INTRODUIRE, to introduce^ 
are conjugated like CONDUIRE. 



JOINDRE, TO JOIN, 

and its compound, Enjoindre, to enjoin, 

are conjugated like CRAINDRE, 

lire, to read. 

Infinitive Mood. 

Present. Lire, to read. 
Part. act. Lisant, reading. 
Part. pass. Lii, ue, read. 

Indicative Mood. 

Present. 

Sing. Lis, lis, lit, I read, or am reading. 

Plur. Lisons, lisez, liseiit. 

Imperfect. 

Sing. Lisois, lisois, /i>oi7, I did read, or was reading. 
Plur. Lisions, lisiez, lisoient, 



295 

Preterite. 

Sing. Lusy lus, lut, I did read, or read. 
Plur. Lumes^ lutes ^ lurent^ 

Future. 

Sing. Lirai, liras^ lira, I shall, or will read. 
Plur. Lirons, lirez, liront, 

Conditional. 

Sing. Lirois, lirois, liroit, I should, would, <^c, read, 
Plur. Lirions, liriez, liroientj 

Imperative Mood. 

Sing. Lis, Use, read thou. 

Plur. Lisons, lisez, lisent, 

Subjunctive Mood. 

Present. 

Que que que 

Sing. Use, Uses, Use, that I may read. 
Plur. Lisions, lisiez, liseni, 

Preterite. 

Sing. Lusse, lusses, lut, that I might read. * 

Plur. lAissions, lussiez, lussent, 

Its compounds are, 

Elire, to elect. Relire, to read again. 



LUIRE, TO SHINE, 

and its compound Reluire, to glitter, 

are conjugated like CONDJJIRE : 

but take no t at the end of their participle passive 

ex» Lui, shined. 
25* 



^94 

METTRE* TO PUT. 

Infinitive Mood. 

Present. Mettre^ to put. 
Part. act. Mettant, putting. 
Part. pass. Mis^ mise, put. 

Indicative Mood. 

Present. 
Sing. Mets^ mets, met^ I put, or am putting. 
Plur. Mettons^ meitez, mettent, 

Imperfect. 
Sing. Mettoisj meitois, mettoit, I did put, or was put- 
Plur. Mettions, mettiez, meitoient^ ting. 

Preterite. 
Sing. Mis^ mis^ mit, I did put, or put. 

Plur. Mimes^ mites, mirent, 

Future. 
Sing. 3Iettrai, meiiras, mettra, I shall, or will put. 
Plur. Mettrons, mettrez, mettront, 

Conditional. 
Sing. Mettrois, meiirois, ?nettroit, I should, would, <^*c. 
Plur. Meitrions, mettriez, mettroient, put. 

Imperative Mood. 

Sing. Mets, mette, put thou. 

Plur. Mettons, mettez, rnetient, 



* Mettre^ when conjugated as a reflective verb, expresses the be- 
ginning or continuation of an action or application ; it is then con- 
stantly followed by the participle d and an infinitive mood. It is ren- 
dered, in English, by the verb to begin : ex. 

Toutes les fois qv?il la voit, il se Every time he sees her, he begins 

met d rire, laughing. 

II s'est mis tout de bon d etudier. He has begun to study jn earnest. 



295 



Que 
Sing. Mette^ 
Plur. Mettions^ 



Sing. Misse^ 
Plur. Missions^ 



Subjunctive Mood. 

Present. 
que que 

mettes, mette^ that I may put. 
mettiez^ mettent, 
Preterite. 

mit, that I might put. 



misses, 
missiez. 



mis sent, 



The compounds of this verb are, 



Mmetire, to admit. 

Commettre, to commit. 

Conipromettre, to compro- 
mise. 

Demettre, to turn out, to 
remove. 

Se demettre de, to resign. 

Omettre, to omit. 



Permettre, to permit. 

Promettre, to promise.* 

Remettre, to deUver up, 
to put back again, to 
recollect, to put off, to 
defer. 

Soumettre, to submit. 

Transmettre^ to transmit. 



Present. 
Part. act. 
Part, pass 



MOUDRE, TO GRIND. 

Infinitive Mood. 
Moudre, to grind. 
Moulant, grinding. 
Moulu, ue, ground. 

Indicative Mood. 
Present. 
mout, I grind, or am grinding. 



Sing. Mous, mous, 
Plur. Moulons, moulez, moulcnt, 
Imperfect. 
Sing. Moulois, moulois, mouloif, I did grind, or was 
Plur. Moulions, mouliez, mouloient, grinding. 

* The participle of this verb (promising), Avhen used adiectively 
find expressing the mental qualities of somebody, is rendered in 
French by qui promet^ or promettoit beaucoup, or dont il y a, or avoit 
beaiicoup a esp^rer : ex. 
Major A. e'toit un ojkier qui pro- Major A. was a very prommVH?- 

Buettoit beaucoup, ou dont il y officer, 

avoit beaucoup i. esp^rer. 



296 

Preterite. 
Sing. Moulus, moulus, moulut, I ground, or did 
Plur. Moulumes^ moulutes, moulureni, grind. 

Future. 
Sing. Moudrai, moudras, moudra, I shall, or will grind. 
Plur. Moudrons^ moudrez, moudront, 

Conditional. 
Sing. Moudroisj moudrois^ moudroit, I should, would, 
Plur. Moudrions, moudriez, moudroienf, ^c* grind. 

Imperative Mood. 

Sing. Moiis^ moule, grind thou. 

Plur. Moulons^ moulez, moulent, 

Subjunctive Mood. 
Present. 

Que que que 

Sing. Moule^ moules, moule, that I niaj grind. 
Plur. Moulions, mouliez, moulent, 

Preterite. 
Sing. Moulusse^ moulusses^ 7noulut, that I naight grind. 
Plur. Moulussions, moulussiez^moulussent, 

The compounds of this verh are, 
Emoudre, to whet. Remoudre, to grind again. 



EXERCISES ON THE FOREGOING VERBS AND 

THEIR COMPOUNDS. 

Do not fear to tell her what you think of it. - - I 
de lui penser^v. 

will speak to her to oblige you, but I know she 

^OMr,p. 
does not fear me. - - Why do you not believe me ? * ^ 



207 

They (are afraid) of being exposed to some dangers. 

e/re,v. 
- - We would not believe him, though he should tell 

quand^c, 
the truth. Why would you not ? - - You should not 

verite^L devoir 

speak so imprudently before I know not whom, 

devant^ip, 
who slanders every body. - - These flowers would 

feur.L 
grow much better if you watered them oftener. - - - 

arroser^y. 
Put out the candle, and do not pretend to sleep. 

de 
" - Were I in town, I would tell them all that 

ew,p. 
I know (about it). - - Say nothing to her, believe 

€71, pro. we rien 

me. - - I will tell it to you to-morrow. - - I esteem 

estimer^v, 
your daughter much, because she told the sin- 
cerely that she would do neither. - - - They who 

say all they know, will readily say what they 

volontiers^Q.dv. 
do not kiK)w. - - Tell the truth with modesty : they 

who do not love it, will always respect and fear it. - - 

If I see your father, shall I tell him you are afraid of 

not succeeding ? - - - Do you think me capable of 

forgetting my friends so soon ? No, I do not. - - You 
oublie7',Y, 

always contradict me when I speak. - - - It is pru- 
dent and humane not to speak ill of any body ; 



298 

but it is a meanness to speak ill of your bene- 
ce,pro. bassesse^L bien- 

factors. - - We often do good to those who 

faiteur^m, souvent^^dv, bien^m. 

are not worthy of it, and harm to those who 

ma/,m. 
do not deserve it. - - - Will you tell me, after 

tneriter^Y, 
this, that I am not your friend ? - - I hope she 

que^ c. 
will not tell them what happened to me yester- 
day. - - I was telling it yesterday to several friends of 
mine, and every body began crying. - - I do not 

like Miss D. because she speaks ill of every body, 
parceque^c, 

- - Her father has transmitted her all his fortune, but 

lui 
not his virtues. - - Sylla proscribed above four 

plus Je,adv. 
thousand Roman citizens. - - Does Mr. R. write to 

citoyen^m, 
you (now and then) from Paris ? - - - Do you 

de terns en terns, ady. 
know his direction ? - - Would you not write to him 

adresse^L 
if you knew it ? - - We were writing while 

pendant que ^c» 
they slept. - - If your brother comes here, detain him, 

and tell him that I have something to show him. 

a f aire voir, 

- - The last time they wrote to him, they desired 

prier,v* 
him to send them the invoice of the goods, and he 

de leur facture^L 

has still omitted it in his letter. - - What are you 

encore^ adv. 



299 

doing now ? - - - I am making a cap for your sis- 

maintenant,a.dv, 
ter. - - Do not do that, I will do it myself. - - I would 

do it with all my heart if I could. - - What would 

de 
you have done, if you had been in my place? - - 

51, c. a, p. 

Wliy do you not fry that fish ? - - The first time 

foisj f, 
you come to see me, I will show you some 

(by the fut.) 
flowers in my garden which will surprise you. - - 

- - Silk-worms generally hatch at the end of the 

Soie^L ver,m» 

spring. These rose-trees grow perceptibly, 

printems^m.* r osier, m. a vue c^'ceiZ, adv. 

and those tulips would soon open, if it were a 

faisoit^v. 
little warmer. - - Though they should deduct ten 

chaud,a.dy Quand^c, 
per cent, they would get still enough. 

pour gagner^Y, encore, adv. 

- - I never buy (any thing) at Mr. P***'s ; for he 

acheter^v, rien car^c. 

always asks too much for his goods. - - - I will 

de marchandise.f, 

undo my gown to-morrow, and do it up again imme- 

5M?*- Me- 
diately. - - - The first time you mimic any 
c/iamp,adv. (by the fut.) 
one, I will punish you severely. - - I would introduce 

your sister to Mrs. F. if I knew her. - - She would 

consent to that, if you would promise her to come 

lui de 
here. - - - They were playing while you instructed 

them, - - You truly join what is useful to what ii 

vraiment,:idv. 



300 

agreeable. - - Did not our soldiers join dexterity 

adresse^f, 
to valor ? - - If you do not take ' great care of 

prendre^v* 
your flowers, the frost will destroy them. - - Mr. 

gelee^f, 
S. says he will get rid of his horse (at the) begin- 

au commence' 
ning of next month. - - You would put out the fire, if, 
ment^m. 
&c. - - Undo that, make it up again before dinner, 

avant,p, 
and never defer until to-morrow what you can do to- 

a,p. 

day. - - Your daughter joins to the love of study the 

desire of surpassing- her companions. - - - Always 

compagne^f, 
virtuous, still handsome, she makes herself 

toujours,2.dv. 
more enemies than friends ; but a day will come, 

when every body will do her the justice she 

^Me,c. rendre^w, 

deserves. - - She reads the History of England every 

day from three o'clock till five. - - I will read 

heure^f, jusqu'a^^, 
your letter as soon as I am dressed. - - -The 

(by the fut.) habille^p,^, 
inhabitants of W*** have elected Mr. V. W. for 

their representative ia parliament. - - I was reading 

n;)r6se7iiu,nt.m» 
Marmontel's 7 ales when you came in. - - Mr. 

Conte^m, entrer^v, 

R. wrote to me some time ago, that when he 

was in London, the Earl of E*** told him 

Comte,m. 
^e should soon see a great, change in the 

changement^m* 



301 

ministry. - - - He often writes to me, and always con- 

7ninistere,m» 

eludes his letters thus : (Be so kind as to) send me 

Avoir la bontc de ' 
some news, whatever it may be. - - Put these hooks in 

their places again. - - I believe he did it through 

par^Tp. 
spite. - - Shall I put another trimming to your 
depit^m, garniture^f. 

gown ? - - I read last year a very good book, but I 

cannot remember the author's name. - - What 

grammar do you read ? - - Whatever merit a master 

has, he cannot succeed in teaching young people 

a, p. 
if he do not join practice to theory. - - I would put 

all your china in that closet if I had 

porcdaine^L cahirk^t^m* 

the key of it. - - You could not do it in ten days, if 

en 
I did not help you. - - We could not permit him 

aider, v. 
to go out, though they would. - - Why do not you 
de quand^c, 

abstain from wine, since it hurts yon ? - - 

puisque^c, faire mal^v. 

He promised to pay me the tenth of this month, 

but he has now put me oflf.to the third of Decern- 

ber. - - He submitted to it with the greatest pa- 

se soumettre 
tience. - - You promise enough, but you seldom 

rcremr/i/, adv. 
keep your word. - - Mr. D. is a very promising 
tenir^v» 

young man. - - It is he who told me, that, be- 
C6,pro. 
26 



302 
fore the invention of water and wind-mills the an- 
cients used to grind their corn in mor- 
avoir coutume^Y* - grain^m, mor- 
tars. - - Will thej not admit Mr. Z. in their society ? - - 
iier^ m. 

Ko, they told me that they would not. - - The Eng- 
lish fleets have performed actions worthy to he 

faire^Y, 
transmitted to posterity. - - Your brother promises 

me every day to amend, but, &c. - - Were I 

de se corriger^Y* 
their master, I would not permit them to go out to 

de 
day. - - I was writing to you when your servant 

brought me your letter. 



41 



naitre^ to be born, to rise. 

Infinitive Mood« 

Present. Xaitre, to be born. 

Part, act.- Naissant^ being born, rising. 

Part. pass. Xe, ee, been born. 

Indicative Mood. 

Present. 
Sing. Nais^ nais^ nait^ I am born. 
Plur. Kaissons^ naissez<, naissent^ 

Imperfect. 
Sing. Naissois^ naissois, naissoit^ I was born* 
Plur. Naissions^ naissiez^ naissoient^ 

Preterite. 
Sing. Naqvuis^ naquis, naquit, I was born. 
Plur. JS'itqiiwus^naquitee, naquirenU 



^^ 



303 



Future. 



Sing. J\*aitrai^ naitras, naitra^ I shall, or will be born. 
Plur. Naitrons^ naitrez, naitront, 

Conditional. 

Sing. Kaitrois^ naiirois, naitroit^ I should, S/c. be born. 
Plur. Naitrions^ naitriez^ naitroient^ 

Imperative Mood. 

Sing. JYflw, naisse, be thou born-. 

Plur. J^aissGnSy naissez, naissent^ 

Subjunctive Mood. 
Present. 

Que que que 

Sing. J^aisse^ naisses, naisse, that I may be borjp^ 
Plur. Naissions^ naissiez^ naissent, 

Preterite. 

Sing. J^aquisse, naquisses^ na^-wfi, that I mightbeboVn. 
Plur. J^aquissions^ naquissiez^ naquissent, 

The compound of this verb is, 
Renaitre^ to be born again, to revive. 



MUIRE, TO HURT, 

is conjugated like CONDUIRE^ but makes, in its 
participle passive, nui. 



^ OINDRE^ TO ANOINT. 

^ ., This verb is seldom used, except in speaking of sacred 
^ceremonies wherein oil is made use of. It is conius^ated 
MkeCRAmDRE. 



304 

PAITRE, TO PEED, TO GRAZE, 

FAROITRE^ TO appear, to seem, 
and its compounds, 
Comparoiire, to appear, to I Disparoitre^ to disappear, 
make one's evidence, | 

are conjugated like COJ^NOITRE. 



PEIXDRE, to paint, to draw, 

PLAINDRE, to pity, 

and Se, Plaindre, to complain, 

are conjugated like CRAINDRE. 



PLAIRE, TO please. 

Infinitive Mood. 

Present. Plaire^ to please. 
Part. act. Plaisant^ pleasing. 
Part pass. P/w, pleased. 

Indicative Mood. 

Present. 
Sing. Plais, plais^ plait, I please. 
Plur. Plaisons, plaisez, plaisent, 

Iipperfect. 
Sing. Plaisois, plaisois, plaisoit, I did please, or was 
Plar. Plaisions, plaisiez, plaisoient^ pleasing. 

-'' Preterite. 

Sing. Plus, plus, plut, I pleased, or did please. 
Piur. Planus, plutes, plurent. 

Future. 
Sing. Plairai, plairas, plaira, I shall, or will please. 
Plur. Plairons, plairez, plairont, 



^05 

ConditionaL 
Sing. Plairois, plairois, plairoif, I should, would, ^"C, 
Plur. Plairions^ plairiez^ plairoienf, please. 

Imperative Mood. 

Sing. Pirns, plaise, please thou. 

Plur. Plaisons, plaisez, plaisent, 

Subjunctive Mood. 

Present. 
Que, que que 

Sing. Plaise, plalses, plaise, that I may please. 
Plur. Plaisions, plaisiez, plaisent. 
Preterite. 
Sing. Plusse, plusses, pint, that I might please, 
Plur. Plussions, plus&iez^ plus sent ^ 

The compounds of this verh are, 
Complaire^ to humour. Dcplaire, to displease. 



PREj\DRE, to take. 
Infinitive Mood* 

Present. Prendre, to take. 
Part. act. Prenant, taking. 
Part. pass. Pm, ise, taken. 

Indicative Mood. 

Present. 
Sing. P rends, prends, prend, I take, or am taking. 
Plur. Prenons, prenez, prennent, 

Imperfect. 
Sing. Prenois^ prenois, prenoit, I did take, or was tak- 
Plur. Prenions^ preniez, prenoient, ing* 

Preterite. 
Sing. Pris, pris, prit, I took, or did take. 

Plur. Primes^ prites^ prirent, 
26* 



Future* 
Sing. Prendmi, prendrasj ^rencZra, I shall, or will take. 
Plur. Prendrons^ prendrez^ prendront^ 

Conditional. 
Sing. Prendrois, prendrois^ prendroit, I should, would, 
Plur. Prendrions, prendriez^ prendroienf, ^c, take* 



Sing. 

Plur. Prenons, 



Imperative Mood. 

Prends, prenne, take thou^ 
prenez^ prennentf 

Subjunctive Mood. 
Present. 



Que, que que 

Sing. Prenne^ prennes, prenne^ that I may take. 
Plur. Prenions, preniez, prennent^ 

Preterite. 
Sing. Prisse, prisses, prit, that I might take. 
Plur. Prissions, prissiez^ prissent, 

The compounds of this verb are, 

Entreprendre, to under- 
take. 

Meprendre, to mistake, to 
be deceived. 

Reprendre^ to take agai^y, 
to chide, to rebuke. 

Surprendre, to surprise. 



Apprtndre^ to learn. 

. ■ des nouvelks^ 

to hear of. 

Comprendre, to apprehend, 
to understand, to in- 
clude. 

Desapprendre, to unlearn. 



PRODUIRE, TO PRODUCE, 
REDUIRE^ TO ^REDUCE, TO BRING TO. 

are conjugated hke CONDUIRE. 



RESTRAINDRE, to restrain^ 
is conjugated like CRJiJNBRlB. 



307 
eire, to laugh. 

Infinitive Mood. 

Present, Rire, to laugh. 
Part. act. Riant, laughing. 
Part. pass. Ri, laughed. 

Indicative Mood. 

Present. 
Sing, Ris, ris^ rif, I laugh, or am laughing. 
Plur. Rions^ riez, rientj 

Imperfect. 
Sing. Riois,, riois^ rioit, I laughed, or was laughing. 
Plur, Riions, riiez^ rioient. 

Preterite. 
Sing. Ris, vis, rit, I laughed, or did laugh'. 
Plur, Rimes, rites, rirent^ 

Future. 
Sing. Rirai, riras, rira, I shall, or will laugh. 
Plur. Rirons, rirez, riront, 

Conditional. 
Sing. Rirois, rnois, riroit, I should, could, <$''C. laugh. 
Plur. Ririons, ririez, riroient, 

Imperative Mood. 



Sing. 
Plur. 


Rions, 


Ris, rie, laugh thou. 
riez, rient^ 

Subjunctive Mood. 
Present. 


Sing. 


Que 
Rie, 


que ■ que 

ries, rie, that I may laugh. 



Plur. .Rnon^, riiez, rienty 



308 



Preterite. 
Sing. Risse, risses, rit^ that I might laugh* 
Plur. Rissions, rissiez, rissent, 

The compound of this verb is, 

Sourire^ to smile. 



SEDUIRE, TO SEDUCE, 
is conjugated hke CONDUIRE. 



SUFFIRE, TO SUFFICE, TO BE SUFFICIENT, 

is conjugated like CONFIRE : but its participle 
passive is svffi. 



SUIVRE, TO FOLLOW. 

Infinitive Mood. 

Present. Suivre, to follow. 
Part. act. Suivant^ following. 
Part. pass. Suivi, ie, followed. 

Indicative Mood. 
Present. 
Sing. Suis^ suis, suit, I follow, or am following. 
Plur. Suivons, suivez, suivent, 

Imperfect. 
Sing. Suivois, suivois, suivoit, I did follow, or was 
Plur. Suivions, suiviez, suivoient, following. 

Preterite. 
Sing. Suivis, suivis, suivit, I followed, or did follow. 
Plur.. Suivimes, suiviies, suivirent, 

Future. 
Sing. Suivrai, suivras, suivra, I shall, or will follow. 
Plur. Suivrons^ suivrez, suivronU 



;i^ 



309 



*t^ 



Conditional. 
Sing. Suivrois^ suivrois, suivroit^ I should, Sfc» follow. 
Plur. Suivrions^ suivriez^ suivroient^ 

Imperative Mood. 

Sing. Suis^ suivcj follow thoiu 

Plur. Suivons^ suivez, suivent^ 

Subjunctive Mood. 

Present. 
Que que que 

Sing. Siiive, suives, suive, that I may follow. 
Plur. Suiviom, suiviez, suivenf^ 

Preterite. 
Sing. Suivisse^ suivisses, suivit^ that I might follow. 
Plur. Suivissions, suivissiez, suivissent, 

The compounds of this verb are, 
S^Ensuivre, to follow from. Poursuivre^ to pursue. 



Se TAIRE^ TO hold one's tongue, 
is conjugated like PLAIRE, 



TEJKDRE, to die, 
is conjugated like CRAIN3RE, 



TRADUIRE^ to translate, 
is conjugated like CONDUIRE. 



TRAIRE, TO MILK. 
Infinitive Mood. 

Present. Traire, to milk. 
Part. act. Trayant^ milking. 
Part. pass. Trait^ aite^ milked. 



31(5 
Indicative Mood. 

Present. 

Sing. Trais^ trais^ trait^ I milk, or am milking. 
Plur. Trayons, trayez^ traient, 

Imperfect. 

Sing. Trayois, trayois^ trayoit, I did milk, or was 
Plur. Trayions, trayiez, trayoient, milking. 

Preterite is wanting. 

Future. 

Sing. Trairai^ trairas, traira, I shall, or will milk, 
Plur. Trairons^ trairez, trairont, 

Conditional. 

Sing. Trairois, trairois, trairoit^ I should, ^c» tnilk. 
Plur. Trairions, trairiez, trairoieni, 

Imperative Mood. 

Sing. Trais, traie^ milk thou. 

Plur. Trayons, trayez, traient, 

Subjunctive Mood. 

Present. 

Que que que 

Sing. Traie, traies, traie^ that I may milk. 
Plur. Trayions, trayiez^ traient, 

Preterite is wanting. 
The compounds of this verb are. 



Ahstraire, to abstract. 
Distraire^ to distract. 
Extrmre, to extract* 



Rentraire, to fine draw 
Soustraire, to subtract. 



311 

VAINCRE^ TO VANQUISH, TO CONQUER. 

Infinitive Mood. 

Present. Vaincre, to conquer. 
Part. act. Vainquant^ conquering. 
Part. pass. Vaincu^ we, conquered. 

Indicative Mood. 

Present. 
Sing. Vaincs, vaincs, vainc,* I conquer. 
Plur. Vuinquons, vainquez^ vainquent, 

Imperfect. 
Sing. Vainquois, vainquois^ vainquoit^ I did conquer. 
Plur. Vainquions^vainquiez^ vainquoient^ 

Preterite. 
Sing. Vainquis, vainquis^ vainquit, I conquered. • 
Plur. Vainquimes^vainquiteSjVainquirentj . .^_... 

Future. ^HJV 

Sing. Vaincrai, vaincras^ vaincra^ I shall, or will con- 
Plur. Vaincronty vaincrez^ vaincront, . quer. 

Conditional. 
Sing. Vaincrois^ vaincrois, vaincroit^ I should, <^c. con- 
Plur. Vaincrions, vaincriez^ vaincroient^ quer. 

Imperative Mood. 

Sing. Vaincs, vainque^ conquer thou. 

Plur. VainquonSj vainquez, vainquent, 

Subjunctive Mood. 
Present. 

Que que que 

Sing. Vainque, vainques^ vainque, that I may conquer. 
Plur. VamquionSyVainquiez^ vainquent^ 

* The singular is very little used. 



312 

Preterite. 
Sing. Vainquisse, vainquisses^ vainquit, that I might 
Plur. Vainquissions vainquissiez^ vainquissent^ conquer. 

The compound of this verb is, 

Convaincre^ to convince. 



VIVRE, TO LIVE, 

Infinitive Mood. 



Present. Vivre, to Uve. 
Part. act. Vivant^ living. 
Part. pass. Vecu, lived. 

Indicative Mood. 

Present. 
Sing. Vis^ vis^ vit^ I live, or am living. 

Plur. Vivons^ vivez^ viveni, 

Imperfect. 
Sing. Vivois^ vivois, vivoit, I did live, or was living. 
Plur. Vivions^ viviez^ vivoient^ 

Preterite. 
Sing. V6cus, vicus^ vecut^ 1 lived, or did live. 
Plur. V6cumes, vecutes, vecureni^ 

Future. 
Sing. Vivrai, vivras, vivra, I shall, or will live. 
Plur. Vivrons^ vivrez^ vivrontj 

Conditional. 
Sing. Vivrois^ vivrois^ vivroit, I should, would, (J-c. live. 
Plur. VinrionSy vivriez, vivroient, 

Imperative Mood. 

Sing. Vis, vive^ live thou. 

Plur. Vivons, vivez, vivent^ 



313 

Subjunctive Mood. 
Present. 
Que que que 

Sing. Vive^ vives^ vive^ that I may live.. 

Plur. Vivions^ viviez^ vivent^ 

Preterite. 
Sing. Vecusse^ veeusses^ vecut^ that I might live. 
Plur. VecussionSj vecussiez^ vecussent^ 

The compounds of this verb are, 

.Revivre, to revive. Survivre, to outlive. 



EXERCISES ON THE FOREGOING VERBS 
AND THEIR COMPOUNDS. 

My brother was born in Paris, on the eighth of Feb- 
d '<y> Fe- 

ruary, one thousand seven hundred and eighty-one. - - 
Trier, m. 
The same men who seem not to fear death when 

lor s que, adv. 
they are in good health, often dread it when 

redouter.v, 
they are sick. - - What does your sister complain of ? 

- - The swallows generally disappear towards the 

hirondelle^i, 
end of autumn. - - You do not seem to pay any 

automne, f. fa^^'^t v» 

attention to what I say to you. - - This man paint* 

very well, I assure you. - - - Why would you 

assurer^y. 
hurt hira, he never did you any harm ? - - I should 
P faire^y, m«/,m. 

pity and succour him if it were not his fault. - - - 

ce,pro. 
27 



314 

You shall disappear as soon as you have ex- 

(by the fut.) 
ecuted my orders, and take care not to speak 

ayez^y, soin^m,de 
to any body, for you know that walls have ears. 

- - - The last time I saw your sister she ap- 
peared to me thoughtful and melancholy. - - - She 

pensif^2idy melancolique^Sidj. 

is a lady that pleases every body. - - - She appears 

quite young : how old is she ? - - - Does she not 

'earn drawing ? - - Your brother has not included his 

' dessein^m, 
tailor's bill in the account which he has 

lailleur^m, memoire^m, 

given me. - - I see you do not complain of him 
rendre^Y* 
without a cause. - - I really am surprised (at it), but 

en, pro. 
he always smiles at every thing 1 tell him. - - As sur- 

de 
prising as this seems to you, yet it is true. - - 

cependant, adv. ce 
At last the enemy surprised and defeated them in the 
Enfn^3.dv, 

space of twelve days. - - They might, if they would., 
espace^m, 

have taken the town three days sooner, but the sol- 
diers were so exhausted with fatigue, that they 

epmCjp.p. flfe,p. 
could not even hold their guns. - - May these 

mme,adv. Pouvoir 

brave men long enjoy the glory which they have ac- 

joiiir, de 
quired. - - I sincerely wish they may. - - Children sel- 

rare- 
dom forget, when they continually 
men ^, adv. lorsque^c, confmwe/Zemenf, adv. 



315 

exercise their minds to study. - - If my brother do not 

exercer,v, 

come this week, as he promised me, if you will, we 

will go and see him in the country. - - Does not 

to-. 

Mrs. H. appear much concerned at her daugh- 

ter's death ? - - When you see Mrs. B. I am 

(by the fut.) 
certain she will please you. - - Did you never see 

her ? - - The children who shall be born from this 

happy marriage, will be the delight of their 

delices.f.^l, 
father and mother. - - She joins to the qualities of the 

body those of the mind. - - Take some pears, and carry 

them to your brother. - - Every time I see him, I take 

him for a foreigner. - - My sister and I learn French, 

etr anger, m, 
and understand very well all that (is said) to us in that 

on dit 
language. - - Though you should learn all the rules, 

Quand^c, 
they would not (be sufficient) without practice. - - I did 

suffirc, v. 
not understand what you said. - - Do not undertake to 

de 
undeceive her ; believe me, you will lose your time. 
dilromper^Y, 
- - - Virtue procures and preserves friendship, but 

obienir^y, conserver^v, 

vice produces hatred and quarrels. - - If you 
vice^m, haine^L querelle^f. 

complain to the master, I will complain to the 



316 

mistress. - - Though you should undertake to prove 

de 
the contrary, she would not believe you. - - Why did 

not jou take the same road as we ? - - He (is not 

que 
pleased) in his situation, now he sees all the dangers 
seplaire^y, 
of it. - - He has suffered much, and none of his friends 

have pitied him. - - The idea of his misfortune pur- 

idee^f, malheur,m. 

sues him every-where. - - When did you hear of him ? 

par-tout^Sidv, 
■ - - Captain D. told my father that he had seen 

him and spoke to him at Madras. - - - We often 

mistake when we judge of others by ap- 

se meprendre^v, juger^v, 

pearances ; and often a person displeases us by the 

very quality by which another has pleased us. 

?7zeme,adj. 

- - The people who often seem the most zealous 

gens.m. z6l6,a.d^, 

are not always the most constant. - - Leave me 

Laisser^v* 
that book a little longer, do not take it again. - - - 

That apple-tree produces no fruit. - - We were 

pommier^m, 
reduced to the 'last extremity when they retook 

our ship. - - Go and speak to Mr. 5 but above all 

do not laugh. - - Would you not laugh, if you were 

in mv place ? - - - We laughed much yesterday at 



317 

the plaj. - - = She was an agreeable ladj, she was 

ever smiling when any body had the honor 

toujourSjZdv, 

of speaking to her. - - He seduced her by his fine 

promises. - - Whatever he may undertake, he never 

will succeed, he is too much addicted to the 

aJonwe, p.p. 
pleasures of this world. - - Young people tell 

what they do, old people what they have done, 

vieillard^xn, 
and fools what they intend to do. - - - We 

50/,m. seproposer^Y, 

learn much more easily the things which 

yac77emen^,adv. 
we understand than those which we do not. - - If we 

go together to my brother's, shall you be able 

c/ier,p. 
to follow us ? - - I will follow you step by step. - - - 

pas a pas^'dL&v. 
Why do you follow me as you do ? - - You may set 

comme 
out when you please, we will follow you, - - Hold 

your tongue, you do not know what you say. - - - 

What books do you translate ? - - My master says I 

shall soon translate Marmontel's Works. - - We should 

have conquered them if we had fought ; and, believe 

me, you might have done much better, if you had 

followed the advice which he gave you. - - - Thej 
27* 



313 
have debated the question a long time without 
being able to resolve it. - - They were quite trans- 
ported with joy when they heard of the happy 

fZe,p. 
news of the peace. - - - Every thing smiles in 

nature (at the) return of the spring. - - - As long 

au retour^m, printems^m, Tant 

as her father and mother live, they never 

^Me,adv. (by the fut.) 

will consent to her marriage with Mr. R. - - - You 

will not live long if you drink so much. - - She lived 

about four years after her husband's death. - ► 

environ^p. apres^ip, 

George III. the eldest son of Frederick, prince of 

ame,adj. 
Wales, was born on the fourth af June, 1 738, and 
Galles, f. «» 

was proclaimed king of Great-Britain on the twenty- 

proclamer^v. 
siixth of October, 1760. - - - Let a man live in any 

country whatever, he is sure to be respected and 

de 
well treated every where, if his behaviour and 

manners are ruled by the principles of a soimd 
mcKurs^ f . pi . regter^ v. bon, adj. 

policy, and the laws of the country he lives 
politiqutjf, 
in. 



319 
OF IMPERSONAL VERBS. 

Verbs which relate to no person or thing, and which, 
as has been before observed, are only conjugated in the 
third person singular, are called impersonal verbs : thejr 
generally are preceded by one of the following pro- 
nouns il or on : of this number are, 

II tonne^ It thunders. 

II phut, It rains. 

O71 dit, People say, or, it is said, ^-c. 

To which may be added several other verbs, which 
become impersonal when employed in the same man- 
ner : ex. 

// vous convient d'etre mo- It becomes you to be mo- 

deste, dest. 

// fait beau, froid, &c. It is fine, cold, &c. 

// semble, It seems. 

// s''ensuit que, It follows that. 

// vaut mieux, It is better, ^-c. 

These verbs, like others, whether regular or irregular 
have their different tenses, and are conjugated in the 
same manner as the personal verbs from which they are 
derived. The learner having gone through the other 
conjugations, the verbs of this class may the more easily 
be dispensed with. It will only be necessary to select 
one that is not derived, and show the manner of conju- 
gating it, only premising, that the compound tenses are 
formed, like others, by joining the participle passive to 
one of the tenses of the auxiliary verb avoir, to have. 



CONJUGATION OF THE IMPERSONAL VERBS, 

Infinitive Mood. 

Present. Pleuvoir, to rain. 
Part. act. Plenvant, raining. 
Part. pagp. Plu, rained. 



320 



- Indicative Mood. 

Affirmatively. 
Present. II phut, it rains, it does rain. 
Negatively. 
// nepleut pas, it does not rain. 
Interrogatively. 



Pleut-il ? 

JSfe pleut-il pas 7 

Imperfect. // phuvoit, 

Preterite. II plut, 

Future. II pleuvra, 

Conditional. II phuvroit, 



does it rain 1 
does it not rain ? 

it rained, it was raining. 

it rained. 

it shall, or vi^ill rain. 

it would, should, S^c, rain. 



Subjunctive Mood. 

Present. Qu'il phuve, that it may rain. 
Imperfect. QuHl plut, that it might rain. 

The following being of the first conjugation, I shall 
only give the third person, present tense, of the indica- 
tive mood : the learner may easily find out the rest. 



II arrive, 


it happens ; from 


arriver, 


to happen. 


II bruine, 


it drizzles ; 


hruiner, 


to drizzle. 


II eclaire, 


it lightens ; 


cclairer. 


to lighten. 


II gele, 


it freezes ; 


geler, 


to freeze. 


II grele, 


it hails ; 


greler^ 


to hail. 


II 7ieige, 


it snows ; 


neiger, 


to snow. 


II tonne, 


it thunders : 


tonner, 


to thunder. 


II importe,it matters. 


importer 


to concern. 




it concerns. 







m 



321 



EXERCISES ON THESE VERBS. 



Does it rain ? - - It rained just now, but 

tout-a-Vheure^ adv. 
it does not rain at present. - - - Was it not raining 

mamfmo.n^,adv. 
when you came ? - - I advise you not to go out 

conseiUer^y, de 

this morning, I think it will soon rain. - - I am 

bieniot^adv. 
sure it would rain if tlie wind was not so high. - - 

grand, 3.dy 
Do you know what happened to my cousin 

savoir^v, 
whilst he was in town? - - I foresaw what 

pendant que^c, prevoir^ 

would happen. - - The roads were very slippery 

chemin^m, glissant,a.dj» 
yesterday, because it drizzled the whole day. Did 

^ you observe how it lightened last 

remarqu&r^Y. comme^ adv. 
night ? - - If it did not freeze I would go to see them 

x'OzV,v. 
to-day. - - It hailed this afternoon, and it will 

aprts-midi^m, 
certainly snow to-night. - - It thundered much 

heaucQiip^ adv. 
yesterday, and I think it will still thunder to- 

cncore^a,dy. 
day. - - It matters little whether you do your ex- 

que (subj.) 

ercise now or later, provided it be well 

pourvu que^c. (subj.) 

done. - - It greatly concerns children to 

6ea'wco?/j9,adv. aux de 

avoid idleness, because it is the parent of all vice 
ivitcr^Y* mere^L 

and destroyer of all virtues. 

destructrice^f. 



322 



The verb Avoir, to have, conjugated impersonally 
■with 2/5 the adverb of place. 

Infinitive Mood. 

Y avoir, there be. 

Indicative Mood. 



Present. 



rf 



Imperfect. 

Preterite. 

Future. 



Affirmatively. 
// y a, there is, there are. 

Negatively. 
Iln'y a pas, there is not, there are not. 

Interrogatively. 

Y a-t'il ? is there ? are there ? 

JV'?/ a-t-ilpas ? is there not ? are there not ? 

// y avoit, there was, there were. 
// y eut, there was, there were. 



// y aura, 



Conditional. // y auroit, 



there shall, or will be. 
there should, would, ^c, feci 



Imperative Mood. 

Qu'll y ait, let there be. 

Subjunctive Mood. 



Present. 
Imperfect, 



QvHl y ait, 
Qu'd y eut. 



that there may be. 
that there might be. 



Compound Tenses, 



II y a eu, there has, or have been. 

11 y avoit eu, there had been. 

// y eut eu, there had been. 

// y aura eu, there shall, or will have been* 

// y auroit eu, there should, <i'C, have been. 

QuHl y ait eu, that there may have been. 

QuHl y eut m, that there might have been. 



m 



323 

EXERCISE ON THIS VERB. 

There are three ladies who (are waiting for) you 

aitendre^v* 
in your brother's study. - - Is there any fire in the 
'•'■'• cabinet^m. 

parlour ? - - No, Sir, there is none. - - There were two 
salle, f. 
men below who asked to speak to you. - - Was 

en basjSidv, a 

there not formerly a (coffee-house) at the 

autrefois^^dv. ca/e,m. 

corner of this street ? There were great re- '^ 

com,m. nte, f. re- 

joicings in France when peace was proclaimed. - - 
jouissance^f, proclame^ip,Tp, 

I was telling you that there will be a grand concert 

dire, v. 
and afterwards a ball and supper at the Pantheon, 

ensuite, adv. 
in the course of this month. - - There would be 

courant^m, 
no harm if you would learn your lesson better. - - - 

ma/,m. mieux,adv. 

Let there be any danger, let there be none, 1 will 

go back. - - - My brother says that there has 

s''en retourner^Y. 

been a bloody engagement between an Englisk 

sanglant, adj. combat, m. 
frigate and a French one, and there have been 
fregate,(. fregate 

many men killed on both sides. - - There would 

depart et d'^ autre. 
have been a great riot yesterday in the Strand, 

emeu^e,f. 
if the magistrates had not sent so many constables, 

conn6tahle,m. 
who dispersed the mob in less than ten minutes. 

papulae c^L 



324 

There %s^ immediately followed by the negation no 
and a participle active, must be rendered by on ne pent 
pas, on ne sauroit^ with the participle in the infinitive 
mood ; the other tenses, as there was^ there will 6e, there 
would 6e, used as above, and made by, the same tenses of 
the verb pouvoir only : ex. 

On ne pent pas^ or, on ne There i^ no going out to- 

sauroit sortir aujour- day because of the rain ; 

d'hui a cause de la pluie^ that is, one cannot, ^c. 

On ne pouvoit Pappaiser, There was no pacifyinaj 

him. ^ 

On ne pourra pas jouer de- There will be no acting 

main, mon pere est tres to-morrow, my father is 

malade, very ill. ** 

EXERCISE ON THIS RULE. 

There is (such a deal) of snow that there is no going 
ian^,adv. 
out of the house. - - You speak so low and so quick 

&rt5,adv. T;z;e,adv. 

that there is no hearing nor understanding what 

entendre^Y. comprendre^v, 

you say. - - My brother runs so fast that there is 

v'tte^adv, 
no following him. - - There was no walking yesterday 

/tier, adv. 
in the streets of London on account of the dirt. - - His 

a cause,]). houe^i. 

arguments were so convincing that there was no re- 
re- 
plying to him. - - There will be no skating in the 
pliquer,y. patiner^w, 

park to-morrow because it thaws. - - There will be 

degeler^v, 
no going to the play next month, he- 

comedie^f. joroc/tm'n, adj. parce- 

cause the play-house will be shut. - - There would 
que^Ct th6dtre,m* 



325 

be no living with you, if you were always in the same 

etiez,Y, t?e,f. 

humour. - - If a horse knew his strength, there would 

force,L 
be no mastering him. 
doiupter^Y, 

This verb il y a, when used to denote a quantity of 
time, is sometimes rendered in English by it is^ it was, 
&c. when the English preposition since is rendered 
(in French) by que : but in all cases where the English 
phrase can be rendered negatively, que must be accom- 
panied by the negation ne : ex. 

II y a trois semaines que It is three weeks since 

voire pere est arrive, your father arrived. 

II y a long'tems que je ne It is a long while since I 
vous ai vu, ■ saw you, or, I have not 

seen you this long 
while. 

EXERCISE ON THIS RULE. 

How long is it since we saw (one another) ? It is a 
Combien, adv. nous, pro. 

year since I met your brother in Italy, and 

rencontrer,v, 
it is six months since 1 heard of him. - «. 

entendre parler^v. 
How long is it since you wrote to your mother ? - - - 

It is but two months. - - It )vas a week since I had 

ne que semainc,L 

seen your brother, when I met him by chance in 

par hasard,aidv, 
a coffee-room. - - How long was it since your friend 

had left France when he wrote to you ? - - It v»'as 

laisser,\\ 
three months. - - It may be two years since Mr. Robert 

28 



^ 



326 

set out for the Indies. - - Hqw long is it since you 

partir^v. 

were in England ? - - It is such a long while since I 

learned German, that I almost forgot it, 
Allemand^ m. 

It often happens that the verb there is^ or it is, &c. 
is understood : in this case, one of the words, ago, these, 
or for these, is expressed as a substitute : ex. 

// y a trois mois que j'e- I was in France three 
tois en France, or fetois months ago, 
en France il y a trois 



mois 



* 



II y a quaire ans que mon My brother has been dead 
frere est mort, these four years. 

EXERCISE ON THIS RULE. 

He is the same man whom we saw a quarter of an 

quar^t «o^ 

hour ago. - - When did you see my father ? - - I saw 

him (a fortnight ago). - - We have not heard from my 

quinze jours 
brother these two years. - - You do not seem to 

paroitre, v. 
be so lively as you were three years ago. - - I would 

enJQue,3,d^. 
have written to you a month ago, if I had known 

savoir^y* 
your direction. - - - I have not seen your sister these 
adrcsse,L 

* From tliis instance it may be observed, -that, if the verb il y a, 
&c. begic the sentence, the word que ranst immediately follow the 
noun of number ; but, if it be trrnsposed, que must be omitted. The 
first construction is to be preferred. The learner must at the same 
time observe, that in the above sentence, the verb, which, in Eng- 
lish, is in the compound ofihe present^ is rendered in French by the pre- 
sent of the iiidicati\ e, and wh,e» ift the pretcrpluperfcct by the im- 
Iterfect 91 tke sa^e moQi. 



327 



- My father has been ill these 

malade^a.dj. 
He has been in London these five jears, 



four months. 

six weeks. - 

and (it is said) he there enjoys a considerable em- 

on dit^v. 
ployment. - - We have neither seen you nor your 

sisters these three days. 

It also happens, that neither the verbs, nor any of 
the words, ago, ihese^ or for these, are expressed in the 
sentence : ex. 



II y cuneufans que ma tante 

demeure dans ce voisi- 

nage, 
II n^y a pas plus d'^une heure 

que nous pechons ici, 
II y avoit deux ans que ma 

saur etoit en France 

quand fy allai, 
Jyfy avoit-il pas six mois 

qu^elle demeuroit avec 

nous quand elle mou- 

rut ? 
II y aura six ans a Xoel 

que voire frlre est chez 

Mons, O, 
N''y aura-t'il pas un an au 

mois d^Aout prochain que 

votre sceur est a Paris ? 



My aunt has lived nine 
years in this neigh- 
bourhood. 

We have not been above 
an hour fishing here. 

My sister had been two 
years in France when I 
went there. 

Had she not lived six 
months with us whea 
she died ? 

Your brother will have 
been at Mr. O's. six 
3-ears at Christmas. 

Will not your sister have 
been a year at Paris 
next Au2:ust ? 

o 



EXERCreE ON THIS RULE, 

have no 



Some people have no pity on their poor 
gens^pL de 

fellow-creatures. - - Some people fancy 



semblabh^ 



2')ersonr}CjL 



'iti 



328 

that they can learn a language without 

pouvoir, V. 
studying. - - - My brother has been four years at 
etudier^ v^ 
Mr. W's. academy, and my father told him that. 

he should stay there two years more. - - I had 

rester^Y, 
been three years in England when that happened. 

arriver, v. 
- - I had not been three months in France, when 

my brother returned from America to London, 

where he fell ill and died. - - - Mr. N. had only 

ne qut 
learned French seven months when he wrote me 

a letter in that language. - - - Had not Mr. David 

been four years and a half in Spain when his sister 

was married ? - - My father and mother had not been 

gone out above a quarter of an hour when 
sortir^v, plus^Sidw 

he arrived. - - - We had been playing at cards 

aux carte^i, 
for two hours when you came in. - - Thomas will have 

entrer^v. 
been at the college two years the tenth of liext 

eoUege^m. 
month. 



The verb itre, to be, becomes impersonal when fol- 
lowed by a substantive, or one of the pronouns personal^ 
possessive, or demonstrative, and is always conjugated 
with the pronoun demonstrative ce, whether speaking 
of persons or things : ex. 



'"^ 



329 

C^est la loi qui Vordonne^ It is the lam that pre- 
scribes it. 
Oest moi qui Vaifait^ It is / who have done it. 

Oest mon bienfaiteur, It is my benefactor, 

Cest eux, or, ce sont eux, It is they who have related 
qui me Vont rapporte, it to me. 

From the last instance, it appears that it is, Sic, fol- 
lowed by a pronoun of the third person plural, may be 
rendered in French two ways ; but, when is it, &c. is 
nsed in asking a question, it is generally put in the sin- 
gular, though the pronoun be in the plural number : 
ex. 

Est-ce eux qui Vont fait f Is it they who have done it ? 



EXERCISE ON THIS RULE. 

It is prosperity which commonly makes 

prosperite, f. rendre, v. 

men haughty and proud, but it is adversity 

orgueilleux, 2idj, 
that makes them wise. - - - It was the custom 

coutume, f. 
among the Spartans to inure their 

parmi,ip» Spartiate^m, de endurcir,v* 

children early to the fatigues of war. 

de honne /ieMre,adv. travail,m» 

- - It is not I who occasioned the quarrel, it is 

causer ^Y, querelle,f, 

you who began first. - - - It was envy 

avez commence,y. le envie, f. 

which caused the first murder. - - Is it not you who 

causer ^Y, meurtre,m. 

wrote to Miss A. ? No, it is Miss Rose's sister. 

avez ecrit,Y, 
' - If you do not succeed, it will not he my fault. 

r6ussir,Y. fautej. 

- - If you came to lose the friendship of your 

dperdre^Y, 
28* 



330 

parents, it would be the greatest misfortune which 

malheur^vci, 
ever might happen to you. - - It is my friend 

jamais^ cidv,pouToir^Y. 
who told me that it was your father whom we saw 

dire,v, 
yesterday. - - Speak to my brothers, for it is they 

who told it me.. - - Why do you not accuse 

Powr^itoz,adv. 
my sisters ? It is they who have done all the 

mischief. - - You blame my aunts, but -is it they 
mal,m, bldmer^v, tantt^L 

who have offended you? 

qffenser^Y^ 

He, she^ they^ immediately followed by who, whom, 
or that^ and such as, whether separated in English or 
not, but implying people in general, are often made 
into French by the impersonal c''est, with an infinitive 
followed by que de before a second infinitive, and if 
the sentence be negative, c^est we pas must be used : 
ex. 

C^est etre fou que de He is a fool who loses his 

perdre le terns a ces time in those trifles. 
bagatelles, 

€^est ne pas gouter les Such as love nobody, do 

plaisirs de Vamitii que not enjoy the pleasures 

de rCaimer personne, of friendship. 

EXERCISE ON THIS RULE. .Jl2i2J 



He is a blind man who does not 

too cfrewg/e,adj. toi 

perceive all the dangers which surround us 

environner,Y» 
in this deceftful ^ world. - - jSwch as are satis- 
trompeur,adj* con- 



331 

fied with their lot are happj. - - He 

/enf,adj, de 5on,pro. sort^m, 
does not know the court who relies 

connoitre^Y, cour^f, sejler^v, 

on the promises which (are made) there. - - They 

aux onfait^v, 

are strangers to the charms of society who shun 

fuir.v. 
company. - - They are idle who do not know the 

savoir,v, 
value of time. - - They obey the commands of God 

who love their neighbours, and do not reproach 

voisin^m, 
them with their small defects. - - He is not a Chris- 
leur <-<» 
tian who seeks to hurt his neighbour and speaks 

a prochain^m, 
ill of him on all occasions. - - Such as neglect 

dans ntgliger^ v. 

study do not understand their own interests. 

j9rojore,adj. 

The verb etre^ to be, becomes also impersonal every 
time it is followed by a noun adjective used in a vague 
indeterminate sense, and relates to no particular object ; 
in which case the verb is generally preceded by the pro- 
noun il ; and when used to denote the state of the wea- 
ther, it is rendered by the third person singular of the 
verb faire^ to make or do : ex. 

11 est extraordinaire^ &:c. It is extraordinary, (^c. 
// fait beau tems^ It is fine weather. 

Ne fait-il pas chaud ? Is it not hot ? 

EXERCISE ON THIS RULE. 

It is surprising to see you so lazy and in- 

e^onnan^, adj. de 





332 

attentive after having been punished severe- 

apres,ip» avoir severe- 

ly for these faults. - - It is always dangerous 

menf, adv. 

to (keep company with) people without any prin- 
de frequenter ^y, aiicun prin- 

ciple of religion. - - Does it rain ? No, Sir, 
cipe.m. Monsieur,m, 

it is fine weather. - - Is it not very cold ? - - - It is 

froid^ m. 
neither cold nor hot. - - It is a high wind, and 
ne,c. m,c. t<» grant/, adj. 

I think it will soon freeze. - - - It is not so cold as 
penser^Y* 

it was at the beginning of this month. - - Do 

commencement^ m. 
you think (that) it is hotter in Italy than here ? 

The learner must observe, that the following verb is 
absolutely impersonal throughout all its tenses, and that 
nothing is more disagreeable than to hear young people 
say, Jefaut, vousfaut^ onfaut, &c. to prevent which, as 
much as possible, some examples are here set down. 

Infinitive Mood. 

Present. Falloir, to be needful, requisite, necessary. 
Part. pass. Fallu, been needful, <^c. 

Indicative Mood. 

Affirmatively. Singular. 

Present* II faut que je fasse^ I must do. 

// faut que tu fasses, thou must do, 

// faut quHl fasse, he must do. 

II faut qu[elle fasse^ she must do. 

Plural. 

il faut que nous fissions, we must do. 

// faut que vous fassiez, you must do. 

II faut quHls^ or elks fasseni^ they must do. 



333 

Negatively. 

// nefautpas quejefasse, I must not do. 

// nefautpas que vous fassiez^ you must not do, <J-c. 

Interrogatively. 

Faut-il quejefasse ? must I do ? 

Faut-il que vousfassiez ? must you do ? 

\Ne faut-il pas quejefasse ? must I not do ? 

Ne faut'il pas que vous fassiez ? must you not do ? 

Imperfect. // falloit quHl ecrimt^ it was necessary, &e. 

for him to write. 
Preterite. II fallut quHlpartit, he was obliged to set 

out. 
Future. // faudra quHl vienne, he must come, he shall 

be obliged to come. 
Condit. II faudroit que f alias se^\ should go, or it 

would be necessary 
for me to go. 

, Subjunctive Mood. 

Present. QuHl faille^ that it may be necessary, <!^c. 
Imperfect. QuHl fallut^ that it might be necessary. 

As to the compound tenses of this verb, they are 
formed by adding its participle passive to the third per- 
son singular of any of the simple tenses of the verb avoir^ 
to have : ex. // a fallu, il avoitfallu, &c. 

From the foregoing instances, it is easy to see, that, 
when the verb falloir is used in the present or future 
tense of the indicative mood, the following verb must 
be rendered by the present of the subjunctive ; but 
when it is used in the imperfect, preterite, or conditional 
present of the indicative, the verb following must be 
rendered by the preterite of the subjunctive : ex. 

fl faut^ or il faudra que I must c?o, I shall be obliged 
je fasse, to do^ or, it will bo neces- 

sary for me to do. 



334 

II falloif, or,, il fallut que, I was obliged, or^ it was 
jeparlasse, necessary for me to 

speak* 
II faudroit que je vendisse, I should be obliged to 

sell, 

EXERCISE ON THIS RULE. 

If you go to Coxheath to-day you must 

aujourd'^hui, adv. 
come back to-morrow. - - - You may go to 

revenir^Y, pouvoir^v, 

London this morning, but remember that you must 

be back at three o'clock. - - - You must get 

de retour se 

up to-morrow morning at four o'clock. - - - 

lever ^Y, 

Custom must not always prevail over reason. - - - 

5wr,p. 
Shall I be obliged to carry them there ? - - - 

falloir,Y, mener^Y. 
Must I not show you my work ? - - - Yol 

montrer^Y, ouvrage^m, 

must have been well (acquainted with) the places 

connoitre^Y. endroit^m, 

to expose yourself in that manner. - - If he 

pour^c. c?e,p. 

wished to pay his debts, he would be obliged 
vouloit^Y, t-®^ dette^L 

to sell all his property. - - If your brothers had not 

hien^m, 
ceased to quarrel, it would have been ne- 
cesser\,Y, de quereller^Y* 

cessary* for them to part. - - It is impossible for you 
se stparer^Y. 

* After the words better^ necessary^ needful^ expedient^ good^ im.' 
possible^ Sec. joined to the verb to &e, conjugated impersonally, the 
preposition for is to be rendered by que^ with the fellowing verb in 
the subjunctive mood, either present or preterite, according to tke 
foiise tf the preceding verb. 



335 

to succeed in that undertaking, all your friendg 
oppose it. 

The same observation is to be made on the verb 'oaloir 
mieux^ to be better, used impersonal} j ; and the adjec- 
tives 6on, difficile^ impossible^ nicessaire^ a propos^ &c. join- 
ed to the verb etre^ used in the third person singular 
only : ex. 

// n'est pas hon que vous It is not good for you to 

soyeit seul^ be alone. 

U vaut mieux que vous It is better for you to 

ayez compagnie^ have company. 

EXERCISE ON THIS RULE. 

It is difficult for you to improve if you 

faire des pr ogres ^ 
io not apply better to study. - - It was impossible 

s^appliquer^y, 
for you to have succeeded unless you take 

a mow5 ^we, c. ne. (by the sub.) 
more convenient measures. - - It would be expedient 

coni:)enafe/e,adj. apropos 

for you to read this book from the beginning 

depuis, p. 
to the end. - - Believe me, it is better 

jusqu'^d^^p. ^w,f. valoirmieux^y, 

for you to go there to-morrow, for it will snow 

car,c. 
soon. - - - Will it not be better for me to be at 
hient6t,3,dy, 
school too soon than too late ? - - Would it not 

<of,adv. <arr/, adv. 

be better for him to go and speak to them himself, 

than to send his servant ? - - - It is good for ut 

de domes tique^m,&LL 

to help one another in our troubles. 
s'' aider ^r, peine^L 



336 

The above verb falloir, being used before the verb 
to have, followed immediately by a noun substantive, 
may be rendered without expressing the auxiliary verb ; 
instead of which, insert one of the following pronouns, 
7ne, te, lui, nous, vous, or leur, according to the number 
and person : ex. 

II me faut des livres^ I must have, or, I want 

books. 
II lui faut un chapeau^ He must have, or, he 

wants a hat. 
It lui faut un bonnet, She must have, or, she 

wants a cap. 

N. B. If the verb to have be expressed in French, it 
must be rendered by the subjunctive mood : ex. 

II faut que faie des livres, I must have, or, I want 
^ books. 

This method, however, is not so elegant as the 
former. 

EXERCISE ON THIS RULE. 

I shall want paper, pens, and ink. - - What do 
falloir,Y, 
you want ? - - I want nothing (for the) present, but I 

a 
think I shall soon want a French grammar. - - - 
penser,\» 
My brother has an old hat, and he will soon 

Tiewa?,adj. 
want a new one. - - If you like to 

7iouvtaii,2idi], ^^ aimez,v» a 

speak much, you must have (a good deal) of 

6ien,adv. 
circumspection not to (speak ill) of others. - - 

veitnut,L pour ne pas medire,v. 

Since I cannot find my book, I must have 

Puisquc, c. 

another. - - If we wish to succeed in our under- 
vouloir, y* 



337 



taking, we must have (a great deal) of patience. - r . 

beaucoup^ adv. 
My brothers have lost their buckles, they must have 

houcle^ f. 
others. 

Before the conclusion of this section, it will be pro- 
per to say something about the pronoun general on^ 
which commonly precedes a verb used impersonally 
(viz. in the third person singular) in French, and in 
English is made by a passive voice : ex. 

On rn' a permis de chanter^ I have been allowed to 

sing. 
On lui a defendu de soriir, He has been forbidden to 

go out. 

In this case, the verb which, in English, is in the 
passive voice, must, in French, be turned into the ac- 
tive, when the English nominative becomes the regi- 
men of the verb in French, the sentence beginnings 
with o?z, and translated as if the English were, one has 
allowed me to sing, one has forbidden him to go out. 



It is the same with, 



On dit, 

On me dit^ 

On dit a voire frtrt^ 

On disoit^ } 

On dit^ ^ 

On dira^ 

On dira a no$ enfans:^ 

On a dit^ 

0% nmi:^ a dit, 

S9 



It is said, or people say. 

I am told. 

Your brother is told. 

It was said, or people said, 

or were saying. 
It will be said, or people 

will say. 
Our children will be told. 

It has been said, or people 

have said. 
We have been told- 



338 



EXERCISE ON THIS RULE. 



In time of war, peace is always spoken of.- - - 
£Jn,p. 
Where is your brother ? it is not known ; for, we 

have not heard of him these two years. - - - - 

The death of the invincible admiral Lord Nelson 

morf,f. 
is daily lamented, a»d will be 

ious les jours ^2.dy, regretter^v. 

30 a long time. - - - I was told yesterday that 

your brother has been punished for his idleness^ 

had your father been told of it, he would have been 

very angry with him. - - As soon as your 

contre^'p, Aussitot que,c» 

book is printed, people will be €ager in 

imprimer, v. s^empresser^ v. de^ p« 

buying it, and it will be read with avidity. - - Learned 

men are found in villages, as well as in large 

grand, adj* 
towns. - - It is reported on all sides that we shall 

de cote, m. 

soon have peace, but the news has not yet been 

received, 'though it be ardently (wished for), 

ardemment.^dv, souhaiter^v, 

however, it is thought that the secret expedition 

will sail in a few days. - - It was as- 

mettre a la voile. «>^ 

serted that you were lazy, - - It will be believed that you 

blame me. - - It would not be supposed that you praise 

HS. «■ « I bave beea assured that he hgs threatened him. 



339 

RECAPITULATORY EXERCISE on the 
IMPERSONAL VERBS. 
There is no going out to-day, it rains apace. - - - 

Do not make so much noise, there is no hearing 
one another. - - Is it cold this morning ? Yes, Sir, it 
is very cold ; however, I am told it is not so cold as 
it was yesterday. - - The weather is very inconstant 

in this country, it was very hot yesterday, it is 

pays^m. 
excessively cold to-day : it did freeze this morning, 

/?-es,adv. 
it hailed at noon, it rained in the afternoon, and 

midi,m, «<>i apres-midi, 

now it drizzles. - - It sometimes lightens when it 

quelquefois, adv. 
does not thunder, but as often as it thun- 

toutes hs fois^c, 
ders, it lightens. - - If it he fine weather next week, 

I shall go to London, but if it be bad weather I 

shall stay at home. - - It is a pleasure to see 

rester^v, au logis, de 

bees (coming out) of their hives when it Is 

aheille^f, soriir^v. ruche^L 

a sunny day. - - Had I known you were returned 

^o^sohil too revenh\y» 
from the continent, I would have gone to see you 

long ago. - - My father and mother were told you 

were ia England ten years ago, but you neither saw 

Ror wrote^to them. - - Every body agrees there 

co7ivenir,v. 



^40 

•re fine women in Great-Britain, but there is not 

such good wine as in France, - - It greatly 

si beaucoup,3.dv, 

concerns children to avoid bad company. - - 

aux de eviter^v. 

If there were any real virtue in the world, should 

we (meet with) so many false friends ? -' - If he 

irouvevyy, 
behaved well, there would not be a man 

se comporier,v. 
(in the world) that I should esteem more. - - No 

au monde, 
object is more pleasing to the eye than the sight of 

plaire^Y, vuej. 

a man whom you have obliged, nor (is) any music 

so agreeable to the ear as the voice of a man 

oreille,t, 
who owns you for his benefactor. - - It is a 

rtconnoitre^Y* «oi 

sad thing to see unfortunate people and be 

^^ de malheureux.a.dj. 

Unable to relieve them. - - Such as support the 

secourir^Y, encourager^V, 

conduct of idle and obstinate scholars, make them- 
selves contemptible. - - They are not acquainted witk 

meprisahle,2Ldj, 
the human heart, who xely Upon the vain 

faire fond, v. 
' promises of mejo. - - You have already been told 

c^e;a,adv. 
that nobody in the world has prepossessed me 

against you, how many times must I repeat 

contre^Tp. comfefg/i, adv. 

it to you ? - - I was told yesterday that you were very 



341 • 

ill, and I am truly glad to see you so well. - - - 

de hien portanL 

There is no persuading you when you have a mind 

vtf^ enrie, f. 
not to believe what you are told. - - - More virtue is 

requisite to support good fortune than bad. - - 

jooMr,p. 
Much art and nicety are requisite to 

cUlicatesse^L poiir^ip. 

please every body. - - It matters little whether it be ^ 

my servant or yours who carries the letter to the 

porter, Y, 
post. - - You must honour your father and mother if 
poste, f. 
you will live long and happy. - - It is more glo- 

vouloir^V, 
rious to conquer one's passions than to conquer 

de vainer e,y, conquerir^v. 

the whole world. - - Sir, I want a pair of boot§j 

entier, adj, 
have you any in your shop that will suit 

houtiquc^L convenir,Y* 

me ? - - It is reported that the Russians have beaten 

Russe^m* 
the Turks ; it is said so, but it is not yet known for 

Twrc,m. 
certain. - - It is thought Sweden has declared war 

Suede^L 
against France. - - It is true ; but it is much 

a -yraijadj. 

feared lest the Swedes should be 

craindre^v, que^c, Suedoisj (by the pre. subj.) 

beaten, though they fight most courageously. 

se battre^v* 
- - - Have the letters been received which were 

expected yesterday ? No, but the mail is ar^ 
attendre^v, 7nalU,f. 

riyed, and they will be delivered this morning. 
29* 



342 

SECT. T. 

OF PARTICIPLES. 

Participles are either active or passive. The par- 
ticiple active^ in French, always ends in ant : ex. par- 
lant ; punissant^ and in English in ing : ex. speaking, 
punishing, &:c. It is ^iwa-js, in its own nature, inde- 
chnable : ex. 

Je vois des hommes et des I see men and women 
femmes venant a nous, coming to us. 

EXERCISE ON THIS RULE. 

The persons whom you saw with us are people 

gens, 1^1. 
fearing God and loving virtue. - - - She met your 

father and sister (as she was) coming here. - - Mj 

en 2d, adv. 

mother was told (the day before yesterday) that 

avant-hier,3idv, 
your sister, remembering the injuries she had 

se ressouvenir,Y» des 
received from your brother, refused to 

r€Cite5,p.p. delapartde, de 

see him, and we are all glad "to hear it. - - - 

apprendre,v. 
Your aunt, having given the necessary orders to your 

cousins, set out immediately for London. - - - Did 

partir,Y. 
you not see them coming to us ? - - How many 

vers,'p, 
lowing oxen, bleating sheep, neighing 

mugir,Y, 6cew/,m. heler,Y, brebis,i,^\, hennir,Yi 
horses I hear afar offt - - Do you not admire these 
de ^cwjadv. 



343 

skipping lambs in your father-in-law's meadow ? 
bondir^Y. agneau<fin» prairie^L 

- - Do you see the flocks languishing with 

tronpeau^m, languir^v, c?e,p. 
thirst, and drinking (on the) margin of this limpid 

au 6orc?,m. 
brook ? 
ruisseau., m. 

When the participle active is preceded by another 
verb, an article, or a preposition, it must be rendered 
in French by the verb in the infinitive mood, and it is 
sometimes used a& a substantive : ex. 

Faut'il que je parte sans Must I set out zuithout 
luiparler? speaking to him ? 

La pauvrete du corps est The impoverishing of the 
la richessGjJe Pdme, body is the enriching of 

the soul. 

N. B, There are some active participles which, by 
use, have been converted into substantives or adjec- 
tives, as inidisant^ slanderer, ignorant^ ignorant,, &:c. 
which are declinable. 

EXERCISE ON THIS RULE. 

I assure you there is a great deal of pleasure in 

«,p. 
teaching diligent scholars. - - We are told there 
enseigner^w, 
will not be so much danger in travelling, as there 

voyager^y. que 
was before. - - - There is a real advantage in 

auparavant^3,dY, 
being learned, but science must not create 

savant, adj . inspirer, v. 

pride. - - Lewis the Great had especially the su- 

surtout^adv, 
perior and rare talents of knowing and choosing men 

of merit. - - He left the house without seeing his 



344 

father, and even without speaking to his mother. 

meme, adv. 
- - He was hanged for robbing Mr. D. - - I sliould 

pendre^v, 
despise a man who is capable «f deceiving 

mepriser^Y, tromper^v, 

his friends. - - After having (waited for) her a long 

attendre^y, toi 

while, she (sent me word) that she was not ready 

envoy er dire^y, ^re/,adj. 

to go out. - - She spends all her time in reading or 
a passerby. 

writing. - - My mother takes an infinite pleasure in 

admiring the situation of your house. - - The grace 

situation, f. 
of God will always keep us from sinning. - - 

empecher^y. pecher^v. 

I often admire the rising and setting of the sun. - - - - 

sohil^m. 
The defending of a bad cause is worse than 

defense mauv ais, adj . 

the cause itself. 
meme. 

The participle passive is sometimes declinable, and 
sometimes indeclinable. 

It is declinable, 

First, when it is joined to the verb efre, to be, forming 
a passive verb, and agrees with the nominative case of 
the verb in gender and number ; and after the verbs 
paroitre, naitre, Sic, : ex. 

Mon frere est aimS, My brother is loved. 

Ma scBur est aimee, My sister is loved. 

Mes cousins sont partis, My cousins are gone. 

Mes cousines sunt parties, My cousins are gone. 

Elk paroit affligee, She appears afflicted. 

Elks paroisseni affligee&^ They appear afflicted'. 



345 



EXERCISE ON TXlIS RULE. 



I have been told your brother-in-law is gone to 

beau-frere^m, 
the Continent ; have I been told the truth ? - - I have 

not seen your mother since she arrived 

depuis que^c. 
from France ; does she appear satisfied with her 

de 
journey? - - My brothers are gone to Dover, and 
voyage,m, 

intend to pay yon a visit when 

se proposer ^y, de rendre^v. v^ 

they are come back. ^ - The houses which are 

(by the fut.) revenir^v, 
built in the winter are not so wholesome as those 

5mn,adj. 
which are begun (in the) spring and finished in the 

au 
middle of summer. - - The wicked are always tor- 

mcchant^ adj . bour- 

mented, and the righteous are comforted by their 
reler^v, jusie^adj. consoler^v, 

own conscience. - - Virtuous people are esteemed 

pejsomie^f, 
and respected by those who are so, and even 

meme, Sidy, 
by the wicked. - - - I assure you that Mr. Brown's 

wife appears much afilicted at the death of 

femine^ f. vj7> 

her husband, but her sons appear as much affect- 

m«rz,m. 
cd by it as she. - - Children (are born) poor and 

naitre^y, 
helpless, and sometimes they die very young. 

foibk^didj, moiirir^y. 



i^. 



34G 

Secondly, when it is joined to the verb avoir, or etre^ 
forming the compound tenses of an active or reflected 
verb, immediately preceded by a pronoun which it gov- 
erns in the accusative case ; it must then agree with the 
gender and number of the substantive to which that 
pronoun refers : ex. 

J'ai parU a voire frere et I spoke to your brother 

Vai prie de venir no^is and desired him to 

voir, come to see us. 

Tai vu Madame Wright et I saw Mrs. Wright and 

Pai entendue chanter, heard her sing. 

Pai lu tons les livres que I have read all the hooks 

vous Tn'avez pretes, which you lent me. 

Avez-vous vu les marchan- Did you see the goods 

discs quefai re9ues ? which I have received ? 

Vo2(s Pavez souvent priee You often desired her to 

de passer chez vous, call at your house. 

Elles se sont repenties de They have repented of 

leurs fautes, their faults. 

In the above instances the pronouns are governed 
by the verbs avoir ov itre, and the participle passive. 

EXERCISE ON THIS RULE. 

I Spoke to your brother this morning, and 

ai.parle,v, 
desired him to come and dine with us to-morrow. - - - 

The resolution which she has taken of going into 

a ^^ 
the country surprises me very much j I have spoken 

etonner, v. 
to her myself, but I have not been able to learn 

pouvoir,Y, 
the reasons which have induced her to it. - - Miss 

engager, v. 
Farren was an excellent actress, I have seen h<^r 

actrice^i. 



347 

play several times. - - I am very sorry for Ihe 

/ac/ie.adj. de 
trouble that affair has given to your aunt. - - If you 
fdne^, tante^L 

can come with me, I will shoAV you the lady 

montrer^Y* 
whom I have heard sing. - - What stuff have 

entendre^Y* ttoffe^i, 

you chosen ? - - The letter which you have written to 

c/;o 1151, p.p. 
me in French was tolerably well ; I have shown 

passablement^2L^Y. 
t to your aunt, who is much pleased 

f?*e5,advr conien^, adj. 
(with it). - - I have not yet received the goods, 

e?i,pro. marchandise^i, 

which you sent me by the ship Good- 

vaisseau.m. 
Will. - - Ladies, have you returned him the letters 

rendre^Y, 
which he had desired you to read ? - - - Where 
pritr^Y. OM,adv, 

did you buy those gloves ?----! bought 

aclieter^Y, 
them in France. - - - Alexander conquered Asia with 

the troops which his father Philip had disciplined. 

troupe^L 
- - The faults which he had committed, greatly 

beaucoup^ adv. 
increased his prudence. - - He has spent all the 
augmenter^Y. 

treasures which his father had amassed with so much 
tresor^m, 
care and labour. - - I shall never forget the good 

ouhlier^Y, 
services which you have done to my mother. 

semce,m. rendre^Y, 

" - Of all the letters which my brother has received 



348 

to-day, there is not one (of them) for 

aujourd^hui^ adv. 

me. - - The reasons, which you have given us, have 

satisfied us. - • What books have you lost ? - - The 

satisfaire^Y, 

fine actions your brothers have done in 

6eaw,adj. ~ faire,v. 

America deserve great praises, and ought to be 

meriter^Y,- louange^L devoir ^y, 

transmitted to posterity. - - The three country 

houses, which your father is said to have bought, 

maison^L 

are extremely fine and well situated. - - The 

5ifwe,p.p. 
soldiers, whom they obliged to set out, are 
soldat^m, a 

come back already. - - My sisters have 
rtvenir^Y. 

quarrelled the whole day, and are now reconciled. 
se querelhr^Y, 

The participle passive is indeclinable in the follow- 
ing cases ; 

First, when the contrary to the above rule happens ^ 
that is, when the pronoun, though preceding the parti- 
ciple passive, is governed by another verb : ex. 

Plusieurs personnes se Several persons came to 

sont p':?,se7ities a In > the door, the sentinel 

por/e, ia sentinelle les let them pass, 
a laisse passer^ 

Cest une belle chanson^ It is a fine song, I have 

je Vai entendu chanter 'heard it sung many a 

plusieurs fois^ time. 

J'^y suis alU avec elh et I went there with her, 

Vai vu peiridre. and saw her pictare 

drawn. 



349 

La langue que fal com- The language I hare be- 
mence d'apprendre est gun to learn is very 
fort utile, useful. 

In the above instances the pronouns are not governed 
by the participle passive, but by the verbs passer, chan- 
ter, peindre^ and apprendre* 

EXERCISES ON THIS AND THE PRECEDING RULE. 

I canin t forget the good actions, which I have seen 

3^ou do. - - The goods which you ordered me to 

de 
send, are arrived ; permit me to show you the letters 

de 
which we have received from Germany. - - The 

Allemagne,L 
fable which I gave you to translate is not difficult. 

a traduire,Y* 
- - Have you already read the books, which I saw you 

buying ? - - Not yet, for I have sent them to my 

Pa? 5 adv. 
sister, who is in the country. - - - I haye bought the 

a 
clothes for which you saw me bargaining. - - The 
hahit,m* ^o^ marchander,v, 

history which I have begun to read is not enter- 

d amu- 

taining. - - She has written more books than you ever 
scm^ adj. 

haye read. - " The lady whom I saw singing is hand- 
some and young, but the song which I have heard 

sung is the best, as to words and music, that 

quant, 
your brother ever wrote. - - Miss B. has spent 

ras$cr,Y, 
30 



•>.'.-JL 



¥ 



350 

two or three days with your sisters, and saw their 

(picture drawn) ; their cousins were in the next 

pciyidre^v, 
room, and my sister saw them painting in minia- 

eii,p. 
ture. 

Secondly, when it is immediately followed by a noun 
(either substantive or adjective) in the accusative case, 
or by another participle passive, though it should be 
preceded by a pronoun : ex. 

Ma scRur s''est casse h My sister broke her arm. 

hras^ 

Les Anglois se sont ren- The English made them- 

du fameux dans cette selves famous in this 

guerre, war. 

Les Espagnols se sont The Spaniards found 

trouve obliges de lever themselves obliged to 

le siege, raise the siege. 

EXERCISE ON THIS RULE. 

Your sister has rendered herself celebrated hy 

ce7e6re,adj. 
ijer wit and beauty. - - My mother has bought 

esprit^m* acheter,v» 

herself a tine gown, my sister had made her- 

faire, v. 
self a good cloak, and my brothers had built 

mantelet.m, bdtir^v, 

themselves an elegant house. - - - They found 

themselves surrounded by soldiers, who carried 

conduire^v, 
them to prison, where they have been detained 

en, p. rete 

for eight days ; but they have been foi 



% 



351 

innocent of the crime with which they were ac- 

de 
cused, and at last (acquitted). - - - The city 

(renvoyei' absous.) 
of Liverpool has rendered itself flourishing hy its 

Jiorissant^'ddj, 
trade. - - Did you hear the new song ? 

comnierce^m, entendre chanter 

Yes, I did. 

Lastly, when the auxiliary verb and the parti- 
ciple passive are used impersonally. Du (when not 
signifying owed),;)u, and voulu, are also indeclinable : 
ex. 

Les pluies qu^il a fait, The rains which we have 

had, 

Je vous ai montre la re- I have shown you the gra- 

connxjissance que fai titude I ought. 

du, 

Ma sceur a fait tout ce My sister has done every 

qu''eUe a pu, thing she could, 

EXERCISE ON THIS RULE. 

The storm, which we had yesterday, has 
tempete, f. 
done (a great deal) of damage to our 

. causer, V* heaucoup,:idv. dommage.m* 

ships. - - The abundant showers which we have 

pluie, f. 
had this week, have prevented me from going 

empecher, v. 
into the country. - - The high wind which 

gran J, adj. vent^m, 
they have had in the county of Kent, has (blo^n 

comtc^m, rcnver- 

down) many houses and trees. - - At last he has 
ser^Y. Enfin^adv* 



% 



352 ' 

returned me all the sums which I had lent to 

rendre^Y. somme,L 

him, and which he had owed me so long. - - I 

devoir ^Y. 
have not paid all the attention which I ought to 

faire,Y» 
the advice your father gave me. - - She has ob- 
avis^m, ob- 

tained from the king all the favours she would. 
ienir^Y. grace, f, 

- - My brother might have improved more, 

faire des progres 
hut he has not made all the efforts he could. - - The 

effort^m, 
excessive heat that (we ha've had) this summer, 

chaleur^'ph il afait,ip,j^* 

has caused many diseases. 
eniyY. 

In order to illustrate in a single example the appli- 
cation of the above rules about participles passive, we 
must write, 

J^ai re^u les lettres que 1 have received the letters, 

tons vi^avez ecrites du which you wrote to me 

f;ujet de Vaffaire, que je with respect to the affair 

vous avois proposee ; et which I had proposed to 

apres les avoir lues avee you : and after having 

attention, fai reconnu, reaJ them with attentioni 

comme xous, que, si je I perceived, as you di( 

Pavois entreprise, fy that, if I had undertaket 

aurois trouve des oh- it, I should have met witl 

stacks que je iCavois pas obstacles, which I ha( 

pre V us, n.ot foreseen* 

In this period, regii is indeclinable, because it is not 
preceded by any regimen ; ecrites is declinable, and 
iigrees in gender and number with its absolute regi- 
men, or accusative, expressed by the pronoun relati^ 
que, which precedes the verb and relates to letter's^ 
proposee likewise agrees with que, by which it is pre- 



353 

ceded, and which relates to the word affaire ; lues is 
declinable on account of its regimen les^ which pre- 
cedes it and relates to letters ; reconnu is indeclina- 
ble, because it is not preceded by any regimen to 
which it can relate ; entreprise, on the contrary, is de- 
clinable, and takes the gender and number of the 
conjunctive pronoun /', which is its absolute regimen 
and its antecedent, relating to affaire ; trouve is in- 
declinable, because it is not preceded but followed by 
its absolute regimen obstacles : privus, on the contrary, 
is declinable, because it is preceded by its absolute re- 
gimen que, which relates to obstacles. 

If custom, in any case, has deviated from the preced- 
ing rules, it is sufficient to observe, that they have the 
sanction of the best authors. A little practice will soon 
remove many of these apparent difficulties. 



SECT. VI. 

INDECLINABLE PARTS OF SPEECH. 

Under this head are comprehended adverbs, preposi- 
tions, conjunctions, and interjections, 

OF ADVERBS. 

Adverbs have been distinguished, according to their 
several significatiohs, into adverbs of place, time, quality, 
quantity, number, order, affirmation, negation, doubt, 
interrogation, comparison, collection, separation, &c. 
But this classification, however ingenious, is far from 
being exact : it was therefore judged, that, if those of 
the most frequent use, and which, when compounded, 
form a particular idiom, were earefuily selected, and ar- 
ranged in an alphabetical series, it would be iJiore to 
the advantage of the learner. 
30* 



354 



TABLE OF ADVERBS. 

Ahondamment^ abundantly, plentifully. 

a V Abandon^ at random, in confusion, in disorder. 

D\ihord^ at first, immediately. 

Absolument^ absolutely. 

D^lccrfd^ grant it, done. 

Agreahhment, pleasantly, comfortably, 

Ainsi (de meme), so, thus, in the same manner. 

Aisement, easily. 

Mai aistynent^ with difficulty. 

Dans un an dHci, a year hence. 

Uannee qui vient, the next year. 

AnciennemenL } r • , • .i 

Autrefois, I formerly, anciently. 

En am% friendly. 
a Pamiable^ amicably. 

En arriere, Tomber en arriere^ to fall backward. 
a reculons, Marcher a reculons, to walk backward. 
Assez, enough. 
Assurement^ certainly. 
Aujourd^hui^ to-day. 

Time to ( D^aujourd^ui en huit^ this day se'nnight. 
come. \ D^aujourd'^hui en quinze, this day fortnight. 

Cllya aujourd'^hui huitjours^ this day week, this 
Timel day se'nnight. 

past. \ II y a aujourd^hni quinze jours, this day fortnight. 

f^Ily a aujourd'^hui un an, this day twelve months* 
Mutant, As much, as many. 
ITautant plus, so much the more. 
D^autant moins, so much the less. 

rlut mfsT' \ J^^* ^^' J"** ^^ ""^^^' ^^^^^ ^^^** 

Dorenavant, in future. 

» Pavenir, for the future, hereafter. 

A PAnghise, after the English manner, fashion, or way. 

u PItalienne, after the Italian, <^e, 

u la Frangoise, after the French, <^eo 

■n la Turquey after the Turkish, 4'€» 



355 



EXERCISE ON THESE ADVERBS. 

Our garden produces all kinds of fruits pknii- 

sorte.L 
fully, - - Your sister left all her things in dis- 

laisser^w, 
order, - - You did not know me at first. - - He would 

X)Ouloir^Y, 
absolutely do it. - - If you please, I will go to 

vouloir^Y, 
London with you. Done, - - I hope we shall spend 

passer, v. 
the day pleasantly, - - Have we not spent it so ? - - - 

My brother learns his lessons easily, and I with dif- 
ficulty, - - ^ year hence you will (be able) to speak 
French tolerably well. - - My father says I shall go 
to *France next year, - - - It was done so an^ 
ciently, - - I had the honour of seeing you formerly^ 

but I do not recollect • where I had that pleasure : 

se rappeler^v, 
I believe it was at Mr. P's. who received us so 

friendly, - - Your brother and mine have settled 

regler^v, 
their affairs amicably. - - Make two steps back- 

pas,m, 
ward, - - He cannot see his way who walks back- 
ward, - - Have you played enough ? - - Certainly 

you must be tired. - - We do not expect him 

devoir,v, 

* See the article indefinite, page 41. 



% 



356 

|j to-day, - - If it be fine weather, I shall be back 

de retour 
this day se^nmgl^L - - I shall see you this day fortnight 

if I am well. - - This day week I was (at your house). 

chez vous, 
- - This day month I met your brother. - - I came 

here this day twelve months, - - He has as 

{a, adv. 

mueh money and as many friends as you. - - I was 

so much the more persuaded of what you told me, 

that I dismissed him this day three weeks. - - 

renvoyer^y, 
I will do it so much the less, as I promised him not 

to meddle with that aifair. - - My sister has 

dc se meler,\. c?e,p. 

just as much wit, and is just as amiable as yours. - - 

Your son has given you some trouble, but I 

mais,c, 
hope he will give you pleasure hereafter, - - If you 

forgive him this time, he will not do it for ihQ 

future, - ' In future, I never will trust him 

any more. - - She dresses after the English 

s'^hahiller,v, 
fashion, but she lives after the French way, - - She 

plays after the Italian manner, - - Your sister has o, 



©ap after the Turkish fashion, - - Come hett, 

bonnet ^m, 

go there, look every where. 

cher cherry. 






357 

ADVERBS. 

. 7^^^' , > off, down, down with, below* 
a, or en bas, } 

En badinant^ for fun. 

d beaucoup pres^ nothing near. 

De beaucoup^ by much, greatly. 

Bien^ well, very. 

De bon cceur^ heartily, with a good will. 

Dehonnefoi, Ki^^^e, 

oincerement^ 5 

De bonne heure^ betimes. 

De bonjm, fairly. 

De bon matin, early. 

De bouche, by word of mouth. 

a la bonne hcure, in good time, luckily, w^ell and good'. 

a bon droit, deservedly. 

a bon mar die, cheap. 

a bride abattue, full speed. 

^d et Id, to and fro. 

d cause de quoi, on what account. 

d cela pres, that excepted. 

Cependant, in the meanwhile, nevertheless. 

d cheval, on horseback. 

EXERCISE ON THESE ADVERBS. 

Hats off, gentlemen, and sit down. - - The whole 

army surrendered and laid dozvn their arms 

mettre,\'» 
upon the ramparts of the citadel. - - There is a man 

belozv, w^hom you will see with pleasure. - - Though 

Quoiqite,c* 
we said it for fan, he was very angry with us. - - 

conlre,ip. 
There were many ladies, and we had a great deal of 

pleasure. - - You may say what you please, 

il voics plaira,r. 



358 
but she is nothing near so handsome as her sis- 
ter. - - He has by much increased his fortune. - - - 
Whatever you do, do it welL - - If you do not do it with 
a good will^ I will do it myself. - - He has acted very 
sincerely in that business. - - Do you speak sincerely ? 

- - We will get up betimes, - - Have I not won 

selever,y» gagner^v,'- 

fairly ? - - We will set out carly^ tliat we may arrive 

before the heat of the day. - - It (is 

chaleur,L valoir 

better) to tell it him by word of mouth, than to 
mieux, v. de 

write to him. - - Sir, I have done my exercise. - - Well 

and good, - - He has obtained it deservedly, - - My 

obtenir^Y, 
father has bought a horse ve7y cheap, - - Do you see ■ 

those two horsemen, who come to us full speed ? - - - 

cavalier^ m. 
They wandered to and fro without knowing whither 

to go. - - On what account is he angry with me ? 

- - That excepted, I have nothing to reproach him 

a reprocher,Y, lui 

with. - - I should speak, but, in the meanwhile, 1 

^o> devoir,Y, 

(hold my tongue). - - Miss White is very handsome, 

se taire, v. 
nevertheless, I do not love her. - - - Some went 

to London in a coach, others on horseback, 
en,]^, '^ a 



359 



ADVERBS. 



Combien^ How much, how many, how ? 

Comhien y a-t-il que, ^ 

Combien de terns y a-t-il que, j 

Combmi y avoit-il que, \^^^^^ ^^^^ ^ 

Depuis quand, 

Combien de terns, 

Pendant combien de terns, 

N. B. 1. Hoio much, how many, how, are rendered 
in French by ^ue before an admiration : ex. 

Que vous etes jolie ! How pretty you are ! 

2. We make use of combien y a-t-il que, when the 
action mentioned in the interrogation has not yet ceas- 
ed ; and then the verb, which (in English) is in the 
compound of the present, must be rendered (in French 
by the present of the indicative mood : ex. 

Combien y a-t-il que vous How long have you been 
etes, or, depuis quand in London ? 
ites-vous a Londres ? 

3. If the verb (in English) be in the compound of the 
imperfect, it is to be rendered (in French) by the im- 
perfect of the indicative : ex. 

Combien y avoit-il que vous How long had you been 

etiez, or, depuis quand in London, when he 

etiez-vous a Londres died? 
quand il mounU ? 

4. If the action have entirely ceased, we make use of 
•pendant combien de terns, with the following verb in the 
compound of the present : ex. 

Pendant combien de terns How long were you in 
m}eZ'Vous iti d Londr&s ? London ? 



360 

5. How long^ in the sense' of for what time, is also 
rendered by pendant combien de terns, with the verb in 
the same tense as it is in English : ex. 

Pendant combien de terns How long do you intend 
vous proposez'vous de to stay in Italy ? 
restej' en Italie ? 



EXERCISE ON THESE ADVERBS. - 

How much do you owe him ? - - You see to how 

7nany dangers and how many reproaches we are 

liable. - - - How many times shall I be obliged . to 
eocpose,ip»p. ,dc 

bid you to (be silent) ? - - How troublesome 
dire,y. de se taire^Y* zmporifMw,adj. 

you are ? How sorry I am for having displeased 

de 
you ! - - How much I should be obliged to you, if 

you would grant me that favour ! - - How long 

accorder^v, 
have you been learning French ? - - How long have 

they been in Paris ? - - How long had you be6n in 

London, when you married ? - - How long had you been 

learning Italian, when you wrote to me ? - - How long 

have your parents been in England ? -, - How long 

had your brother been in Germany, when we left 

it ? How long were you in Holland ? - - How long 

did your cousin learn the mathematics ? - - How long 



361 

have that gentleman and lady been waiting foK 

me ? - - How /ong has your relation been dead ? - - 

How long had he been in his regiment, when he 

died ? - - How long was he ill ? - - Hoio long does your 

uncle intend to leave his son on the continent ? - - 

se p7'oposer de 
How long had your father and mother proposed 

to stay in America, when they first went thither ? - - 

de 

Why are you proud of your beauty ? You do not 

s'^enorgueillir^v, 
know how long it will last. 

ADVERBS. 

Combien y a-t-il dHci ? How far is it hence ? 

Dans combien de terns ? How long will it be before ? 

Comme, as, like, how. 

Comme il faut, soundly, as it should be. 

Comment, how. 

a conire-cceur, against our will. 

a contre-sens, the contrary, or wrong way, in a wrong 

sense. 

a contre-tems, unseasonably. 

a corps perdu, hand over head, desperately. 

« c6t6, "i 

a Vecart. f . , 
^ «„ . > aside. 

a part, { 

a quariier, j 

a cote Vun de Vautre, abreast- 

De ce cote-ci, on this side. 

De ce cotC'la, on that side. 

Dt cote et d'^auire, up and down, about. 

De tons cotes, on all sides, on every side* 

Coup sur coup, one after anotheiv 

31 



362 

EXERCISE ON THESE ADVERBS. 

How far is it hence to Dover ? - - How long will it 6$ 

^before you send me back the books I lent you ? - - • 

They are punished as they deserve. - - My father's 

liouse is like yours, it is very badly built. - - - 

ma/, adv. 
See how it rains. - - Have they not been beaten 

soundly ? - - This exercise is done as it should he, 

- - How can you speak thus ? - - We went to the play 

against our will. - - You hold your book the wrong 

way. - - Your brother took in a wrong sense all 

that I said to him. - - Our master arrived very 

cc que 

unseasonably. - - The French rushed on the 

fondre^y. 
Austrians desperately, - - Put that aside. - - I 
Autrichien^m, 
perceive two ships sailing abreast. - - • Let us walk 

^ this side, and our companions will go on thai 

side. - - They run up and down all day, and 

do nothing but play. - - How dare you run about 

ne que 

while your mother is waiting for you ? - - 

pendant que^c. 
The enemies were victorious on all sides. - - We 

hear on every side, that peace will very 

apprendre,Y* 

soon take place. - - They drank three bottles of 

avoir lieu,Y. 
BurguHdj wine one after another. 






363 

ADVERBS. 

Davantage^ more. 

Dedans > ^.^^^. i„^araiy. 
En dedans^ ) ' "^ 

^^''""' ■ 1 without. 
iLn dehors^ ^ 

Dejd, already. 

Dcmain, to-morrow. 

Le lendtmain^ the day after. 

Apres demain, the day after to-morrow. 

Dtrnierement^ lately. 

Ci-dessus, above. 

Par dessus, above, over and abov^. 

n J > underneath. 

Jiu dessous, J 

a decouvert, openly. 

c e7m, / j^^j^ , halves. 

a moitie^ 3 ' -^ 

d dessein, on purpose, designedly. 

a droite, to the right. 

a double entente, with a double meaning. 

Encore, again, yet, as yet. 

Enjin^ at last. 

Ensuite^ afterward, then. 

Entierernent, entirely. 

Expres, on purpose. 

d Vecarf^ out of the way. 

a Pentour^ round about. 

a Venvers^ the wrong side outwards. 

a Penvi^ in emulation. 

aux environs^ thereabouts. 

En nulle manure^ in no wise. 

En plein jour. ) , x • i j 

IP ^ 1 ■ :j- > at noon, at mid-day. 
En plem midi^ 3 

En terns et lieu^ in a proper time and place. 

En tous cas, whatever may happen. 

En un din d'^(Bil^ in the twinkling of an eye« 

En sursaut^ suddenly. 



364 

EXERCISE ON THESE ADVERBS. 

1 know how that happened, talk no more of it. - * 
Look within and jou shall see it. - - She was within 
and I was without, - - Have you already done your ex- 
ercise ? - - I will call upon you to-morrow, and 

passerby. c^er,p. 
.ihe day after we will go and see my uncle. - • We 

•will pay you the day after to-morrow if we can. - - 

JL was lately (at your house). - - You will finS it above, 
chez vous* 

- - I like your garden and walks above all, 

aimer^T, 

- - Look underneath this stone. • - Underneath 

you will find something curious. - - Speak and show 

yourself openly, - - We were half dead. - - I never de 

things by halves, - - They killed him on purpose, - - 

They did gay so designedly, - - Go fo the right, - - 

^y brother always speaks with a double meaning, - - 

I tell the truth, yet he does not believe me. - - At 

last the rebels retired into the woods with 

se retirer^y, dans^p, bois.m. 

a great loss. - - Do first what you have to do^ 

pertt^i, Faire^v, 
afterward you shall go out. - - He did it entirely 

to please you, - - I came on purpose to see you. 



I 



365 

- - Take all these papers, and put them out of the 

way* - - How can you find the place, if you always 

turn round about ? - - You have put on your 

mettre,v. 
waistcoat the wrong side outwards, - - My brother 
veste^L 
and yours work in emulcdon of one another, - - - 

He lives in London or thereabouts, - - I will do it in 

no wise* - - I was stopped at noon, - - We will tell him 

what we think in a proper time and place, - - What' 

ever may happen, I (do not care) for it. - - He did 

56 soucier,v, 
it in the tivinkling of an eye, - - This morning I 

awoke suddenly, but I soon fell asleep again^ 

s''6veiller,y, 

and did not wake again till seven o'clock. 

se r6veiller,y, 

ADVERBS. 

Facilement, easily. 
Fidelement, faithfully. 

^^%f^'hnafile. 
De fie, 5 

a la fois, together. 

Combien de fois ? how many times ? 

IJne fois, once. 

Deux fois, twice. 

Trois fois, thrice, three times. 

Tant de fois, so many times. 

Par fois, now and then. 

Fortement, strongly. 

Fort, very. 

Fori et ferme^ stoutly. 

31* 



366 

a fond, thoroughly. 

De fond en cornhle^ from top to bottom, to all intents 

and purposes. 
De front, abreast. 
Galamment, genteelly, gallantly. 
Gouttc a goutte, by drops. 
Guere ou Gucres, (with ne before the verb,) little, but 

little. 
a la hate, in haste. 

7 ' / ^/ ' [ "i^ there, up stairs, above stairs. 

DVieure en heure, hourly, every hour. 
Hier, yesterday. 
Hier-au'soir, last night. 
Avant-hicr, the day before yesterday. 



EXERCISE ON THESE ADVERBS. 

Your brolflaer learns easily, but he forgets ahnosj 

oublier, v. 
as easily as he learns. - - In the last battle our troops 

fought (with the) French, all the soldiers and 
tivrer,Y, aux 

officers did their duty faithfully : the enemy sur- 
rendered at discretion, and were obliged to (march 

de sor- 
out) of the country in a fie, - - Let every one speak 
ivr,Y, 

in his turn, for if you speak all together, how can 
a 
1 hear what you say ? - - How many times did I tell 

you to write to jour parents ? - - I spoke to him only 

de 
ence, but I saw him twice, - - My father generally'*' 

goes to Germany thriu a year. - - I told it you thru 



367 

times. - - 1 saw him 50 many times, - - Do you go 

often to London ? I go now and then, - - The king 

strongly opposed the enemy in the action, where 

. s'^opposer a melee^f. 

he fought gallantly, - - Your little sister is very 

combattre^ v. 
pretty. - * In all that they undertake they always act 

stoutly, - - My brother knows French thoroughly, - - 

They demolished the house from top to bottom, - - 

I travelled in a post-chaise drawn by three horses 

abreast, - - Always behave genteelly, - - Your brothers 

came to sec us, and we received them politely, - - 

The wine runs from the hogshead by drops, - - Give 

him but little wane. - - ^ Never ^ do^ things in 

Ke jamais ^2i^\. 
haste, - - Is Mr. D. abom stairs ? - - Go up stairs, you 

will find what you (look for) in the drawer 

cherxher^v, iiroir^m, 

behind the door. - - After having (waited for) him 
derriere^ip, attendre^v, 

hourly, he arrived at last. - - We see the army 

increasing every hour, - - I went yesterday to London. 

grossir^y, 

- - It rained very much last night, and it has frozen 

very hard this morning. - - T'he day before yesterday 

tres fort 

I met your brother, who was riding on horses 

se prommer,Y, 
back* 



Tr 



368 



ADVERBS. "^ 

Ici^ here. 

Ici autour^ hereabouts. JMM 

Icipres, hard bj. I^H 

jD'z'ci, hence. -^^m 

DHci en quinze jours^ within a fortnight. tIH 

Pcfr ici, this way. 

Par ici par Id, here and there. 

a Vinstant, immediately, instantly* 

Jamais, ever. 

J^e jamais, never. 

a jamais, for ever. 

Justement, just, precisely. 

Jusqu'd quand ? how long ? 

JusquHci, hitherto, as far as this. 

Jusque-ld, so far, as far as that. 

Jusqu'cix ? how far ? 

Dejour, in the day time. 

De jour a autre, ) r i . j j -i 
rt '^- ' ' > irom day to day, daily. 

JUe jour en jour, y •' jt j 

De deux en deux jours, ^ 

De deux jours Vun, > every other day. 

Tous les deux jours, 3 

Dans quinze jours, in a fortnight. 

EXERCISE ON THESE ADVERBS. 

Did I not tell you to stay here? - - How 

many miles is it hen^e to Hampton-Court ? - • 

(There must) be a great deal of game here* 

II doit,\, gibier,m» 

ahouts, - - How long has he lived hard by? • ' How 

demturer,Y. 
far is it hence to Canterbury ? - • I will call upon your 

Cantorbery 
brother within a fortnight* - - Come this way. - - Youf 



369 

books are scattered here and there, - - Come back 

e/?a?'5,adj. 
immediately* - - They instantly invited him to dine 

with them. - - I do not believe that he ever will follow 

(by the subj.) 
your advice. - - My father never will see him again. 
conseil^m, 

- - Great men will for ever be celebrated in history. 

- - (This is) just what I say. - - How long^ O 

Foi/a,adv. 
Catiline, will you abuse our patience ? • - - 

abuser, V, de 
Hitherto the enemy has done nothing considerable. 

- - Learn this piece of poetry as far as that, - - 

po6sie^f. 
How far will y@u go ? - - You always come to see me 

by night, why do not you come in the day-time ? - - 

de 

We expect from day to day to receive news from 

de 
the Continent. - - We are daily exposed to great 

dangers. - - My master comes here every other day, 

- - I shall go to France and Italy in a fortnight, 

ADVERBS. 

La, there, thither. 
Lcl aiUour, thereabouts. 
La has, yonder. 
De Id, 1 ., 

Par la, that way. 

Loin, far. 

JDe loin, afar off, at a distance. 



370 

Long-tems^ a long while, long time, 
Lors, then, at the time. 

D 1 > then. 

Des'lors^ from that time. 

Mal^ ill, wrong, 

Mainienant^ now, 

Mediocreinent^ indifferentlj. 

Meme^ even, yet. 

De meme^ so, in the same manner. 

Mieux^ better. 

De mieux en mieux^ better and better. 

Moins, less. 

Moins — Moins^ the less — the less. 

d moins ^ for less, at less. 

Au moins, du moins. ) . i . j. x i. i x 
rri . ^ ' ^. ' > at least, at the least. 

JE?i moi?i5 c?e Wen, in a trice. 
Naivement^ plainly, ingenuously. 
Jfaturellement, naturally, by nature. 
au Natur&l^ to the life. 
JVe, ni, m, neither — nor. 
Non pas, ne pas, ne point, non, no, not*. 
De nuit, by night, in the night-time. 
Obtigeamrnent, kindly, obligingly. 
Oil, where. 

OBSERVATION ON THE ADVERB Oii. 

The adverb of place, Ow, where, is most commonly 
and more elegantly turned into French by que after the 
two other adverbs ici, here. Id, there, to prevent the hia- 
tus caused by the meeting of the two vowels ; and some- 
times after nouns expressing the place where something 
has happened, been done or committed, especially when 

* Fas, with the negation ne before it, merely expresses a negative,! 
without affirming it, whereas point denies and affirms at once. Pui 
often denies but partly, or with some modification ; point, on th 
contrary, always denies absolutely, totally, and without any reserve* 



371 

the sentence begins with the verb e/re, to be, used im- 
personally, as, it is^ it was^ it will 6e, &c. ; ex. 

Cest id que nous Vatten- It is here (where) we are 

dons, waiting for him. 

Ce fat la que je le vis pour It was there (where) I saw 

la premiere fois, him for the first time. 

Ce fat en plein senat que It was in full senate 

Cesar fat inhumaine- (where, or in which) 

ment assassine, Cassar was inhumanly 

murdered. 



EXERCISE ON THESE ADVERBS. 

It was there or thereabouts that I met him. - - Do 

you see that tree yonder ? - - Thence I went to France, 

and soon after to Germany. - - If you go that loay, 

apres^p. 
you may call at Mr. H's. - - We are jeifar from 

pouvo%r,Y» passer chez 
©ur house. - - I see many ships afar off, - ^ I saw him 

yesterday, but it was at a distance. - - You made me 

wait a long while, - - The fight lasted a long 

comhat^TCi, 
time. - - He was ill at the time of my arrival. - - Then^ 

I believe you. - - From that time I began t© 

commencer, v. 
speak to him. - - Does your son behave ill now ? - - 

When I do wrong, I repent immediately, - - They are 

mal 
now in England. - - The tree that I planted grows 

indifferently. - - Virtue is amiable even in an enemy. 



372 

You blame him, and nevertheless you act m the 

same manner, - - You work httter than your sister. - - 

She reads French hetter and better, - - - My cousin 

has less money and merit. - - - The less you work 

(by the fut.) 
the less you will improve. - - - He will not do 

faire des pr ogres. 
it for less. - - - There are now in America 30,000 men 

at the least. - - - If you cannot come, at least write 
to us. - - - He replied plainly to all my questions, and 

I am much pleased with him. - - - What he does, he 

cfe, p. 
does it naturally, - - - Miss Nichol's picture is 

portrait^ m. 
drawn to the life. - - - I will neither see him nor 
fait,^.^. 
speak to him. - - - My mother and sisters (were to) go 

devoir^ v. 
next week to France, but my father says, that he 

neither can nor will expose them to the caprice of the 

vouloir,Y. 
fashion which now reigns in that country. - - - (1 asked 

Je- 
for) a glass of wine, and not a glass of water. 

mander^y. 
- - - Will you come with me ? ^o, for you alwayg 

travel hy night, • • Always speak kindly. - - Where did 
you meet them? - - It was here Wicre I saw your brother 
for the la«t time* - - • It was at Caernarron zvhere 



373 

Edward the Second was born, the first who bore the 

naitre^r. 
title of Prince of Wales. - - It was near the walls of 

Galles^L 
Corunna in Spain, where (or near which) the brave 

Sir John Moore was wounded, and died a 

chevalier^m, 

few hours after ; England will long regret the loss 

of that great general. It was there also where that 

famous battle was fought ^ in which both our 

se donner^Y, 
officers and soldiers showed so much courage, and 

performed so many prodigies of valour. - - It is not 

amidst the pleasures of this world where -. (or amidst 
^a7'mi. p. 
- which) we find happiness, it is in the bosom of inno- 

5eiH,m. 
.^^^cence and peace where (or in which) we ought to 

(look for) it. - - It is in the county of Huntingdon 

chercher^y, provincc^L 

where the best cheeses in the kingdom are made. 

ADVERBS. 

JD'ow ? whence ? 

Par ou, through what place ? which way ? through 

which ? 
Old J yes. 

D^ouire en outre, through. 
Pas a pas, step by step. 
De part et cfautre, on both sides. 
J^ulle part^ no-where, any-where. 
a peine, hardly, scarcely. 
Pek'Tnele, helter-skelter. 

32 



374 

Peut-itre^ maj be, perhaps. 

Pen, little. 

Peu dpeuy by little and little, by degrees. 

ctpeupres, ^ ) ^^^^^^ ^^j.^ jj^^j. thereabouts. 

a peu de chose pres, ^ i j ^ 

'Dans peu^ in a short time. 

Depuis peu^ lately, not long ago, a little while ago. 

a pied^ on foot. 

kpuds nuds, barefoot, barefooted. 

£u pis allej\ let the worst come to the worst. 

De pis en pis ^ worse and worse. 

Deplein gre^ with a good will, freely. 

De plein pied^ on the same floor. 

a pleines wam^, largely. 

Plus, more, above. 

Plus — Plus, the more — the more. 

Plus quHl rCenfaut, more than enough. 

Au plus, tout au plus, at the most. 

Deplus en plus, more and more. 

» plus forte raison, much rather, much more so. 

EXERCISE ON THESE ADVERBS. 

Did my brothers tell you whence they came ? • - 

Which way are they gone ? - - The hole through 

which they (made their escape) was so small, that I 

s''echapper, v. 
do^not know how they could get out. - - Do you knox^ 

sortir,v» 
your lesson ? Yes, Sir. - - The barrel is pierced 

baril,m, 
through. - - I will follow you step by step. - - 

The battle was cruel and bloody, and 

conibat,m» sanglant,^dj, 

kept up a long time with an equal advantage 

se maintenir,v* 
on both sides, - - I can find my book no-where, - - 



375 

There is no going any-where in winter. - - He speaks 
so low, that I can hardly hear what he says. - - The 

Spaniards pursued them so closely that they 

Espagnol^m, de si pres ^2id\\ 

entered the town helter-skelter, - - I shall see you 

perhaps to-morrow. - - He has little money. - - If you 

give me a verb, I will learn it by little and little, - - 

She is as tall as you, or thereabouts, - - I heard that 

your sister will (be married) in a short time, - - Have 

se marier 
you heard from your mother lately ? - - I received a 

letter from her not long ago, - - I was on foot, and 

he was in a coach. - - I often pity the poor little 

chimney sweepers, who \\3\k barefooted in 

cheminee^L ramoneur^m, 

winter.- - - Let the loorst come to the worst, I will 

(get rid) of it. - - Your brother writes worse 

se defaire^y, 

and worse, - - He submitted to it with a good will, - - 

se soumdtre 
All our rooms are on the same floor, - - He is so cha- 
ritable, that he gives alms largely, - - I shall 

aumone^L 
never more complain of the rude reception 

malhonnete,d.dj, accueil^m, 
which your uncle has given to my father. - - 1 have 

/ai/,p.p. 
written three letters, neither more nor less, - - You 

are above twenty years old, - - The more we arc 



37e 

above others, the more it becomes us to be 

au dessus de^\i» 

modest and humble. - - You give me more than 

enough, - - You study riiiore than ever.^ - - How many 

coats have you ? I have six at the most, - - I 'shall 

endeavour to deserve your kindness more and morei, 

- - If I have done that to oblige my friend, I 

pour^^p. 
would much more so do it for my relations. 

ADVERBS. 



Pluiot, sooner. 

Point du tout, not at all. 

i, point nomm6, seasonably. 

Tout a pointy in the nick of time. 

apropos, sCfisonablj. 

Pourquoi ? or que ne ? why ? 

De pres, near, nearly, narrowly. 

Prmur,mmt, ) g^^ ' j^ ^^^ g^^^ j^^^_ 

±jn premier lieu,. 3 i^ ^ 

Des a present, from this moment. 

Pfesque, almost, hardly. 

Presque jamais, hardly ever. 

Presque toujour s, most commonly. 

De propQs delibire, on purpose, purposely, deliberately. 

Par casfortuit, by chance, aceidentally. 

Par derriere, behind. 

Par' dessus le marche, into the bargain. 

Par en has, downward. 

Par en haut, upward. 

Par malice, through ill-nature, out of ill-nature.- 

Par megarde, unawares. 

Par terre, upon the ground, down. 



377 

EXERCISE ON THESE ADVERBS. 

My father arrived yesterday sooner than we ex- 

ne 
pected him. - - How do you like that book ? Kot at 

ail, - - You come very seasonably^ and your brother 

came in the nick of time, - - He speaks little, but he 

speaks seasonably, - - fVhy do you not learn your 

lessons better ? - - fVJiy do not you come yourself ? 

- - Your dog is so snarling, that there is no ap- 

hargnenx^adj, 
preaching him ?i€a?*. - - He narroidy escaped 

being killed, - - In tli^ first place, I must telL 

d'etre^v. 

you, that I shall punish you, if you do not 

behave better. - - From this moment I begin to 

se comport er,v, a 

believe that you are altered. - - You are almost 

change, p.p. 
as tali as I am. - - He is hardly ever at home. - - Wo 

dine most commonly between three and four o'clock. 
e?i^re,p. 

- - They killed him purposely, - - I met him by chance, 

• - That has happened accidentally, - - He struck 

f rapper, v. 
his enemy behind, - - He gave me three jards qi' 

muslin into the bargain, - - Shall i begin donn- 

mousseline^f, 

zvard or upward ? - - Begin downward, - - He has 

torn my book through ilhidture. - - If I have 

d^chirer^Y, 



S78 

done him any harm, certainly I did it unawares, - - 

I always find your hooks and hat upon the ground. 

- - It was Peter who threw me down, 
jetter^Y, 

ADVERBS. 

Quand ? when ? 

Depuis quand ? how long is it since ? 

Que ? why ? how ? 

Quelquefois, sometimes. 

a quoi hon ? to what purpose 2 

Rarement^ seldom. 

Au reste^ } i. ±^i^ t. 
ri • ' > as to the rest, 
jJu reste, 5 

a rebours^ the wrong way. 

a la renverse, backward, upon one's back,- 

d recidop.s, backward. 

d rez de chaussee, even with the ground." 

Sens devant derriere^ preposterously. 

Sens dessus dessous, topsy-turvy. 

De tons sensj \ ^ r 

De taus les scns^ ) J J' 

Separement, separately. 

Seulementy only.* 

De ^ang froid, in cold blood. 

De suite, together, one after another* 

Dans la suite. ) /v j 

T, 1 V ? afterward. 
Far la suite, J 

ISur le champ, directly, upon the spot* 

Suremeni, safely. 

EXERCISE ON THESE ADVERBS, 

When shall I have the pleasure of seeing you ? - - 

How long is it since you lived in London ? - - Why do 

d 

* Onl]/ is also expressed, in French, by m before the verb and gw 
After it, ^hen it becoaaes a p«njuactieB» 



379 

you not come to see us sometimes ? - - To ivhat pur- 
pose shall I write to him ? - - He writes to me very 
seldom, - - As to the rest, do as you please. - - You do 
every thing the wrong way, - - - You hold your 
book the wrong way, - - He fell upon his hack, - - 
If you walk backward^ you will fall backward, - - Our 
eating-room is even zuith the ground, - - You put all 
your things preposterously, - - She has left (every 

thing) topsy-turvy, - - You may find it every- 

pouvoir^y, 
where, - - He defeated them separately, - - I only saw 

him once, - - He committed the murder in cold 

meurtre^m, 
blood, - - They go together, - - He will give you much 

pleasure afterward, - - Do directly what I bid 

4ire,y, 
you. - - We arrived safely, 

ADVERBS. 

Tant, so much, so many. 

Tant mieux^ so much the better. 

Tant pis^ so much the worse. 

TantOt, by and by, sometimes. 

Tantot — Tantot^ sometimes — sometimes. 

Bientot^ 5 

Tot ou tard^ one time or other, sooner or later, soon or 

late. 
Tant soit peu^ very little, ever so little. 
Tard, late. 




380 

a fems^ time enough, in proper time. 

De long'tems, for a long time, this long while. 

^e terns en terns, ) ^^^ ^^^ ^^^ ^^^^ ^j^^ ^^ ^;^g_ 

jDe terns a autre, y ^ 

a tort, wrongfully. 

rt tort eu a droit, right or wrong. 

a tort et a travers, at random. 

7Vop, too much. 

Toujours, always, ever. 

Pour toujours, for ever. 

Tous les jours, every day. 

Tour a tour, by turns. 

Tout, quite, wholly, thoroughly, entirely.* 

Tout a coup, suddenly, on a sudden, all at once. 

Tout has, softly, with a low voice. 

Tout d^un coup, suddenly, on a sudden, all at once. 

EXERCISE ON THESE ADVERBS. 

He has so much money, and so many goods, 

that he does not know what to do (with them.) - i 

en, pro. 1 

(It is) so much the better for me, but it will be sm 

C^est,Y, ce 

much the worse for you. - - My father will come back 

reven{r,v. 
by and by. - - Sometimes you write well, so?nc- 

iimes you write very badly. - - My father says I shall 
50on go to France. - - Have patience, you will suc- 
ceed one time or other, - - The sun is the em- 
blem of truth, which dispels, sooner or later, the 

. dissipe.r,Y* 

/ * ihi;- adverb tctkes the nature of a noun adjectiye, an^/becomes 
declinable, in French, when placed before another adjectivl feminine 
beginning with a consonant : ex. ' * 

Ces femnies paroisscient tout These women seemed quite fright- 
t^'ray^cs et iou'us co'mternees, gaed und quite dismajcd 



381 
vapours of slander. - - Did he give you any meat ? 

- - He gave me -oery little* - - You arrived late^ but I 

came in proper time* - - I have not heard from my 

brother for a long time, - - Come and see us now and 

then. - - You accuse him wrongfully. - - Right or 

wrong he will speak, and alvi'ays speaks at 

vouloir^v. 
random. - - Give him a little money, but never give 

him too much, - - You always, contradict me when I 

speak. - - O my children ! be ever good, and you will be 

ever happy. - - I bid you adieu /or ever. - - I go every 

dire^ v. 
day to town. - - We will dance by turns, - - I am 

quite tired with repeating the same things. - - My 

de 
sisters were quite transported with joy when they 

heard the happy news of the victory. - - Misfortunes 

come sometimes suddenly upon us. - - Speak softly, 

^<?^ 

- - A storm arose . suddenly, and all the sailors 

s^elever^Y. 
were quite frightened. - - The ladies I saw at the 

a 
play were quite young and agreeable. - - He has more 

brilliancy than solidity. - - Science is estimable. 
hrillant^m, solide,m, 

but virtue is more so. 

davantage,)^dy. 



382 

ADVERBS. 

Tout a fait, quite. 

7*0?^; d Pheure, this minute, presently. 

Tout droit, straight along. 

Tout de ban, in good earnest. 

Tout de long, .all along. 

Tout franc, frankly, freely. 

Tout haut, aloud. 

Tout outre, through and through. 

a tout bout de champ, } , , 

- , -^ ' > at every turn. 

ei tous coups, J *' 

d tous egards, in all respects. 

De toutes ses forces, with all his or her might. 

Par tout, every-where. 

Par tout oil, wherever. 

Vite, ) . , , 

Vitemmt, I 1"'<=k'y- 

Auvif, '] to the quick. 

d vide, empty. 

Au plus vile, with all speed. 

Void, here is, behold. 

Voild, there is, behold, 

d vue d^ceil, perceptibly. 

F, there, therein, within, thither. 

EXERCISE ON THESE ADVERBS. 

You are quite altered. - - I will do it presently* - - 

If you do not come this minute, I shall go and 

fetch you. - - Go straight along, - - Do you be- 

chercher,v. 

lieve it in good earnest ? - - He was lain down all 

cowc/ie,p.p. 
along, - - He acts frankly, and speaks aloud. - - He 

ran him through and through, - - She speaks 

percer,v. 




at evei-y iurn^ without knowing what she says. - - 

sans^p. savoir^y. 
She is better than her sister in all respects, - - He 

struck me with all his might. - - I have (looked 

■f rapper, Y. cher- 

for) you every-zohere, - - I will follow you wherever 

cher^v. 

you go, - - Set out quickly. - - Her misfoTtunes - 

(by the fut.) malheur^m. 

touch me to the quick, - - The coach was returning 

empty. - - Go zcith all speed to Mrs. Lucas, and 

c/i€2',p. 
tell her to come directly, - - Here is my room, and 

de 
there is yours. - - These children grow percep- 

grandir^Y, 
iibly, - - Go thither instantly. 



SECT. VII. 

OF PREPOSITIOJ^S. 

Prepositions are divided into the three following 
classes. First, those that govern the genitive or abla- 
tive case. Secondly, those that govern the dative. And, 
lastly, those that govern the accusative. 

First, the following govern the genitive or ablative. 

Autour de, about, round. 

a cause de, because of, on account of. 

a cause de vous, de lui, d'^elh^ de nous, &c. on your, his, 

her, our, S/c. account. 
^ coti de, aside, by. 

d couvert de, free, secure, or screened from* 
ajleur de, close to, even with. 
^ moins Je, under.- 



^ft 



) 

> on this side. 

'5 5 



384 

a force c?e,* by dint of. 

a raison de^ at the rate of. 

a Vabri cZe, sheltered from. 

a Pegalde, to, in comparison. 

el regard c?e, with regard, with respect, as to, concerning. 

a lafaveur c?e, by means of. 

a IHnsgu Je, without the knowledge of, unknown to. 

a la maniere de. } . a. xi, r x.- c 

^ J 77 '> in or after the manner or lashion 01. 
a la mode de 5 

a Vo'pposite de. } . , 

rr- - • 1 > over-agamst. 
yis a VIS de, 5 ° 

Au dec a de. 

En deqa de, 

Au deld de, on that side, on the other side. 

Au dehors de, out, without. 

Au dessus de, above, over, upon. 

Au dessous de, under, below, beneath. 

Au devant de, before. 

Aller ail devant de, to go to meet. 

Au derriere de, behind, in the back part. 

Au dedans de, in, within. 

Aulieude, instead of. 

Au milieu de, in the middle of. 

Auprix de, en comparaison de,m comparison to. 

Aux environs de, about, round about. 

Ensuite de, after. 

Faute de, for want of. 

a la hauteur de, (sea term), off. 

Hors de, out of. 

Le long de, along. 

Loin de, far from. 

Pres or proche de. } • 1. u 

Auprcsde, ' | near, or mgh, by. 

Pour Pamour de moi, de lui, dhlle, de vous, 8lC, for 

my sake, for his, her, your sak%, 4' c. 
To7it aupres de, close, hard by. 
a Pepreuve de, proof, (able to resist). 



* This preposition is sometimes Englished by loith : ex. 
II pleurc a force de rire^ He cries with laughing. 



385 



EXERCISE ON THESE PREPOSITIONS. 

Come this way ; we shall walk round the meadow. - • 

prairie, f. 
I have sent nothing to your brother because of his idle- 
ness, hut I forgive him on your account* - - Sit down by 

that lady's sister. - - Endeavour to set yourself 

mettre, v. 
free from blame. - - We are not yet secure from all 

danger. - - Cut that sorrel even with the ground. 

oseille^ f. 
- - He is become a very good master by dint of 

study and practice. - ~ He will not sell it uyider 

vouloir^v. 
twelve guineas. - - My brother bought yesterday 

twenty pair of silliC^stockings at the rate of fourteen 

shillings and sixpence a pair. - - Under that tree 

Sous^p, 
we shall be sheltered from the rain. - - Your horse 

(is worth) very little in comparison of his. - - With 
valoir^v, 

regard to what you say, I do not mind it, 

se soucier^v, en 

" - All the prisoners (made their escape) by means of 

s^echapper^ v. 
the darkness of the night. - - Your brother is 

obscuriti^ f. 
gone to London without the knowledge of your 

mother. - - He (left off) Latin unknown to his 

quitter ^y» 
father. - - Now the English ladies (dress themselves) 

s^habiller^Y* 
after the French fashion* - - Mrs. Tart lives in 

deymurer^y, 
33 



386 

the Strand over-against' Catharine-street. ^ - We now 

live on this side of the river. - - Do not you say that 

you met my father on the other side of the bridge ? 

- - Why did you stay out of the house ? - - Mrs. A. 

is very proud, she thinks herself above every body, 

se croire 
and consequently she (looks upon) every body as 

regarder^v, 
beneath her. - - Did you observe the elegant 

remarquer,\. 
lady who was in the box below you ? - - There 

loge,f. 
is a large tree before the house. - - I am 

going to r.ieet my aunt, will you accompany me ? - - 

My uncle has a rich plantation in the back 

part of Virginia. - - There is a fine statue within the 

garden. - - He took my hat instead of his. - - Let us . 

go in the middle of the meadow. - - My house (is 

va- 
good for) nothing in comparison of hers. - - He 
TozV,v. 
walks two or three times a * day about the garden. - - 

/ow,f. 
We drank tea, after which we went to 

prendre^Y, gwoi, pro. 

the play. - - f can do nothing for want of money. - - 

They were off the Cape of Good Hope when they 

were taken. - - Do not push me out of the 

pousser. v. 

* Remember the observations after the article wn, itne^ a or aw* 
page 4S. 



i 






387 

room. • - He is gone along the river. We are stilt 

far from our house. - - I met your friend Mr. A, 

yiear the church. - - My mother wa& buried nigh this 

marble pillar. - - He passed by me without knowing 

sans^ip, connoitre 
me. - - I do it for your sake as well as for theirs. 

- - My best friend lives close to the Royal Exchange, 

demeurer 
and he lived formerly close to St. James's palace. - - 

The officers and soldiers were lodged in barracks 

caserne,^, 
cannon and bomb-proof. - - My shoemaker very 
canon, m. 6om6e,f.pl. 

much wanted to make me a pair of boots water- 

desirer^v, 
proof but I had not money enough to pay 

pour, p. 
him. 

Secondly, the following govern the dative, 
Conformement^ according, pursuant. 

>«5e?«, J *^"' ^^*^^' ^^^" *^' ^' ^^^ ^'' *^- 
Par rapport a, with respect, on account. 
Quant «, as for, as to. 



m. 



EXERCISE ON THESE PREPOSITIONS. 

A candid and sincere man always speaks and acts 

according to what he thinks. - - He has been punished 

pursuant to an act of parliament. - - Yesterday we 

parhmcnt^m, 
waited for him till five o'clock in the morning. - ^- 

dii 



•388 
They foaght with obstinacy on both sides until tfe 

beginning of the night. - - If I had not stopped him, 
entree, f, 

he would have gone even to Dover. - - We accompa- 
nied them as far as Rochester, and they pursued 
their way to Canterbury, - - I will do it zoith respect 
to you, but never on account of them. - - As for me 
I will not give him a penny. - - As for us we were 
very much dissatisfied, I assure yoti. - - As to what 

people may say, I do not care for it. 

pouvoiryV. (fut.) se soucier,v» 

Thirdly, the following require the accusative, 

Apres^ after* 

D^apres, after.* 

Avant, before. 

Avec, with. 

o travers, cross, through. 

Chez, in, to, at, among. 

Chez moi, chez toi, chez lui, chez elle, chez ncus^ &c. at (ra 

to my, thy, his, her, our, <^c. house'. 
Conire, against. 
'Dans, in, into, within. 
,De, about, through. 
.Depuis, since, from. 
Derriere, behind. 
i}e>, from. 
Devjont, before. 
De dessus, from the top. 
De dessous, from under, from beneath. 
Durant, during. . . 

5. * We make use of this preposition in the following sense only : — ' 

llpeint dPujprcA %m bon maitre. He paints after a good master. 



389 

Eriy in, into, like, as, at. 
Eiitre^ between. 

Envers, towards, with regard to, 
Environ, about. 
Excepte, ^ 

Horsy > except, but, save. 
Horrais, 3 

Moyennant, for, provided. 
ono san,i notwithstanding, in spite of. 

Outre, beside. 

Par, by, through. 

Par deed, on this side. 

Par deld, on that side. 

Par derriere, behind. 

Par dessus, above, over. 

Par dessous, under, below. 

Parmi, among. 

Pendant, during, for. 

Pour, for. 

Sans, without. 

Savf, saving, but with. 

Selon, } J' i 

c< . ' > accordinff to. 
bmvant, 3 ° 

Sous, under. 

Sur, upon, about. 

Touchant, concerning, about. 

Ve7's, towards, to. 

EXERCISE ON THE,SE PREPOSITIONS. 

He arrived here an hour after you. - - Miss A. 

paints after nature. - - Let me drink before you. - - 

Laisser.Y. 
Did you not see her walk loith her father ? - - It was 

the ancient Britons, who cut a road through 

chemln,m. 
this mountain. - - Such was the eustojrn amons tjte 
33* 



390 

Romans. - - I was going to your house : but as I have 

met jou, we will go to my house., where we shall dine. 

- - Do not lean against that wall. - - Go and 

s^appuyer^Y. k>^ 

take a walk in the garden. - - I am going into my 

faire un tour 
room. - - Keep yourself within the limits of de- 

cency. - - I spoke to your father about your affairs. - - 

His father died through grief. - - I have not heard 

from her since her departure. - - Go into my room ; 

you will find a letter behind the looking-glass ; 

miroir^m. 
(b'e so kind as) to bring it to me. - -.. From this mo- 
avoir la honie, de 
ment I believe you. - - Do not put 3^ourself before 

me, - - We saw the camp from the top o/the hill. - - 
I saw it from under a tree. - - He behaved well during 
jour absence. - - My sister is in England. - - He be- 
haved like an honest man in that affair. - * He acts as 

ten 

ii tender father who loves you. - - Tell nobody what 
passed between you and me. - - Be not unjust towards 

your neighbours. - - It was ahout four o'clock when 

/jroc/imwjm.sing. 
we set out. - - Take all that you please except my 

sword. - " I giife you aU my books., 6wi the Histi^y of 



■mt 



391 

France. - - They were all drowned sate my friend. - - 

iioyer^v. 
He will do it for two guineas. - - I walk every day 

notwithstanding the bad weafher. - - I hope you will 

succeed in your undertaking in spite of Mrs. Slander. 

• - Beside his own money, he spends all his sister's. 

- - It is said that Gibraltar is (blocked up) by land 

bloquer^V* 
and hy sea. - - I have passed through France and 

Italy. - - We have passed through Germany. - - He 

lives on this side^ and his brother on that side of 

London. - - He is a coward who attacks his enemy 

behind, - - Let us see whether you can jump over 

5?,c. sauter^v. 

the table. - - Look under the door, and you will see 

it. - - Envy, jealousy, and slander, always reign 

medisancf-S. 
among authors. - - What have you done during my ab- 
sence ? - - I have been expecting you for a long time. 

- - - Your aunt has sent me some books /or you. - - - 

Without him what could I have done ? - - A woman may 

please without beauty, but she cannot succeed icithout 

virtue. - - He always goes out without me, - - The 

army marched three dajs and three nights without 

stopping. - - He carried away all my furniture, saving 

nieubhs^m.}^]. 



392 



my bed. - - Do I not live* according to the rules 

regle.L 
which you have' prescribed ? - - I found your buckle 
prescrire,v. houcle^ii 

under the chain - - You said you had left it upon 

chaise^ f, laisser,Y, 

the table. - - How could I lend you a guinea ? I had no 

money about me. - - Did not my brother write to you 

Concerning that affair ? - - It was towards the evening 

when he arrived. 

OBSERYATIONS on some PREPOSITIONS. 

Above, This preposition, when preceding a noun 
expressing time or number, so as to signify more than 
or longer than, is to be rendered in French by plus de : 
ex. 
Le combat dura plus de The fight lasted above 

deux heures, two hourg. 

EXERCISE ON THIS PREPOSITION. 

My brother was not above twenty years old, when 

he (was married). - - He made us wait above a week. - - 

se marier 
My father's country-house is very handsome, but it 

cost him above six thousand pounds. - - In the last 

sea-fight which took place between the French and 

the English, above twelve hundred men perished in 

the action on the side of the French, and the 

* See the N. B. before the Exercises upon the first Conjugatroii, 
page 1?8. :f|. 



393 

English took above fifteen ships of the line. - - It is 

above a year since my cousin set off for Jamaica. 

Jamaique^L 

At is most commonly rendered by «, and some- 
times by one of the French articles an, a la, il l\ aux, 
according to the gender and number of the noun fol- 
lowing : ex. 

Nous etions a diner, We were at dinner. 

Elle est a la maison, She is at home. 

// joue bien aux cartes, He plays well at cards. 

EXERCISE ON THIS PREPOSITION. 

if you be at Rome, live as they do at Rome. - - 
vivre 
We will Qet up next week at six o'clock. - - When I 

se lever 
called upon Mr. B. he was at breakfast. - •> Every 
passer 
thing I have is at your service. - - My brother is at 

Mr. K's. academy. - - Were you at Mrs. C's. ball last 

week ? - - You always travel by night at the peril «>f 

your life. - - I will pay you at the end of the year. - - 

My mother is at the height of happiness. - - He plays 

comble 
very well at chess, and his companion begins 

ec/iec5, m.pl. 
to play a little at draughts. - - He did it at the insti- 

Jamc5,f. pi. 
gation of his friend. 

After nouns or verbs denoting anger, derision, joy, 
provocation, resentment, sori'ow, surprise, or concern, at is 
rendered by one of the following articles, de, du, de la^ 
de r. des : ex. 



394 

// se moque de 'sous, He laughs at you. 

Je me rejouis de voire I rejoice at your good 

bonheur, luck. 

J^ous sommes surpris de ce We are surprised at what 

que vous dites^ you say. 

EXERCISE ON THE SAME PREPOSITION. 

Exasperated at his conduct, he told him never to 
/rn^e.adj. 
laugh at poor people. - - We always ought to rejoice 

devoir 
at the good fortune which hefalls our neighbours, 

arriver^Y* a 
- - I am vexed at the news which we received last 

week. - - A good Christian never shows any resent- 
ment at the injuries which are offered to him. - - He 

faire 
always smiles at (every thing) which is said. - - A pa 

lout 
tient man never grieves at his misfortunes. - - - 

s'^attrister^y, 
I cannot help being surprised at her manner 

s'^empecher^y, de 
of answering. - - 1 am concerned at the loss which 

you sustained in your trade. - - He was so mortified 

essuyer^y* 
fl5f the disobedience of his sons, that he died through 

de 
grief. 

At is rendered by chez^ when, in English, it^precedes 
the word house^ either expressed or understood, and the 
same rule is to be observed with respect to the preposi- 
tion to : ex, 

T6tois chez votre frere, I was at your brother's. 

Je vats chez Madame I am going (o Mrs. Lucas'sv 
LucaSf 



395 



EXERCISE ON THE SAME PREPOSITIONS. 

I (called upon) Miss Brown this morning, as 1 had 
passer 
promised your mother, but she was not at home. - - - 

Where was she then ? She was at her aunt's. - - - I 

thought mj friend was at his father's, but I mistook, 

se tromper 
for he was ai his uncle's. - - How long have jou been 

at Mr. H's. ? - - We lodge at mj friend's, but we board 

manger 
at the pastry-cook's. - - - If you go to my brother, tell 

him to come to my cousin's, where I am to spend 

de passer .,Vf 

the day, and we will go together to his friend's. 

By, when preceding a numeral adjective immediately 
followed by another adjective expressing the dimension 
or superficies of an object, is rendered in French by sur, 
and when it precedes a verb in the participle active, it 
is then rendered by en : ex. 

Cette chamhre a dix pieds This room is ten feet 
de longueur sur sept long by seven and half 
et demi de largeur, wide. 

En agissant ainsi, -dous By acting thus, you will 
vousferez des ennemis, get enemies. 

EXERCISE ON THIS PREPOSITION. 

My box is a foot and a half deep by two wide and 

four long. - - The general (drew up) his army in order 

r anger, y. uz» 

of battle, and placed his best soldiers in length by 



» 



39a 

fifty feet deep. - - Our (school-room) at Alfred 

tcole,j f. 
House, Camberwell, is forty feet long ly 

thirty-six wide, and our play-ground contains above 

an acre of land. - - You will soon speak French 

arpent, m. 
by applying so. - - Your father gets a considerable 

s^appliquer faire, v. 

fortune by buying cheap and selling dear. - - - Men 

acquire learning by working and not by sleeping. - - - 

Water hollows a stone, not by falling with force, 

creuser^Y» 
but by falling often ; so a man becomes learned, not 

by studying with force, but by studying often. 

By^ after the verbs to sell^ to buy, to work, and the 
like, preceding a noun of weight or measure, day, week, 
month, or year, is rendered into French by a, au, a la, a 
V, aux, according to the gender and number of the fol- 
lowing noun : ex. 
Je ne vends run a la I sell nothing by the 

livre, pound. 

// achete ioujours a Vaunt, He always buys by the ell. 
■Nous iravaillons a Vheure, We work by the hour, or 

on a \3,journee, - by the day. 

EXERCISE ON THE SAME PREPOSITION. 

Always buy tea by the pound, and never by the 

ounce, you will get it cheaper. - - I never buy niy 

avoir 
cloth by the ell, but by the piece. - - It is a sad thing 

to buy coals by the bushel. - - - How do you sell your 

de 

brandy ? We sell it by the gallon, a net not by the 



397 

bottle. - - He sells his wine hy the dozen. - - - I sell 

eggs by the hundred, and chesnuts by the quarter. 

- - How do yo« measure your cambric ? by the ell, 

hatiste^m, 
or by the yard ? - - Do you buy cider by the hogshead, 

tonneau.m. 
OT by the pipe ? - - Does your father work by the 

week or the month ? No, Sir, he works by the year. 

Well ! I always thought he worked by the piece. 

By, immediately following the verbs to kill, to wound, 
io knock down, and the like, is made into French, by 
d^un coup de, when it expresses the effect, blow, thrust^ 
stroke, firing, &c. of an instrument by which a man was 
either killed, wounded, &c. provided the blows have 
not been repeated : if the blows have been repeated, we 
make use 6f a coups de, in which case it is most com- 
monly rendered in English by with : ex. 

II fat blessi d^un coup de He was wounded by an 

Jieche, arrow. 

lis Vassommerent a coups They knocked him down 

de baton, with a stick. 

EXERCISE ON THESE PREPOSITIONS. 

Achilles was killed at the siege of Troy by an 

au 

arrow, which Paris, king Priam's son, (let fly) 

decocher, v. 

at his heel. - - (Unable to) catch the thief, 

talon,m. Kepouvoir attraper,y, 

they knocked him down with a stick. - -, At last 

Enfin,a.d\, 

the king, having broke his battle-axe and 

bache-d^armes,i, 

sword by the force of his blows, was knocked down 

rmvtrs6, p.p. 
<^ 1 



338 

hy a stone, and taken prisoner. - - William the 

/ai7,p.p. 
Second was killed hy an arrow in the New-Forest. - - 

My brother was wounded hy a gun, and my 

fusil^m* 
eousin was killed hy 3, cannon-ball. - - Edward the 

boulet de canon,m. 
First was wounded in Palestine with a poisoned 

dagger. - - He is so strong,^ that with his fist he 

poignard^m. 

could knock down an ox. - - He threw my brother 

down, and almost killed him with his feet. - - 

par ierre, 

They killed him not with stones, but with arrows. - - 

The soldiers kill one another with bayonets, and the 

se tuer 
officers with sabres and swords. - - My mother's 

watch (goes too fast) hy half an hour, but your's 

avancer^v, 
(goes too slow) hy twenty minutes. 
retardcr^v, 

For^ after reflected verbs, as also those which denote 
thanksgiving, &c. is rendered by one of the following 
articles, de, du, de la, de V, des : ex. 

Je me rejouis du service I rejoice for the service 
quHl vous a rendu, et je which he has done to 
Pen remercierai demain^ you, and will thank 

him to-morrow for it. 

EXERCISE ON THIS PREPOSITION. 

I am very grateful for all the kindness 

reconnoissant,^diy honte,f. 

yon have had for me. - - He is very sorry /or the 



399 

grief he has caused you, - - When we have reached 

atteindre^v, 
the age of reason, we are often sorry, but too late, 

for the time we lost when we were young. - - - My 

brother desired me to thank you for the part you 

de 

took in his troubles. - - - Every one leaped for joy, 

peine^L tressaiUir 

when the happy news of peace arrived. - - A child 

who cares little for those who gave him life, 

56 soucier^y, 
is an unnatural being. - - An ungrateful son will be 

denaiure^adj, 
punished (one time or other) for his ingratitude. 

From, preceding the name of a man or woman, or one 
of the personal, possessive, relative, or interrogative pro- 
nouns, after the verbs to go, to come, to send, &c. is gen- 
erally rendered in French by de la part de, or de ma, de 
sa, de notrepart, de votre part, &lc, : ex. 

Allez de ma part chez Go from me to Mr. D. 

Mons, D. 
Je viens de sa part, I come from him or her. 

EXERCISE ON THIS PREPOSITION. 

Go from me to Miss Dunkin's and tell her I shall 
be glad to see her : no, stop a little, tell her that 
you come from my cousin, who has something very 
pretty to show her. - - From whom do you come ? 
said she to me. - - Madame, replied I to her, I come 
from my parents, who sent me. - - Well, answered 



400 

she, any one is always welcome, who comes from 

them. - - - Send from me to Mr. Lucas, and let him 

know that I am (very much) vexed at the letter I 

trts de 

received from him ; I never could have expected 

s'^attendre^v^ 
to receive such an affront from such a gentleman. 
« 

In requires" some attention from the learner, who is 
to observe that dans always conveys a limited idea, 
and is followed by the article ; when, on the contrary, 
en conveys a very determinate idea, and seldom admits 
of the article, whether expressed in English or not : 
ex. 

II est dans la maison, He is in the house. 

Elle est en Angleterre, She is in England. 

EXERCISE Ofif THIS PREPGSITIOW. 

He always keeps himself shut up in hia room. - - 

Take all the linen which I shall want in c»«r jour- 

linge^m, 
ney, and put it into my box. - - Walk into the parlour. 

- - We live in the county of Surrey. - - Is there a good 

tire in the room ? - - - Ovid, one of the finest poets of 

the Augustan age, expired in the seventeenth 

. d\^Iuguste^m. siecle^m, 
year of our Lord, at Tomi, near Varna, on the 

5«r,p. 
western coast of the Black Sea, whither he 

occidental^2idy ' cSle^L 
had been banished by the emperor Augustus. - - - 

Is your sister in France ? - - No, madam,, she is in 



401 

Spain. - - How long do you intend to slay m town / - - 

Sir, do you keep house ? - - No, we live in 

(ready furnished) lodgings. - - - When we are in 

garni,a.dj.' chambre^L on 

peace, people talk of war ; and when in war, they 

on on 

talk of peace. - - - Your eldest son behaved like a, 

hero. - - If my son behave like an honest man, I shall 

act towards him as a tender father. - - In what does 

human happiness consist ? - - If you wish to be happy 

and esteemed in this world, live like a man of 

ten 

honour and probity. - - He walks in the garden with 
hi& friend. - - - He is gone to spend the winter in 
Italy. - - - The American navy officers have acted 
like heroes. 

/h, after words denoting pain, hurting, or loonndivg, 
and preceding one of the possessive pronouns in con- 
junction with any part of the body, is to be rendered by 
one of the following articles, rt, aw, a la, a /', aux, and 
the possessive pronoun left out ; and when in precedes 
a noun denoting a part of time, it is not to be expressed 
in French : ex. 

II ttoit hiesse au Iras e.t Pie was wounded in his 
nmi a IsLJamhe, arm, and not in his leg. 

Vous le trouverez toujours, You will always find him 
chez lui le matin, at home in the morn- 

ing- 
34* 



4G'I 

EXERCISE ON THE SAME PREPOSITION. 

My brother has constantly a pain in his head, and 

I have very often a pain in my teeth. - - Never eat 

any fruit which is not ripe, for there is nothing 

more apt to give you a pain in your stomach. - - - My 

companion, by jumping over a form, (fell down), 

6awc,m. tomber^v. 
and was much hurt in the shoulder. - - - Your brother 

was wounded in the arm, but not dangerously, and 

my cousin was mortally wounded in the head. - - 

My master comes generally m the morning. - - I will 

call upon you in the afternoon, and in the evening go 

to the play. 

On or upon. This preposition is rendered by de after 
the verbs to depend^ to live, to subsist, and the like ; and 
by one of the following articles, de, du, de la, de V, des, 
after the verb to play, preceding the name of an instru- 
ment : and before the days of the week and the names 
of the month, preceded by a numeral adjective the 
above preposition must not be expressed : ex. 

II vit de pain et d'eaw, He lives on bread and 

water. 
Fou.9 jouez du violon, et il You play on the violin, 
joue de la jiute^ and he plays on the 

flute. 
Cela arriva le dix-huit du That happened on the 
mois dernier^ eighteenth of last 

month. 



403 



EXERCISE ON THIS PREPOSITION. 

We all depend upon divine mercy. - - - A 

misericorde^ f. 
good end generally depends on a good beginning. - - 

Men do not live only on bread and meat, but on the 

grace of God. - - - Birds subsist upon what they can 

catch. - - What do you live upon^ you who never eat 

any meat ? - - In winter I live on milk and vegetables, 

and in summer I live upon bread and butter, cheese, and 

all sorts of fruits. - - Upon what instrument does your 

sister play ? - - She plays very well on the harpsichord, 

and she is now learning to play on the harp. - - Come 

o?i Friday early, and I will go to see you on the Saturday 

following. - - Why did you not play on the violin on 

Wednesday last ? - - On June the eighth, 1376, died 

Edward, prince of Wales, the delight of the 

(in the pi.) 
nation, in the forty-sixth year of his age. - - On the 

third of June, 1664, the English obtained a great victo- 
ry over the Dutch off Harwich, took eighteen 

Hollandois^m, 
ships, and destroyed fourteen more. 

Over» This preposition is commonly rendered in 
French by sur ; but it must be rendered by the partici- 
ple passive of the verbs /ruV, passer, acherer^ when it 
denotes an action ended : ex. 



404 

// a Vavantage sur vous, He has the advantage 

over you. 
Votre frere partit des que Your brother set out as 
la pluie flit p3.ss6e^ soon as the rain was 

over, 
he diner est-il fini ? Is dinner over ? 

EXERCISE OKt THIS PREPOSITION. 

A coach passed over his body and killed him. - - 

Tullia, Tarquinius' wife, the unnatural daughter 

denatu7'6 ^a.dj, 
of Servius king of Rome, ordered her coachman ,» 

ordonner a 
to drive over the dead body of her father. - - In 
de passerby. 
going to London, did you go over Westminster* 

bridge ? - - Yes, but in coming back I passed over 

Blackfriars bridge. - - - They dissolved the army 

dis^perser^Y» 
as soon as it was resolved that the campaign was^ 

ov&r, - - - In France they drink coffee ag soon as 

dinner is over, - - You may go and walk when 

(by thefut.) 
the rain is over* - • They fought well, and the 

(by the fut.) 
battle was soon over. 

With is rendered by dans^ when it is used before 
nouns denoting the purpose, design, or motived the 
agent : ex. 

// le jit dans Patiente dUtra He did it wiih an ex- 
hkn recompen^^ pectation of being well 

rewarded* 



403 



EXERCISE ON THIS PREPOSITION. 

He poisoned his brother with the hope of 

empoisonne7',v. 
inheriting his estates. • - My ^brother is gone to 
h6riter, v. de 
your house with the design of scolding you 

gronder^y, 
well. - - He who beats another with tlie intention of 

killing him, is a murderer at the bottom of his 
h«art. - - He did' it with the intention of pleasing 
you, and not with any design of hurting you. - - I 
went last week to Mr. Olympus, with the expecta- 
tion of receiving the money which I lent him a 
month ago, but he was not at home. - - I live with 
the hope of receiving it (bne time or another). - - 
He said so zoith a design of deceiving you, if he 
could. 

With must be made by de after the following 
verbs, to starve, to die, to do, to dispense, to meddle, 
tq encompass, to load, to cover, to strike, and those 
denoting fulness : likewise after the following ailjec- 
tives, amorous, charmed, pleased, displeased, endowed, 
^'c. ex. 

Ellc meurt de froid et de She dies with cold and 

fciim, hunger. 

Je siiis content de ce que I am pleased with what I 

fai;- have. 



406 



EXERCISE ON THE SAME PREPOSITION. 

Lazy people ought to die with hunger and 

devoir ^v. 
cold. - - The winter was so severe, that I was dying 

7uith cold. - - They are so rich, that they do not know 

what to do with their naoney. - - I hope you will dis- 

que toi 

pense me with that disagreeable (piece of work). 

besogne^L 
- - Do not meddle with my affairs, meddle zvith your 

own. - - It is reported on all sides, that Paris is to be 

encompassed with walls. - - Do you see that waggon ? 

chariot^m. 
It is loaded with goods. - - - Do you wish your house 

que 
(be) covered with slates or tiles ? - - He was overwhelmed 
soit^v, tuile^L acca6/e, adj. 

with grief. - - The enemy, struck with terror and 

astonishment, ran away. - - - Honour me with your 

commands. - - I have filled my cellar with good beer 

and excellent wine. - - Narcissus, seeing himself in a 

clear fountain, fell in love with his own 

devenir, v. amour eux, adj . 
person. - - I am charmed with the agreeable company 

of your sister. - - As to us, little satisfied with his 

answers, we took other measures. - - - Are you not 



407 

pleased with the behaviour of your son Thomas ? ^<- 

You would be wrong to be dissatisfied with 

avoir tort^ de meconYen/, adj. 

him, for he behaved hke an honest man in 

se conduire^y, 
that affair, and he is endowed zcith many good 

doue^a,d], 
qualities. - - The man who meddles with nobody's 

affairs, but quietly follows his own, seldom makes 

himself enemies. 

With is rendered by contre after words denoting 
anger or passion : and before nouns denoting the 
matter, instruments^ tools, or expressing how and in 
what manner a thing is done or made, it is rendered by 
one of the following articles, o, au, a la, a V, aux, ac- 
cording to the gender and number of the following 
»oun : ex. 

Madame votre mere est ires- Your mother is very angry 

fdchee contre vous, with you. 

Une table a iiroirs, A table with drawers. 

Dessiner au crayon, a la To draw with a pencil, 

craie, with chalk. 

Se battre a Vepee, au pis- To fight with swords, with 
iolei, pistols. 

EXERCISE ON THE SAME PREPOSITION. 

My brother was in^ such* a passion' with me, that I 
si ««>^ colere^f, 
thought he would have beaten me. - - I believe what 
€roire,Y. 
ou say, but I was very angry with her when she 

t«ild me she would not do it. - - I live near the river, 



408 

and if you come to eee mc, we will fish with a 

net or a line. - - Your brother and my cousin 

Jilet^m. ligne,t 

fought with sabres and pistols; the former was 

wounded in his thigh, and the latter in bis side. - - - 

My house has been built wji//i lime and sand. - - Did 

Miss Arnold show you the picture she has drawn 

with India ink ? - - - No, but he showed me her 

C/iine, f. 
mother's picture done with chalk, I assure you it is 

yery like. - - Do not go so near that wall, it is newly 

ressemblanty3.d^» 

painted with (white lead). - - I -bought a penknife with^ 

ceruse^ f. 
two blades. - - - The Americans fought bravely 

lame.L se hattre 

with the English at New-Orleans. 

nouvelle 

With is not to be expressed after some verbs, such as, 
to meet with, to trust with, to supply with, to reproach with, 
Slc, It is likewise to be suppressed where it expresses 
the situation, position, 8lc, of a person, or when it is used 
in the sense of having, holding, &C. : ex. 

II a essuyi hien des cha- He has met with many 

grins, troubles. 

JsCous lui fournirons, tout ce We will supply him with 

do7it il aura besoin, every thing he wants, 

// se promme toujours un He always walks with 
Hvre a la main, book in his hand, tha 

is, having or holding 
book, &c. 






409 



EXERCISE ON THE SAME PREPOSITION. 

He met with so many mortifications from his 

essuyer^Y, 
sons, that through grief he fell ill and died 

de tomber^w 

almost with despair, - - - When you meet 

rencontrer,v, 
a poor man, never reproach him with his poverty, 

but endeavour to furnish him with the means 

moyen^m* 
of emerging from his misery. - - - I have trusted Mr. 

N. with my son's education, with the utmost con- 
fidence that he will answer my expectation. - - - The 
Jfew River supplies London with aJi the water whieh 

the inhabitants stand in need of. - - I reproached 

avoir besoin^Y, 
her with her ingratitude towards her benefactors. - - - 

He always walks round the premises with a stick in his 

bdton^m, 

hand. - - Never speak to any body with your hat on 

/e 

your head. - - He is represented on horseback, with 

a sword in his right-hand and a horse - pistol 

r6p6e argon^m.pistolel.m, 

in his left. 

gGtMc/ic,adj. 

Without (sans) : this preposition is sometimes ex- 
pressed (in English) by the imperfect or compound of 
the imperfect of the verb to 6e, preceded by the con- 
junction if, and sometimes by but for : ex. 
35 

ft 



410 

Sans vous, je ne sais ce que If it were not for yeu^ 1 do 
je deviendrois^ not know tvhat would 

become of me. 
Sans lui, mon frere auroit Had it not been for him, 
ete puni, my brother would have 

been punished. 
Sans elle, je serais mort de But for her, I should have 
foim, starved. 

EXERCISE ON THIS PREPOSITION. 

Without the assistance of the divine Providence, 
5ecowr5,m. 
what are we ? What are we capable of ? - - Accord- 
ing to what you- tell me, and what I have heard, 
she has a great deal of wit and merit ; and, Imt for 

that large scar which she has in her fore- 

gmwJjadj. cicatrice^L 
head, she would be very handsome. - - Had it not 

been for the help of good and honest people, what 

could you have done 1 - - If it had not been for me, 

he never would have paid you. - - Wen it not for rich 

and charitable persons, what would become of the 

poor and needy ? - - Our neighbour fell into the rivcF, 

voisin^m, 
and but for my father, who was passing that way, he 

would have been drowned. - - Were it not for emula* 

&e noyer^v, 
tion^ (every thing) would languish in the world. 

tout 



411 

SECT. VIII. 

OF CONJUMCTIOKS. 

Most of the conjunctions are adverbs and prepositions, 
but always attended by de or que. They have been di- 
vided into copulative^ comparative^ disjunctive^ adversative^ 
casual^ dubitative^ exceptive, conditional, continuative, con- 
clusive, &c. Instead of following this arrangement, it 
will be of more importance for the scholar to under- 
stand, that different conjunctions require different states 
of the verb. Some require the following verb in the 
infinitive mood, others in the indicative, and others again 
in the subjunctive. 

These require the following verb in the infinitive 
mood, 

Afin de, in order to. 

a molns de, or ) , 

' J > unless. 
u moms que de, 3 

Avant de, or ) , /. 

Avant que de, y 

Au lieu de, instead of. 

De crainte de,or'^ r r c 

De peur de, y 

Excepte de, except to. 

Faute de, for want of. 

Jusqu'd, to that degree that, till. 

Lorn de, far from, 

Plutoi que de, rather than. 

EXERCISE ON THESE CfONJ UNCTIONS. 

In order to learn well, we must study with a 

on devoir, v. 
^reat deal of attention. - - It will be impossible for 

you to learn French ■unites you be diligent. - - Let us 



412 

breakfast before we begin (any thing). - - A prudent 

«oi nen, 

man ought to think several times, before he acts. - - - 

t^i agir^y. 
He is gone to church, instead of coming with us. - - - 

I would not do it for fear of displeasing you, - - He 

is capable of (every thing) except of doing good. - - - 

tout^ 
For want of sending for a surgeon in 

envoy er chercher^v, chirurgien^mk a 

time, he lost his arm. - - He carried his inso- 

pousser, v, 
lence to that degree that he spoke injurious words 

«oi dire,v. 
to him. - - Your cousin has humbled himself, till 

humilier, v. 
he fell (on his) knees before the idol. - - Far from 
*o^ a 

exciting them to fight, I did all that I could in order 

a 
to prevent them. - - She would do (any thing) (in the) 

tout au 

world rather than speak to him. - - Rather than study, 

he loses his time, or spends it in trifles. 

The following require the verb in the indicative mood* 

Ainsi que, * as. 

7'out ainsi que, * just as. 

Apres que, * after that, after. 

a cause que, ) , 

r, ? because. 

rarce que, 5 

a ce que, according as, or to. 

a condition que, on, or upon condition that, 

a mesure que, * in proportion as, as. 

Au lieu que, whereas. 



Hef page 417, 



413 

Des h moment que, * the moment that. 

.^ussi long'tems que, * as long as. 

Aussi loin que, * as far as. 

Aussitot que, ^ 

U'ahord que, f * „ „^^^ ^^ 
r>vv ^ ' >* as soon as. 
Des que, C 

Sitot que, j 

Attendu que, considering that, seeing that. 

Comme, or ) * j,^, 

E71 tant que, \ 

De faqon que, >. 

De maniere que, I 

De sorte que, > in such manner that, so that, so. 

Si hien que, \ 

Tellement que, ^ 

Depuis que, ever since, since. 

Puisque, since. 

De meme que, even as. 

D^oii vient que, how comes it to pass that, why. 

^""9"^' I* when. 
iguana, 5 

Mais, but.t 

Outre que, beside that. 

a peine que, hardly, scarcely, — but, or when. 

Pendant que, ) * ^^^.j^^ 

Tandis que, y 

Peut-etre que, perhaps. 

^"«"^' . hhough. 

iguana meme, y ° 

Selon que, ) * according as. 
ibuivant que, J ° 

Tant que, * as long as. 
Que — de — ne, than only. 
Auiant que, * as much as. 



t This conjunction, when beginning a sentence, is always rendered 
by mais. In the middle of a sentence, the word but is always ren- 
dered by ne before the verb, and que after it : ex. 
Je n'ai parU d voire frere que I bave spoken to youi* brofheT- 

deux fois, hut twice. 

35* 



414 

D^aulant que^ whereas, for so much as, since. 

D^autant plus — que, so much more, the more, — as. 

Tontefois, yet, nevertheless* 

Toutes les fols que, every time, as often as, whenever^ 

Sinon que, except that. 

Si, if, in case, whether. 

EXERCISE ON THESE CONJUNCTIONS. 

I called at your sister's, as you had desired me* 
passer, V. 
- - I punish you as you deserve (it). - - Jfter yon 

were gone, I began writing. - - I love you because 

you behave better than your brother. - - According 

as I see, you are very well. - - - He will write to you, 

on condition that he shall speedily receive 

promptement, adv. 
your answer. - - -In proportion as we study, we 

become learned. - - - A skilful gardener pulls up 

arracher,v, 
weeds as they grow. - - - Your brother 

mauvaise herhe,f» 
learns his lessons, whereas you do nothing. - - • The 

raoment that I saw you, I knew you again. - - I did 

not stay in Italy, as long as you did. - - I followed him 

*<» 
(with my) eyes as far as I could. - - As soon as they 

des 
>iad taken the general, the army surrendered. - - Why 

did you give it to him, considering that you had 

promised it to rae ? - - - I did not come to see you^, 



415 

seeing that I did not know that you were ill. - - - 

You (look at) me, as if I had taken your book. - - 

7'cgarde'i\ v. 
I will lend jow. my horse, as you are my friend. - - 

So you will not come when I call you. - - - He 

beat him so that he almost killed him. - - - 

Your mother is quite altered, since I saw her 

c/io!?ige, p.p. 
last. - w - - You must stay at home, since you 
dernier ement^ adv. 
are not well. - - The thing happened even as I had 

foreseen it. - - How comes it to pass^ that I have not 

seen your friend until now ? - - Why^ in proportion as 

we grow older, do we not grow wiser ? - - Wlmi 

devinir^ v. 
you are going to undertake an affair of importance, 

permit me to tell you, that you ought to consult 

de 
your friends before you begin it. - - - When she had 

done speaking,, she (fell asleep). - - Did you not see 

s''endormir^v, 
Mr. Brown this morning ? - - Yes, hut I could not speak 

to him. - - - Sometimes those who meddle with our 

affairs hut to serve us, are those who do us most 

harm. - - The misfortunes of others seem to us 

ior/,m. semhler^w 

but a dream in comparison to our own. - - If you 

sonsrp^m^ 



416 
c5uld give me but half of the money you owe me, I 
should be very much obliged to you. - - Beside that 
he does not apply as he should, he is often absent 
from school. - - We were hardly arrived, when it 

began to rain. - - While you lose your time, your 
a 

brother improves fast. - - Play on the harpsichord, 
^ heaucoup^a,dv» clavecin^m, 

"■ v^hile I write my exercise. - - Perhaps the master will 

forgive me. - - Though you should cheapen for 

marchander^v, 
two hours, I could not abate sixpence. - - Our father 

punishes and rewards us according as we deserve. - - 

Speak as long as you please, I will not grant you 

what you ask me. - - He had rather do harm 

aimer ^Y, mieMa;,adv. 
to his companions than (be doing) nothing. - - If 

faire^v* 
you loved to study, as much as you love to play, I ; 

a 
should have (no occasion) to complain. - - I avoid 

aucun svjet^m, eviter^v, 

slanderers; as much as 1 fear them. - - You may 
medisant.m, 
believe me, for so much as I was present when he 

said so. - - This proceeding was the more extraor- ' 
dinary, as it was contrary to the laws of the king- 
dom. ' ^ The belief of another life appears to '' 

croxjance^ii 



417 

me so much the more conformable to truth, as it is 

the more necessary to virtue. - - Virtue reigns so 

much the more sovereignly, as it does not reign by 

force and fear. - - All men (seek after) riches, and 

rechercher^v. 
yet we see few rich men happy. - - I see the king and 

queen every time I go to Windsor. - - He interrupts 

me as often as I speak. - - Whenever I go to London, I 

meet him. - - She said nothing to me, except that it 

Was impossible (for her) to do what you required of 

hii^pro, 
her. - - I know not whether he would come, even though 

jou should desire him. - - In case Mr. S. calls 

passer,v» 
here, tell him I am not at home, and ask him when 

he will come again to see me. - - If you do it, you 

will be punished. - - - Tell me sincerely whether he 

did it or not. - - - We should spare ourselves 

epf/rgner,v. 
many troubles, were we more prudent. 

peine^f. 

The conjunctions that have this mark * affixed, 
as it appears in the preceding ones, when followed, 
in' English, by a verb in the present of the indica- 
tive mood, and connected with another verb denot- 
ing futurity, require the verb, which, in English, is 
put in the present, to be rendered in French by the 
future. 



418 

EXERCISE ON THIS RULE. 

Yeu will be rewarded just as jou deserve. - - 

Jfter you have done jour exercises, you shall go out. 

devoir ^m, 

- - I will explain these rules to you, as we read them. 

- - The moment that you burn this letter, the danger 
will be over. - - We will follow you as far as you go. 

- - Jls long as you (keep company with) those people, 

frequenter ^Y. 
never come to my house. - - We will set j3ut as soon 

as we have dined. As you deserve, you will be 

rewarded. - - Send me Miss White, when she has 

done writing. - - You will write the words accord- 

fini,ip.l^,de 

ing as I dictate them. - - As long as you behave 

se comporter^v, 
well, you will be dear to me. - - In short, said this 

good king, I shall only think myself happy in as much* 

se croire 
<ts I cause the happiness of my people. 
faire 

It has been remarked in the degrees of comparison, 
that every comparative must be attended by the con- 
junction que^ than ; it must now be observed, that, if^ 
que precede a verb in the infinitive, it is to be followed ' 
by de. But if the verb be neither in, nor can be turned 
into the infinitive, the conjunction must then be attend- 
ed by ne ; that is, que before the noun or pre noun, and. 
?ie before the verb : ex. 



419 

II vaui mieux eire mal- It is better to be unfor° 

heureux que d^itre cou- tunate than criminal. 
pahle, 

Mon pere est revenu My father came back 

plutot que nous ne Pat- sooner than we ex- 

tendions, pected him. 

EXERCISE ON THIS RULE. 

It is more pleasing to enjoy good health, 

«grea6/e, adj. 
than to possess a large fortune. - - It is harder (to 

be revenged) of an enemy, than forgive him. - - - 

se venger^v. 
It is better to make a sacrifice of a limb, said the 

surgeon, than lose your life. - - When the thunder 

roars, it is less dangerous to be in an open field, 

grander ^Y» 

than to take shelter tinder a tree. - - Should you 

se mettre^ 
not apply more than you do ; you, especially, who 

are to be useful to your country ? - - - That would 

give me more pleasure than you imagine. - - Did you 

not receive your goods before war was declared ? 

- - How many people can say to themselv«|s, Had I 

employed my time better than I did when I was 

young, I should be (in good circumstances) now. - - - 

a mon aise^ 
Diseases come faster than they go away. 

s'en rctourneryY, 



■m-- 



420 

The following require the verb in the subjunctive mood. 
Mfin que, ) ^^^^ ^^ ^^^^^ ^^ ^^ ^^^ ^^ ^^ 
Four que^ J ' ' 

Avant que, before. 

Au or en cas que, in case that, if, suppose that. 
A mains que,^ 

ExupUque, r„„, ti„. 
oi ce nest que, ' ' 

Que — ne, 
Bien que, ^ 

ncore que, \ ^|-^Qyg|^^ although, for all that, as. 
T^uoique, k 
Tout] que, J 
Bien entendu que, with a proviso that, upon condition 

that, provided that. 

Vepeur que, ^ ' 

Dieu veuille que, God grant. 

Plaise, or pint a Dieu que, please God, or would to God. 

a Dieu ne plaise, God forbid. 

ormis que, / ^^^^ ^^. unless, except. 
Hors que, J ' 5 r 

Jusqu'a ce que,^ till, until. 
Loin que, far from. 

Moyennant que,! ^^^^ ^^^ ^^^j^^^ ^^^j_ 
Jrourvu que, y ' ^ 

Konohsiant que, notwithstanding that. 
Pour peu que, how little soever, however little. 
Sans que, without that. 
Soit que, whether, — or. 
Supposons que, suppose, let us suppose that. 
Tant shn faut queje, I am so far from. 
Tant shn faut quHl, or elle, he, or she is so far from. 
Tant s"^ en faut que nous, or vous, we, or you are so far from. 

* These conjunctions require the negation ne before the following 
verbs : ex. 

A moins qu'iZ ne le fasse, Unless he does it. 

De crainte, or de peur qu'ils ne viennenf, For fear, or lest ti^ej comf 

t See observations upon the pronouns indefinite, page 118. 



421 

EXERCISE ON THESE CONJUNCTIONS, 

I will explain- to you every difficulty, that you 

may not be disheartened in your undertaking. - - - 

decourager^v. 
Carry that money to Mrs. Nolle, in order that she 

may pay the writing-master when he comes. - - - A 

(by the fut.) 
wise and prudent man lives with economy when 

young, to the end that he may enjoy the fruit of 

his labour when he is old. - - - Before you begin an 

(by the fut.) 
action, consider well, and see whether you can bring 

en venir 
it about, for it is the end that crowns the work. - - - 
about (Buvre^m, 

In case you want my assistance, call me, I shall be 

near you. - - If I do not call upon you this afternoon, 

I will write to you. - - Suppose you should lose your 

friends, what would become of you ? You will 

never be respected, unless you forsake the bad 

abandonner^v, 
company you keep. - - You cannot finish (to-night), 

ce soir^ 
sinless I help yon. - - I will not lend it you, unless 

you promise me to return it to her as soon as you 

de rcndrc^v. 
can. - - I shall not cease to importune you, till you 
(by the Alt.) de 

have forgiven me. - - They are not happy, though 
36 



422 
they be rich. - - The general arrived yesterday morn- 
ing at the camp, weary and tired, but very season- 

ably ; immediately he gave his orders to 

pour^ip. 
begin the action, though he had not yet all his 
engager ^v, 
troops. - - Although you have a good memory, this 

Is not enough to learn any language whatever, 

pour, p. 
you must make use of your judgment. - - For all 

that she has no fortune, I do not love her the less for 

it; - - As zealous a friend as he appears, I know one 

action of his life which is neither Christian nor 

equitable. - - I lend you my violin with a proviso that 

you will return it to me in an hour. - - My mother 

will come to see you, upon condition that jou promise 

me to go to the play with her. - - - 1 give you 

that penknife, upon condUion that you will not make 

a bad use of it. - - I will go to London to-morrow, 

provided you accompany me. - - I will write again to 

your brother to-morrow, lest he should not 

(present of subj.) 
have received my last letter. - - We avoided an engage- 
ment, for fear we should be taken, their forc^e beingJ 



423 

superior to ours. - - God grant you be not disappointed 

in your hopes ! - - Would to God I had been there ! I 

would have conquered or perished. - - God forbid I 

should blame your conduct. - - Your business never 

will be done properly, unless you do it yourself. - - I 

shall not go out to-day, except you go with me. - - - 

They fought with fury on both sides, 

se battre^v, adiarnement^m, 

till night came. ^ - I shall not set out, till I have 

dined. - - I am going to write, till we go out. - - Jfcr 

from hating him, I wish him all kinds of prosperity, 

- - I forgive you this time, provided you promise me 

to be lazy no more, and pay more attention to 

de faire,y, 

what you are told. - - I will give 3'ou leave to dance, 

provided you give me your word of honor 

'^ parole^L 
not to overheat yourself. - - Why did you tell 

de s''e chauffer ^y, 
me my father was arrived, notwithstanding you 

knew the contrary ? - - He is so quick, that 

prompt J ad j, 
however little he is contradicted, he (flies into a pa^ion) 

shmporter^v. 
in an instant. - - - However little you give her 

she is of so good a temper, that she is always 

naturcLm, 



424 

pleased. - - Can jou touch it without mj brothej> 

sontent^zdj. 

perceiving it ? - - Suppose we dine here to-day^ 

and to-morrow at our house. - * I am so far 
from blaming you for assisting him, that, on the 
contrary, I very much admire your conduct. - - 
He is so far from despising her, that, on the con- 
trary, he respects and honours her. - - It is so 
far from raining, that, on the contrary, 1 think 
\\4^ shall have dry and hot weather during all 
this week. 

The conjunction W, if, instead of being repeated m 
a sentence, is more elegantly rendered by <ywe, with 
the verb following it in the subjunctive mood, as, in- 
istead of saying, 

Si vous venez chez jnoi., et If you call upon me, and 
si vous ne. me trouviez do not find ixie at 
jjas^ home, 

It is more elegant to say, 

Si vous venez chez moi, et 
que vous ne me trouviez 
pas, &LC, 

Que must also be repeated in the second part of a 
sentence, as well as the pronoun, when there is a con- 
junction in the first part of it ; in this case que requires 
the following verb to be put in the same mood as the 
preceding : ex. 




% 



425 



es que je Paurai vu et As soon as I have seen him 

que je lui aurai parle^ and spoken to him, I will 

je vous le ferai savoir, let you know it. 

Quoiqu'il soil plus riche Though he be richer than 

que vous^ et qu'i7 ait dt you, and have better 

meilhurs amis^ friends. 

EXERCISE ON THIS AND THE PRECEDING RULES. 

Jf your father do not arrive do-day» and if you 

want money, I will lend you some. - - 

avoir besoin de 

If you should see your sister, and speak to 

her, &:c. - - If you study and take pains, I 

assure you that you will learn the French 

language in a very short time. - - Whether 

you eat or drink, sing, dance, or play, do 

every thing with grace and attention. - - - 

If you love me, and be willing to oblige me, 

do not go to France with her. - - If men 

were wise, and would follow the dictates of 

lumiere^ f. 
reason, they would save themselves many sor- 

epargner^v, 
rows. - - If you meet my brother, and he speak 

to you, do not answer. - - So that you saw aiid 

spoke to her. - - Though you have good relations, 

pareni^m', 
36* • 



426 

your merit be known, and you do not want 

manquer de 
friends, your projects will not succeed without your 

brother's assistance. - - As soon as I have dressed 

myself, and breakfasted, I will go to see him. - - 

While you play and lose your money, your sister is 

learning her lesson. - - We must pity him who has 

no talent, and only despise him who has no virtue. 

- - Play on the organ, while I read my brother's 

letter and answer him. - - Beside that he never 

studies, and is always in the country, he has not 

so much wit as his sister. - - I will explain to you 

every difficulty (in order) that you may take 

courage and learn well. - - Though you should have 

the best master in England, and learn all the rules 

of the grammar, if you do not put them in practice^ 

you will never speak good French. - - - God grant 

you may succeed in your pursuits, and obtain the 

entreprise^f. 
favour you solicit so ardently ! - - - Whether 

God raise up thrones, or pull them downj 

ilever^v* abdisser,Y» en 

whether he communicate his power to prince?^ 

puiismccpL 



427 

« withdraw it to himself, and only leave them 
retirer^Y, 
their own weakness ; he teaches them their duty 

in a sovereign manner. - - Whether you speak or 

de, p. 

(hold your tongue.) you will obtain nothing from 

se taire^v. 

me ; hut whatever you may say, speak so that you 

may never oiFend any one. - - Your brother told me 

personne 
he was young, and was* but twenty years old when 

he was made a captain; I think he was better in- 
formed and had more experience than you have. - - - 
1 can assure you, that both our officers and soldiers 
have behaved nobly, and performed prodigies of 
valour, though ^the enemies were superior in num- 
ber, and had the advantage of the ground. 

terrein 

It is here necessary to observe, that verbs denoting 

wish^ will, command^ desire, douht, ftar, ignorance, entreaty^ 
persuasion, pretension, surprise, &:c. always require the 
conjunction que after them, with the following verb in 
the subjunctive mood* 

In short, in those dispositions of mind where the will 
is chiefly concerned, or whenever we express a thing 
- with some degree of doubt or hesitation, then the verb, 
which, in English, is put in the infinitive mood, the 
participle active, or the future tense, must, in French, 
be put in the subjunctive mood : ex. 

f See the remark after the Terb *ire, to be, page 174, 



428 

Croyez-vous quHl soil hon- Do you believe him to be 

nete 7 honest ? 

Jt doute que vous le fas- I doubt of your doing it. 

siez, 

Je ne crois pas quelle I do not believe she will 

vienne, come. 

See Falloir^ and the rules after it, page 332. 

EXERGISE ON THIS AND THE PRECEDING RULES. 

You wish him to pay you ; he has no money, I am 

obliged to lend him some every day. - - - I do not 

de 
think that true philosophy may be less useful to 

women than men ; but I remark, that the most 

remarquer, v. 
part of those who meddle (with it) are but 

se mihr^v, en 

very bad philosophers, without becoming better 

wives for it. - - I do not believe that your mother.will 

» ' 

arrive to-day. - - She wishes you may succeed 

pouTfoir,v, 
in all your undertakings. - - I fear she (will go 

craindre^y, s'^en al- 

away) without speaking to me. - - - I much fear he 
Zer,v. 
will come sooner than you expect him. - - - Do 

attendre,Y, 
you not say you are surprised that William has not 

spoken to you ever since last week. - - For my part, 

Quant « moi^ 
I am not surprised at it, for he is always pouting. 

bonder, y* 



i 



429 
rDo you think he will succeed, and obtain th6 place 



he aims at ? - - - You have had much trouble, and we 

aspirer,v, 

all fear lest hereafter she should give you much 

(pres. ofsubj.) 
m,ore. - - If you believe him to be your friend, why 

then do not you follow his advice ? - - It is necessary 

for you to go thither, and assure him, that I am very 

que • 

thankful for all his kindness. - - I wonder that 

rcconnoissant^ de^ 

Mr, R. has not yet asked your sister in marriage. - - - 

If you see her and she speaks to you, do not answer 

her. - * Order her to do it. - - Do you imagine 

Dire^y. sHmagincr^Y. 

we are sure they will come to-night ? - - ~ Do you 

think it is possible for you to (bring it about) ? 
cr,oir€,v. de^ cnvenir dbout^y* 

". ^ It is just we should suffer, since we deserve it. - - - 

I do not say I have seen it. - - He (was af«aid) lest 

craindre^y. que 
you should come while he was (gone out). - - - - 

Our master has ordered, that we should (get up) to- 

.96 le\ 7- 
.morrow morning early. - - You did not think tl she 
i 
■wanted to deceive you, when she told you .hat. 
vouloi7\v, 
-'- 1 wonder you should doubt, that it is vour 

etre surpi'is^ v. 
daughter who told it me. - - Do you think my mother 



m 
> 



430 
will let us go to the ball next week ? - - Were Mr. S* 
discreet and willing to undertake that affair, I 
would communicate it to him immediately. - - It 
will be better for you to go and speak to him your- 
self, while he is in town, because I do not doubt of 
his undertaking it. - - Were I certain that you would 
speak to him about it, I would desire him to come 
and dine with us to-morrow ; for I am to see him to- 
night at his brother's. - - I am certain thit he will 
satisfy you : are you certain he will satisfy me ? - - - 
Your uncle is very glad you have written to your 

father. - - I am very glad to hear you have over^ 

de SUV' 

come all difficulties. - - I will give you no rest, 
monier^Y, 

unless you are reconciled with your mother. - - - I 
quene, 
do not believe it is she who has done it. - - Do you 

believe it ? - - My brother is not well, and I doubt 

very much of his coming to see us before next 

jl spring. - - *Do y«u think he is on the road? - - I 

• • €?i,p. ^<» 

doubt whether he will come before next week. 

svivant^^dj, 
- - I did not know you had studied geography so long. 



431 

It must be observed, that, after the verb -couloir^ the 
verb io have is not expressed, but rendered in French bj 
que. it must also be observed, that the sign of the fu- 
ture tense, 5/m//, when it refers to the will of a person, 
and meaning, I choose^ I do not choose^ do you choose^ &lc. 
must be rei^Jered in Freueh by the present tense of the 
indicative mood of the verb vouloir^ according to the 
number and person, with the following verb in the sub- 
junctive mood : ex. 

Je veux qu'i/ fasse cela, I will have him do that. 

Je veux que vous me mon- You shall show me that 
triez cette lettre, letter, that is to say, 

I choose you should 

show, &c. 
Voulez-vous qntje danse ? Shall I dance ? that is, do 

yon choose, &c. 

EXERCISE ON THIS RULE. 

You would have your daughter return to- 

"vouloir^y* revenir^v. 

morrow, but that is impossible. - - I will have your 

father know what you have done : you must stay 

restei'^r, 
here till he comes, - - Your mother would have yon 

come directly ; why do not you come then ? - - I 

absolutely intend that she shall go thither 

voidoir., V. 
directly, and tell him, that, whether he be ill or 

well, I will have him set out as soon as he has re- 
ceived my letter. - - I will have you see my house, 

and tell me what you think of it. - - She lihall not go 
penseVyV, 



432 

into the <:ountry, unless I go. with her. - - - My father 

would have me and my brother walk all the 

jaire apied^v, 

way. Your sister shall go with me to Croy^en, and 

chemin^ m. 

not you. - - - Your father will have you go to France 

in a month ; I am very glad of it, however I would 
not have you do things too precipitately. - - - Shall 
my brother show you his translation ? - - Your brother 
asked me whether he might go home to-morrow ; I 
told him he might go whenever he thought he 
should be wanted : but you shall remain here till 
you have learned all your lessons. I know a gen- 
tleman who is going to Paris ; shall I tell liim to call 
upon you ? I would not have you go to Germany 
without understanding French well, as that language 
will enable you to learn German much sooner than 

you expect. Your brother shall not go out to-day. 

• - - Will you be so good as to go and carry that letter 
to the post ? No, 1 cannot leave my play. But J tell 

you, that you shall (go) ; I would have you pay 

faire, v. 
more attention to what you are told. 



433 

Qui, que, or dont, preceded by a superlative, require 
the following verb in the subjunctive mood, and when 
qui stands as a nominative to a verb, denoting a condi- 
tion, it also requires the following verb to be put in the 
subjunctive mood : ex. 

C^est la plus helh femme She is the handsomest 
qui puisse se voir^ woman that can be 

seen. 

Oest h plus mechant gar- He is the most wicked 
con que Je connoisse, boy that I know. 

Je veux une femme qui soil 1 will have a wife who is 
helle, handsome : 

that is, I win not hav^ any woman for a wife, but 

on condition she be handsome. 

EXERCISE ON THIS RULE. 

Do you say you are surprised, that he has not 
yet written to you ? I assure you it is not to be won- 
dered at, for he is the most negligent man I know. 

- - It is necessary for you to go thither, and assure 

que 
him that he has done nothing that should 

devoir ^Y» 
(make me angry). - - He is the most charitable man 

fdcher,\. 
we have in this neighbourhood ; his purse is always 

*open to any one who is poor and industrious. - - Did 

you not tell me you (sought for) a master who had 

chcrcher,\, 
a good pronunciation, and was endowed with % 

great deal of patience ? - - When a father is capable 

of teaching his children, he is the best ma«t«r- whom 
37 



434 . 

they can have. - - I know nobody that improves 

faire des progres^ 

more than Miss K ; and when she was learning 

» 
French, had she learned it by rules, she would speak, 

write, and translate now much better than Miss S — , 

though she was two years in France. - - Has not your 

brother some friends whom he can trust ? - - - Your 

sefier^Y, 
father has bought the finest horse that I have ever 

seen. - - Is there any lady that appears more reasonable 

than she does ? If you ever choose a friend, I wish 

you may choose one whom you esteem, and who 

may be an honest man. - - It will be better for you to 

go and speak to him yourself, instead of writing to 

him, because 1 do not doubt of his undertaking and 

(bringing about) your affair ; he is the most diligent 

venir d bout de 
and the most careful man we have in this country. - - 

Before you begin any thing of importance, consult 

some body who is your friend, and on whom you can 

rely. - - - Do you know any body who goes to 

faii'e fondly. 

France ? - - I have something to send to my sister. ^ - 

If you do not follow my advice, believe me, it will 



433 

be the greatest misfortune that can happen to you. 

- - Babylon was the finest city that ever was built. - - 

The best reason I can give you is, that I 

poiivoir^y, 
(was not well). - - If you lend me a horse, lend me 
se bun porter ^Y. 
one that goes well. The God who has created us, 

and who created the universe, is the only one 

5ew/,adj. *o^ 
to whom we owe homage, and the only one whom we 

ought to fear. 



SECT. IX. 

OF INTERJECTIONS. 

Interjections, as before observed, serve to express the 
gudden emotions of the soul. 

There are several sorts, viz. 

Of joy^ gf^tfi poii^') admii-ation, aversion, silence^ callings 
encouraging, warning, &:c. such as, 

Allons, gai ! come, be cheerful ! 

gn, courage ! come, come on ! 

Bon ! good ! 

Ah, mon Dieu ! oh, my God ! 

Ah, oui-da ! ay, marry ! 

Ha, quelle joie ! O, joy ! 

6 del ! O Heaven ! 

Fi ! fi ; (j upon ! 

Hola, ho ! ho there ! 

Hilas 1 alas ! 

Malheur a ! wo to ! 

Misericordc ! bless me ! 

Prenez garde, gare ! have a care ? 

Pnix, chut, st ! hist, hush! 

Silence ! silence ! 



436 



EXERCISE ON THE INTERJECTION^* 

Come, friends, let os rejoice ! - - Good ! here are 
se rejouir^v. 
Mews for you, brother, - - Fj, fj ! Robert, you do 

act think of what you say. - - Oh ! how lovely a 

penser,v» a que 

virtue is modesty ! Why do you not endeavour to 

shfforcer^y, de 
acquire it ? - - Alas ! who can express the torments 

1 suffer here ? - - - Man without religion, never 

kaving his heart or mind at peace, can, alas ! 

* esprit^m* en, p. 
be but a very unfortunate creature, - - Wo to you ! 

usurers, misers, unjust possessors of (other people's) 
usurier^m, avare^m, cmtrui^ipTO, 

goods, hearken to these words : The treasures 

hien,m. icouUr^v, <^o^ parole^f. 

of iniquity (will be of no service) to you. - - - O ! 

ne servir de rien 
(lazy people), go to the ant, consider what she 

paresseux^ fourmi^f, 

does, and learn from her, wisdom and industry. - - - 

Bless me! lam undone! - - - Hush there! silence! 

perdu^ p.p. 
- - - Oh ! the dismal effects which laziness pro- 

funeste,Q,Aj» 
duces ! - - • How* tremendou^^ an^ office^ is^ that 
terrible^ adj. le ^^^^ 

of^ a^ judge^ ! What wisdom, what integrity, what 

knowledge, what sagacity of mind, what experience, 

science, f. '' 

(are required !) 

ne faut'il pas avoir^v* * ^^ 



437 



REMARKS AND EXERCISES on the WORDS 

de, a, and pour. 

Having, in this manner, gone through the respective 
parts of speech, there will be no oceasion for a syntax. 
It will, however, be necessary to give some rules for 
ascertaining the proper use of the particle de or «, and 
the preposition pour, before a verb in the infinitive 
mood, and then to point out, by way of exercise, some 
idiomatical expressions that most frequently occur in 
the French tongue*. 

When two verbs come together in a sentence, the 
latter, having no subject expressed nor understood, must 
be put in the infinitive mood, whether the English sign 
to be prefixed or not. 

In the following cases, the infinitive mood must 
never be preceded by a particle. 

First, when the verb in the infinitive stands nomina- 
tive to another verb : ex. 

Aimer est un verbe, . To love is a verb. 

Secondly, after the following verbs, aller, croire, dc- 
Toir,faire, ilfaut, savoir. valoir mieux, venir, pouvoir, 
oser, vouloir, and penser, when rendered by to be, like or 
near. 

EXERCISES ON THIS RULE. 

To know how to give seasonably is a talent every ^ 
body has not. - - - To be able to live with one's self, 
and to know how to live with others, are the two 

great sciences of life. - - - I had rather do it 

aimer mieux^y, 

* The great r.uri.ber of idiomatical expressions in the French lan- 
^lage has long btcn considered as an almost insuperable difficulty in 
the nay of its easy acquirement ; however, this difficulty is daily 
decreasing ; these peculiar expressions are now giving Avay to a reg- 
ular confclruction, and arc very little used by the best writer*^. 
37* 



438 

now than later. - - Why dare you not undertake it f 

I think you might succeed. - - He says he will lend 

pouvoir^v, reussir^v. 
you his gun with all his heart, because you know 

fusil ^m, 
how to make use of it. - - Aristotle, though so 

x^ se servir^y, 

great a philosopher, was never able to penetrate the 

cause of that prodigy. - - Tell him, that he may set 

out when (he pleases). You never could 

it lui plaira^v* pouvoir^v. 

come more seasonably. - - We are to go to Vauxhall 

to-morrow. - * - I am going to see your brother. - - - 

(Is it not better) to set out now, than wait 
Valoir mieux^v. de attendre^Y, 

any longer ?----- If you ♦ trunk to oblige her, 

plus croire, v. 

you mistake. * - We were to have had a ball yester- 
se tromper^Y, 
day, but my sister was not well. - - You did very 

right, for you ought not to speak to him, - - I 
i2'en,adv. car,c. devoir^r^ 

had like to have fallen twenty times coming 
penser^ v. 
hither. - - To instruct, ple^e, and more the passions, 

are the three principal qualifications requisite in an 

qualiti^ 
orator. - - If you would read this book, I could 

vouloir, V. pouvoir^ V. 

lend it to you for four or five days. » * - He wishes to 

vouloir^ 
learn without taking pains. 

peine, sing. 



439 

The particle de is put before a verb in the infin- 
itive mood : First, when any of the following 
words, of, from or with, are used before the parti- 
ciple active of any verb. (See the JsT, B. upon the 
participle active, page 343.) 

Secondly, after a noun substantive joined immedi- 
ately to a verb, either without any article at all, or with 
the following articles, /e, la, or les. 

Thirdly, after the following adjectives, decent, glad, 
impossible, necessary, sorry, worthy, vexed, and the like. 

Fourthly after the following verbs : to advise, to ap- 
prehend, to bid, to cease, to command, to. conjure, to coun- 
sel, to defend, to defer, to deserve, to desire, to endeavour, 
to entreat, to fear, to hasten, to long, to order, to permit, to 
persuade, to pray, to pretend, to promise, to propose, to refuse, 
to remember, to threaten, to tell, to warm, to undertake, <^c, 
and the greater part of the reflected verbs. 

And lastly, after the conjunction que, preceded by the 
comparative degree. 

EXERCISE ON THIS RULE. 

1 have desired your brother, to lend me some 
prier,y, 
money. - - - My mother ordered me to tell you, to 

ordonner,v. 
go and speak to her directly. - - Did you not permit 

bim to go out this morning ? - - * I am surprised to 

sortir,Y, 
find you so ill. - - I have not desired you to play. * - 

Bid your sister to send me my book. - - - We 

Dire,Y, a 

were afraid of displeasing you. - - - What do yoU 

advise me to do in such a cage ? - - - My sister 

conseiller,y. 

and I intend to (call upon) you on Friday next, 

passtr,r, chez,^. 



440 . 

i am very glad to hear you are better. - - 

apprendr6^Y, 
She does not pretend to speak French as well as 

septquer^v^ 
you. - - We are tired of repeating to you the same 

things so often. - - If you finish your exercise soon, 
you will have the pleasure of walking, while the 
others will have the trouble of working. - - It Is neces* 

sary to tell her not to go thither (any more); for, 

plus^ adv. 
she would be in danger of losing her life. - - - En- 
deavour to please your masters by your application to 

a 
study. - - - Do not you remember having said you 

would carry me to the camp-? - - - Do not they 

mener^ v. 
deserve to be encouraged, who undertake to serve 
m6rittr,\, 
the public ? - - - We are all glad to hear you have 

overcome your enemies ; we should have been sorry 

to have heard the contrary. - - What a fool you are 

to grieve so, when you have so much reason to 

s^affiiger^y. 
rejoice ! - - Never expect to speak French well, uh- 

s'^attendre^ 
less you practice it (very much.) » - I shall never refuse 

heaiicoup, 
to do you a service, as long as it is in my power. 
rendre^y* 
' - Have you a mind to do what you have pro- 

^<i^ envie^f. 
mised me ? - - I cannot give you the book you asked 



441 

me for, mj brother has not (thought fit) to send 

juge7' a propos^ v. 
it me back again. - - •* I desired you to bring your 

sifiter with you ; why did you not ?* - - I forbid 

difendre\y» 
you to speak or write to him (any more). - - Would 

daxantage, adv. 
you not be very glad to read and speak Italian ? - - 

- - . Condemn the opinion of no one hastily, but 

endeavour to regulate your own by the line of 
iefforcer^Y. •<^ *<^ 

truth. - - - Who can hinder me from speaking or 
■v6rit6,L empecher^v, 

writing to her ? - - (Give me leave) to tell you, that 

Permeitre^Y. 
you do very wrong to disoblige your aunt. - - - He 

ma7, adv. 
(was not contented) to demoUsh the temple and pull 
se contenter^V. ^- 

down the statues, but, &c, - - - Is there any thing 
hattre^y, 
more glorious, than to change anger into friendship t 

- - - (I long) to see your mother, and tell her all 

// me tarde^v* 
that I think (about it.) 
en, pro. 



The particle a is to be placed before a verb in the 
infinitive mood : First, after the auxiliary verb, avoir, 
to have, immediately followed by a substantive or 
an adverb, expressing a futurity in the action : ex. 
J''aiplusieiirs lettres a ecrire, I have many letters to write. 

Secondly, after nouns substantive joined to the 
verb avoii', or nouns adjective joined to the verb 
efre, signifying to be addicted, apt, bent, diligent, dis- 

* Dq i/, is understood, and must be expressed in French. 



442 

posed^ dreadful, easy, fit, hard, intUned, quick, ready, suf^- 
ject, used, &«. 

Thirdly, after the following adjectives, admirable, 
good, dexterous, handsome, scarce, the last, the first, the 
second, &c. 

And, lastly, after the following verbs, to amuse, to 
aspire or aim at, to begin, to condemn, to continue or go 
on, to compel or force, to design, or destine, to dispose, 
to employ or spend, to encoi^rage, to Engage, to excite, 
to exhort, to help, to ind'nce, to invite, to learn, to please, 
to serve^ to tak& a pleasure or delight in or to, to teach, te 
itink, &€. 

EXERCISE ON ir.r. PRECEDING VERBS. 

Come hither, Paul, I have something to communi- • 

eate to you. - - We have much to fear in our present 

situation, and a great 'naiiy hazards to run. - - - I 

tsssot^e to the pin J to-night 5 for, I have five or 

six visits to pay. Is there any thing pleasanter 

rendre,y, 
to behold than the flux and reflex of the sea f - - We 

ought to learn how to subdue our passions, 

'o^ subjuguer,y, 

conquer our desires, and suffer . patiently the most 

cruel misfortunes. - - - She is always the first to 
disgrace, f. 

(find fault) with what I do. Do not gather 

trouver a redire, d 

that appk, it is not yet good to eat. - - - Mr. N. told 

me you had a country-house to let. - - - Mr. F. is a 

louer,v, 
very agreeable man, always ready to serve his friends, 

but he has the misfortune to be inclined to gaming. 



443 

- - - Your master does not love you, because you ar€ 

not diligent in learning your lesson. - - - We had for a 

long time nothing to eat but the fruits which we had 

gathered. - - - The greatest part of men spend their 

time either in doing nothing, or doing what they ought 

not to do. - - - What you say of her is very hard 

difficUe^Sidj, 
to be believed. - - - Tell him, I have no complaint to 

make about his conduct. - - - Why do you oblige her 

de 
to ask my pardon, since she is not inclined to do it het- 

self ? - - - I believe she takes a delight in tormenting 

me. - - - Life is so short, that we should employ all 

our days in preparing ourselves for the other world. - - 

There is no more danger to fear. - - - Use yourself, 

S'^accontumer^v, 
laid a father to his son, to practice virtue : that alone 

will help you to bear with patience ail the vicis- 

supporter\v, 

Etudes of fortune. - - - Never amuse yourself in read- 
ing bad books. - - - You can never spend your time 

passerby, 
better than in reading and studying the history of your 

own country. - - - Learn to speak well ; but, above all, 

to speak truth. - - - That science, which teaches us to 

c/ire, V. 
see things as they are, is highly worthy of cultivation. 

- - - An honest man always takes pleasure in obliging 
his friends. - - - Does your master teach you how to 
translate English into French ? - - - Do you begin to 
translate French well ? - - - Why did you not oblige 
him to pay you what he owes you ? - - - Why do yoa 



444 

not (get ready) to set out with us ? - - - I love to 

s'*appreter,v. 
discourse with polite and sensible people. 
s^entretenir^y, 

N. B. For the sake of euphony, the following verbs, 
to begin, to continue, to constrain, to engage, to exhort, to 
compel or force, to endeavour, to oblige, may be succeeded 
by de, or a, as most convenient. 

The preposition pour is to be used before a verb in 
the infinitive mood, when it expresses the cause, the 
design, or the end, and then the English particle to 
|nay be expressed by in order to, to the end, or for to. 
This preposition is also used after the adverbs, enough, 
on purpose, too, too much, or less ; and before an infini- 
tive in the beginning of a period, 

EXERCISE ON THESE RULES. 

I will do every thing in my power to please him. - - 

Good rules are useless, if the attention, industry^ and 

assiduite, f. 
patience of the scholar be not put into practice to learn 

them. - - Mrs. B. has too much pride to confess she 

(is in the wrong.) - - To understand geography well, we 

avoir tort, on 

must, &c. - - I assure you that I came on purpose to 

see you. - - She will do all that is in her power to 

oblige you, and prove to you that she is truly your 

friend. - - The wicked live to die, but the righteous 

die to live. - - She has vanity enough to believe all 

you tell her. - - Wliat makes the misfortunes of kings, 

is not to have friends bold enough to tell them the 

truth. - - I wrote to you some time agOj to let 

faire,r. 
you know, that your brothers were arrived. - - - He 



445 



promised me, that he would do every thing to de- 
serve the honour of your protection. - - - I sent yes- 
terday my servant to your aunt's to desire her to 
send me back again the book I lent her a month 

ago, but she was not at home. - - We did all that 

faire^Y, 
we could to pass the river, but could no* (accom- 

venir a 
plish it). - - To convince you that I am ready to do 
hout cZe,v. 
you any service, (be so kind as) to command me* 

avoir la bonte^v, 
- - Why did you not punish her for having done 

what you forbade her to do? - - - A man should live 

a century at least to know the world, and many other 

centuries to know how to make a proper use of that 

knowledge. 



SECT. X. 

OF IDIOM ATICAL EXPRESSIONS. 
ON THE VERB AVOIR, to have, &c 

Avoir fnal a la tele, 



Avoir mal aux oreilles, 
Avoir mal aux yeux, 
Avoir mal au ner, 

Avoir mal a la bouchc, 

vJcoir mal aux dents, Sfc.^ 
38 



to have the head-ach, or 

a pain in the head, 
to have sore ears, or a pain 

in the ears, 
to have sore eyes, or a pain 

in the eyes, 
to have a sore nose, or a- 

pain in the nose, 
to have a sore mouth, or 

a pain in the mouth, 
to have the tooth-ath^ 



446 

We say, after the same manner, 
Avoir froid aux mains ^ aux pieds^ <^c, ex. 
J^ai froid a la tete, aux My head, my hands, and 

mains, et aux pieds, my feet, are cold. 

Avoir beau, to be in vain : ex. 

Vous avez beau ^ctr/cr, It is in vain for you to talk. 
Avoir beaucoup de peine, to have much ado. 
Avoir de la peine a : ex. 

J'ai de la peine a vous croire, I can hardly believe you. 
Avoir besoin de, to want, to have occasion for. 
Avoir la honti de (daigner), to be so kind as. 
Avoir connoissance, avis de, to have notice of. 
Avoir cours, to take, to be in vogue. 
Avoir honte, to be ashamed. 
Avoir la mine de, to be like, to look like : ex. 
Vous avez la mine d'etre You look like a man of un- 

intelligent, derstanding. 

Avoir pitie de, to pity. 

Avoir part au gateau, to share in the booty. 

Avoir bonne mine : ex. 

Yous avez tres-bonne ) ^ i j 7; i. j 

7,7 . > You look very zvell to day. 
mine aujourdlim, 5 ^ j 

Avoir plus depeur que de mal, to be more afraid than hurt. 

Avoir raison, to be in the right. 

Avoir soin, to take care. 

Avoir tort, to be in the wrong. 

,.,,,. /• • 7 ^ to have no occasion or business 

JV 'avoir que faire de, | ^^ ^^ ^^^^ 

N''avoir garde de, or ) are ex- (" to be sure not, or 

Se garder bien de, J pressed by ( by no means. 

Aller son train, to go our own way. 

Aller trouver quelquhin, to go to somebody. 

Venir trouver, to come to. 

EXERCISES ON THE PRECEDING RULES. 

I could not call upon him this morning, because I 
had a pain in my head. - - - My brclber would have 
come with me, but he hai a sore leg, and is obliged to 



447 

keep his bed. - - - - I heard your mother had the* 
ioofh-ache : Is it true ? No, madam, but she has 
a pain in Jur side which prevents her from going 
out. - - - - I have not yet finished my exercise ; 
for my hands were so cold, that I could not write another 
Avord ; besides, I had much ado to find my books, I 
did not know where to look for them. - - - It will 
he in vain for you to write to me, I never will answer 

you. ' - ' I can hardly believe what you tell me, 

ft is in vain for me to speak to her, she still goes her 
own way, - - - Miss N. cried very much yesterday, but 
I think she was more afraid than huri, - - - It has been 
in vain for him to torment your sister, she never would 
tell him what happened to her when she was at Mr. 
P's. - - - Go to him, and tell him that, unless he re- 
turns me my books in a very short time, I vfill desire 
his father to send them to me : when you have told 
him that, do not wait for his answer ; come to me im- 
mediately, 1 shall be at your mother's, where I am to 
dine, and thence go to the play with the whole family, 
- - - In vain I give myself trouble, I am not the richer 
for it. - - - Your sister does not look so 7veU to-day as 

she did yesterday. Ain I not in the right to go 

there no more ? - - - I will take care to prevent them 
from coming hither. Believe me, I have long sus- 
pected them, and now I am very certain that both your 
cousins and they have had a share in the booty, - - - fVe 
should often be ashamed of our finest actions, if the 



448 

^orld knew all tRe motives which produce them. - - - 
f^are in the wrong not to ask for his horse, he would 
lend it to you. - - - Why should I borrow hi§ horse, 
when I have one of my own ? - - - I have no occasion for 
his. ' - - Be so kind as to carry that letter to Mr, IPs. 
hut be sure not to tell him who sent you. - - - I hope 
you will by no means go there again, after what has hap- 
pened to you. - - - He was so altered, that she had 
much ado to recollect him, hut he now begins to look 
very well* Somebody having advised Philip, Alex- 
ander's father, to banish from his states a man who had 
spoken ill of him, I shall by no means do it, answered 
he, he would go every where and speak ill of me. 

ON ETRE, TO BE. 

^dsonaise, > ^^ ^^ j^ ^^^^ ^.^^^^^ 

Eire j en bonne passe V stances. 

( bien dans ses ajja^res, 3 

^ , . s , , , ( to be in threat favour 

Etre hen auprts de quelquhm, ^ ^.^^ ^^^^ ^^^^ 

^ , , , ( to be out of favour with 

Eire mal avec quelqu'un, ^ ^^^^ ^^^ 

C to be chargeable, trou- 
Etre a charge a quelqu^un^ < blesome, or a burden 

( to some one. 
Etre. but a but, to be equal. 
Eire de moitie, to go halves. 

^ , , .. 1 n -1 J ( to be within mus- 

Etre a la portee du fusil, du canon, ^ j^gt-shot, gun-shot. 

Eire a la portee de la voix, to be within call. 

p ^ a la veille de, > to be upon the brink, or very 

( sur le point de, I near to» 
Eire en 6tat de, K^ ^ff^,,|^ 
Avoir le moyen de^ ) 



449 



EXERCISE ON THE PRECEDING IDIOBIS. 

Your brother is in good circumstances now. - - - 
Somebody told me he tvas in great favour with the 

king*. Yes, it is true, but he is out of favour 

with mj father, because he is troublesome to the family. 

- - - Well, Mr. R. and he are equals, I thought 

Mr. A. and Mrs. D. went halves in that affair, but I 
heard the contrary. - - - Suffer me to tell you, you do 
very wrong to treat her as you do, you undoubtedly 
must have forgotten she is in the queen's favour. - - - 
Well, if she he in the queen's favour^ do you imagine I 
am not to tell her what I think of her conduct ? - - - 
The two fleets were within gun-shot, and very near be-- 
ginning the engagement, when we left them. - ' - We 
will be within call. - - - Why do you not take a coach 
now and then ? said she to me. I would willingly take 
one sometimes, replied I to her, but I cannot afford it. 



ON FAIRE, TO MAKE, OR DO, 

Faire cas de, to value, to esteem. 

Faire un tour de promenade, to take a walk. 

Fairt le malade, to sham sickness. 

Faire I'ecole buissonniere, to play truant. 

Faire heaucoup de chemin, to go a great way. 

Faire le bel esprit, to set up for a wit. 

Faire fond sur quelqu'un, to rely upon one. 

rf • . / ,. V ( to let one know, to inform, 

T aire savotr, (envoycr dire^) < , , , ,' ' 

Faire voile, or K^ ^^^ ^^.j^ 
Mettre a la voile, ) 

Faire faire, to bespeak, to get made, to oblige one to do. 
38* 



450 

Faire de son mieiix, to do our best. 

Faire semhlant^ to pretend. 

Faire de son pis, to do our worst. 

J^e faire que de, to be just, or 

Venir de, to have but just : ex. 

// ne fait que d^arriver, He is but just arrived- 

Me faire que, to do nothing but. _ 

Se faire des amis, des ennemis, to get friends, enemies* 

Se faire des affaires, to bring one's self into trouble. 

o?, /v- • ( to be conceited, to have a ffood 

b^en faire accroire, { • • r ^ ir 

^ ' ( opinion of one's self. 

Oen est fait de moi, I am undone, it is over with me. 

Cen itoitfait de lui, he was undone, it was over with him. 

Pen sera fait d\lk, \ ^^<= ^J" ''^- ""'•°n«' " "'"' ^^ ""'^ 
^ ' ( With her. 

/-<, -x J- 'I J S we should be undone, it would 

L^cn seroit fatt denous, < t. ... ' 

^ ' ( be over with us. 

The English verb, to cause, preceding the verb to 6e, 
immediately followed bj a participle passive, is rendered 
in French, by the verbya?'re, and then the verb to be is 
not expressed, but the participle passive is turned into 
the infinitive mood : ex. 

// lui fit couper la tete, He caused his head to he 

cut off, 

EXEIRCISE ON THE PRECEDING IDIOMS. 

Do not lose that ring, for I value it much ; it i& a 
particular friend of yours who gave it me. - - - I would go 
and take a walk, if 1 were well. - - - Do you not sham 
sickness now and then ? - - - Did not your brother jp/cc^- 
truant l^st week ? - - - That man goes a great way for 

a trifle Mr. P. sets up for a wit, wherever he goes. 

You m^yr^ly wpon what I tell you. - - - He succeeds 

"better m being conceited, than in giving ethers a 
good opinion of himsdf. - - - I begin to be very much 



4M 

satisfied with his brother, who now docs his best, and 
will soon be able to write a French letter to his father. 

- - - Let me know whether he will pay jou or not. - - - 
We shall set sail about the fifteenth of the next month. 

- - - Why did notigou bespeak three or four pair of shoe^ 
more ? - - - Send zoord to your brother, or let him 

know^ that there is a letter for him here. I will give 

him an exercise, and oblige him to do it in my pre- 
sence. - - - She told me if she zvo'e obliged to do it, 
she would do her worst, - - - She pretends not to 
listen, but 1 assure you she does not lose a word of what 
you say. - - - We were but just come in when it began 
to rain. - - - It would have been over with us, could th€ 
enemy have known what passed in our camp. - - - You 
do nothing but play from morning till night. - - - - 
That young lady will get friends every where. - - - 
If you do not take care, you will bring yourself 
into trouble - - - Permit me to tell you, that they 
are too much conceited. - - - Your brother is un- 
done, if his master come to know of it. - - - In 1606, 
King James caused the oath of allegiance to be drawn 
up ; and, in 1621, summoned a parliament, in which 
were formed the two parties, called Whigs and Tories. 

ON DirFERENT VERBS. 

Ainur mieux, to have rather, to choose rather. 

c, J 7 • 7 • V to take a great deal upoi> 

be donner bitn aes airs, < i ir * 

' ( one's sell. 

// nefaut pas s'^etonner, it is no wonder. 

// me tarda Je, 1 long to. 



45^2 

Penser, to be like. (Followed by a verb in the infini- 
tive mood.) 

S'cn prendre a, f *" ^^ '^,« /^"" "' ''''""^ "P"" one, 
^ ' ( to look to one for. 

S^y bien prendre, or ( to go the right way to 

S''y prendre de la bonne fagan, ( work. 

5'i/ prendre mal, to go the wrong way to work. 

5'i/ prendre tout autrement, ^ *^ go q^ite a different, or 

' ( another, way to work. 
Prendre en mauvaise part, to take amiss. 
Venir a bout de, to bring about, to accomplish. 

EXERCISES ON THE PRECEDING IDIOMS. 

I choose rather to set out now than later. - - - She 
told me she had rather do any thing than speak to Mr. 
L. - - - They had rather have had you stay in Italy 
4avo or three years longer. - - - Do not you think Mrs. 
H. takes a great deal upon herself? - - - It is no wonder 
that I do not speak French so well as you ; you have 
been several years in France, and I never was there* 
- - - I hope your brother will succeed in his undertak- 
ing ; for, he goes the right way to work, and I am certain 
that he will bring it about, - - - Your cousin, on the 
contrary, will always be poor ; for, he goes the zorong 
way to work in every thing he undertakes. - - - She 
longs to see your father, and tell him how well you 
have behaved all the time of his absence. - - - I had 
like to have been killed in coming here. - - - If he 
_Jbse, he will lay the blame upon you* - - - Why do you 
lay the blame upon her ? she was not even in the room 
when that happened. - - - Should not your sister suc- 
ceed, whom would she lay the fault upon .^ - * - You 



453 

iay you long to speak French ; and I too, I assure you. 

1 long to tell you something, nevertheless I do 

not know how to communicate it to you for fear of 
disobliging you. - - - When you have a mind to tell m& 
goniething disagreeable, you should go quite a different 
way to work. - - - I beg of you not to take amiss what I 

tell you. Do not begin a thing, unless you are sure 

io hrins. it about* 



ON DIFFERENT VERBS. 

Se passer c?e, to do without, or to be easy without. 
Savoir bon gre, to take kindly of. 
Trouver mauvais que, to take ill if.* 
Trouver a redire e, to find fault with. 
Tenir maison^ to be a house-keeper. 
Tenir boutique^ to be a shop-keeper. 
Tcnir parole, to keep our word. 
... , V < to be in a person's ponder, 
.\e tejur qu a, | ^^ j.^^ .^^ ^ person's power : ex. 

// ne iient qua moi, a vous, It is in my, your, his, her, 
a lui, a elle, ^-c, power, &LC. 

II ne tient pas amoi, a vous, It is not my, your, fault, 
<^c. que, &:c. if.t 

S^en tenir a, to stand to. 

Vouloir dn bien a, to wish one well. 

E71 vouloir a, to have a spite against. 

Je souhaiterois pouvoir^ I wish 1 could. 

// y rcp, il y alloit, de voire vie, your life is, was, at stake. 

n -7 77 -x J 7 S "ly honor is, was, 

il y va, ?/ V alloit, de rnon nonneur, \ ^ ■ a ■ -^ 

^ ' ^ ' ' ( concerned in it. 

Je ne laisse pas de, I nevertheless, or for all that. 

* With the following verb in the subjunctive. 

t With <^''- following veib in the subjunctive, and ?ic before ij. • 



454 



EXERCISE ON THE PRECEDING IDIOMS. 

When I have wine, I drink some ; but when I have 
none, I am easy without, - - - If you will he so kind as 
to write to my father, to let him know my situation, I 
shall take it kindly of you, and promise you never to 
find fault with what you may recommend to me. - - - 
I wish I could do you that service, I would do it with all 
my heart. - - - 1 hope you will not take it ill, if\ write 
to your uncle at the same time. - - - I shall stand to 
what you say. - - - He has been a house-keeper these five 
and twenty years. - - - He might have succeeded much 
better than he has done, had he followed his uncle-s ad- 
vice and mine ; but he never was satisfied, and was con- 
tinually ^/iMJmgy*a«/i with what we were telling him. - - 
However little you send him at present, he will take it 
kindly of you. - - - It is in her power to live in the coun- 
try, and be very happy there. - - - It unll soon lie in your 
power to make us happy. - - - I assure you it shall not he 
my fault, ''fj^^ ^^ ^^^ succeed; for I wish you welL - - 
Since it lies in your power to recommend Mr. P. to your 
friend, why do you not do it ? - - - When you see him, 
you may assure him, that, since it is in my power to do 

it, J will not forget him. You have a spite against 

my brother ; because it 7cas in Ms power two or three 
times to oLIlge you. and he never would. - - - I wish I 
could persuade you how sorry he was for it ; but his 
honor was concerned in not doing it : . : .1 though you be 
very angry wiliii him, be would, n:rry:['^-l^r?!?^{ov.for all 
that,) do you service if it weretn ^l,£ foii;cr, - - - Had I 



45o 

thought he would have refused me that favour, I never 
would have asked it of him ; I might very well have 
done without it, - - - You ought to have thanked him for 
that attention, instead of being angry with him; but 
when your sisters heard that you could not obtain his 
leave, they took it amiss, and have ever since had a spite 

against him. When they told me of it, I would most 

willingly have represented to them, hew much they zvei'e 
in the wrong : but I v/ould hi no means do it ; for 1 know 
it is in their power to do me a great deal of harm, and I 
^o not \Yish to get enemies. - - - Every body admires heV 
humanity ; for, though he has behaved in so ungrateful 
a manner towards her, she would, nevertheless, have done 
him service, if he had lived. 



SECT. XI. 

GENERAL AND PROMISCUOUS EXERCISES. 
OF THE UjYnERSTAJVDIjVG OF LJJVGUAGES, 

The understanding of languages serves (for an) in- 
inteltigence^f. dt 

troductioii to all the sciences. By it we come 

■parxenir^y, 
with very little trouble at the knowledge of a groat 

many fine things, which have cost those who in- 
vented then\ a great deal of pains. By it all 

timea and countries lie open to us. By it 

siccle^ m. etrc, v. 

WO become, in some measure, contemporary to all 



456 

ages, and inhabitants of all kingdoms. It (enables) 

mettre en eiat^ 
us to converse with the most learned men oi all 

antiquity, who seem to have lived and laboured for 

us. We find in them many masters, whom (we are 

il nous 
allowed) to consult at leisure ; many friends who 
est permis 
are always at hand, and whose useful and agreeable 

conversation improves the mind. It informs us of 

enrichir,v. 
a thousand curious subjects, and teaches us equally 

(how to make an advantage) of the virtues and vices 

a profit er^Y, 
of mankind. Without the assistance of languages, 

all these oracles are dumb to us, and all these 

pom-, p. 
treasures (locked up;) and, for want of having the 

fermer^v, 
key, which alone can open us the door (to them,) we 

en, p. 
remain poor in the midst of so many riches, and 

ignorant in the midst of all the sciences. 



OF STUDY. 

We (come into the world) surrounded with a cloud 
nailre^y, * 

of ignorance, which is increased by the false pre- 
judices of a bad education. By study, the former 
is dispersed, and the latter corrected. It gives 
* See the observation on the preposition with^ page 405. 



457 

proportion and exactness to our thoughts and rea- 
jusiesse^L 

^sonings; instructs how to range in due order what- 
ever we have to speak or write ; and presents us with 

dire^y. * 

the brightest sages of antiquity as patterns for our 

modtle^ rr>. 
conduct, whom, in this sense, we may call, with 

Seneca, the masters, and teachers of mankind. But 

pr6cepttui\m. 
the usefulness of study is not confined to what we 

call science; it renders us also more fit for business 

and employment ; besides, though this study 

de plus ^2idi\\ quand^c 
were of no other use but (the acquiring) a habit of 

t 
labour, (the softening) the pains of it, (the pfo- 

t 
curing) a steadiness of mind and (conquering) 

t ferraile^L t 

our aversions to application or a sedentary life, or 

whatever else seems (to lay a restraint upon) us, it 

assujeitir^w 
would still be of very great advantage. In reality, 

it draws us off from idleness, play, and debauch- 

ery. It usefully fills up the vacant hours of the 
day, and renders very agreeable that leisure, which, 
without the assistance of literature, is a kind oi death, 
and, in a manner, the grave of a man while he is 
alive. It enables us to pass a right judgment upon 
other men's labours, to enter into society with men 

t These particiiilcg active are to be rendered in Frcnt;h I ,- ihft 
jiinnitivc. 



458 

of understanding, to keep the best company, 

frtquenter^v. 
(to have a share in) the discourses of the most learned, 

prendre part a 
to furnish out matter for conversation, without which 

quoi^ 
we must be silent, to render it more agreeable and more 

useful, by intermixing facts with reflections, and setting 

relever^v, 
the one by the other. 



IJV*DOLEJyCE CHJRJCTERISED. 

Indolence deprives men of all that activity", which 

should call forth their virtues and make them illustrious. 

An indolent man is scarcely a man ; he is half a woman. 

He wills and unwills in a breath. He may have good 

intentions to discharge a duty, while that duty is at a 

distance ; let it but approach, let him view the time of 

action near, his hands immediately (drop down) in lan- 

iombei'^Y, 
guor. What (can be done) with such a man ? He is 

peut on fair e^ * 
absolutely good for nothing. Business tires him, reading 

fatigues him, the service of his country interferes too 
much with his pleasures, and even attendance at court, 
though for the time of advancement, is too great a re- 
straint upon him. His life should be passed on a bed of 

down. If he be employed, moments (are as) 

sembler.Vp 
hours to him ; if he (be amused,) hours are as 

s'^amiiscr^v, 
moments^ In general, his whole time eludes him : 

* See th§ obseryation on the preposition inr'th^ page 405. 



459 

he lets it glide unheeded, like water under 

insensihlement^^dv, 
a bridge. Ask him what he has done with his 

morning, he knows nothing about it; for he has 

matinec^L 

lived without one reflection upon his existence. He has 

slept as long as it was possible for him to sleep, dressed 

fclowly, amused himself in chat v/ith the first person that 

called upon him, and taken several turns in his room 

faire^w 
till dinner. Dinner is served up, and the evening will 

be spent as unprofitable as the morning, a^d his whoje 

life as this day. (Once more), such a man is good 

Encore unefois,3.dY, 
for nothing. It is only pride that can support him in a 

life so Worthless, and so much beneath the character of 
a man. 



JJ\*ECDOTE OF THE CAJWIA^AL VIVIERS. 

John de Brogni, Cardinal of Viviers, who presided at 
the council of Constance as dean of the cardinals, had 
been a hog-driver in his infancy. Some monks, passing 
by the place where he was busied in that mean employ- 
ment, and taking notice of his wit and vivacity, offered 
to carry him to Rome, and bring him up to study. The 
boy accepted of their ofler, and went straight to a slioe- 
maker to buy a pair of shoes for his journey ;, the shoe- 
maker trusted him with part of the price, and told himf, 



4eo 

gmiling, he should pay him the rest when he was inade 
a cardinal. He hecame a cardinal in reality, and did 
not forget his former low condition, but took care to 
perpetuate the memory of it. In a chapel he built at 
Geneva, over against the gate of St. Peter's church, he 
caused this adventure to be carved in a stone, whepe he 
is represented young and without shoes, keeping hogs 
wnder a tree, and all around the wall are the figures of 
shoes, to express the favour he had received from the 
shoemaker. This monument is still subsisting at Genevia:* 



FR^TEU;S'AL JiFFECTIOJW 

The king of Cucho had three sons : and, like many 
other parents, having most affection for the youngest, 
some days before his death declared him his successor, 
to tlie exclusion of his brethren. This proceeding was 
the more extraordinary, as it was contrary to the laws of 
the kingdom. The people, therefore, thought that, after 
the death of the king, they might, without any crime,, 
raise the eldest son to the throne. This design was uni- 
versally approved of, but the new king, calling to mind 
his father's last words, rejected the offer, and taking the 
crown, placed it on the head of his youngest brother, pub- 
licly declaring, that he renounced it, and thought him- 
self unworthy of it, as he was excluded by his father's 
vail, and his father could not now retract what he had 
done. His brother, being affected with such a generQus 



461 

action, instantly entreated him not to oppose the inclina- 
tion of the people, who desired him for their ruler. He 
urged, that he alone was the lawful successor to the 
crown, which he refused, and that their father could not 
infringe the laws of the kingdom ; that he had been be- 
trayed by an extravagant fondness ; and that, in a word, 
the people had the power of redressing any breach in the 
established law. Nothing, however, was capable of per- 
suading his brother to accept of the crown. There was 
a glorious contest between the two princes ; and, as they 
perceived that the dispute would be endless, they re- 
tired from court. Thus, each having both conquered 
and been vanquished, they went to end their days to- 
gether in peaceful solitude, and left their kingdom to 
4be other brother. 



STUDY OF J^ATURE, 

There is a study* of nature which requires'^ almost 
nothing but eyes, and which, on that account^ is | with- 
in the reach* | of all sorts of persons, and even^ of chil- 
dren. It consists in | being mindfuP | of the objects'" 
which nature offers^ us, in considering them carefully^ 
and admiring the different beauties of them, but without 
searching*** in their hidden" causes, which belongs'^ to 
the physic*^ of the learned. 

I say that even children are capable of it : for they 
have eyes, and don't want*^ inquisitiveness*\ They | 

1 Etude 5 adcnaander; 3par cette raison ; 4^]aporfee; snierae; 
ese rendre attentif ; "^objet ; s presenter ; »avec soin ; J oappro- 
fondir; ii secret i ^2^tre du ressort ; 1 3 physique ; umanqiur; 
1 scuriosite. 

39* 



4e2 

are dcciroiis^ [ to know : liiev ask queslicns.- | One 
need culr^ | cj^iickeiv, and keep u[y in them the de- 
sire of learning and knowing, which is natural to all 
men. Besides, that study, if it ought to be called so, far 
from being painfuP and tiresome', offers nothing but 
pleasure and delight". It can serve instead of,'-^ and 
ought common!}'" to be done by way" of, diversion'-' onlj ., 

h is I not to be conceived'* | how many things chil- 
dren could learn, if one knew how to improve'^ all the 
opportunities'^^ which they themselves afford'^ us* 
A garden, the fields", a palace, all that is a book open 
for them : but they must have learnt, and be accustomed 
to read it. Nothing is more common among us than 
the use'-" of bread and linen : nothing is more scarce'^ 
than to fmd children who know hov/ both the one and 
the other are prepared : through liow many ways-*^ and 
hands wheat-' and hemp^- must pass before they | are 
made-^ | bread and linen. The same must be said of 
woolen-^ stuffs,"^ which are but little like the fleece-*"' of 
sheep^' of which they are made^ no more than paper^ 
is like those linen rags-" that are picked up"^^ in the 
streets. Why are not children acquainted'- with those 
marvellous^ productions'^'' of Nature and Art, which they 
every day make use of, w^ithout minding^'' them ? 

The following examples will serve to shew^^ how wc 
ought to study Nature in all that offers itself ^"^ to our eyes 
and ascend'^ from^^ her to the Creator. 1 shall confine 
myself '° to what concerns" plants^^ and animals. 

The first Preacher*^ that proclaimed*'' the glory of the 
supreme God is the sky,''^ where the sun, the moon, and 

" iVouloir ; sinterroger ; 3il ne faut que; 4rdvei]lcr ? Sentrele^ 
jiir ; ^pynible ; ^cnnujeux ; Sagrenient ; stenirJieu; ^ oordinaire- 
jnient ; 1 ^ en jotiant and »2 recreation, (but this last uord mvsl come 
after lenir lieu, and the sentence end with en jouant) ; i 3inconceiva~ 
ble ; i4profiter ; is occasion ; i efournir ; I'^une canjjjagne ; 
i8u?age; i^rare; 2 ofa§on ; 2 1 ble ; 22chanvre ; 2 3(ievenir^ 
S4laine; 2 5^toffe; 2 6toison; 2 7brebi.s; ssformer; 2 9papier^; 
'^ochiffon; 3 1 lamasser ; 3 2instruit ; 3 Smerveilleux ; 3 4ouvragej 
""sfaire reflection a ; scmontrer; s^se presenter; asremouter; 
-9 par; 4 oborner ; 4iregarder5 ^zpjante ; "^^fv^^li^Sikiva: } ^^9^* 



463 

the stars' shine forth- with so much hiightness'- ; and 
that book written in characters^ of iight^ is sutiicient*' to 
make all men inexcusable^ But the divine Wisdom is 
no less admirable' in its least productions^ wherein it 
has been pleased^", | if one may say so'% | to make itself 
more accessible^-, and wherein it seems to invite us to 
consider it nearer'% without fearing to be dazzled" by it< 

PLANTS. 

There is in the most seemingly^^ despicable'^ where- 
with'"^ to astonish'^ the most sublime'^ minds,-" w^hich 
nevertheless^' cannot see but the most coarse-'- orgsns^^ 
of them, and to which the whole secret of the life, 
nourishment^^ and propagation'-^ remains-^ unknown-"^. 
Not one leaf-^ is neglected^ in them. Order and 
symmetry^" are obvious-' in every thing : and that with 
so prodigious^- a quantity^^ of pinking,"^ ornaments^^ and 
beauties, that none is exactly-^ like another. 

What is not discovered by the help^'^ of mycroscopes^^ 
in the smallest seeds^^ ! But how much virtue and effi- 
cacy'*^ has God put in them by one single^' word, by 
which he seems to have given plants a sort of immor- 
tality ! Let the earth bnng fortk''^ gracs'^'^ and ike her¥'^ 
yielding^'" seed^^^ &c. 

Is there any thing that deserves'*' more our admiration, 
than the choice*^ which God has made of the general 
colour, that beautifies^^ all plants ! If he had died^** in 
white or scarlet' all the fields"'-, who could have been 
able to bear^^ either th^ brightness^" or harshness^^ of 

1 Etoile ; 2 briller ; 3ec]at ; ^caracterc; slumiere; ejine faut que, 
{beginning Hie sentence ;) "^inexcusable ; Sadnuirable ; flouvracre ; 
lovouloir; ^ipour ainsi dire; 1 2accessrble ; i3(je plus pres ; 
i 4^bloui ; 1 5 en aparence ; i eju^prisabJe ; i ^de quoi ; i Setonner ; 

1 3 sublime ; 2 oeyprit ; 2 inc'annioins ; 2 2grossier ; 2 sorgane ; 2 4nou- 
riture ; 2 snnilliplication ; aedemeurer; 2 7inconnu; saieuille; 

2 9n^glige; 3 osiujmctrie ; s iseni-ible ; ssprodigieux ; 33fecoDdile; 

3 4d^coup\ire ; 3 Jomem*nt ; acparfaitement ; ^Tsecours ; ssmicro- 
scope ; 39graine ; 4 0(;tncace ; ^igeul ; 42produire ; ■* 3son jet ; 
^4]ierbe; 4 5porter; 4Csa semence ; 4 7(iigne; 4 Schoix ; 4 9t'jii- 
bellii* ; 5 o(.eindre ; 6 irt:)uge j s^cainpagne ] s ssouteuir ; 5 4^clat; 



464 

them ? If he had darkened^ them with more dusky^ 
colours, who | could have taken a delight^ | in so sad* 
and so melancholy^ a prospect^ ? A pleasant"^ verdure*^ 
keeps^ a medium'** between these two extremes^*, and 
it has such an affinity^^ with the frame^=^ of the eye, that 
it is diverted'^ instead of strained'^ by it, and it is rather^^ 
sustained^^ and nourished^^ than wasted'^. But what 
was thought at first-" to be but one colour, is such a 
diversity of hues-^ as astonishes^^. 'Tis green every 
where, but 'tis no where the same. Not one plant is 
coloured^^ like another : and that surprising^* variety, 
which no art can imitate^^ is again diversified^^ in each 
plant, which is in its origin^'^, its progress^^ and maturity^^ 
of a different sort of green. 

I transport'" myself | in thought^* | into blossomed^^ 
fields^^ or into a garden well look'd after^*. What an 
enameP^ ! What colours ! What riches ! But what an 
harmony^^, and what sweetness^^ in their mixture^^ and 
the shadowing^^ that tempers'" them ! What a picture**, 
and by what a master ! But let us pass from this general 
Tiew*=^ to the consideration of any particular fiower*^ 
and pick up**, at random*^ the first that offers to*« our 
hand, without troubling ourselves" with chusing*^ 

It is just blown*% and has still all its freshness'", and 
brightness^^ Are there so lively^^, and at the same time 
so sweet colours^^ among men ! Could ever art invent^* 
stuffs as thin^^ and of as smooth^^ and nice" a texture P'^ 
Bring near^'' the leavei which I hold,^" Solomon's pur» 
ple^^ itself. What a course^^ haircloth^^ to them !^* 

lObsciircir; 2 sombre; 3faire ses dlUces ; ^triste; slugnbre; evue * 
7agr^able ; 8 verdure ; 9tenir ; » oniilieu ; 1 lextremite ; >2rapport ; 
i 3struct»re ; i4delasser; i^tendre; 'Cplutdt; i^soutenir; » ^nour- 
rir; i9epuiser; 2od'abord; 2iteinture; 2 2etonner; 2 3colore; 2 4sur- 
prenant ; 2 simiter ; 2 6se diversifier ; 2 7origine ; 2 Sprogres ; 2 9 matu- 
rity ; 3 0ge transporter ; si par la pens^e ; 3 2fleuri ; 3 3compagne ; 
3 4cultive; 3 5^mail; saharmonie ; 3 7 douceur; 3 8 melange; 3 9 nu- 
ances ; 4otenaperer; 4 i tableau; 4 2vue; 4 sfleur ; 4 4cuei]lir ; 4 5au 
hazard ; 4 etomber sous ; 4 Tge mettre en peine ; 4 schoix ; 4 9eclorre ; 
5ofraicheur; si eclat; 5«vif; 5 3teinture; 5 4inventer; ssdelie; 
5 cuni ; s Tdelicat ; 5 stissu ; s saprocher ; 6 otenir ; 6 ipgurpre 5 
62gro^ier; escilicej 64en comparaison* 



463- 



What a ruggedness% what breaking oflf^ in the texture^ 
what a ditference in the coloiirin":'' 1 



TREES AND FRUITS. 

So far* we have considered^ the earth only as a mead- 
ow°. _ Now'' it shews itselP to us like a rich orchard^, 
tilled^" with all sorts of fruit, which succeed^ ^ one 
another according to the seasons^ ^. 

1 observe'^ one of those trees bowing^ ^ its branch- 
es'^ I down to the ground^ % | bent^'^ under the 
weight' * of excellent fruit, whose colour and smelP ® 
declare^" the taste^ % and at the quantity's whereof 1 am 
amazod^\ Methinks-' that tree says to me by that 
glory-^ it displays-'^ to my eyes : Learn of me what is the 
goodness and magnificence-^ of the God who has made 
me^ for you. 'Tis neither for him, nor for myself, I am 
so rich. He has need of nothing, and I cannot iise^ 
what he has given me, Bless"*^ him, and unload^ ^ me. 
Give him thanks ; and since he has made me the instru- 
ment"^ of your delight^^, bccome^"^ that of my gratitude"^, 

I think'^ i hear the same invitations^'' from all sides^^ : 
and as"^ I walk on,^'' I always find out new subjects of 
praises'^ ^ and wondcr,^^ for 'tis a new kind" at every 
step*^. Here the fruit is hid'^ within^° : there 'tis the 
kernel" that is in the inside'^ : and a delicate pulp^^ 
shines-'^ outv/ardly^ ' with the most lively colours. This 
fruit sprung^^ out of a blossom", as almost all do : but 
this other so delicious was not preceded^"* by the Mos- 
40m, and it shoots^^ out of the very^^ bark^'' of the 

^Rndespe; 2 interruption ; Scoloris ; 4jusqu'ici ; Sregarder; 
6]>rairie ; ^niaiutcnant ; Sfe montrcr ; 9 verger ; 1 orerapJi ; 1 'sue- 
ceder ; 1 sgaison ; i 3considerer ; ^ -i porter ; 1 sbranche ; ^ 6jucqii'(.n 
tf-rrc ; 1 7rourbe ; ispoids; isodeiir ; 2 oannoncer ; 2i£;out; 
22abondancc ; 2 ^etonner ; 2 4il nie sernblc ; 2 5ponjpe ; aeetalcr ; 
2 7niagiiinceiicc ; 2 8foni:er ; 2 Ouser ; sobenir; 3 ' decharj^er ; ^^m\~ 
nistre; 38d6lices; 3 4dcvenir ; 35reconnoi?sance ; 3 eil nie semble ; 
37invitation ; 3 8de tonte.s partes ; 39a mesure que ; ^os'avanccr ; 
4ilouang;e ; 42adniiration ; 4 Sespece ; 4ipas; iscache; ^'f^iai 
dedans r 4 Tamande ; 4 3in(erienr ; 4 9chair; sobrjUer; ^^tm de- 
hor;!; sayejik: ■"'Srlcur; 5 1 precede j ssnnilrej •"•emcmcj ''*7eGcrc(*\ 



4GG 

tree'. The one begins the summer^, the other finishes 
it. If this is not soon^ gathered* it | falls down^ | and 
withers^ : if you don't wait"^ for that, it will never ripen^; 
This keepsMong' ° : that goes away^ * swiftly*^. The 
one refreshes^ ^ : th^ other nourishes^ ^. 

Among- ^ fruit trees^ ^, some bear^'^ fruit in two sea- 
sons of the year, and others unite' ^ together both tjie 
different seasons, and even the years: bearing young '^ 
blof^soms, green frait, and ripe fruit | all at once"'': | to 
evince^' the sovereign^- liberty of the Creator, who 
in diversifying^^ tlie laws of Nature, shews"^^ that he is 
the master of it, and can at all times, and with all things, 
do equally what he pleases'-^^ 

I observe^^ that weak^' trees, or of an indifferent^^ 
pitch^^ are those that bear the most exquisite'^ fruit. 
The higher^' they grow"* the less rich they seem^^ to 
me ; and their fruit | is the less fit^^ ] for me. The 
other trees which bear nothing but leaves, or bitter^ 
and very small fruit, are nevertheless very useful'^ for 
building^"^ and navigation"^ 

If we had not seen trees of the height and bigness^^ 
of those that are in some forests, we could not believe 
that some drops^° of rain'^* fallen from heaven wei*e 
capable to nourish them. For | there is need*^ of | a 
juice*'', not only very plentiful'% but full of spirit*^ and 
salts**^ of all kinds*'' to give the root'% the trunk*^, and 
branches'^ the strength and vigour^ ^ which we admire 
in tliern. It is even remarkable''^ that the more neglect- 
ed those trees are, the handsomer they grow^ ^ : and 
that if men applied themselves to eultivate""* them, as 

1 Arbre ; 2^te ; Sprompternent ; 4cuei]lir ; ^tomber ; 6se fletrir ; 
"^attendre ; Savoir de la maturite ; 9se garder ; i olong-teras ; 
5 1 pa. per; isavec rapidite ; ^ Srafraichir ; i 4 fortifier; isentre; 
1 6 fertile ; i "^ porter; i Sunir; ^ ^naissant ; 2 otout a la fois ; 2 inion- 
trer ; 2 2gouverain ; 3 sdivcrsificr ; 24faire voir; 2Sp]aire; 260b- 
server ; 2 7foible; 2 3iEediocre; sotaille; soexquis ; sipJus; 

3 2s''elever ; 33paroitre; ^J^conveiiir ; ssamer; ^entile; 37edifi- 
ces, ; ssyavigatioi^g ; sogrosscnr; logoutte; 4ip]uie; 4 2jl faut ; 

4 3J6UG ; 4 labondaut ; 4 5 g-^pi-ji . 4 cpel -; 4 7espece; 4 8racinej 
4 9troric ; 5 obrancbe ; siyigaeur; ''aremarqnable ; 5 3devenirj 
iJcultiyer. 

f 

t 



467 

they do the small trees of their gardens, | they would 
rather hurt' them. | You thereby, O Lord, preserve- a 
proof ^ that 'tis you alone have made'' them : and you 
learn man that his carcs^ and industry^ are useless'' to 
you ; and that if you require'^ them for some shrubs^ His 
to employ' " him, and warn^ ^ him of his ov4^n weakness^ ^ 
in trusting^ ^ weak things only to his care. 



FISHES. 

With what a deaP ^ of fishes'^ of all sizes '"^ do the 
waters teem^ " ! I consider^ ^ all these creatures, and see, 
methinks^^, that they have nothing but a head and a 
taiP°. They have neither feet^^ nor arms. Even 
their head has no free movement^^ : and, if I attend- 
ed^ ^ to their figure only, I should think^^ them de- 
prived^ ^ of all that is necessary for the preservation^^ 
of their life. But with so few exterior-' organs^% they 
are more nimble^", more swift^°, and more | artful and 
cunning^', | than if they had many hands and feet: 
and the use they make of tlieir tail and fins"-, shoots^ ^ 

them forward like arrows^'' -and seems to make them 
fly3 5. 

How I comes it to pass^^ | that in the middle^ "^ of 
waters, so much impregnated^^ with salt that 1 cannot 
bear^^ a drop"*" of them in my mouth, fishes live, and 
enjoy a perfect strength-^ and health ? And how, in the 
middle of salt, do they kas^-- a flesh that has not the 
taste of it ? 

Why do the best, and mostsfit for the use of man, 
come near''^ the coasts^ % to olFer themselves, it seems, to 

• ris ne feroicnt que leur miire ; 2conscrver ; Spreuve ; 4 former; 
5soin ; eindustrie ; ^inutile ; scsigcr ; » arbrisseaii ; > ooccuper ; 
i^avertir; 1 2 foibJesse ; ' Sconfior ; '^foule; ispoisson; i 6jrran- 
(i.cur ; ' 'enfanter ; 1 Scxaminer ; 1 Oce me seniblt ; 2 Oquenc ; 
2ipie; 2 2njouvenient ; 2 3etre atlenlif; 2 4cioirf»; ssprive; sscon- 
servation ; 3 '^exterieiir ; ssorejanc; ssagile; 3"prooj})t; -^ ir.'Uipli 
d'artifices ; ssnagcoire ; sspoiis^er; sitr.iit; s^yoler; scarriv^r; 
3 7 milieu ; 3 8 charge ; 3 9souflVii- ; 4 ogoutte ; *'vigucur; isconser- 
ver ; 43s\xprocher : ^''cofo. ^ 

I 

I 



468 

him, whilst a great many others, useless^ to him, affect^ to 
keepofP ? 

Why do those that keep'' in unknown^ places, whilst 
they I were propagating^ ] and growing"^ to a certain 
size,^ as herrings,^ mackarel^*^, cods", &:c. come in 
shoals^^ at an appointed^^ time, to invite the fisherman^*, 
and throw themselves | as it were^^ | of their own ac- 
cord^^, into their nets^"^ and boats" ? 

Why are several of them, and of the best kinds^'^, 
eager^" to get^^ into the mouth^~ of rivers^^, and come 
up-'* to I their fountain-head^^ | to communicate the 
benefits'^ of the sea to the countries which are dis- 
tant'""^ from it? And what hand directs^^ them vrith so 
much care and bounty for men, but your's, O Lord, 
although so obvious''^ a Providence^^ seldom^^ engages^^ 
their gratitude^^. 

BIRDS, 

We see in several | dumb creatures^'^ | an imita* 
tion of reason which astonishes : but it appears | no 
where'" | in a more sensible manner than in the indus- 
try of birds in making tlieir nests^®. 

In the first place^'', what master has learnt them that 
they had need of any ? Who has taken care to forewarn"^^ 
them to get them read}^^ | in time^^ | and not to be 
prevented^^ 1 by necessity? Who has told them hoW 
they must be contrived** ? What Mathematician has 
given them the pian'^^ of them ? What Architect^ has 
directed^^ them to chuse a firm^^ place, and build upon 
a solid*"^ foundation''^ ? What tender'*^ mother has advis- 
ed^*^ them to line^^ the bottom^^ of them with so soft^"^ and 

ilnutile ; ^affecter ; 3s''eloi5ner ; ^se tenir ; ^jnconnu ; ^se multi- 
plier ; '^acquerir ; ^grandeur ; ^hareng ; lOjnaquerau ; i^morue ; 
i2fowle ; i3naarqiie ; i4p^cheur ; iSpour ainsi dire ; i6(^'eux memes ; 
i~iilet ; I'^barque ; i"espece ; ^^to be eager is s"'emprcsser : -'lentrer ; 
-^emboucljure ; 23fleuve ; 24i-emonter ; 25soxirce ; 26avantage ; 
27e]oigne ; -'^conduire ; ^Oyisible ; 30Providence ; S'rarement ; ^^at- 
tirer ; 3r3reconnoisi?ance ; 34^xiiraal ; ^Snulle part ; 3bnid ; ^''lieu ; 
38avertir ; 39pr^parer; 40a teras -, 4ige laisser prevenir ; 42eonstruire ; 
43figure ; 44Arcliitecte ; 45ensei§ner ; 46forme ; 47solide ; 48fonde- 
ment ; 49tendre ; ^OconeeiJlier ; -icouvrir j, 5:!rond ; ^3naou. 



469 

hic^ matter^ as down^ and cotton^ ? And when these arc 
wanting, who has prompted^ them that ingenious^ char- 
ity which makes them phick^ out of their breasts"^ with 
their bill,^ as much down as is requisite, to prepare a 
convenient^ cradle^^ for their young ones^^ ? 

In the second place, what wisdom has traced out^^ to 
each kind^^ a particular^* way of making their nests, 
where the same precautions were kept^^, but in a thou- 
sand different ways^^ ? who has commanded the swallow^"', 
the most industrious^^ of all birds, to come near man, 
and chuse his house to build^^ her nest before^° his eyes, 
without fearing to have him for a witness, and seeming^^ 
on the contrary to invite him to consider her works^\ 
'Tis not Avith small sprigs-^ and hay'^* that she builds, as 
the others do. She uses-^ cement-^ and mortar^"^, and in 
so solid a manner that | her work cannot be demolished 
without some might and main^^. | Yet she has no other 
instruments^ but her bill. She has nothing wherewith^® 
to draw up^^ water. She can only wet^^^ her breast, in 
keeping^^ her wings^'^ up^^. And 'tis with the dew^* 
which she sprinkles^"^ the mortar with, she diktes^^ and 
moistens^^ her masonry"^^ which she afterwards disposes*^ 
and sets in order'^'^ v,dth her bill. Reduce''^, if it is 
possible, the most ingenious"^* Architect to the small 
compass"^^ of this swallow : | with all his learning leave 
him a bill only to work with'^, | and see if he will have 
the same dexterity^ and the same success''^ 

In the third place, who has made all the birds 
understand that they were to hatch"*^ their eggs^^ in 
sitting over^^ them ? That this was an indispensable^* 
necessity ; that both the father and mother could not 

IMatiere; ^duvet; ^coton; ^suggerer; ^ingenieux; Ss^aiTacher; "^ei- 
tomac ; ^bec ; ^commode ; i^berceau ; iipetit; I'raarquer; J^espece ; 
l4maniere ; i5observ6 ; it'ia^on ; i^hirondelle ; i>^adroit ; '^^^difier; -^a ; 
Siparoitre ; -^travail ; -^branchage ; -"t?oin ; ^oemployer ; -''cimept ; 
2'7morti6r ; -Sj] faut une espece d'cfibrt pour deiuolir son ou\Tage ; -^in- 
strument ; sOqu ; sipniscr ; 32inouiiler ; 33tenir ; siaile ; ^s^Ieve ; 30ropec" ; 
37faire rejaillirsur ; ^^detrcmper; 39humecter; 40,ija9onncrie ; 4iordon- 
ner; '^-arranger ; 43i-eduire ; ■I'lhabile ; 'i^voliinie; '*Gcouserv'czlui tonici 
ses connoissances en we lui labsant qne le bcc ; '^"adrciKC ; ^^^succe* ; 
^^iaire eclorrc ; ^^oeuf; 5icouvcr; ^-indispcnseiblc . 
40 



470 

quit together^ ; and that if one | went in quest^ ] of 
food% the other was j to stay for"^ | his return ? Who 
has set^ them in the calander^ the precise'' number oi 
the days of this rigorous^ attendance^ ? Who has told 
them to help out^^ of the egg the yotmg one already 
formed, by breaking first the shelP^ ? And who has so 
exactly^'^ acquainted^^ them with the moment, that they 
never prevent^^ it. 

Lastly^^, who has made lectures*^ to all birds concern- 
ing the care which they were to take of their young 
ones, till they were brought up^'^ and fit^^ to shift for 
themselves^^ ? Who has taught them that wonderfuP 
industry to keep^^ in their throat^-, either the food^^ or 
water, without swallowing^^ them, and preserve^'' them 
for their young ones, to which this first prepar- 
ation^^ serves^"'' instead of milk ? Who has made them 
discern"^ so many things, of which some suit^^ with one 
kind^^ but are pernicious to another : and between those 
which are proper for the old ones^^, but would be 
hurtfuP^ to the young ? Who has made them discern 
those which are wholesome^^ ? We know the tender- 
ness^* of mothers among men, and the anxiety^^ of 
nurses^^ but I don't know whether we see any thifig 
so perfect. 

Is it for birds, O Lord, that thou hast united^"^ so many 
miracles^^ which they are not sensible of ^^ ? Is it for | 
curious people^^ | w^ho are contented to admire them, 
without ascend ing"^^ to thee ? And is it not obvious^^ that 
thy design was to call us^^ to thee by such a spectacle"^ to 
make us sensible of thy providence and infinite wisdom, 
and to filP us with trust^^ in thy goodness? 

Some of these young ones are exceeding beautiful, and 

lEn rneme terns ; ^aller chercher ; Snouriture ; ^attendre ; ^mar- 
quer; ^calendrier ; "^precis ; Srigoureux ; ^assiduite ; lOaider a sortir ; 
i^coque ; I2exactement ; isjn^truit ; i^prevcnir ; i%iifin ; i^legon ; 
^'''elev^ ; i^en etat ; i^se servii' ewx-memes ; ^Ojnerveilleux ; siretenir ; 
22gorge ; 23aliment ; 24avaler ; 25conserver ; 26preparation ; 27tenir lieu ; 
28discerner ; 29convenir ; sOespece ; Siperes ; 32faire tort ; 3^salutaire ; 
S4tendresse ; 35sollicitude ; sGnourrice ; 37unir ensemble ; 38miracle ; 
59connoitre ;,40des curieux ; ^iremgnter ; 42^ible ; ^Spjipeller ; -Mspec- 
tacle ; ^%emplir ; 46c9nfia«oe. 



411 

nothing is richer or more diversified* than heir feathers^. 
But one must own that all finery^ must yield^ to that of 
the peacock,^ on which God | with a liberal hand^ | has 
poured forth"^ all the riches that embellish^ the others, 
and on which he has lavished,^ with gold and azure'^, all 
the shadowing^^ of colour. This bird seems^- | to be 
sensible^^ of | its preferences^. And 'tis, it seems, to 
displays^ all its beauties to our eyes, that | it spreads that 
glorious taiP^, | which | puts them beyond all dis- 
pute^"^. I But the most magnificent of all birds has nothing 
but a disagreeable^^ voice^^: and it is a proof that with 
a very shining-^ outside^\ one may have nothing but a 
wicked heart--, little gratitude, and much vanity. 

It is not necessary to shew how these | "pliysical obser- 
vations^ | and a great many^^ others of the like~^ nature, 
are capable of adorning^*^ and enriching""^ a youth's^*^ 
mind : making him attentive to the effects of Nature, 
which are before our eyes, and offer themselves-^ to us 
every minute^^ almost, without our taking notice of 
them^* : of learning him a thousand curious things con- 
cerning the Sciences, Arts, and Trade, as Chem- 
istry^-, Anatomy^', Botany^**, Drawing^^, Navigation, 
Printing^^ &c. ) of giving him a taste^" | for gar- 
dening'^', for trees, the country, and walking^^, which is 
not a thing in-'ifferent : of enabling^^ him | to bear a 
part agreeably in conversation^^, | and not to be reduced 
cither | to keep silent*^ | or not to know what to speak, 
but trifles'*^ 

HISTORY. 

"^Tis not without reason History has always been 
looked upon'''^ as the !ight^^ of times, the repository^^ of 

ipiversiGe ; -plumage ; -"^parure ; '<c^der ; ^Paon ; ^comrae a pleiiies 
mains; "verser; Sembellir; ^prodigner ; lOaxur; iinuance; i-paroitre ; 
^Ssentir; ^^avantage ; ^-^etaler; i^il fait cette poinpeuse roue ; i^'mettre 
en evidence ; i-desagreable ; i^cri ; ^Obrillant ; 2iexterieur ; 22fond ; 
-^observation physique ; -linfinite ; 25parcil ; 26orner ; 27enrichir ; 
-3jeune homme ; -^se presenter ; sOmoment ; 3ifaire reflexion a ; s^Chi- 
mie ; •^3Anatomie ; 3»Botanique ; 35peinture ; 36Iniprimerie ; 37(ionncr 
du gout ; ;^8jardiuage ; ^ypromenade ; ^Omettre en etat ; -iifonmir agr^- 
jhlement a la conversation ; 42garder le silence ; 'i^bagatclle ; 44reg»r 
: i^lurtiicre ; ^^depositaire. 



472 

events^ , the faithfuP witness^ of truth, the source of 
good counsel and prudence, the rule of conduct and 
manners'^ . Without it, being confined^ within the 
bounds^ of the age and country wherein we live, con* 
tracted'^ in the narrow compass^ of our particular 
knowledge^ and reflections, we always continue^^ in a 
sort^^ of infancy^^, which leaves us^^ strangers^^ to the 
rest of the universe^^ and in a deep ignorance of all 
^hat has past^^ before us and surrounds^"^ us. What is 
that few number of years which make up^^ the longest 
life ? What is the | tract of land^^ | we can inhabit'^^ or 
run over^^ upon the earth, but an imperceptible— point^^ 
with respect''^ to those vast^^ regious^^ of the universe, 
and that long series^"^ of ages which have succeeded one 
another from the beginning of the world? Yet 'tis to 
that imperceptible point our knowledge is limited^^, if 
we don't call to our assistance-^ the study of history, 
which lays all ages and countries open^^ to us : makes 
us enter into a correspondence^^ with all the great men 
that antiquity^- ever produced^^, sets'^^ all their virtues 
and vices before our eyes : and by the wise reflections 
it affbrds^^ us, or suggests^^ to us, procure us, in a short 
time, an anticipated^^ prudence, much superior to the 
lessons of the ablest'^ masters. 

History may be said to be the com^non school of 
mankind^^ ; equally open and useful both to high'*^ and 
low'-\ princes and subjects, and still more necessary to 
princes and the great than to others. For how, through 
the crov/d*- of flatterers'^^ who beset^ them on all sides'^^ 
and never cease to praise and admire them, that is to 
say, to corrupt them, and infect their*^ mind and heart ; 
how, I say, will timorous^^ truth be able to approach 

-Evenement ; sfidele ; stemoin ; 4nioeurs; ^renfermer; ^bome ; "res- 
serre ; ^cercle ; ^connoissances ; K^'denaeurer ; Hespece ; I2eiifance ; 
isiaisser ; i^^tranger ; i%nivers ; iSpreceder ; I'^'etivironner ; ^Scompo- 
ser ; iSetendue de pays ; 20occuper ; 2iparcourir ; sajj^perceptible ; 
23pomt ; 24^, Pegard de ; 25vaste ; ^'6region ; ^^snite ; 28se bonier ; 29cc- 
cours ; 30/o lay open^ ouvrir ; ^icommerce ; 32antiqui(e ; 33produced t> 
made by were in French ; s^jjiettre ; ssfournir ; 3*^donner lieii de faire ; 
S'^anticipe ; 2&habi]e ; 3?genre hTimain ; 40gra,nc] ; 4J petit ; 42fou]e ; 43flat-' 
tern- ; 44as6i4ger ; 45d^ toutes parts ; 46empoisoKner ; 47tnfiide. 



473 

them, and raise* its weak voi^e, in the midst^ of that 
tumult^, and confused* noise' ? How | will it make 
bold^ I to shew them the duties and slavery'' of royalty^ 
make them understand^ wherein^'' their true glory con- 
sists ; represent to them that if they | will be pleas- 
ed^* I to trace their institution back to its origin^^, they 
will plainly*^ see that they are for the people, and not 
the people for them ; tell them of their faults ; make 
them fear the just judgment of posterity ; and dispel^* 
the thick cloud'^ formed round^^ them by the vain phan- 
tom*' of their greatness, and the intoxication*^ of their 
fortune. 

These so important and so necessary services it can- 
not render them but by the help*^ of history, which alone 
is in possession of the liberty to speak to them freely-% 
and carry that right so far as-* | to judge | without fur- 
ther appeal-^ | of the actions of kings themselves, as 
well as fame^, which Seneca calls the most unhiassed^^ 
judge of princes. In vain-^ are their endowments-" cried 
up-', their parts-^ and courage admired, their achieve- 
ments^s and conquests^** extolled^* : if all that is not 
founded on truth and justice, history secretly | arraigns 
and condemns^^ | them under borrowed^^ names. It 
makes them look upon the generality^* of the most fa- 
mous conquerors^^ but as public scourges^®, enemies to 
mankind, robbers^" of nations, who being impelled^^ by 
a restless^^ and blind^" ambition, carry desolation from 
country^* to country, and, like an inundation or confla- 
gration^2, lay waste*^^ all that they meet with'^ It sets'^ 
before their eyes a Caligula, a Nero, a Domitian, load- 
ed'"^ with praises during their life, become, after their 

iFaire entendre ; -an milieu ; 3tumulte ; ^confus ; ^bruit ; (^oser ; 
'''servitude ; "royaut^ ; ^entendre ; lOen quoi ; iHouloir bien ; i-'remon- 
ler jusqu'a I'origine de ]eur institution ; iSclairement ; i^dissiper ; 
iSnuat^e ; ii'au tonr de ; I'fantome ; i^enivreraent ; i=^secours; -^avec 
liberte, and the liberty, commit before^ is left out ; "^^jupquW ; --sou- 
reraineraent et sans appel ; ^Sfenommee ; ^-^inte^^re ; "-'^on a beau ; 
26talent ; •i'fuire valoif ; -Sesprit ; "P'exploit ; sOconquete ; >^'vanfer; 
32faire le proces ; s^eniprnnte ; 34]a plupart ; 35conquerant ; ^t^lleiiu ; 
STbrigand ; s-ipousse ; 3 'inquiet ; ^^^aveuglc ; ^icontrec ; ^^inccudit ; 
^^ravager; ^^rencontrt r ; i-mettre; -^^eombl^. 



41^ 

death, the horror* and execration of mankind : whereas 
Titus, Trajan, Antonin, Marcus Aurehus, are still look- 
ed upon as the delight of men, for having used^ their 
power only to do them good. 

There is no age^, or condition, but can reap'* the same 
benefits^ from history : and what I have said of princes 
and conquerors, comprehends also, due^ proportion be- 
ing kept"^, all persons | preferred to honours^ : | minis- 
ters of state, generals, officers, magistrates, lieutenants, 
prelates, fathers and mothers in their family^, masters 
and mistresses with their servants*^ in one word, all 
those that have authority over others. 

Thus" history, when it is well taught, proves*^ a 
school of morality^^ for all men. It cries down*'' vices, 
unmasks*^ false virtues, undeceives*^ from vulgar*'^ errors 
and prejudices*^ dispels the enchanting*^ witchcraft-" of 
riches, and all that vain splendor^* which dazzles^^ men, 
and demonstrates by a thousand instances^^ more per- 
auasive^^ than all arguments-% that there is nothing great 
and commendable^^ but honour and probity. From the 
esteem and admiration which the most corrupted peo- 
ple cannot refuse to the great and glorious^' actions 
which it lays before them-% it makes one^ conclude, 
that virtue is therefore the true blessing"" of man, and 
that it alone makes him truly great and estimable. It 
learns us^* to respect that virtue, and discover'''^ its beau- 
ty and brightness"^ through the veils^* of poverty, adver- 
sity, obscurity, and even sometimes of discredit"^ and 
infamy^^ : as on the contrary, it inspires nothing but con- 
tempt^'' and horror for vice^^ | though arrayed^^ | with 
purple, \ blazing with light,^" [ and placed upon the 
throne. 

iHorreur •, ^user ; ^a.<i^e \ -^tirer ; Sarantage ; ^juste ; "''garder ; ^coa- 
stitiie en dignite ; ^famille ; lOdomestique; "ainsi ; I2devenir ; ]3nio- 
rale; i^decrier ; i^a^masquer ; i&detromper; I'^populaire ; ^Spr^jug^. 
I9enchanteiir ; sOprestige ; ^i^dat; ^s^j^iouir ; ssexeruple ; 24persuasif ; 
55raisonaement ; 26iouab]e ; 27beau ; -^Spj-^senter ; 29one and us, art 
left out ; sobien ; 3^us is Itfi out ; S-'demeler ; ss^clat ; 34voi]e ; 35d^cri ; 
56infaraie ; 37niepris ; ^Scrioje ; 39fut-il rev^tu ; 40totit briliant de Ju- 
^niere. 



475 

But to Gonfine mjselP to my design, I look upou 
history as the first master that children must have, 
equally fit to amuse and instruct them, to form their 
mind and heart, and enrich their memory with an infi- 
nite number of facts as agreeable as useful. It | is even 
very condusive^, | by the allurement^ of pleasure which 
is inseparable from it, to excite'* the curiosity of that 
age eager^ to learn, and give them a taste for study. 
Therefore in point^ of education, it is a fundamental 
principle, and observed in all times, that the study of 
history ought | to go before' | all others, and | pave^ the 
way I for them. Plutarch tells us that the old Cato, 
that celebrated^ censor^", whose name and virtue have 
done so much honour to the Roman republic, and who- 
took a particular care to bring up" his son himself^^^ 
without relying'^ upon the care" of masters, composed 
purposely^s f^jj. i^iif^^ and wrote with his own hand, in 
large letters^^, | entertaining pieces of history^"^ ; | that, 
said he, the child from the lowest age, could, without 
quitting his father's house, get acquainted^^ with the 
great men of his country, and form himself upon those 
antient patterns^^ of probity and virtue. 

Our age, and still more our nation, have an extreme 
need to be undeceived^'' of an infinite number of errors, 
and false prejudices which become every day | more 
and more^^ | reigning-^, concerning poverty and riches, 
modesty and pomp^^the simplicity of building*-'^ and fur- 
niture^^ costliness^^ and magnificence^; frugality and 
the I refined arts^^ | of cookery^^^ : in a word, concern- 
ing almost every thing, that makes the object of the 
contempt or admiration of men. The public taste here- 
in'^° becomes the rule of young people. They think 
that valuable^*, which is valued by all. 'Tis not reason 

JSe borner ; '^pouvoir heaucmip ?ervir ; ^attrait ; ^plquer ; -^avidc ; 
finatiere ; '^l)rececler ; '^pr^parer la voie ; ^celebre ; J^ceiifeTir; n^le- 
Tcr ; i^Jvii-ruejne ; i3j.-'en reposer; i^travail ; i^cxpres ; J^caractere ; 
iide belles histoires ; i^^'faire coniiois^ance ; i-^jnodele ; 'f'd^tromp^ ; 
Side plus en plus ; 2-idominant ; ^'^fefte ; ^^batiment ; ^Sj^eubles ; 
5<^sonif)tuosite ; ^-^'''magnificence ; '-^'rafincinent ; -Oi^cDne chere ; ^^sm 
ccia; 3 J estimable. 



47^ 

"but custom that guides them. One bad example alone 
would be capable of corrupting the mind of young peo- 
ple, susceptible of all sorts of impressions : what is not 
therefore to be feared for them in a time wherein vices 
are grown^ into custom^, and sensuality^ | exerts its ut- 
most endeavours* | to extinguish^ all sentiments of hon- 
our and probity. 

What need have they not of this science, whose 
chiefs effect is to dispel the false prejudices which se- 
duce'' us, because they please us : to cure and | set m 
free^ | from the vulgar errors, which | we have sucked 
in with our mother's milk^ : to learn us | to discern be- 
tween^o | what is true and false", good and bad, be- 
tween I true greatness*^ | and a vain pride^^ : and to 
hinder the contagion of bad example and vicious cus- 
toms from tainting" the minds of young people, and 
stifling^^ the happy seeds of virtue, which are observ- 
ed^^' in them ! 'Tis in that science, which consists in 
judging of things, not by the common opinion, but by 
truth ; not by their outward appearance^'', but by their 
intrinsic value^% that Socrates placed^* the whole wis- 
dom of man. 

I therefore thought it my duty-** to begin this treatise^ 
on history, with setting down-^ principles and rules to 
judge soundly"^ of great^* and good actions, to discera 
wherein consists solid glory and true greatness, and to 
distinguish^^ exactly ^^ what is worthy of esteem and 
admiration, and what deserves only indifference and 
eontempt. Without these rules, young people, natural- 
ly unguarded^'', and having no other guides^ ^ but their 
own inclinations^^, or the vulgar opinions, might mis- 
take^" for a pattern^' all that is agreeable^^ to those 

iPasse ; ^usage ; ^cupidit^ ; ^s'efforcer; ^^teindre ; ^principal; "^s^* 
duire ; ^delivrer ; 9sucer avec le lait ; ^Ofaire le discernement ; I'le 
Trai et le faux; i^solide gra.ndt;ur ; i^enflure ; ''linfecfer; 'S^touffer ; 
i^remarquer ; ^"^turn thus^ by what they appear outwardly ; ^"tum 
ihus^ by what they really are (reellenient") ; i^mettre ; "^Murn thus^ I 
thought to owe to begin ; 2itraite; 2?^lDblir ; ^S^ainement; '^'^beau ; 
25demeler ; 26pr^cis6meiit ; "^"''peu precaution!!^ ; ^Sguide ; 29penehant; 
soprendre ; 3ixnodele j s^eonforme. 



^77 

false notions^ and imbibe^ the passions and vices' of 
those of whom history relates^ celebrated'^ actions, -vfhich 
are not always virtuous or commendable^ Whereas 
they will be convinced by these principles, that those 
common opinions are contrary to right^ reason : and 
that 'tis neither riches, the magnificence of buildings, 
the sumptuousness^ of clothes or furniture^ | luxurious 
eating^, | the splendor of di!;i. (ties or birth, shining^" ac- 
tions, such as victories and conquests, nor even the most 
valuable parts^ \ that make a man truly great and wor- 
thy of admiration : but that 'tis by his heart man is 
whatevei- he is ; and that the more truly great and gen- 
erous his heart ^2 is, the more contempt will he have for 
whatever appears great to tlie rest of men. 



THE CITY OF BJBFLOJST. 

Babylon'", the seat*^ of the empire of the kings of As- 
syria*% | was founded'^ by Semiramis ; but Nabucodo- 
nosor gave it its chiefs' beauties. This conqueror^', af- 
ter I having brought to an end'^ long2<> and ditlicult^* 
wars^, seeing himself in a full tranquility^^, applied him- 
selP"* to make-^ his metropolis^^ one of the wonders^ of 
the world. 

It w^as situated^^ in a vast^^ plain, watered^" by the 
Euphrates^'' : the canals, cut'^ out of tliat riv<^r, made 
the fruitfulness"^ of the soil'^ so great, that it yiclded^^ as 
much to the king as hair^^ of his empire. 

The walls of the city built with large bricks^", fifty 
cubits^^ thick, and two hundred high, made a perfect^^ 

^Idee ; "^se remplir de ; Srapporter ; ^^clatant ; Spgtimable ; ''droit ; 
■''somptuosite ; ^'^rrienble.- ; ^luxe de la tabie ; i^'brillaiit ; 'iqualites de 
I'esprit ; ^-turn thvs^ the more he will have a heart truly great, &;c. ; 
i3Babylone ; i 'siege ; i^Assyrie ; ''Tonde ; I'^'principaJ ; '•''conqu^rant ; 
i^terminer; 20]ong ; -'dilRcile ; ^-guerre ; -Stranquijlil^ ; "-'■^appliqncr ; 
2%rfd of in French before the lu.vt noun ,• ^^capitale ; -"merveille ; 
28sitiie ; 29vaste ; ^Oarrose ; siEuphrute ; -i^ne ; s.^rertiliie ; 3iterr«ir ; 
S^apporter ; ^c^noiti^ ; 3~briquG ; 3yeoud6e ; 33parfiiit. 



478 

square*, of twenty leagues in compass^ One hundred 
and fifty towers^ were raised along^ those inaccessible* 
walls I at equal distance^ | and commanded"^ all the 
neighbouring^ country. 

An hundred^ gates of brass^" poured out" on all sides 
an innumerable'^^ crowd^^ of people of all nations : fifty 
large streets crossed** the city from one end*^ | to the 
other, and formed*^ | in crossing one another**^ | a great 
many*^ spacious squares", containing^" stately palaces, 
magnificent places, and delightful^* gardens. 

The Euphrates ran^^ | through the midst^^ | of Baby- 
lon. A bridge, built^^ upon that river with wonderful-* 
art, joined-^ the two parts^^ of the city. At both ends^^ 
of that bridge were seen two palaces : the old palace at 
the east^^ and the new one westward^". Near the old 
palace was the temple of Belus. From the centre"* of 
this building sprung out^^ a pyramid^^ six hundred feet 
high, and composed^* of eight towers rising^^ upon one 
another, always tapering^^. From the top^^ of that 
pyramid the Babylonians^^ observed^^ the motion"* of the 
stars^*. This was their chief study''^, and ^tis by it they 
have made themselves famous'^^ among other nations. 

At the other end of the bridge the new palace was 
seen, which was sixty stades, or eight miles round**. Its 
celebrated*^ gardens, encompassed*^ by large terras- 
walks-^rosc*" like*^an amphitheatre^", | as high as^* j the 
walls of the city. The whole mass'^ was supported^^ by 
several* arches^^ the vaults^^ whereof being covered 
with large stones, reeds" done over^^ with bitumen^^ two 
rows^" of bricks^*, and plates^^ of lead'^^, made^* the whole 

'Quarre; ^circuit; 3tour; 4r6gner; ^inaccessible ; ^Ae distance en 
tlistance ; "''comrtiander ; ^voisin : 9porte ; i^airain ; "s'ouvrir ; i2ja- 
nombrable ; isfoule ; I4traverser ; i%out ; informer ; i^ge croiser ; 
iSplusieiirs ; I9quarr6 ; ^Orenfermer ; 2idelicieux ; 22couler; 23au milieu; 
-4constniit ; 25surprenant; 26joindre ; 27partie ; 28aux deux extremites ; 
-^orient ; sOa I'occident ; 3icentre ; 32gortir ; 33piramide ; 34compose ; 
■"'Velever ; 36en dirainuant ; 37gommet ; 38Babilonien ; S9observer ; 
'*f'mouveraent ; Piastre ; 42^tude ; 43celebre ; 44tour ; 45fanieux ; 46en- 
loure ; 47terrasse ; 48s'^iever ; 49en ; '^Oamphitheatre ; ^la la hauteur ; 
'''^masse ; ^^gontenu ; ^^plusieurs ; ^^arcade ; ^^youte ; ^^roseau ; ^Sen- 
slmt ; 59)iitume ; sprang : siferique ; 62piaque ; ssplomb : ^'^renirf. 



479 

impenetrable* to the rain^ and dampness^. | There 
were seen walks* | reaching farther than one could 
see', I groves^, grass-plots'^, flowers^ of all sorts ; canals, 
ponds^, aqueducts^", to water^^ and embellish^^ ^j^^t de- 
lightful^^* place". A marvellous^^ collection*^ of all the 
beauties of nature and art ! 



MERIT. 

Cyrus interrupted*"^ Solon, and said to him, It seems*^ 
to me that merit alone" distinguishes men. Wit is the 
least of all merits, because it is always dangerous when 
alone ; but wisdom, virtue, and valour, give a natural 
right^" to govern. He alone ought^^ to command others, 
who has more wisdom to find out what is right^^, more 
virtue to pursue^^ it, and more courage to cause it to be 
execute d^*. 

Merit, replied^^ Solon, essentially^^ distinguishes men : 
it alone should determine^^ their rank^^ : but ignorance 
and passions oftentimes hinder-^ it to be known. Self- 
love^" makes every body challenge^^* it. Those who 
have most of it, are always modest^^, and don't desire^^ to 
rule^*. In short^^, what seems"'° to be virtue, is some- 
times nothing but a deceitfuP^ vizard^^ Disputes, dis- 
cords^^, illusions''", | would last for ever** | if there were 
no surer^2 and less ambiguous^^ means'"* to regulate*^ the 
ranks, than merit only. 

In small republics*^ the ranks are determined^'' by 
election*^ In great monarchies*^ by birth^". I own^* 
that it is an evil to bestow^^ dignities upon those who 

^Impenetrable ; '^pluie ; ^humidite ; ^allee ; ^a perte de vue ; ^bos- 
ji^uet; ^gazon ; Sfleur ; ^reservoir ; i^aqueduc ; Harroser; i-embellir ; 
JSdelices ; i^lieu ; i^merveilleux; i^assemblaoje ; I'^interrompre ; ^Sgeju. 
bier ; i^seul ; -0 jroit ; 2idevoir ; ^^juste ; ^Sguivre ; "^-^executer ; -hi' 
pliquer; 26essentiellement ; 27(Jecider ; 23rang ; ^yempecher; ^Oamour- 
propre ; sig^attribuer ; 32jQodeste ; -^^chercher ; 34cioininer; Sognfin ; 
'6paroitre ; 3'^trompeur ; ^Smasque ; 39discorde ; ^OjHupion ; ^letre 6ter- 
nel ; 42sur; 43^quivoque ; -^^xnoyen ; ^Sregler; •*^republiquc ; '^"se re- 
gler ; "^HlQGtiou •, ^flmonurchie ; ^Onaissaace j SJavouer ; ^ 'accordor. 



480 

liave no true merit : but it is another necessary evil ; 
and that necessity is the spring^ of almost all political 
establishments. That is the difference between natural 
and civil right. The former^ is always conformable^ to 
the most perfect justice. The other, though often unjust 
in its'* consequences, becomes however^ unavoidable^, in 
order to prevent^ disorder^ and confusion. 

Ranks and dignities are but the shadow^ of true great- 
Bess^''. The outward" respect and duties^- that are paid*=* 
to them, are likewise" but the shadow of that esteem 
which belongs^^ to Tirtue only. Is it not a great wisdom 
in the first law-givers^^ to have preserved^^ the order of 
the society, in enacting^^ laws, by vdiich they, who have 
the shadow of virtues, are contented'^ with the shadow 
of esteem ? 

I apprehend^" you, said Cyrus : sovereignty^* and 
ranks are necessary evils | to keep passions within 
bounds22. I The commonality^^ ought to be contented 
to deserve the inward^* esteem of men by their simple 
and modest virtue : and the great ought to be convinced^* 
that outward^^ respect^^ only will be paid^^ to them, un- 
less they have true merit. | By that means^^ ] the for- 
mer*' will not be exasperated^^ at their | low state^^ | 
neither will the others pride^^ in their greatness. Men 
1 will be sensible^'' | that kings are necessary : and 
kings will not forget that they are men. Every body 
wili keep^^ his own^^ place ; and the order of the socie- 
ty will not I be broke through^'^. | 1 comprehends^ the 
beauty of that principle, I am mighty impatient^' to be 
informed^'' of your other laws. 

iSource ; ^Iti. ; ^Gonforrne ; *turn thus^ the consequences which 
Sirise from it (r^sulter) ; ^pourtant ; Cjnevitable ; '^prevenir ; ^desor- 
dre ; ^ombre ; lOgrllndeur ; Hesterieur ; I'^homniage ; ^Si'endre ; i^aussi ; 
i^appartenir ; i^legislateur ; i^conserver ; iSetabJir; i^se contenter ; 
20concevoir ; 2isouverainete ; 22conlenir Jes passions ; 231es petits ; 
24int6rieur ; 25se persuader ; 26exterieur ; 27respect ; 28accorder; 29par- 
la ; 30un ; sis'aigrir ; S2bassesse ; s^s'enorgueillir ; s^sentir ; 35se tenir ;• 
56own is left out ; s^trouble ; ^Scomprendre ; 39avoir grande impa- 
tience ; 40apprendre. 



'"',"% ■ ./.c°~'>,*p/**^ .0> 




"•^"V 









^' ^'.^J^. '- '-^ 















V 




^'♦.r;>^o^ 



^^•i^ 












% 



Deacidified using the Bookkeeper proces 
Neutralizing agent: Magnesium Oxide 
Treatment Date: Sept. 2006 



^^\. ^ ' '^ " % ^ PreservationTechnologie 



^% ^ 




O. '' 



•0' ^' 



0.V c » " 



.V 



'^^^^^.^^ %>^'% :;rf>^> 



,0 c. 



.0^ 



-^^^^ 



.,,^ 



A' 






s.^iii^^^ 









o"v -r 



)^ "t^. '/V. \^ 









^ .r c^. ^M^' 



A^' J 



•' , V -** /\ 



XV^' '^r 



^/% 



'O 1, 









^ -V^Z^ 



' "^rl- 






.^..^^^v y'^ 



ci-^ ',. "■"^i^r^ 



^ ^ « f , 



'/>. * 9 I A \^ 






'•^^'<y 



a hO 



</ .>;. 



^■'^%J-:^^: ^^ 









^^/^ V^^ 




.^^ -^^^ 



lltiililMMilil! 

iliilSii 



LIBRARY OF CONGRESS 



■ii!iiifil 



liil 




i! i I ill piijiiiaaiM. 



- i 



